0303-156 (OFC) Project Manuala
PROJECT MANUAL
.Point Happy,New Store
Point Happy Pavilion Center
La Quinta, California 111!
1
March 7, 2003
Gensler:.
4675 MacArthur Court
iSuite350
Newport Beach, CA 92660
. � 1 (T.). 949.863:9434
• (F) 949.553.1676
Gnaw
ob
Ogg:( 4401*
1& 4, r"
aL�
I, I
Gensler , • . Bank of America : Point Happy
• } 07.2022.012,. La Quinta, CA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100
Summary
01101
Requests For Information (RFI's)
01310
Project Management and Coordination
01330
Submittal Procedures
01420
References
01500
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01600
Product Requirements
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02361
Termite Control
02810
Irrigation Systems
02900
Landscaping
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300
Cast -in -Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
• Not Applicable
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120
Structural Steel
05500.
Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100
Rough Carpentry
06105
Miscellaneous Carpentry
06181
Glued Laminated Structural Units
06190
Pre -Fabricated Wood Trusses
06402
Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210
Building Insulation
07320
Roof Tiles
07552
SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
07620
Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim
07840
Firestopping
07920
Joint Sealants
® TABLE OF CONTENTS 0000-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA �•
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 Steel Doors And Frames
08125 Interior Aluminum Frames
08200 Wood Doors
08411 Aluminum Entrances And Storefronts
08711 Door Hardware
08800 Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09220
Portland Cement Plaster
09260
Gypsum Board Assemblies
09310
Ceramic Tile
09511
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09651
Resilient Products
09680
Carpet
09912
Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10520 Fire -protection Specialties
10801 Toilet And Bath Accessories
DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT •
Not Applicable
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Not Applicable
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Applicable
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Applicable
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050
Basic Material and Methods
15080
Mechanical Installation
15150
Plumbing Piping, Valves and Specialties
15300
Fire Protection
15400
Plumbing
15440
Plumbing Fixtures
15450
Plumbing Equipment
15731
Small Packaged HVAC Units
15880
Air Distribution
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0000-2 •
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
h 07.2022.012
15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000 Electrical
16410 Low Rise Fire Alarm System
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1111111111111131 =1051M
e
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART1-GENERAL
1:1 SUMMARY
A. This Section addresses:
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1. Work covered by Contract Documents.
2. Use of premises.
3. Work by others under other contracts.
4. Owner furnished products.
5. Occupancy requirements prior to substantial completion.
B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to all Sections. The Contract
Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by
all.
C. Conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents shall be resolved in the following
order of priority:
1. Amendments and revisions (such as Change Orders) of later date take precedence over
those of earlier date;
2. the Agreement;
3. the Supplementary Conditions;
4. The General Conditions;
5. . Drawings and Specifications; Drawings govern Specifications for quantity and location.
Specifications govern Drawings for quality and performance. In the event of ambiguity
or conflicts, the greater quantity and the better quality shall govern.
-1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project:
1. Project Identification: Project consists of a new branch bank facility for Bank of
America.
2. Project Location: The project is located in an existing shopping center development at
the northwest corner of the intersection of Highway #111 and Washington Road in La
Quinta, CA.
3. Owner: Bank of America.
1.3 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Work shall be conducted in a single phase. Coordinate construction schedule and
• operations with the Owner and Architect.
SUMMARY
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01100-1
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
1.4 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: The Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including •
use of Project site, during construction period. Subcontractor's. use of premises must be
coordinated with the Contractor and is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to
retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Access: At all times, provide the Architect and Owner easy and safe access to the Work
wherever it is in preparation and progress. Provide such access so the Architect may perform
their functions.
C. Use of Site: Confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and
the Contract Documents and do not unreasonably encumber the Site with any materials or
equipment.
D. Environmental Requirements:
1. The following requirements are in addition to all applicable laws and regulations.
2. No burning will be permitted on the Site.
3. Control dust by water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, or other methods acceptable to
the Owner. Comply with governing regulations.
E. Owner's Rules: Conform at all times to Owner's requirements for protection of plant, materials,
equipment, and noise levels.
1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS •
A. Separate Contract: Owner will award separate contracts for performance of certain construction
operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be completed during the same
period as work under this Contract. The separate contracts will include the following:
1. Security and data systems (Contractor to furnish and install empty conduits with a
junction box where indicated on the Contract Documents).
2. Telephone systems (Contractor to furnish and install empty conduits with a junction box
where indicated on the Contract Documents).
3. Fixtures, furnishings, and equipment to the extent not identified in the Contract
Documents.
4. Precast concrete vault equipment.
5. ATM's and night deposit equipment.
6. Safe deposit boxes.
7. Copiers.
8. Equipment Racks.
•
SUMMARY 01100-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
C7
Gensler
07.2022.012
1.6
1.7
9. Furniture systems.
10. Undercounter equipment.
11. - Que line
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
OCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install
equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such
occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and
partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of incomplete portions of the Work, nor shall
it relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
1. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner's items from damage during storage and
handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
2. If Owner's items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall
repair or replace them.
3. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
4. Obtain a .Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
5. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems
serving occupied portions of building.
6. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Contract Documents shall
mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment or revision of such reference
standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. In addition to the codes,
specifications and standards referred to in the Contract Documents all work provided under this
Contract shall comply with applicable provisions of the following, where standards conflict the
more stringent shall apply:
1. Building Code: CBC 2001 Building Code.
2. Handicapped: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG), latest
edition.
PERMITS
SUMMARY .
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01100-3
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
A. Contractor will secure and pay for the building permit.
B. Contractor shall secure and pay for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and •
inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion. of the Work which are
customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required at the time
the Bids are received.
C. If required by governmental authority, Owner will make application for permits and licenses
using forms obtained and prepared by the Contractor and with all costs paid by the Contractor.
1.9 TAXES
J
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes for the Work or portions
thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted at the time Bids are received,
whether or not yet effective.
1.10 PROJECT COORDINATION
A. General: Refer to the General Conditions for requirements pertaining to coordination. The
Contractor shall be the sole coordinator of the Work.
The Architect has exercised reasonable care in coordinating the Contract Documents
between disciplines. Carefully study and compare the Contract Documents, site, Owner
furnished data, and local conditions and report at once any discrepancies, errors, or
omissions in the Contract Documents prior to the award of the Contract. Failure to report
any discrepancies, errors, or omissions in the Contract Documents shall be a waiver to
any claim by the successful bidder for expense made necessary by reason of later
interpretation of the Contract Documents by the Architect.
B. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to
assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction
operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation.
Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for
required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
C. Existing Conditions:
Conduct a thorough examination of the site, the Contract Documents, and Owner
furnished data of existing conditions before proceeding with the Work. The Contractor
shall formulate from its examinations its own conclusions as to the extent of the existing
conditions and the complexities that may be encountered in the execution of the Work.
•
SUMMARY 01100-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
a. Owner Furnished Data: Portions of the Contract Documents were prepared from
• data received from the Owner by the Architect. Such data is available from the
Owner and represents all existing conditions known to the Owner. Such data will
be furnished only for the information and convenience. of the Contractor, and the
accuracy or completeness of this data is not guaranteed. Field verify all existing
dimensions. Other conditions, of which no record exists, may be encountered
during construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
•
SUMMARY 01100-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America: Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
• - SECTION 01101 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REQUEST(S) FOR INFORMATION (RFI'S)
A. General: A Request for Information (RFI) is a Contractor initiated, Architect formatted, written
instrument related to the execution of the Work that is addressed to the Architect. Upon receipt
of the Notice to Proceed, and thereafter, the RFI shall be used by the Contractor as the means for
it to ask questions related to the Work; subject to the conditions contained within this article.
1. An RFI which fails to conform to the requirements stated herein, (i.e, is incomplete or
contains numerous errors) shall be returned to the Contractor for its
completion/rectification without benefit of the Architect's response, in addition, no
adjustments for Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be granted for an RFI failing to
conform to the requirements stated herein.
2. The Owner reserves the right to assess the Contractor for the cost (based on time and
materials) of an RFI response performed by the Architect, and any of it's consultants,
which is deemed by the Owner and the Architect as being frivolous or unnecessary (i.e.;
the subject of the RFI is clearly addressed in the Contract Documents).
3. Each RFI shall be submitted with such promptness as to cause no delay in the Contractor's
own work and in that of any subcontractor. No adjustments of Contract Time or Contract
Sum will be granted because of failure to have an RFI submitted with sufficient time to
allow for the processing of a response by the Architect.
B. Authorship:
Prior to the commencement of the RFI process, the Contractor shall designate a designated
represetative whose duties shall include the responsibility for enforcing the Request for
Information provisions of this article, to maintain an up-to-date log of all RFI's, advise the
Architect, in writing, of the status and disposition of all RFI's at the progress meetings, and
be a member of the Contractor's on-site staff. The contractor's representative shall be
experienced in administration and supervision of building construction of the type
indicated on the contract documents including mechanical and electrical work.
2. Each RFI shall originate solely from the Contractor's representative. An RFI submitted to
the Architect by an entity, or individual, other than the contractor's representative shall be
returned to the Contractor.
C. Prohibitions: RFI's shall not be used for the following:
To solicit consideration by the Architect of a "substitution".
2. To request an adjustment of the Contract time. If the Contractor believes that the response
received from the Architect to any RFI warrants adjustment to the Contract time it shall
• immediately advise the Architect, in writing, upon receipt of the Architect's response.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 01101-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America: Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
To request an adjustment of the Contract sum. If the Contractor believes that the response
received from the Architect to any RFI warrants adjustment of the Contract sum it shall
immediately advise the Architect, in writing, upon receipt of the Architect's response.
4. To solicit comment clarification(s) of any required submittal or shop drawing review that
was transmitted by the Architect to the Contractor.
D. Procedure:
1. The Contractor shall submit all RFI's directly to the Architect.
2. Each blank on the RFI form shall be filled in.
Each RFI shall contain specific reference to the drawing number(s), detail number(s),
schedule type(s), bulletin number(s), specification section(s) and paragraph number(s), or
other related document(s) which is (are) pertinent to the Contractor's question. The date of
each referenced drawing number, bulletin, specification section or other related document
shall be identified. In preparing each RFI verify the applicable dimension(s), field
conditions, drawing requirements (small through large scale details), and/or specification
section requirements pertaining thereto. Prior to submission of the .RFI coordinate the
nature of the inquiry with the requirements of other sections or trades as related thereto.
Where supplementary sketches are required to clarify an inquiry the Contractor shall attach
supplementary sketches, at large scale, illustrative of the inquiry. Sketches shall include
sufficient detail, materials, dimensions, thicknesses, assembly, attachments, relation to
adjoining work, structural grid references, and all other pertinent data and information for
the Architect to make an informed response.
a. The Contractor is encouraged to suggest solution(s) to its inquiries, if applicable.
Should the Contractor's solution(s) have an impact on Contract Sum or Contract
time it shall be so stated within the RFI.
4. Each RFI shall be dated and sequentially numbered.
Each RFI shall be reviewed, and signed, by the contractor prior to transmitting to the
Architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01250
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 01101-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
•
is
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happe
07.2022.012 La Quints, CA
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included. in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01310-1
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if •
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including
home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise •
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record minutes in writing. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone
concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting.
4. Notification: Inform participants 3 days prior to meetings not regularly scheduled.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers, testing laboratory
representatives; regulatory, financial personnel, and other concerned parties shall attend
the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Requirements in individual Specification Sections for preconstruction
responsibilities. •
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler - , Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 _ La Quinta, CA
:b..
Tentative construction schedule.
c: •
Project coordination
d.
Critical work sequencing.
e.
Designation of responsible personnel.
f.
Procedures for processing Requests for Information (RFI's.)
g.
Procedures for processing Bulletins.
h.
Procedures for processing submittals.
i.
Procedures for processing substitutions.
j.
Procedures for processing field decisions, proposal requests and Change Orders.
k.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
1.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
in.
Submittal procedures.
n.
Preparation of Record Documents.
o.
Use of the premises.
p.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
q.
Parking availability.
r.
Office, work, and storage areas.
S.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
t.
First aid. .
U.
Security.
V.
Progress cleaning.
W.
Working hours.
C. Preinstallation Conferences and Meetings: Conduct a preinstallation conference, or meeting, at
Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
• 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Related Change Orders.
C. Purchases.
d. Deliveries.
e. Submittals. r
f. Review of mockups.
g. Possible conflicts.
h. Compatibility problems.
i. Time schedules.
j. Weather limitations.
k. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Warranty requirements.
in. Compatibility of materials.
n. ` Acceptability of substrates.
o. Temporary facilities and controls.
p. Space and access limitations.
q. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
• r. Testing and inspecting requirements.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0-1310-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
S. Required performance results.
t. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record minutes of each meeting.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests. Schedule and administer special meetings as
required.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Change Orders.
14) Documentation of information for payment requests.
15) Testing and inspection requirements.
16) Status of Request for Information.
17) Other business relating to the Work.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since
the previous meeting and report.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
C7
•
•
f
Gensler Bank of America : Point'Happ_y
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1. Attendees: Every entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,
coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings.
All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after
each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
C. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the
following:
1)
Interface requirements.
2)
Sequence of operations.
3)
Status of submittals.
4)
Deliveries.
5)
Off-site fabrication.
6)
Access.
7)
Site utilization.
8)
Temporary facilities and controls.
9)
Work hours.
10)
Hazards and risks.
11)
Progress cleaning.
12)
Quality and work standards.
13)
Change Orders.
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
• 01310/9-98/bac ,
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
1.2 - DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Processing Time: Promptly submit Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples in accordance
with the accepted schedule, as to cause no delay in the Work. Allow 5 working days for initial
review of all submittals. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1. Initial Review: Allow 5 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent
submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be
delayed for coordination. Delaying submittals to facilitate coordination between
submittals shall not constitute a delay of the Work nor shall it be the basis for an
extension of time.
2. Concurrent Review: Concurrent review is a submittal that requires review by more than
one design discipline. Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, submittal schedule shall reflect concurrent review.
3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01330-1
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect, before being returned to
Contractor. •
4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
5. Allow 3 calendar days for processing each resubmittal.
6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 5 inches by 6 inches on label or beside title block to
record Architect's review markings.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Unique identifier, including revision number. Submittals shall be numbered
consecutively and the numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions.
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Other necessary identification.
D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
E. Resubmission: Unless corrected copies are required for final submittal due to Architect's
observance of noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may
serve as final submittal.
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect.
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using an Architect accepted transmittal form. Architect, will
discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
•
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
3
Gensler E. Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
H. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect
in connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual. Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop,Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Clearly mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring.
f. Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams.
h. Mill reports.
i. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
j. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
k. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Design calculations.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01330-3
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differs_: tiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed
wiring.
3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size draw inas, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by
40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).
4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:
All Submittals: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one
blue- or black -line print. Architect will return the reproducible print.
D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review is
of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name or name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of samples that show
the range of variations.
b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
5. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain
one Sample set; remainder will be returned.
•
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
r�
Gensler
07.2022.012 .
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta. CA
a. Submit a single Sample, where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
7. Systems Submittals: Identify submittals for systems such as fire alarms, exterior walls,
and curtain walls, on the transmittal and act upon the system singularly as a combined
submittal. If resubmission is required, resubmit entire system submittal.
8. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
F. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
B. Qualification, Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
C. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
• product complies with requirements.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012
La Quinta, CA
D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and •
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel
certified.
E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
I. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate •
preparation needed for adhesion.
K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency.
M. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction (ie, IBCC) that product complies with building
code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler , — , • r :. • Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1
0 Section "Closeout Procedures."
O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including. but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1.. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances:
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
Q. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory -authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative
making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7.. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed,
coordinated, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 0
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each properly executed submittal, make marks to
indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will reject and return
submittals not complying with requirements. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action
stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. No exception Taken. No further review of Submittal required.
2. Make Corrections as Noted. Incorporate corrections in Work; resubmittal is not required.
If Contractor cannot comply with corrections as noted, revise to respond to exceptions
and resubmit.
3. Revise and Resubmit. Revise as noted & resubmit for further review.
4. Resubmit Properly. Submittal not reviewed because it does not contain Contractor's
signature indicating its review and approval, and/or is not in proper condition for review.
Resubmit.
5. Not Reviewed. Submittal is not required by Contract Documents.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect may review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each
submittal to appropriate party. 0
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded
or returned marked "Not Reviewed."
END OF SECTION 01330
01330/9-98/bac
•
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler , , ,_, , i- "
07.2022;012 .-
07.2022:012
• SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 - DEFINITIONS
Bank of America : Point -Happy
La 'Quinta, CA
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations. _
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor,
or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,
erection, application, and similar operations. Installers shall be experienced in the operation
they are engaged to perform.
J. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed
a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar
with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
K. "As Required": As required by regulatory bodies, by referenced standards, by existing
conditions, by generally accepted, construction practice or by the Contract Documents. In the
event of ambiguity or conflicts, the most stringent requirements shall apply.
0 L. `By Others" refers to work that is not a part of the Contract.
` REFERENCES 01:420=1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
M. "N.I.C.: "Not in Contract" means the work or the item indicated is not a part of the Contract
and will be provided by the Owner. •
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that
are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly
with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. On request, make available a copy of
standards specific to the Work being performed.
E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list.
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from Access Board (800) 872-2253
www.access-board.gov (202) 272-5434
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
Available from Government Printing Office (888) 293-6498
www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr (202) 512-1530
FS Federal Specification
Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925
www.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fed-specs.cfm
F. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms
are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of
the entities in the following list.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100
www.aluminum.org
REFERENCES 01420-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333
REFERENCES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
(202) 737-0202
(847) 303-5664
(202) 624-5800
(248) 848-3700
(972) 506-7216
(312) 201-0101
(202) 824-7000
-(859) 2884960
(202) 626-7300
(800)644-2400
(312) 670-2400
(202) 452-7100
(303) 792-9559
(800) 395-2522
(703) 736-9666
(301) 972-1700
(847) 394-0150
(202)789-2900
'01420-3
www.aaadm.com
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
www.aabchq.com
-" AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
www.aamanet.org
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
www.aashto.org
ACI
American Concrete Institute/ACI International
www.aci-int.org
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
www.concrete-pipe.org
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
www.flexibleduct.org
AGA
American Gas Association
www.aga.org
Al
Asphalt Institute
www.asphaltinstitute.org
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
www.e-architect.com
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
www.aisc.org
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
www.steel.org
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
www.aitc-glulam.org
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America
www.alca.org
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
www.amca.org
ANLA
American Nursery & Landscape Association
(Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen)
www.anla.org
REFERENCES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
(202) 737-0202
(847) 303-5664
(202) 624-5800
(248) 848-3700
(972) 506-7216
(312) 201-0101
(202) 824-7000
-(859) 2884960
(202) 626-7300
(800)644-2400
(312) 670-2400
(202) 452-7100
(303) 792-9559
(800) 395-2522
(703) 736-9666
(301) 972-1700
(847) 394-0150
(202)789-2900
'01420-3
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
(202) 293-8020
www.ansi.org
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
(253) 565-6600
www.apawood.org
ARI
Air -Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
(703) 524-8800
www.ari.org
ASA
Acoustical Society of America
(516) 576-2360
www.asa.aip.org/
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
(800) 548-2723
www.asce.org
(703) 295-6300
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
(800) 527-4723
Air -Conditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org
(404) 636-8400
ASME
ASME International
(800) 843-2763
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(212) 591-7722
International)
www.asme.org
ASPE
American Society of Plumbing Engineers
(773) 693-2773
www.aspe.org:8080
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
(440) 835-3040
www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
(610) 832-9585
www.astm.org
AWCI
AWCI International
(703) 534-8300
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
www.awci.org
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(See WCMA)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
(800) 449-8811
www.awinet.org
(703) 733-0600
AWPA
American Wood -Preservers' Association
(817) 326-6300
www.awpa.com
AWS
American Welding Society
(800) 443-9353
www.aws.org
(305) 443-9353
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
(212) 297-2122
REFERENCES 014204
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
• HMMA
Bank of America: Point,Happy
La Quinta, CA
www.buildershardware.com
Copper Development Association Inc.
Gensler
www.copper.org
07.2022.012
•
CDA
www.cganet.com
CGA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
CISCA
www.cisca.org
CPA
Composite Panel Association
CRI
(Formerly: National Particleboard Association)
CRSI
www.pbmdf.com
DHI
Carpet & Rug Institute (The)
EIA/TIA
www.carpet-rug.com
(706) 278-3176
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
FGMA
www.crsi.org
FM .
Door and Hardware Institute
FMG
www.dhi.org
GA
Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry
GANA
Association
.GTA
• HMMA
Bank of America: Point,Happy
La Quinta, CA
www.buildershardware.com
Copper Development Association Inc.
(800) 232-3282
www.copper.org
(212) 251-7200
Compressed Gas Association
(703) 412-0900
www.cganet.com
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
(630) 584-1919
www.cisca.org
Composite Panel Association
(301) 670-0604
(Formerly: National Particleboard Association)
www.pbmdf.com
Carpet & Rug Institute (The)
(800) 882-8846
www.carpet-rug.com
(706) 278-3176
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
(847) 517-1200
www.crsi.org
Door and Hardware Institute
(703) 222-2010
www.dhi.org
Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry
(703) 907-7500
Association
www.eia.org
Flat Glass Marketing Association
(See GANA)
Factory Mutual System
(See FMG)
FM Global
(401) 275-3000
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
www.fmglobal.com
Gypsum Association
(202) 289-5440
www.gypsum.org
Glass Association of North America
(785) 271-0208
(Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association)
www.glasswebsite.com/gana
Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of
North America
(See 'GANA)
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(See NAAMM)
REFERENCES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01420=5
Gensler
Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012
La Quinta, CA
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
(703) 435-2900
•
www.hpva.org
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
(212) 419-7900
www.ieee.org
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
(212) 248-5000
www.iesna.org
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council
(315) 646-2234
www.igcc.org
ITS
Intertek Testing Services
(800) 345-3851
www.itsglobal.com
(607) 753-6711
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
(800) 488-6864
www.lightning.org
(847) 577-7200
LSGA
Laminated Safety Glass Association
(See GANA)
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
(312) 332-0405
www.naamm.org
NACE
NACE International
(281) 228-6200
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
www.nace.org
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
(703) 713-1900
www.ncma.org
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
(301) 977-3698
www.nebb.org
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
(301) 657-3110
www.necanet.org
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
(207) 829-6901
www.nelma.org
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(703) 841-3200
www.nema.org
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
(800) 344-3555
www.nfpa.org
(617) 770-3000
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
(604) 524-2393
www.nlga.org
NPA
National Particleboard Association
•
REFERENCES
01420-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
0
0 -
Gensler
07.2022.012--
Bank
7.2022.012_
Bank of America: Point :Happy
La Quinta, CA
,REFERENCES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01420-7
(See CPA)
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
(800) 323-9545
www.nrca.net
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
(888) 846-7622
www.nrmca.org
(301) 587-1400
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door Association
(See WDMA)
PCA
Portland Cement Association
(847) 966-6200
www.portcement.org
PDCA
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America
(800) 332-7322
www.pdca.com
(703) 359-0826
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
(800) 644-2400
www.boltcouncil.org
(312) 670-2400
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
(Contact by mail only)
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
(847) 462-1930
www.sdi.org
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
(315) 646-2234
www.sgcc.org
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(312) 644-6610
www.sigmaonline.org/sigma
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
(703) 803-2980
National Association
www.smacna.org
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(800) 523-6154
(Formerly: SPUSPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry,
'Inc.;
Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
SPIE
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
(850) 434-2611
www.spib.org
SPRI
SPRI
(781) 444-0242
(Single Ply Roofing Institute)
www.spri.org
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
(800) 837-8303
,REFERENCES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01420-7
Gensler
07.2022.012
www.sspc.org
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
www.tileusa.com
TLA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
www.iapmo.org
Industries
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (Uniform Building
Alliance
Code)
www.tiaonline.org
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
ICC International Code Council
www.ul.com
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
Officials)
www.wclib.org
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: AWCMA - American Window Covering
Manufacturers Association)
www.windowcoverings.org
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and
Door Association)
www.wdma.com
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
(412) 281-2331
(864)646-8453
(703) 907-7700
(800) 704-4050
(847) 272-8800
(800)283-1486
(503) 639-0651
(800) 506-4653
(212) 661-4261
(800) 223-2301
(847) 299-5200
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930
www.wwpa.org
G. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used
in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the
entities in the following list.
CABO Council of American Building Officials
(See ICC)
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
(909) 595-8449
Officials (The)
www.iapmo.org
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (Uniform Building
(800) 2844406
Code)
www.icbo.org
(562) 699-0541
ICC International Code Council
(703) 9314533
(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building
Officials)
www.inticode.org
REFERENCES 01420-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
C11
Cl
•
Gensler Bank of America: Point HaPPy
07.2022.012.. La Quinta, CA
H. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and
• acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the entities in the following list.
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772
www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000
www.doc.gov
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090
www.epa.gov
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology: (301) 975-6478
www.nist.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (202) 693-1999
www.osha.gov
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01420
01420/11-00/bac
•
REFERENCES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
01420-9
Gensler Bank of America: Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
0 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
•
PART 1 -GENERAL
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls.
1. Provide and maintain all temporary facilities and controls necessary for the performance
of the Work. Locate and install all temporary facilities and controls where acceptable to
the local authorities having jurisdiction and utility owner and remove same and terminate,
in a manner suitable to the local authorities having jurisdiction and utility owner, at
completion of Work or when otherwise directed. Unless otherwise specified, pay all
costs associated with the provision, and maintenance of, temporary facilities and controls
including power, water, and fuel (if any) consumed until Substantial Completion.
1.2 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Owner's construction forces.
2. Occupants of Project.
3. Architect.
4. Testing agencies.
5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in
construction, at Project site.
C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by
all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise,
for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Underground Utilities: Comply with all laws and regulations concerning the
identification and locations of all underground utilities. Utilities data on Drawings are based
upon information obtained by Architect and have not been verified by Architect. Architect shall
not be responsible or liable for the data supplied. Data shall not be relied upon by Contractor in
complying with Contract Documents or safety requirements. Report to the utility any break,
leak, dent, gouge, groove, or any other damage to facilities whether or not caused by the
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
Contractor. Contractor shall notify Architect and nearby occupants of emergency situations that
may arise. •
B. Use of Permanent Utilities: When each permanent utility is operational, it may be used for
construction purposes, if acceptable in writing, to the Owner. The written request for
permission for use of the system from the Owner shall include, as a minimum, the conditions
and reasons for use and provisions for and effect on equipment warranties. In the event that the
Owner accepts the Contractors use of the permanent utility for the balance of the Work, the
Contractor shall be fully responsible for it, and shall pay all costs for operation, power,
restoration and maintenance of same.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use
of completed permanent facilities. 0
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the
remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked -in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements
cannot be used for that purpose.
B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove
effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide
drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities.
1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants
that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by sewer department officials.
3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After
heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. •
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012. La Quinta, CA
4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify
effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes.and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use.
D. Temporary Toilet and Drinking Water Facilities: Provide and maintain temporary toilets, and
drinking -water, facilities for use by all construction workers throughout the construction period.
Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell.
Keep toilet facilities clean, sanitary, and provided with all appurtenances, and in
compliance with all applicable codes and regulations. Service as often as necessary to
prevent accumulation of wastes and creation of unsanitary conditions.
2. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Where the work is in progress provide drinking water, water
dispensers, and cups.
E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of
completed installations and for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Provide temporary heating using UL
Listed, or FM approved, portable smokeless heaters having safety controls against explosion,
overheating and carbon monoxide buildup, until a major portion of the building, or the entire
building, is enclosed.
• 1. The building shall be considered enclosed when the permanent walls, roofs, weather-
tight, windows are in place and glazed, and all entrance enclosures are either permanently
in place or are provided with suitable temporary enclosures all to the extent that the
building interiors are suitable for the installation of interior finishes.
•
In the event that the Owner accepts the Contractor's use of the permanent heating systems
for the balance of the Work, provide temporary filters to adequately filter air being
distributed through the duct work and air handling units to the supply outlets; disposable
filter shall be placed in front of all exhaust registers to keep construction dirt out of
exhaust duct work.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed areas throughout
construction period required to: facilitate progress of Work; to protect Work and products
against dampness and heat; to prevent moisture condensation on surfaces; to provide suitable
ambient temperatures for installation and curing of finish materials; to provide adequate
ventilating; to meet health regulations for safe working environment; and, to prevent hazardous
accumulations of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or gases in areas occupied during construction.
Provide local exhaust ventilating to prevent harmful dispersal of hazardous substances into
atmosphere of occupied areas. Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in
harmful exposure to persons or property. Provide ventilating operations at all times personnel
occupy an area, when subject to hazardous accumulations of harmful elements. Continue
operation of ventilating system for as long as required after cessation of Work to assure removal
of harmful elements.
• TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3
-Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1. In the event that the Owner accepts the Contractor's use of the permanent ventilation and
air conditioning systems for the balance of the Work, provide and maintain temporary •
filters to adequately filter air being distributed through the ductwork and air handling
units to the supply outlets; disposable filter shall be placed in front of all exhaust registers
to keep construction dirt out of exhaust duct work.
G. Electric Power and Lighting Service:
1. Arrange with local electric utility for temporary electric service to the site. Provide all
installation and equipment for temporary lighting and power. The electrical service shall
be of adequate capacity for all construction tools and equipment without overloading the
temporary facilities.
a. Provide power distribution throughout the structure and site as required to facilitate
construction operations. Terminations shall be provided for each voltage supply
complete with circuit breakers, disconnect switches and other electrical devices as
required to protect the power supply system.
b. A temporary lighting system shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the
Contractor as required to satisfy the minimum requirements of security and safety.
Provide general illumination for the entire project. Provide increased levels of
illumination where the work is being installed.
2. All temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance with
the applicable provisions of the governing codes and regulations, the NEC, NEMA, and
OSHA standards. All temporary power and lighting shall be maintained to give safe
working conditions, continuous service, and so as not to pose a threat to the Owner's
property. Modify and extend temporary power and lighting systems as the Work
progress requires.
H. Telephone Service: Provide and pay for temporary telephone service, and service charges,
throughout construction period. Long distance calls shall be paid for by the party making the
call. A pay phone is not acceptable.
3.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES AND PROTECTION
A. Temporary Construction Openings: Provide openings in slabs, walls, and partitions where
required for moving in large pieces of equipment. Close and restore all openings and finish
them after the equipment is in place. If structural modifications are required to provide
temporary construction openings notify the Architect for acceptance prior to making the
modification.
B. Dewatering Facilities: Protect the site and the Work from rain, spring or ground water, backing
up of drains, broken water lines, and all other water accumulations. Construct and maintain
temporary drainage and lawfully dispose of pumped water to prevent water accumulations.
Provide and operate sufficient dewatering and pumping equipment to maintain site and Work
free of water.
C. Access Roads: Construct and maintain, in good useable condition, required temporary roads
and other access to the site. When no longer required remove temporary access roads. •
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
J,
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012,' La Quinta, CA
D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide one 8'x 4' painted wood project sign, with
is
project information applied thereon in a form and of content acceptable to the Owner, at a
location designated by the Owner. Graphics for project information sign shall be black. Upon
completion of the project, the sign shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor.
1. . No other signs or advertisements will be permitted.
Use 3/4" APA A -C exterior grade plywood with 2" x 4" framing; prime entire sign, coat
face of sign with 2 coats of white paint, coat edges and back of sign with 2 coats of black
paint. Support sign on 4" x 4" wood posts, properly braced. Paint supporting structure
with 2 coats of black paint.
Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over
exterior primer.
E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Refer to�Division 1 Section "Waste Management Program" for
requirements applicable to waste disposal facilities. Comply with Division 1 Section
"Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
F. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-aid
stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas.
G. Temporary Field Office: Provide suitable insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office
facilities complete with telephone and furnishings for use as a common facility by all personnel
engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel,
storage of field documents, layout space for drawings, drafting table for production of As -built
drawings, and meetings at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly.
H. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
storage of materials and equipment subject to weather damage, vandalism, or theft. Provide
lockable doors and floors raised above the ground.
I. Construction Aids: Provide all items, such as hoists, cranes, and other lifting devices, all
scaffolding, staging, platforms, runways, ladders; and all temporary flooring, as required by the
various trades for the proper execution of the Work. Excavate, level, or otherwise treat existing
grade as required for placement of construction plant items. Provide such equipment with
proper guys, bracing, guards, railings, and other safety devices as required by governing
authorities and OSHA. All permanent work shall be protected from hoists, cranes, and other
lifting devices so as to prevent staining, damage or marring of the permanent work.
Tree and Plant Protection: Existing or newly planted vegetation, shrubs, trees, sidewalks,
paving, etc., on the site, shall, unless directly affected by the Work, be protected against damage
of any kind. No diesel or gasoline engine shall be left running under trees. No vehicle shall be
allowed to pass over the feeder root system within the drip line unless approved by the
Architect. Damage of any kind caused by the Work shall corrected before final acceptance.
Maintain trees, plants, shrubs, existing site improvements, etc., designated to remain within the
project site.
K. Streets and Sidewalk Protection: Protect streets and sidewalks and repair damage caused by
construction operations. Clean mud and debris from wheels of vehicles leaving Site and from
is
streets as required.
,TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
L. Pest Control: Within the limits of the construction site provide an effective rodent, insect and
pest control program. Engage a professional pest -control service to perform this program at •
regular intervals throughout the duration of the Project. Perform control operations lawfully,
using environmentally safe materials.
M. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, erect a temporary fence and gates
to prevent unauthorized persons from entering the construction site. The extent of the fencing
required shall be that determined by the Contractor to protect the Work, and to comply with the
requirements of local authorities and regulations. Install in a manner that will prevent people,
dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
N. Security: Maintain building and site security at all times. Provide temporary weather -tight
enclosures for all exterior openings. Equip exterior doors with locks. At the end of each day's
Work, close and lock all temporary enclosures. Provide security watchman service as required
to protect the building and site during working and non -working hours.
O. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Provide all barricades, shoring, fences, bridges,
railings, and guards for the protection of the public and construction personnel. All safety
devices shall conform to the applicable requirements of local building codes, OSHA.
P. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from wind, rain dust, frost, freezing temperatures, weather, other
construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for
building exterior.
Q. Temporary Fire Protection: Throughout the building, during construction, provide for fire
protection and fire prevention in accordance with all applicable Federal, state and local codes
and regulations.
3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2. Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines.
Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as
available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to
permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may •
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
, r
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
• clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
2. Remove and dispose of temporary filters and thoroughly clean the interior of the air
handling units and duct work prior to acceptance of the Work. Provide all new filters in
heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems.
3. Replace all lamps of the permanent lighting system, to comply with the Contract
Documents, at no cost to the Owner.
4. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-7
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
• SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements for the selection
of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
• products.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: All bids shall be based on the products required in the Contract Documents.
B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
• selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, •
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage.
9. Protect stored products from damage.
B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.5 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
1.6 SUBMITTALS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
•
is
Gensler, Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by Architect.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities shall include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, service life, maintenance, visual effect, and
specific features and requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
- installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
j. Time value to be added to, or subtracted from, the Contract Time of completion.
k. Benefit(s) to the Owner.
1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
M. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution. Substitution requests, if any, shall be submitted so as to allow a
reasonable time for their consideration and shall not be justification for delay of the
Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
PRODUCT REQUMEMENTS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
.' _ 01600-3
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. •
2. Standard Products: Unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide
products of both quality and type that have been used successfully in similar situations on
equal quality projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a
single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by
the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a
list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements.
4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers
listed that complies with requirements.
5. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and
matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed
product matches satisfactorily.
a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and
complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the
Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
C. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under one of the following conditions:
1. That the specified product is not available due to lockout, strike, bankruptcy, product
discontinuance, Acts of God, and that the proposed product will match or exceed the
quality of the specified product while either providing the Owner with a cost savings or
expediting the Work.
2. When a warranty of performance is specified and, in the judgment of the Contractor, the
specified product will not provide the desired performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
is
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler , , • •. _,
07.2022.012,
SECTION 02361- TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for termite control:
1. Soil treatment.
Bank of America : Point Happy
La.Quinta, CA
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA -Registered Label.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that
treatments furnished comply with requirements.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report
for Owner's record information, including_ the following as applicable:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
® 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5.. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
1.3 QUALITY -ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is
.located.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply ter miticides, and label with a Federal
registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or
frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA -Registered Label
requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
• 1.5 COORDINATION
TERMITE CONTROL
Copyright 2003 Gensler
-.02361-1
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting
operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground -supported slabs, before •
construction.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite
control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of
subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty
period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA -registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water
or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment
solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label
volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use,
according to the product's EPA -Registered Label. •
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation
work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with
application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources
of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes,
formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.
•
TERMITE CONTROL 02361-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
0
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
with manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label for products.
3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label, to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly.
1. Slabs -on -Grade: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building
slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete
footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation
walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric
conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, and along entire outside
perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. -Avoid soil washout around footings.
3. Masonry:;:Treat voids.
4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -
supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label
instructions.
D. Post warning signs in areas of application..
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 02361
TERMITE CONTROL
Copyright 2003 Gensler
02361-3
•
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
•
SECTION 02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
A. Section Includes: Automatic sprinkler irrigation systems and controls.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 02900 - Landscaping.
2. Division 15 sections: General requirements for water and drainage
systems.
3. Division 16 sections: General requirements for electrical work.
C. Permits: Apply for and secure required permits.
1.02 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM:
1. B 62-85 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
2. D 1784-81 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds.
3. D 1785-83 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
4. D 2241-84 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pressure -Rated Pipe (SDR -Series).
B. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF):
1. Requirements for Seal of Approval.
C. Plastics Pipe Institute (PSI):
1. Recommendations for hydrostatic design stresses for PVC pipe.
D. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, as reference in
.Document 00705 - General Provisions.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
- 02810-1
1.03 SUBMITTALS: •
A. Product Data: In accordance with Section 01300, submit detailed lists of
materials proposed for use. Prepare typewritten material list using the
following format. Double space between each item:
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL NO.
B. Project Record Documents: Record information on a daily basis and
submit in accordance with Section 01720.
1. Dimension, from 2 permanent points of reference, such as building
comers, sidewalks, or curbs, the location of the following items:
a. Routing of main pressure lines, at a maximum of 100 feet
intervals.
b. The routing of 24 volt control and common wiring.
C. Point of connection to electrical power.
d. Automatic control valves.
e. Point of connection to water.
f. Gate valves.
g. Quick coupling valves.
h. Other related equipment.
C. Controller Charts: Submit in accordance with Section 01730. •
1. Prepare charts after Project Record Drawings have been approved by
Landscape Architect.
2. Provide 1 controller chart as follows:
a. Chart shall be a reproduction of the Record Drawings, if the
scale permits fitting the controller door. If photo reduction
prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to
retain full legibility.
b. Chart shall be blackline print of the actual "As -Built" system,
showing the area covered by that controller.
C. Provide 1 chart for each controller.
3. Identify the area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a
distinctly different translucent pastel color, drawn over the entire area
of coverage.
4. Following approval, hermetically seal charts between 2 layers of
20 -mil thick plastic sheet, and mount using Velcro or similar
fasteners.
5. Charts shall be completed and approved prior to final review of
irrigation system.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-2
•
•
•
D. Checklist: Provide a signed and dated checklist and submit in accordance
with Section 01730 prior to final review of the work.
1. .Use the following format:
a. Plumbing Permits: If not required, so note.
b. Material Approvals: Approved by and date.
C. Pressure Line Tests: By whom and date.
d. Record Drawings: Received by and date.
e. Controller Charts: Received by and date.
f. , Materials and Equipment Furnished: Received by and date.
g. Operating and Maintenance Data: Received by and date.
h. System and Equipment Operation Instructions: Received by
6 and date. -
i. " Manufacturer's Warranties (if required): Received by and date.
J. Written Guaranty: Received by and date.
k. Lowering of Heads in Lawn Areas: If incomplete, so state.
2. Provide catalog and part sheets on materials and equipment installed
under this Section.
3. Include index sheet stating contractor's and equipment manufacturer's
name, address, and phone number.
E. Miscellaneous Items: Furnish the following tools .as a part of this
Contract:
1. Two sets of keys for each automatic controller cabinet, and each
controller enclosure cabinet lock.
2. Two wrenches for disassembly and assembly, or adjustment, of each
type sprinkler head- used in this installation requiring such special
tools.
3. One 30 -inch sprinkler key for every 12 lock lid valve boxes used in
this installation.
4. Two 5 -foot long value keys for gate valves.
5. Six quick coupler keys and matching hose swivels for each type of
quick coupling valve.
6. Four keys total for loose key hose bibbs.
F. Test Reports: In accordance with Section 01300, submit test reports of
pressure testing.
G. Instructions: In accordance with Section 01730, provide maintenance
manuals, instructions, and demonstrations to Owner's maintenance
personnel.
1. Maintenance manuals shall include sufficient detail to permit
operating personnel to understand, operate, and maintain equipment.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
. 02810 - 3 '
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Qualifications: Installer shall be regularly engaged, and specializing, in the
installation of equivalent irrigation systems using solvent -gasket joints.
B. Certifications: Electrical wiring, controls, motors, and devices shall be UL
listed and labeled.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing PVC pipe and
fittings. Pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows the length of
pipe to lie flat without undue bending or concentrated external loading at
any point. Pipe that has been dented or damaged shall be discarded.
WARRANTY:
A. Submit warranty forms in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties,
Guaranties, and Bonds.
B. During the warranty period, the Owner reserves the right to make
temporary repairs as necessary to keep the sprinkler system equipment in
operating condition. The exercise of this right by the Owner shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the
warranty as herein specified.
MAINTENANCE:
A. The entire sprinkler irrigation system shall be under full automatic
operation for a period of 7 days prior to any planting, and for 60 days after
approval to begin maintenance period.
B. Extra Materials: Provide extra heads of each type equal to 10 percent of the
quantity installed.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-4
•
•
•
0
•
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS:
A. Pressure supply line from point of connection through backflow prevention
unit shall be copper or brass.
1. Copper Pipe and Fittings:
a. Pipe: Type K, hard tempered.
b. Fittings: Wrought copper, solder joint type.
C. Joints shall be soldered with silver solder, 45 percent silver, 15
percent copper, 16 percent zinc, and 24 percent cadmium. Solid
at 1125 F. and liquid at 1145 F.
2. Brass Pipe and Fittings: -
a. Brass pipe shall be 85 percent red brass, ANSI Schedule 40
screwed pipe.
b. Fittings shall be medium brass, screwed 125 pound class.
B. Pressure supply lines 1-1/2 inches and smaller downstream of backflow
prevention unit shall be ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40 PVC. Pressure lines 2
inches and larger shall be Class 315 PVC.
1." Identification Markings: Identify all pipe and fittings with the
following indelible markings:
a. Manufacture's name.
b. Nominal pipe size.
C. Schedule or class.
d. Pressure rating, in PSI.
e. NSF Seal of Approval.
f. Date of extrusion.
2. Pipe (Solvent Weld Type): Manufacture from virgin polyvinyl
chloride compound in accordance with ASTM D 2241 or ASTM D
1784, Class 12454-B (formerly Type I, Grade 1). Hydrostatic design
stress rating 2,000 psi.
3.- -Fittings:. Standard weight, ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40, injection
molded solvent -weld PVC. Comply with ASTM D 1784, Class
13454-B.
a. Threads (Where Required): Injection molded type.
b. Tees and Ells: Side gated.
4. Threaded Nipples: Standard weight, ASTM D 1785 Schedule 80
with molded threads.
C.: Metal:
1. Galvanized Pipe: ASA Schedule 40 mild steel with threaded
connections.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
- 02810 -=.5'
2. Fittings: Medium galvanized screwed beaded malleable iron.
3. Protective Coating: Two coats of Koppers No. 50 Bitumastic.
•
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 6
•
D. ' Non -pressure Lines: ASTM D 1784 Class 14333-D (formerly Type H,
• Grade 1) PVC with solvent -weld joints. Comply .with general
requirements for pressure lines.
E. Visible Pipe and Fittings:
1. General: Integral gray color.
2. Threaded Risers and Nipples: ASTM D 1785 Schedule 80 PVC.
3. Other Risers and Fittings: ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40 PVC, solvent
weld.
F. Sleeves:
1. 4 inches and smaller: ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40 PVC.
2. Larger than 4 inches: ASTM D 1784 CLass 12454-C (formerly Type
I, Grade 2, Class 315) PVC.
G. Conduit: ASTM D 1785 Schedule 80 PVC.
H. Identification:
1. Tags: Polyurethane Behr Desopaid, yellow in color with black letters
2-3/4 inches by 2-1/4 inches, as manufactured by Christy's, or equal.
2. Attach identification tag showing valve number on each solenoid
pigtail.
2.02 JOINT CEMENT AND PRIMER:
A. Non -pressure plastic pipe and fittings shall be cemented using a 100
percent active solvent, blue in color.
B. Pressure plastic pipe and fittings shall be coated with a primer and then
with a 100 percent active solvent.
C. Both primer and solvent shall be similar in all respects to that
manufactured by Christy's or approved equal.
2.03 VALVES:
A. Gate Valves:
1. 3 inches and Smaller, (Unless Otherwise Noted on Drawings):
ASTM B 62 brass body, 150 pound saturated steam -rated with
screwed joints, non -rising stem, screwed bonnet, solid wedge disc.
Provide with bronze handwheel. Nibco, or approved equal.
B. Swing Check Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: 200 pound W.O.G. bronze
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS _ 02810.!..7
construction with replaceable composition, neoprene, or rubber disc,
conforming to FS -WW -V -51D, Class A, Type IV. •
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-8
• C. .- Anti -Drain Valves: Heavy duty virgin PVC construction with F.I.P. thread
inlet and outlet. Internal parts shall be stainless steel and neoprene.
Anti -drain valve shall be field adjustable against drawout from 5 to 40 feet
of head. Anti -drain valve shall be similar to the Valcon ADV, or approved
equal
D. Quick Coupling Valves:
1. Two-piece type brass body, 150 pound class, with 3/4 -inch female
threads opening at base, permitting operation with a special
connecting device (coupler) designed for this purpose.
a. Coupler threads: Lug type.
b. - Hinged Cover: Brass with a yellow vinyl cover and locking top.
E. Remote Control Valves:
1. Valve Type: Spring-loaded, self-cleaning, packless diaphragm
activated, normally closed type with Dupont-Zytel body, equipped
with flow control.
2. Valve Solenoid: 24 volt AC 4.5 watt maximum, 500 milliamp
maximum surge, corrosion -proof, stainless steel construction, epoxy
encapsulated to form a single integral unit.
3. Provide manual bleeder valve to permit operation in the field without
power at the controller.
4. Valve Body: Cast iron with bronze trim.
* * * SELECT ONE***
4. , Valve Body: Cast brass.
4. Valve Body: PVC.
F. Valve Boxes:
1. Non -Traffic Type: Plastic box with locking cover. Carson
Industries, Ametek, or equal, as detailed on Drawings.
a. Remote Control Valves: 9-1/2 inches by 16 inches by 11
inches Model 1419-12B. Emboss valve station numbers on top
of cover.
b. Gate Valves: 10 -1/4 -inch diameter by 10 inches Model
910-12B.
2. Traffic Type: 10 -1/4 -inch diameter precast concrete, as manufactured
by Brooks Products, El Monte, CA (818)443-3017. Provide
bolt -down cast iron cover.
G. Valve Sleeves: For manual control valves, Champion Model 20 valve
sleeve, or equal.
•
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS =,,02810 -.9
2.04 HEADS: is
A. Small Lawn Sprinkler Heads: In accordance with type noted on Drawings.
1. Body: Plastic or brass as noted on Drawings, with a 1/2 -inch IPS
inlet.
2. Nozzles: Plastic or brass with coverage of full, half, quarter, or as
noted on Drawings.
3. Nozzles shall rise a minimum of 4 inches.
B. Small Shrubbery Sprinkler Heads: In accordance with type noted on
Drawings.
1. Body: Plastic, with height as shown on Drawings.
2. Nozzles: Plastic or brass with degree of arc as noted on Drawings.
3. Pop-up type body shall be used where noted on Drawings.
C. Rotary Sprinkler Heads: In accordance with type noted on Drawings.
D. Tree Irrigators: Provide assemblies as indicated on Drawings, including
vents and filters.
2.05 TRICKLE DRIP EMITTERS AND EMITTER TUBING:
A. Emitter Body: Glass -filled polypropylene, as manufactured by Global •
Water Systems, Whittier, CA (213) 945-2287. Provide inlet barb. Flow
shall be regulated through a silicone flapped diaphragm with a flow path of
1/4 -inch. The emitter shall pressure compensate for rated flow 10 percent
plus or minus over a pressure variant of 10 to 50 pounds per square inch.
B. Tubing: Virgin polyethylene extruded from Union Carbide Bakelite resin
No. 60-80 or No. 75-10, as manufactured by Global Water Systems.
1. 1/2 -inch tubing shall have an inside diameter of -0.580 -inch and an
outside diameter of 0.690 -inch.
2. 1/8 -inch tubing shall have an inside diameter of 0.125 -inch and an
outside diameter of 0.195 -inch.
C. Fittings: Molded from heat -resistant polypropylene plastic, similar to
Agricultural Products compression line fittings. Use Agricultural Products
No. CA adapter and No. CAA adhesive when connecting emitter tubing to
1/2 -inch PVC slip socket fittings.
•
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-10
•
•
•
2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS:
A. Backflow Preventer: Refer to Landscape Drawings.
B. Wye strainers at backflow prevention units shall be Class 125 cast iron
with. 30 mesh monel screen and shall be similar to Bailey No. 100A or
equal. -
2.07 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER:
A. Provide type and size as noted on Drawings.
* * * SELECT ABOVE OR BOTH BELOW * * *
A. Type: Fully automatic operation, capable of operating the number of
stations and remote control valves indicated on Drawings.
1. Pedestal or wall mount type in a vandal resistant enclosure with
locking hinged cover.
2. Fuse and ground chassis at controller components.
3. Provide UL approved on-off switch and electrical outlet for 115
volt electrical service. Locate inside enclosure.
B. Operation: Unit programmable for various schedules entirely by setting
switches, dials or touch plate. Provide the minimum following features:
1. Operation switch for each day of the week, for three schedules,
allowing each station to be scheduled independently as to days of
watering.
2. A minute operation switch for each station with a positive
increment range of 0 to 60 minutes. Time settings accurate within 1
percent.
3. Repeat switch to allow selected schedules to be repeated after
completion of the initial watering schedule, and to allow repeat
operations to be scheduled throughout a 24-hour period.
4. Adjustment to increase or decrease length of watering period of all
stations in a program from 0 - 300 percent.
2.08 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND SERVICE:
A. High Voltage:
1. Electrical service to automatic controller shall be in accordance with
Division 16 Sections. Provide final hookup to equipment as a part of
the Work of this Section.
. IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
X 02810'-11 . ;
B. Low Voltage:
1. Connections between controller and remote control valves shall be •
made with direct burial AWG -UF, 600 volt wire, 16 gage or larger,
insulation thickness 3/64 -inch, utilizing low density high molecular
weight polyethylene insulation.
2. Splices, where permitted, shall be waterproofed using Rainbird,
Snap-Tite, Scotch -Lok No. 3576 Connectors, or fusible heat shrink
tubing.
3. Pilot wires shall be a different color for each controller. Common
wires shall be white with a different color stripe for each controller.
Minimum size shall be No. 14 gage.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Before Work commences, a conference shall be held with Landscape
Architect regarding requirements of the Work of this Section.
1. Do not install irrigation system when field obstructions, grade
differences, or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that may not
have been considered in the original design.
B. Examine surfaces for conditions that shall adversely affect execution, •
permanence and quality of Work.
1. Verify that grading has been completed and the work of this Section
can properly proceed.
2. Exercise care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Be
responsible for existing utilities and for damages to utilities which
are caused by operations or neglect. Check existing utility drawings
for locations.
C. Notify Landscape Architect in writing of existing conditions that are not
shown, or that differ from those shown on Drawings.
D. Do not proceed with Work until discrepancies are convected or existing
utilities are located.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Lay out each system using staking method as approved by Landscape
Architect. Maintain and protect approved staking layout. Piping or
equipment shown diagrammatically on Drawings outside of planting areas
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-12
•
• shall be installed inside planting areas whenever possible
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - •13
3.03
B. Lay out sprinkler heads and make any minor adjustments required due to
differences between actual site conditions and the Drawings. Minor
adjustments shall be maintained within the original design intent in order
to avoid conflicts between planting and architectural features.
C. Protection: Protect the installed work and materials of other trades from
damage during irrigation installation system operations.
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING:
A. Excavate trenches in straight lines to required depths. Follow approved
layout for each system. Bottom of trench shall be flat to insure piping is
supported continuously on an even grade.
B. Provide minimum coverage as follows:
1. Pressure supply lines: 18 inches.
2. Non -pressure lines: 12 inches.
3. Control wire: 18 inches. Place under pressure supply lines.
C. Provide not less than 4 inches clearance between each line and not less that
6 inches clearance between lines of other trades, unless otherwise noted in
details on Drawing.
D. Protect materials to prevent intrusion of dirt and moisture.
E. Test all systems prior to backfilling. If the only piping installed is over
20 -feet long, pressure testing is required for that section at the time of
installation. Upon completion of piping installation, the entire system
shall be tested.
F. Backfill Material: Clean, fine granular material, free of rocks and debris.
G. Compact backfill with mechanical devices to a dry density equal to
adjacent undisturbed soil. Restore to adjacent grade, free of dips,
depressions, humps, or other irregularities.
1. Compaction by truck or other vehicle is not permitted.
H. Under Paving:
1. Backfill with sand, one layer 6 inches below pipe and one layer 3
inches above pipe, and compact in layers to 95 percent compaction
using mechanical tamping devices. Set in place, cap, and pressure
test piping under paving prior to installation of paving work.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-14
L
•
•
• 2:: Install piping under existing walks by jacking, boring, or hydraulic
driving. Cutting or breaking of sidewalks or concrete is not allowed
without Architect's approval. No hydraulic driving will be permitted
under concrete paving.
3. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between top of pipe and
bottom of aggregate base for pressure and non -pressure piping
installed under asphaltic concrete paving.
3.04 INSTALLATION:
A. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer
instructions.
B. Install backflow assemblies in shrub areas at minimum height permitted by
local code.
C. Brass Pipe and Fittings: Assemble using Teflon tape applied to male
threads only.
D. Plastic Pipe and Threaded Fittings: Assemble using Teflon tape applied to
male threads.only.
E. Galvanized Metal Pipe and Fittings: Assemble using Teflon tape applied to
male threads only. Coat below grade portions with 2 coats of protective
coating.
F. Quick Coupling Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, locate valves within
6 to 12 inches of nearest edge of hardscape.
G. Check Valves and Anti -Drain Valves: Install where required to prevent
low -head drainage.
H. Tree Irrigators: Locate at each tree. Install as indicated on Drawings,
including vents, filters and other appurtenances.
I. Backflow Prevention Unit and Automatic Controllers: Verify location
with Landscape Architect. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
J. Sprinkler Heads:
1. Shrub heads shall be installed as noted on Drawings.
2. Elevate full heads in lawn areas to a minimum of 4 inches above
grade.
•
IRRIGATION- SYSTEMS 02810 ' 15 - '
3. Install heads along curbs, walks, and paving level with grade in lawn
areas. •
4. Lower raised heads within 10 days after notification by the Owner.
•
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 028.10-16 •
5. _ ; Set- all heads perpendicular to finished grade,. unless otherwise
directed by Landscape Architect.
K. Remote Control Valves: Install valves in shrub or ground cover areas
wherever possible, or where shown on Drawings. When grouped together,
allow at least 12 inches between valves. Install each control valve in a
separate valve box.
3.05 UTILITY SERVICES:
A. Connect to existing water outlet or gate valve at locations indicated on
Drawings and make minor changes in location necessary due to actual site
conditions as work of this Section.
B. Connect to existing electrical service. Make minor changes in location as
necessary due to actual site conditions as work of this Section.
3.06 WIRING:
A. Place wiring in the same trench and along the same routing as the pressure
supply lines, unless otherwise approved.
1. Install wiring prior to main line whenever possible.
2. When more than one wire is placed in a trench, tape wires together at
maximum 10 feet on centers.
B. Provide a 12 -inch expansion loop at each connection and directional
change. Provide a sufficient length at each splice to allow valve bonnet to
be brought to the surface without disconnection.
C. Use a continuous wire between controller and remote control valves.
1. Except as otherwise approved, do not splice wire at any point.
2. Approved splices shall be enclosed in abox.
D. If wires under paved areas cannot be continuous, splices shall be enclosed
in an approved junction box.
3.07 VALVE BOXES:
A. Fill area under box with minimum of 1 cubic feet of 3/4 -inch crushed
gravel before box is installed.
IRRIGATION= SYSTEMS _02810 -17.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Notify Landscape Architect for the following reviews, with 48 hours
minimum notice.
a. Pressure supply line installation and testing.
b. System layout.
C. Automatic controller installation.
d. Control wire installation.
e. Lateral line and sprinkler head installation.
f. Emitter tubing and emitter installation.
g. Coverage tests prior to landscape planting.
2. Provide 7 days notice for Final Review.
3. Provide "walkie-talkie" equipment and/or personnel to maintain
communication from review area to automatic controllers.
4. Provide up-to-date Project Record Drawings at each review.
a. In the event Contractor calls for a review without up-to-date
Project Record Drawings, or without preparing the system for
inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursing
Landscape Architect on an hourly basis for the inconvenience.
No further reviews will be scheduled until this charge has been
paid.
B. Pressure Tests:
1. Do not install remote control valves, quick couplers, or any other
valve assembly until testing of pressure main lines is completed and
approved.
2. Do not backfill trenches more than necessary until testing has been
reviewed, tested, and approved.
3. Provide equipment necessary to test systems, including force pump.
4. Perform hydrostatic tests in presence of the Architect.
5. Test pressure supply lines under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds
per square inch for a period of 2 hours, unless otherwise directed by
Landscape Architect in writing.
C. System Flushing: After sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and
connected, and prior to installation of sprinkler heads, thoroughly flush all
lines with a full head of water. Install sprinkler heads after lines have been
flushed to the satisfaction of the Architect.
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-18 -
•
• D. Coverage Tests:
1. Perform coverage tests after sprinkler system is completed, but prior
to any planting, in the presence of the Architect.
2. Test system to ensure that planting areas are watered adequately and
uniformly.
3. Make necessary adjustments, including realignment of heads, to
provide required coverage as directed by Landscape Architect.
4. If it is determined that coverage can be improved by a nozzle change,
make such changes, or arrange with the manufacturer to have such
changes made, as part of the work of this Section. Make changes
prior to any planting.
3.09 CLEANING:
A. Upon completion of the work, restore ground surfaces to required
elevations and remove excess materials, debris and equipment from the
site to satisfaction of Landscape Architect.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Provide instruction to maintenance personnel in proper operation of
equipment in accordance with Section 01730.
•
END OF SECTION
0 IRRIGATIONSYSTEMS
•02810 19' -..
•
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil preparation and fertilization.
2. Planting operations.
3. Landscape planting materials.
4. Imported topsoil and planter mix.
5. Drainage materials in containers.
6. Maintenance.
B. Provide landscape plantings in the areas shown on Drawings with plants in
a healthy, vigorous growing condition. Items not specifically shown in
• Drawings or specified, but normally required to conform with such intent,
are considered part of the Work.
C. Include labor and equipment required to place, amend, and fine grade the
soil. Include the cost of fertilizer as specified. If the final soils analysis
results in a change to the specified amendments, a Change Order will be
issued.
D. Related Sections:
1. Section 02810 - Irrigation Systems.
2: Section 02915 - Landscape Finish Grading: Fine grading.
3 Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance.
1.02 REFERENCES:
A. American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature (AJCHN):
1. Standardized Plant Names, latest edition.
B. American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. (AAN):
1. American Standard for Nursery Stock, latest edition.
• C. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, as referenced in
LANDSCAPING 02900-1
Document 00705 - General Provisions.
D. Agricultural Code of California.
LANDSCAPING 02900-2
n
U
•
• 1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: In accordance with the provisions of Section- 01300, submit
complete lists of materials proposed for use, giving the manufacturer's
name, catalog number, and catalog cut for each item where applicable.
B. Substitutions:
1. If any plant specified is not obtainable, submit a written substitution
request to the Architect during the bidding period.
2. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted unless
authorized by the Landscape Architect in accordance with Section
01630.
C. Selection, Tagging and Ordering Plant Material:
1. Submit a request for inspection and documentation to Landscape
Architect at least one month prior to start of landscape planting work
that plant material has been ordered.
2. Plants shall be subject to inspection and rejection by Landscape
Architect at place of growth, and after delivery, for conformity to this
Specification.
D. Imported Topsoil:
1. Furnish the source of imported topsoil to the Landscape Architect for
approval.
2. Submit test results and schedule of recommended soil amendment
adjustments to Landscape Architect for review.
E. Agronomic Soils Test Report: In accordance with requirements under
Article - Source Quality Control, submit report to Landscape Architect
prior to preparation of soil amendment or ordering plant material.
F. Certificates:
1. Submit certificates for the following items upon delivery to the job
site:
a. Quantity of commercial fertilizer and organic fertilizer.
b. Quantity of soil amendments.
C. Quantity of seed.
d. Quantity of other soil additives per agronomic soils test report.
2. Submit written certificate of hydroseeding.
3. Submit Certificate of Delivery of container or bulk materials.
4. Submit written certificate of soil balance.
5. Submit written certification of quantity and quality of plant
materials.
•
LANDSCAPING 02900-3
G. Pre -Installation Conference: Provide a written projected planting schedule
noting the estimated completion date, number of working days
required,and special coordination requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Perform work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and
regulations required by authorities having jurisdiction over such work and
provide for all inspections and permits required by authorities in
furnishing, transporting, and installing materials.
B. Test soil samples after grading operations are complete, at subcontractor's
expense.
C. Materials shall conform to the requirements of this Section and to Section
212 of the Standard Specifications, whichever is more stringent.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Handling Plants: Handle plants in a manner to avoid any damage to the
plant. Protect plants from sun or drying winds. Plants that cannot be
planted immediately on delivery shall be kept in the shade, well protected,
and adequately watered. 0
B. Furnish a Certificate of Delivery slip with each delivery of material in
containers or in bulk. Certificate shall state source, quantity, or weight,
type and analysis, and date of delivery.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Prior to excavation for planting or placing of stakes, locate utilities,
electric cables, conduits, sprinkler lines, heads, valves, and valve control
wires so that proper precautions may be taken not to damage such
improvements. In the event of a conflict between such lines and plant
locations, promptly notify the Landscape Architect to arrange for
relocation of one or the other. Failure to follow this procedure places the
responsibility on the Contractor for making repairs at his expense for
damages resulting from Work hereunder.
B. Notify Landscape Architect in writing of soil or drainage conditions
encountered during planting operations which are detrimental to growth of
plant material.
LANDSCAPING . .'02900;. 4
is
r�
C.
1.07
I'l- ."4.
WARRANTY:
A. Plant Material:
1. Plant materials furnished or relocated under this Section shall be
warranted in writing, for a period of 1 year for boxed material, 3
months for all other material, from the date of final acceptance for all
material, against improper installation, and against defective,
unsound, or diseased conditions that may appear.
2. Plant material shall be guaranteed to live and grow in a healthy
condition for the above periods, commencing with the acceptance of
the work at the conclusion of the maintenance. Dead or obviously
unhealthy materials shall be replaced without delay. The opinion of
the Landscape Architect will be final in determining plant material to
be replaced due to an unhealthy condition.
3. Upon receipt of written notice from Owner of the death of any
warranted plant materials during the warranty period, the subject
- plant materials shall be promptly replaced with the same species
originally planted, and of a size closely approximating the size of the
plant if normal growth had occurred since the original planting.
Replacements shall be subject to the requirements of this
Specification.
4. When plants are replaced, advise the Owner in writing, of the
necessary establishment maintenance which must be performed.
5. Contractor shall not be held liable for loss of plant materials that
have not been maintained properly by the Owner.
6.- The. expense of replacement shall be evenly shared by the Owner and
the Contractor if replacement is necessary after the maintenance
period but during the warranty period.
7. Replacement shall continue to be made until each plant has
successfully established itself for the required guaranty period.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 . MANUFACTURERS:
A. Design of soil_ amendments and fertilizers is based on Gro -Power products
manufactured by Southern California Organic Fertilizer Company, (714)
750-3830.
B. Materials shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be either the
ones upon which the design is based or the products of a manufacturer
accepted in advance.
LANDSCAPING
'029004.5 '
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Imported Topsoil:
1. Provide natural, fertile, friable soil free from stones, noxious seeds,
weeds, roots, subsoil or other material detrimental to normal plant
growth.
2. Obtain imported topsoil from local sources acceptable to Landscape
Architect.
3. Silt plus clay content of soil shall not exceed 15 percent by weight
with a minimum 95 percent passing a 2.0 millimeter sieve.
4. Samples of the import soil shall be submitted to the soils testing
laboratory for analysis, interpretation, and recommendations prior to
blending or backfilling.
B. Fertilizer/Soil Conditioner:
1. Provide commercial fertilizer, uniform in composition, free- flowing,
suitable for application with approved equipment, and delivered to
site in unopened containers, each fully labeled according to
applicable fertilizer laws, and bearing the name or mark of the
manufacturer. Gro -Power Plus, or equal.
2. Provide 16-6-8, 12-12-12, 12-8-8, and 17-13-5, as indicated on
Drawings.
C. Organic Soil Amendment:
1. Provide nitrogen stabilized organic amendment derived from
redwood sawdust, fir sawdust or finely ground bark.
2. Provide organic soil amendments in accordance with planting plan
notes on Drawings.
D. Pre -Planting Herbicide: Round -Up, or equal.
E. Pre -Emergent Weed Control: Ronstar-G, Treflan, Eptam, Vegitex, or
equal.
F. Mulch: 3/4 inch size nitrogenized redwood chips, or medium grind bark
mulch as produced by Michael Rawls Company, Orange CA (714) 649-
2022, or approved equal.
G. Peat Moss: Sphagnum peat moss, Canadian or European variety, free from
alkali.
H. Soil Sulfur: First quality commercial grade.
-LANDSCAPING . 029.00 - 6
•
•
•
1 •
•
I. Ferrous Iron Sulfate: First quality commercial grade.
LANDSCAPING
2.03
J. Agricultural Gypsum: First quality commercial grade.
K. Calcium Carbonate Lime: First quality commercial grade.
L. Root Hormone: Super Thrive.
M. Backfill mix for general use shall be in accordance with the planting plan
notes on the Drawings.
N. Excess soil shall be removed or redistributed before application of
fertilizer. Where soil is to be replaced by plants, allowance shall be made
so that when finish grading has begun, there shall be no deficiency in the
specified depth of mulched planting beds.
PLANT MATERIALS:
A. Identification: Plant material shall be true to type and nomenclature in
accordance with AJCHN Standardized Plant Names, and each bundle or
plant shall be properly identified with durable, legible labels.
B. Quality and Size of Plants: In accordance with rules and grading of AAN
American Standard for Nursery Stock, and as shown on the Drawings.
1. Trees, shrubs, vines, and ground covers shall have a normal habit of
growth and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from insect
infestations.
2. Plants that meet the measurements specified, but do not posses a
normal configuration or balance of height and spread, will be
rejected.
3. Trees and shrubs shall have been grown in containers of the size
stated on Drawings, and shall have sufficient roots to hold the root
ball together after removal from containers without being rootbound.
4. Trees will be straight and of uniform shape without damaged,
crooked, or multiple leaders. Trees with abrasions of the bark,
sunscalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 1/2 -inch
which have not been pruned and painted or completely callused, will
be rejected.
5. Groundcover plants shall be grown in flats or as indicated on the
Drawings. Flatgrown plants (rooted cuttings) shall remain in original
flats until transplanting. Soil shall contain sufficient moisture so that
it will not fall apart when lifting the plants.
LANDSCAPING ° --02900 - 8
•
•
•
• C. Lawn: In accordance with planting plan on Drawings.
D. Hydroseeding:
1. Seed: Fresh, clean, new crop seed, premixed by mechanical mixer to
proportions specified on planting plan on Drawings.
2. Seed shall be mixed by dealer and furnished with dealer's guaranteed
statement of composition and purity. Transmit copy to Landscape
Architect.
3. Hydromulch: In accordance with planting plan on Drawings.
4. Soil Stabilizer: In accordance with planting plan on Drawings.
5. Fertilizer: In accordance with planting plan on Drawings.
2.04 ACCESSORIES:
A. Tree Staking shall be as indicated on Drawings.
•
B. - Ties shall be as indicated on Drawings.
C. Guying materials for on -grade planting shall be as indicated on Drawings.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Agronomic Soils Testing:
1. Take 2 samples of site soil at a depth of 6 to 12 inches, within
proposed planting areas, after completion of grading and prior to
weed control and soil preparation.
2. Take samples to an agronomic soils testing laboratory registered by
the State of California and acceptable to the Landscape Architect for
soil evaluation.
3. Request testing for- fertility and suitability analysis with written
recommendations for soil amendment, fertilizer and chemical
conditioners, application rates for soil preparation, planting backfill
mix, hydrospray, andpost=maintenance fertilization programs.
4. Soils report recommendations shall take precedence over the
amendment and fertilizer application rates specified in this Section.
B. Testing laboratory shall be Soil and Plant Laboratory, Inc., 412 South
Lyon; Santa Ana, CA 92701, P.O. Box 11.744, Santa Ana, CA 92711
(714)558-8333. Tests shall be paid for by the Contractor.
LANDSCAPING - • .-02900-;-9 -
C. Furnish a soils analysis of existing on-site soil. There shall be 4 sampling •
areas located throughout the site as selected by Landscape Architect. Take
2 core samples at each sampling area. Suitability and fertility analyses with
comments and recommendations shall be provided for each sample.
1. Submit testing laboratory's interpretation, recommendations, and
comments to Landscape Architect within 14 days after the
completion of rough grading.
D. Furnish a soils analysis of import soil, lightweight soil mix,
camellia/gardenia/azalea mix, and fir sawdust prior to backfill. Submit 2
quarts of fine sand and 2 quarts of nitrogen stabilized fine fir bark for the
custom lightweight soil mix for organic and particle size analyses. Do not
mix. Submit 1 quart of fir sawdust for organic analysis.
1. Submit soil testing laboratory's findings to Architect within 5 days
prior to backfilling.
E. Soil testing shall be conducted for organic suitability after completion of
planting in the soil preparation and backfill mix areas. Submit to the
testing laboratory the original amendment specification with previously
issued bulletins for soil amendments and installation procedures. Provide 3
random samples of planting soil for analysis. Fertility analyses,
recommendations, and interpretations shall be furnished by the testing
laboratory to ensure all specified amendments made been provided. •
F. Samples of material, including fertilizers, soil conditions and other
specified materials, shall be submitted for inspection. Delivery may begin
upon approval of samples.
G. Samples of the native soil shall be submitted to the soils testing laboratory
after rough grading and prior to soil preparation. On receipt of a soils
analysis and recommendations, a Change Order to the Contract will be
issued if revision to soil treatment is recommended.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Verification of Conditions: Inspect and accept the condition of the site
relative to this Section before commencing Work. If not acceptable, notify
the Owner in writing. By proceeding with the Work of this Section, the
Contractor indicates his acceptance of previous related work.
•
LANDSCAPING 02900-10
• B. Landscape -work shall not .begin until construction adjacent to planting
areas has been completed and irrigation systems have been installed and
approved by Landscape Architect.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A. Protection:
1. Provide necessary safeguards and exercise caution against injury or
defacement of existing site improvements.
2. Be responsible for any damage resulting from landscape planting
operations. Repair damage and return the area to the previous
condition at no cost to the Owner.
3.03 WEED CONTROL:
A. Apply pre -planting herbicide to visible weeds, before and after soil
placement. -
B. Pre -emergent Weed Control: Immediately after planting, apply pre -
emergent weed control materials to planted areas which will not be seeded.
C. Protect existing plants from damage.
D. After application of weed killer, before and during preliminary ryand finish
grading, remaining weeds and grasses shall be dug out by the roots and
disposed of off-site. Weeds and grasses not of the perennial type, less than
2-1/2 inches high and not bearing seed, may be turned under. Perennial
weeds and grasses to be removed include, but are not limited to the
following:
1.
Nut Grass.
2.
Alfalfa.
3.
St. Augustine.
4.
Puncture Vine. .
5.
Kikuya Grass.
6.
Mustard Plant.
7.
Johnson Grass.
8.
Wirewood.
9.
Morning Glory.
3.04 SOIL PREPARATION:
A. Cross -rip on grade planting areas to a depth of 10 to 12 inches in two
LANDSCAPING 02900-=11
directions.
LANDSCAPING '02900 -12
•
•
•
• B. Broadcast the organic soil amendments uniformly over -surface of the area
to be treated. Roto -till the top 6 inches of planting areas to evenly
distribute the amendments and conditioners into the soil.
•
C. Moisture Content: The soil shall not be worked when the moisture content
is so great that excessive compaction will occur, not when it is so dry that
dust will form in the air. Water shall be applied, if necessary, to provide
ideal moisture conditions.
3.05 PLANTING OPERATIONS:
A.. Finish Grading: Prior to commencement of planting operations, complete
finish grading as specified in Section 02915.
***DELETE BELOW WHEN USING SECTION 02915***
1. When preliminary grading, including weeding and fertilizing, has
been. completed and the soil has dried sufficiently to be readily
worked, planting areas shall be graded to uniform levels or slopes at
a minimum of 2 percent. Minor adjustments to finish grades shall be
made in the direction of the water. Low spots and pockets shall be
graded to drain properly. Finish grade of planting areas shall be one
inch below grade to drain properly. Finish grade of planting areas
shall be one inch below grade of adjacent pavement. Grading shall
be done when soil is at optimum moisture content for working.
Planting areas shall be scarified to a depth of 3 inches below grade
prior to placing fertilizers. Rock and debris more than 2 inches in
diameter shall be removed from the site.
B. General: Prior to installation of irrigation system, specimen trees shall be
located as directed by Landscape Architect.
1. Preparation of Lawn Beds: At the time of planting, lawn bed shall be
raked lightly to an even surface, removing any deleterious materials.
Care shall be taken not to change the drainage pattern. The lawn bed
shall be inspected by the Landscape Architect to determine suitability
for planting prior to seeding. The Contractor shall obtain such
approval before seeding.
2. Watering: Immediately after planting, seeded areas shall be watered
with a fine spray, care being taken to avoid erosion, and the planted
areas kept moist until the seed has germinated and the plants have
become established.
3. Watering Basins: Construct a firmly compacted mound of soil
around each tree and plant to form a watering basin at the edge of
and following the shape of the planting pit area. Mounds for trees
and for vines from 5 gallons or larger containers, shall be at least 2
LANDSCAPING `"02900-13 -
inches high. Excavated earth, if capable of retaining water, may be •
used. Refill any settlement.
•
LANDSCAPING '02900 -14
C. Plant Pits: -Trees and shrubs .shall be installed in round pits with vertical
• sides, a width equal to twice the diameter, and a depth equal to the height
of the root ball or container. Sides and bottom of plant pits shall be
R
scarified.
D. Setting Container and Larger Plants:
1. Plants shall be centered and set on the appropriate native soil that has
been puddled and settled.
2. Plants shall be set with the top of root ball level 2 inches above finish
grade and rotated to give the best appearance in relationship to
adjacent structures or surroundings.
3. Use appropriate backfill mix to continue filling plant pits. Set plant
plumb and brace rigidly in position until backfill mix has been
tamped solidly around rootball. When 3/4 of the pit is backfilled,
water thoroughly, saturating the rootball. Continue filling pit to
finish grade with backfill mix.
4. When the plant pit is filled, form saucer berm around plants with
backfill material sufficient to hold 2 inches of water. Remove the
berm prior to dressing.
5. Apply root hormone at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
Tree balls shall be set before application of root hormone, and shall
be mulched immediately after application of root hormone into the
• root ball.
6. Water plants immediately after planting.
E. Provide on-site or approved imported top soil as necessary for raised
planters and bring soil up to required finish grades.
F. Staking and Guying: Immediately after planting, stake 5 gallon, 15 gallon
and 24 -inch box trees. Guy larger trees as detailed on the Drawings.
G.. Mulching: Spread mulch 1 inch thick in planter and areas that do not
exceed 10 percent slope.
3.06 GROUND COVER:
A. Install plant material in moist soil in the areas and at the'spacings indicated
on the Drawings, in neat rows, insuring complete coverage of planting
areas, including under and around trees and shrubs. Spacings shown in the
Plant List or on the Drawings are triangular spacing, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Install ground cover rooted cuttings, pots, or flats after mulching.
LANDSCAPING 02900 --15
3.07 HYDROMULCH WEED ERADICATION PROGRAM: •
A. Fertilize planting areas with urea 46-0-0 commercial fertilizer at the rate of
0.5 pounds per 1000 square feet.
B. Water planting areas thoroughly and continuously for a period of 3
consecutive weeks. A specific watering duration and frequency program
designed to germinate all residual weed seeds shall be approved in
advance.
C. Discontinue watering process for 2 days. Then apply a nonselective broad
spectrum systemic herbicide for perennial weeds. The type of chemical to
be used shall be determined by a licensed pest control advisor. If annual
weeds are present, use straight contact herbicide in accordance with pest
control adviser's recommendations.
D. Allow sufficient period of time to insure that all weeds are dead. Follow
herbicide manufacturer's direction.
E. Water planting areas thoroughly and continuously for a period of 3 weeks.
A shorter watering period may be permissible at the discretion of the
Architect. Discontinue watering process for 1 day prior to ' the second
application of the herbicide spraying. Re -apply the spraying operation
with a straight contact weed killer according to pest control adviser's
recommendations. Avoid irrigation for a minimum of 4 days for effective
final weed kill.
F. Clear all desiccated weeds from the area.
G. Water all planting areas thoroughly and continuously for .3 consecutive
days to saturate upper layers of soil prior to hydromulching operation.
H. Allow planting area soil surface to dry out for 1 day only prior to the
hydromulching application. Exercise care to not allow the soil surface to
be either super -saturated with water or bone dry prior to the hydromulching
installation. There should be some residual moisture within the fist
1/4 -inch of the soil surface.
3.08 HYDROMULCH AND HYDROSEEDING:
A. Verify that soil is prepared and fine graded in accordance with Section
02915.
-LANDSCAPING 02900 -16
• B. Before filling tanks, completely clean tank of seed and : debris in the
presence of, and to the satisfaction of, the Architect.
•
LANDSCAPING
.02900-17
3.09
C. Mix seed with hydromulch at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
Material for hydromulch shall be uniformly blended in slurry container
with minimum capacity of 1,500 gallons and agitated by mechanical
device to produce desired blend. Deliver slurry by hose to fan -type nozzle
at proper pressure for uniform distribution.
D. Apply hydromulch slurry mixed with commercial fertilizer at the rate
recommended by the manufacturer. Mix the specified seed material mixed
with water and spray resulting slurry under high pressure evenly and
uniformly over area to be seeded.
E. To areas that have been soil prepped, apply Gro -Power Hi -Nitrogen in
slurry at quantities recommended by manufacturer.
F. Submit certification, in writing, from Contractor stating that the
hydroseeding has been installed as specified.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. General: Notify Architect at least 24 hours in advance when requesting
on-site reviews.
B. Schedule for On -Site Reviews:
1. Pre job conference.
2. At completion of finish grading.
3. At completion of roto -tilling.
4. At completion of fine grading.
5. At delivery of plant materials.
6. At plant layout prior to excavating pits.
7. After planting pits have been excavated, but prior to backfilling.
8. After initial planting operations. (One tree with each type of
specified staking shall be approved prior to planting of trees.)
9. After -placement of drainage course, but prior to placement of
lightweight soil mix.
C. Pre -Maintenance Review:
1. At the completion of landscape planting operations and prior to the
beginning of the formal maintenance period, the Pre -Maintenance
Review shall be held.
2. Request on-site review of Landscape Architect five working days
prior to the completion of work in order that a mutually agreeable
time for review may be arranged.
3. At the time of review, the areas under the Contract shall be free of
LANDSCAPING 02900 18
•
•
r�
L
�J
LANDSCAPING
weeds, dead leaves and trash, neatly cultivated and raked. Stakes,
guys and plant basins shall be in good order.
02900 -19
4. If, after the Pre -Maintenance Review, Landscape Architect is of the
opinion that the Work has been performed in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications, written notice of preliminary
acceptance will be given. This report will note any items which must
be corrected, and state the date of commencement and completion of
the formal maintenance period.
D. Final Review: Perform Final Review in accordance with Section 02970 -
Landscape Maintenance, at completion of 90 calendar day maintenance.
3.10 CLEANING:
A. Keep all areas of the Work clean, neat and orderly at all times during the
period of Contract. Clean construction areas at the end of each day.
3.11 PROTECTION:
A. Protect areas susceptible to traffic by erecting barricades immediately after
planting. Maintain protection as required by Section 02970.
END OF SECTION
•
LANDSCAPING 02900-20
•
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 03300 -. CONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A., Work included:. Furnish and. install cast -in-place concrete required for the project as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein. This Section also includes:
1. Concrete for work specified in Mechanical and Electrical Divisions unless
specifically included therein.
2. Grouting of structural steel setting plates and elevator sills (if required).
3. Grouting of bases and equipment not specified under other Sections.
4. -Coordination with other trades with regard to requirements for special bases,
sleeves, chases, inserts, finishes or provisions of any nature.
5. Curing of formed concrete surfaces.
6. Installation of anchor bolts, hangers, anchors, plates, inserts and miscellaneous
metal or other materials embedded in concrete and which are furnished by other
trades.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Concrete work beyond the building lines: See Sidewalks and Driveways.
2. Aggregate base for slabs on grade: See Earthwork.
3. Concrete Forms (including erection, stripping and removal).
4. Concrete Reinforcement.
5. Finish for concrete surfaces including patching and curing of concrete (except
curing of formed concrete): See Concrete Finishes.
1.2 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following references, codes and standards
are hereby made a part of this Section and concrete work shall conform to the applicable
requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing
contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.
A. 'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete", ACI 318-89.
B. California Building Code, 2001 Edition.
1.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL: Refer to quality Control Section for general requirements
governing testing and inspection.
A. Cement and Aggregates: Furnish to the Architect the following data:
1. Mill certificates from cement manufacturer certifying that cement meets
Specifications and is suitable for purpose intended.
•
CONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE 03300-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
2. Proof of aggregate's compatibility with cement to be used and certification that
aggregates meet Specifications. Owner reserves the right to have his testing •
agency perform any additional tests on cement and aggregates which may be
deemed advisable.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
A. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with ACI 306R-78, "Cold Weather Concreting".
B. Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with ACI 305-77, "Hot Weather Concreting".
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type U. Cement shall be of same brand, type and source
throughout Project.
B. Aggregates: ASTM C 33 from sources with proven history of successful use. Source
shall be constant unless 10 days' prior notice is given for approval after recheck of mix
design. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious
substances. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but that special tests or •
actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may
be used when acceptable to the Architect.
C. Water: Clean and potable, free from impurities detrimental to concrete.
D. Admixtures: The use of admixtures shall be confined to those admixtures listed below.
Admixtures containing chlorides are not permitted. Admixtures shall be batched in strict
accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Chemical Admixtures:
a. Water Reducing Admixture: W.R. Grace Co. "Daracem ML330",
Master Builders "Pozzolith 200N" or Sika Chemical Corp. "Plastocrete
161". Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494-86, Type A and shall
not contain more chloride ions than are present in the municipal drinking
water.
b. High -Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): W.R. Grace
Co. "WRDA-79" or approved equal. Admixture shall conform to ASTM
C 494, Type A and shall not contain more chloride ions than are present
in the municipal drinking water.
C. Air Entraining Agent:. Air -entraining admixture conforming with ASTM
C260 may be introduced into the mix. Air -entrainment shall not exceed
4 percent. Submit manufacturer's data to Architect for review.
CONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE 03300-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
x .
s
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
2. Certification: Written conformance to above requirements and the chloride ion
content of the admixture shall be submitted by the admixture manufacturer prior
to review of mix designs by the Architect.
E. Expansion Joint Fillers: ASTM K 994-71, asphaltic compound strips, 1/2" thick unless
otherwise noted, precut to proper size.
F. Non -Shrink Grout (Non -Metallic): Euclid Chemical Co. "Euco N -S", L&M "Crystex",
Upco "Upcon", U.S. Grout Corp. "Five Star", Master Builders "Masterflow 713", or
approved equal, nonmetallic, nonstaining, premixed grout having a compressive strength
at 28 days of not less than 6800 psi, non -shrink at all flow levels.
G. Curing Compounds (Formed Concrete): Conform to requirements of Concrete Finished
Section (for Clear Curing and Sealing Compound). .
2.2 MIXES:
A. Mix Designs:
1. Mix designs for concrete shall be Contractor -designed at his expense. Designs
shall be prepared by a qualified agency approved by the Architect and Structural
Engineer. Four (4) copies of mix designs shall be submitted for Architect's
• review at least 30 days prior to placing any concrete and shall indicate
completely, brands, types and quantities of admixtures included. If concrete is to
be placed by pumping, recommendations of ACI Committee 304 shall be
followed.
2. Mix designs shall be proportioned in accord with Section 4.3, "Proportioning on
the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of ACI 318-83. Submit
mix designs for each class of concrete for review.
B. Structural Drawings indicate minimum compressive strengths, slumps, maximum size
aggregates and minimum cement contents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING: Concrete shall be ready mixed as per ASTM C 94-86a. Equipment shall be adequate
for the purpose and kept in good mechanical condition at all times.
A. The rate of delivery, haul time, mixing time and hopper capacity shall be such that mixed
concrete delivered shall be placed in the forms within 90 minutes or 300 revolutions of
the drum from the time of introduction of cement and water to the mixer. Any
interruption in placing in excess of -90 minutes or 300 revolutions will be cause for
shutdown of the work for the day and the wasting of any remaining mixed concrete in
• hoppers or mixers.. In case such interruption occurs, the Contractor shall provide
CONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE 03300-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
construction joints where and as directed and cut concrete back to such line, cleaning
forms and reinforcing as herein specified. Delivery tickets shall show departure time
from plants. Revolution counters shall be set at "0" and shall commence to operate when
drum revolution begins after introduction of ingredients into the mixer.
B. No water shall be added to the mix after the initial introduction of mixing water for the
batch except when, on arrival at the job site, the slump of the concrete is less than that
specified. In this case, and only under the direction of the Special Inspector and with not
more than one application per load, additional water may be added from the truck system
to bring the slump within required limits. The drum or blades shall then be turned an
additional 30 revolutions or more until mix is uniform.
C. Mixers shall be equipped with an automatic device for recording number of revolutions
of drum or blades prior to completion of mixing operation.
D. Concrete shall be kept continuously agitated until discharged into the hopper at the job
site.
E. Contractor shall note that the appearance of unpainted exposed concrete surfaces
depends upon uniform color and texture within any one area and between adjacent areas
and he shall exercise strict batching and mixing controls to achieve this end.
3.2 PLACING:
A. Absorbent forms shall be thoroughly wetted before concrete is placed. Aggregate base
for slabs on grade shall be moist but not saturated when concrete is placed.
B. Placing of concrete shall be done immediately after mixing. No concrete shall be placed
or used after it has begun to set and no retempering will be allowed. The method used in
placing shall be such that concrete is conveyed to place and deposited without separation
of the ingredients. No concrete shall be placed with a free unconfined fall in excess of
six (6) feet. Concrete shall not be allowed to cascade through reinforcing steel in such
manner as to promote segregation. Do not support runways on reinforcing steel.
C. Splash or accumulations of hardened or partially hardened concrete shall be removed.
Contact faces of forms for exposed concrete shall be protected from splash during
placing of adjacent concrete. Concrete containing piping shall be placed in a manner
that will prevent damage to pipes.
D. Deposit concrete in approximate horizontal layers not exceeding 18" in thickness, unless
otherwise authorized. Placing of concrete shall be carried on in a continuous operation
without interruption until placing of course, section, panel or monolith is completed.
E. Distribution of concrete shall be even and continuous and no placement joints shall
show. Before a placement is started, make certain that adequate equipment, men, and
concrete will be available to place in cycles which will permit proper and thorough
integration of each layer of concrete. Upon stopping of a placement, the top surface
CONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE 03300-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
Gensler ` 1 , . , Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
shall be on a level. Points of deposit in walls. shall be so spaced that it will not be
• necessary for concrete to flow laterally more than 24 inches.
F. No concrete shall be placed for any element until reinforcing for same is fastened in
place nor until forms are complete. No concrete shall be placed before work that is to be
embedded has been set. Notify other crafts so they may deliver anchor, inserts, etc., or
other work to be embedded in ample time and also notify them when their assistance in
setting is required. Reinforcing or other materials that have been set in place shall not be
disturbed.
G. No pipes except electrical conduits 1-1/4" and less in diameter shall be embedded in
structural concrete. Before placing concrete, such pipes and large conduits shall be
sleeved providing 1/4" clearance (min.) all around. Sleeves for plumbing and
mechanical pipes shall be placed so as not to impair strength of concrete or interfere with
reinforcing bar placement. Multiple sleeve openings shall be placed no closer than three
times diameter of the larger sleeve. Reinforcing clearances to sleeves shall conform to
clearances specified for concrete surfaces. Sleeves and inserts will be provided and set
under other Sections of the work.
H. , Remove debris, mud and water from places to receive concrete.
I. Concrete splash and/or grout shall be removed from surfaces that will receive painter's
finish.
• J. Place no concrete in water unless written permission has been obtained from Structural
Engineer.
K. Notify Owner's Representative, Architect and Structural Engineer 48 hours minimum
prior to placing of any concrete.
3.3 VIBRATION AND CONSOLIDATION:
A. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by means of internal mechanical vibrators.
Such consolidation shall be produced as will be obtained by placing the vibrator directly
in concrete at 18" - 30" intervals for a period of approximately 5 to 15 seconds and
withdrawing slowly or as directed, depending on the consistency of concrete. One
vibrator will be required for each location where simultaneous placing takes place, to
ensure thorough vibrating of all sections. Provide sufficient spare vibrators on the job so
as to have them readily available in case any vibrator in use should suddenly cease to
function properly. Where spare vibrators are employed, provide additional spares.
_Provide smaller diameter vibrators for areas with congested reinforcing steel. Under no
condition shall vibrator be placed against reinforcing steel or attached to forms. Use no
vibrators to transport material.
& Vibrator shall be of the flexible immersion type having a frequency of not less than
8,000 rpm. Use and type of vibrator shall conform to ACI 309, "Recommended Practice
for Consolidation of Concrete".
•
iCONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE - —03300-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
C. Spading will not be permitted on exposed concrete surfaces.
D. Voids and rock pockets shall be eliminated. Voids and rock pockets in exposed concrete •
may subject that portion to rejection.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS:
A. Placement of construction joints and the manner in which they are provided for shall be
only as approved by Owner's Representative or as shown on the Drawings. Construction
joints shall be few as possible and will not be permitted simply to save forms. Submit
shop drawings of construction joints showing proposed locations and details. Submit to
Architect prior to forming or placing concrete.
3.5 CURING:
A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. In hot, dry and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss
before and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply
according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before
floating and troweling.
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after
placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 •
days.
C. Curing methods: Cure concrete by moist curing, by moisture -retaining cover curing, or
by combining these methods, as specified.
D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Use continuous water -fog spray.
3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate
cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide
coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4 -inch lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
E. Provide moisture -retaining cover curing as follows:
1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete,
placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches
and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears
during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
F. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surface, by applying the appropriate curing method.
•
CONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE 03300-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler : _ Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012, La Quinta, CA
1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture -
retaining cover, unless directed otherwise.
r
3.6 EQUIPMENT BASES: Verify sizes and shapes required by items specified elsewhere. Concrete
bases for special equipment shall be installed in strict accord with Drawing details and the
specifications and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer.
3.7 EXPANSION JOINT FILLERS: Place filler material so that top of surfaces is level and aligned
uniformly 1/4" below adjacent concrete surface.
3.8 GROUTING:
A. The setting of steel base plates is specified under Structural Steel Section. The grouting
of the steel base plates shall be performed as hereinafter specified and as a part of this
Section.
B. Grout used for the grouting of base plates shall be non-metallic, non -shrink grout mixed
and applied in strict accord with manufacturer's directions.
C. Grouting of bases shall be carefully done so as not to leave any voids between the base
plates and the concrete.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Refer to Quality Control Section for general requirements
governing testing and inspection.
A. Tests and inspections shall be performed by qualified individuals, engineering companies
or testing laboratories who shall perform those special inspections required by Sec. 306a
of the Uniform Building Code, those tests and inspections specified below and such
other tests and inspections as the Architect or Owner may require to establish the
acceptability of the work.
B. Testing and inspection services shall be retained by the Owner at his expense except that
when tests or inspections reveal failure of materials to meet contract requirements, costs
for subsequent tests and inspections will be deducted from the Contract Price. Excessive
inspection time required by Contractor's failure to provide sufficient workmen or to
properly pursue the progress of the work shall likewise be deducted from the Contract
Price.
C. Furnish material and handling for test cylinders and any other samples which testing
agency requires for analysis of concrete work.
D. Compression Tests: 4 compression test cylinders will be taken for each placement of
150 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each class of concrete placed each day. Make, cure and
store test cylinders as per ASTM C 31-87. One cylinder will be tested at 7 days for
• information; two at 28 days for acceptance; and one retained as a spare.
CONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE 03300-7
Copyright 2003 Gensler -
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
E. Slump Test: Slump tests will be performed as per ASTM C 143-78 (slump cone) 360-63
at time of taking test cylin�-.-
F. Testing agencies will supervise preparation and selection of samples taken at job site.
END OF SECTION 03300
CONCRETE, CAST -IN-PLACE 03300-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
t
•
•
•
•
r�
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL -
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Work Included: Provisions of structural steel. Work Includes, but is not necessarily limited to
following:
1. All structural steel framing and all other steel as shown on the drawings and herein
specified.
2. Anchor bolts, bearing plates, and leveling plates and/or shim plates.
3. Furnishing of all anchor bolts and templates for structural steel items and responsibility
for their correct locations.
1.2 INCORPORATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division Number 1 apply
to all work in this section.
B. Published specifications, standards, tests or recommended methods of trade, industry or
governmental organizations apply to work of this section where cited by abbreviations noted
below.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
2. American institute of Steel Construction's "Manual of Steel Construction", Eighth
Editions (AISC).
a. "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings" (AISC).
b. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" (AISC).
C. "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" (AISC).
3. American Welding Society's (AWS): Structural Welding Code (AWS D1.1-82).
4. American National Standards institute's "Plain Washer" (ANSI B18.22.1 - 1967 (R1975)
and Beveled Washers (ANSI 18.23.11 - 1967 (R1975).
5. Steel Structures Painting Council's "Painting Manual" (SSPC).
6. California Building Code, 2001 Edition.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Fabricator's Qualifications: Fabricator shall have had not less than five years experience in
fabrication of structural steel and be able to furnish evidence of his ability, facilities, proficiency
of his personnel and completed projects of this size.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America: Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
B. Steel Erector's Qualifications: Erector shall have had not less than five years experience in
erection of structural steel and be able to furnish evidence of his ability, facilities, proficiency of •
his personnel and completed project of this size.
C. Welding Qualifications: Welding procedures, welders, welding operations and tackers shall be
qualified in accordance with AWS Building Code. All welders shall be pre -qualified.
1. Welders who have not performed welding for period of three or more months shall be
requalified.
2. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before performing
further welding.
3. The Contractor shall pay costs of certifying qualifications.
D. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Straightness of Structural Members: Conform with Section 1.23.8.1 of AISC.
2. Erection Tolerances: Conform to additional requirements of AISC, Section 7 (h).
E. Owner's Testing Agency: Test and inspections will be performed by the Owner's Testing
Agency. The cost of testing and inspection of structural steel shall be paid for by the Owner
except as follows.
1. It is assumed that all fabrication will take place in one shop location only. All additional
inspection costs resulting from fabrication at more than one shop location will be back -
charged to the Contractor. •
2. In case of controversy about tensile properties and bend test, costs of retest of plain
materials shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes,
threaded fasteners, bolts and welds in accordance with AWS welding symbols, in accordance
with AISC standards.
B. Erection Procedure: Submit descriptive data to illustrate structural steel erection procedure,
including location of equipment, sequence of erection and temporary staging and bracing.
Procedure must be approved by Owner prior to erection.
C. Welding:
1. Certification of welder's qualifications.
2. Welding Procedure: Submit welding schedule and descriptive data to illustrate welding
procedures to be performed.
3. Field Welding Equipment: Field welding equipment shall be adequate type, voltage and
amperage to make proper welds.
D. Manufacturer's Proofs of Compliance for Materials:
Certification that materials meet requirements specified. •
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
r,
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
2. Certified reports of tensile properties and bend test.
• E. Samples: Provide as requested by the Owner's Testing Agency.
1.5. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Unload materials carefully; do not set onto ground
B. Store structural steel members, whether on or off site, above ground on platforms, skids or other
support; store other materials in weathertight, dry place until time of use. .
•
•
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Provide the Owner's.Testing Agency with free access to places whether on or off the job site
where materials are stored or fabricated, to places where equipment is stored or serviced, and to
job site during time of laying out, erection or job -site fabrications.
B. Sequencing, Scheduling:
1. Notify the Owner in sufficient time prior to shop or field fabrication or erection to permit
testing and inspection without delaying work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A36, ASTM A572 (grade 50), ASTM A992.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500.
C. Standard Threaded Fasteners:
1. Plain Washers: ANSI B 27.2.
2. Beveled Washers: ANSI B 27.4.
D. High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325 -F with threads excluded from shear plane,
or ASTM A325 -X with threads excluded from shear plane as indicated on drawings.
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 or A354 Gr. Bd as indicated on drawings.
F. Filler Metals for Welding: AWS A5.1 or A5.5 E70XX electrodes.
G. Shear Studs: "Nelson" shear connectors. Conform to ASTM A-108.
H. Modified Alkyd Rust -Inhibitive Primer: FS TT -P -86e, Type I. Same as Tnemec Co., Inc.'s "10-
99"; or approved equal.
r STRUCTURAL STEEL
Copyright 2003 Gensler
05120-3
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America: Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General Requirements: •
1. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC, and requirements of regulatory
agencies.
2. Fabricate preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible.
3. Do shearing, flame cutting and chipping carefully and accurately.
4. Coordinate as required for attachment of other work to structural steel.
5. Conform to "Structural Steel" notes.
B. Connections:
1. Connections shall be bolted or welded as indicated.
2. Shop connections not otherwise shown shall be welded.
3. Eccentric connections are not permitted unless shown in detail on approved shop
drawings.
4. Do not locate combination of welds or bolts on same side of connections.
C. Bolted Connections:
1. Punch or drill holes 1/16 -inch larger than bolt size.
2. Do not drift to match unfair holes; where enlarging is required, ream unfair holes, but
only up to next larger bolt size, and use larger bolts. Where unfairness exceeds
maximum, weld hole in base material solid and drill hole of proper size. Misaligned
holes will subject members to rejection. Use of gas cutting torch is not permitted.
3. Bolting: See Part 3, Execution, Section 3.3 D.
D. Welded Construction:
1. Weld in accordance with AISC, AWS D1.1-82, and AISC specification.
2. In addition to specific requirements of Drawings, details of all welded joints shall
comply with all requirements for joints which are accepted without qualification tests
under the AWS Code.
3. Grind exposed welds reasonably smooth.
E. Column Bases: Mill and attach to columns.
F. Column Splice and Splice in Compression Member: Mill contact ends to assure full bearing.
Develop for all loads.
G. Bearing Plates: Provide for attached installation resting on footings, piers and walls.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Shop Painting of Steel Surfaces:
1. Remove loose mill scale and rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter. •
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012. La Quinta, CA
2. • Treat with rust remover and neutralizer in strict accordance with manufacturer's
• instructions.
3. Apply one coat of primer except where steel will be encased in concrete from initial two
.inches, or where beams are to be fireproofed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 • INSPECTION
A. Examine foundations to support construction and verify the following:
1. Correct location and elevation of bearings and anchor bolts.
2. Absence of other conditions to adversely affect erection of steel.
B. Do not begin erection before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and Erector is fully
satisfied for correctness.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Supervise setting of anchor bolts and other embedded items required for erection of structural
steel. Be responsible for correct bearing of steel and correct location of anchor bolts. Furnish all
necessary shim plates, etc, for levelness.
3.3 ERECTION
A. General Requirements:
1. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC.
2. Insure steel is plumb, level and in accurate alignment before making final connections.
3. Where erection requires performing work of fabrication on site, conform to applicable
standards of Fabrication Article.
4. Field corrections of major members will not be permitted without the Engineer's prior
approval
5. Conform to "Structural Steel" notes.
B. Column Bases and Bearing Plates:
1. Attached Column Bases and Bearing Plates: Align with wedges or shims.
2. Loose Column Bases and Bearing Plates: Where too heavy to be placed without derrick
or crane, set, wedge and shim.
3. Grouting: Grout in accordance with requirements of Concrete, Cast -In -Place Section.
(Not included in this section.)
C. Field Assembly:
1. Clean bearing surfaces and surface to be in permanent contact before assembling
members.
-STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120=5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
2. Accurately assemble frames to lines and elevations indicated, within erection tolerances
noted. •
3. Insure assembly is plumb, level and aligned before final connecting.
4. Do not fasten splices of compression members before abutting surfaces have been
brought completely into contact.
D. Bolting:
1. As erection progresses, bolt up work to take care of all dead loads, construction live
loads, lateral and wind forces and erection stresses.
2. Unless otherwise noted, erection bolts used in welded construction may be either
tightened securely and left in place or removed and the holes filled with plug welds.
3. High Strength Bolting:
a. Shall be performed in accordance with Specifications for Structural Joints using
ASTM A-325 or A-490 Bolts by Research Council of Riveted and Bolted Joints.
b. Contact surfaces shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or other coatings.
C. Tighten all nuts using (1) properly calibrated wrenches, (2) by the "Turn -of -Nut"
method, or (3) by the use of a Direct Tension Indicator. Minimum bolt tension
as per AISC3 for each bolt size used. Check wrenches for accuracy of
calibration at least once each day.
d. When bolts have been completely tightened, mark with identifying symbol.
E. Temporary Bracing: Introduce wherever necessary to provide for all loads to which structure is
subjected including erection equipment and its operation. Leave in place until no longer required
for safety. Make proper provisions for construction loads, piles of materials, equipment, etc.,
carried by structural frame during erection. Contractor shall be solely responsible for frame
during erection.
3.4 CLEANUP
A. After erection thoroughly clean surface of foreign or deleterious matter such as dirt, mud, oil or
grease that would impair bonding of fireproofing or concrete.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner's Testing Agency will test and inspect in accordance with the AISC requirements and
as required, and as follows:
1. Bolting: Check bolt tightness on not less than ten percent of bolts selected at random in
each high strength bolt connection with a minimum of two bolts per connection.
Inspection procedure will be as described in the "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted
Structural Joints.
2. Welding: Inspect full partial groove penetration welded connection of column to
column, column to girder, or beam to girder by ultrasonic or other approved non-
destructive tests.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
a. Ultrasonic testing will be performed by a specially trained, qualified technician,
who will operate the equipment, examine welds and maintain a record of welds
examined, defects found and disposition of each defect. Defective welds shall
be repaired and the cost of retesting of defective welds shall be borne by the
Contractor.
b. Initially, welds requiring ultrasonic testing will be tested at the rate of 100
percent in order to establish qualifications of each individual welder. If
rejectable defects occur in less than five percent of the welds tested, the
frequency of testing may be reduced to 25 percent. If the rate of rejectable
defect increases to five percent or more, 100 percent testing will be reestablished
until the rate is reduced to less than five percent. Percentage will be calculated
for each welder independently.
C. When ultrasonic indications arising from the weld root can be interpreted as
either a weld defect or the backing strip, the backing strip shall be removed at the
expense of the Contractor, and if no root defect is visible, weld shall be retested.
If no defect is indicated on this retest and no significant amount of the base and
weld metal have been removed, the joint need no further repair or welding. If a
defect is indicated, it shall be repaired by the Contractor at no expense to the
Owner.
d: - - Questionable root indications that prove not to be defects will not count against
the welder to increase test rate.
e: Ultrasonic instrumentation will be calibrated by technician to evaluate the
quality of the welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Appendix C.
f. Other methods of inspection, for example, x-rays, gamma ray, magnetic particle,
• or dye penetrant, may be used on welds if deemed necessary by the inspection
agency with the cooperation of the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall:
1. Make no extra charge for any handling of steel required for complete four-sided
inspections of members at Engineer's request. It is not anticipated that complete four-
sided inspection of all members will be undertaken. Such inspection will be necessary in
case of dispute or uncertainty regarding adherence to Drawings and Specifications.
2. Repair defective welds or flaws, lamellar tearing, and replace defective studs.
3. Pay for retesting of repaired defective welds flaws and studs.
4. Cooperate to the fullest extent to accommodate inspection agency personnel with the on
site testing,and inspection procedures. _
5. Assume full responsibility and pay for all corrective work.
END OF SECTION 05120
.STRUCTURAL STEEL
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Shop Drawings and Templates: Submit shop drawings detailing the fabrication and erection of
each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal
fabrications and their connections. Submit templates for layout of each metal fabrication.
Show anchorage and accessory items.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar
to those indicated for this Project for a minimum of 5 years, with a record of successful in-
service performance, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without
causing delay in the work.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel."
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.4 STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Store metal fabrications in a dry, well -ventilated, weathertight place. Deliver and handle so as
to prevent any type of damage to the fabricated work.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond
to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
05500-1
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, •
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500, or hot formed steel
tubing complying with ASTM A 501.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40) minimum, unless otherwise indicated
or required to satisfy the performance requirements; finish as follows:
1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Interior Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal
modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT -P-664; selected for
good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems
indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite
prolonged exposure.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior •
walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.01.2. La Quinta, CA
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
• Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.,
D. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3 (ASME B 18.6.7M).
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1 (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
F. _ Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B 18.6.1.
G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B 18.22.1 (ASME B 18.22M).
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B 18.2 1.1 (ASME B 18.21.2M).
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Interior Anchors: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material for Exterior Fasteners: Alloy Group .1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B-588, tumble -wing type, class and style as needed.
r
2.5 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically. recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications. .
2.6 CONCRETE FILL
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Composed of ASTM C150 Type I Portland cement, ASTM
C33 sand and coarse aggregates and potable water to produce a low slump* mix suitable for
placement. Grade coarse aggregate from 1/8" with at least 95 % passing a 3/8" sieve and not
more than 10% passing a No. 8 sieve. Fill shall be proportioned to provide a minimum 28 -day
compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).
2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
• 1. Welded connections may be used where bolted connections are shown.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously along entire line of contact to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices and fasteners to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to
support indicated loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
H. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
I. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Make up threaded
connections tight so that threads are entirely concealed.
K. Hot dip galvanize all exterior ferrous metal fabrications embedded in concrete. Hot dip
galvanize all other items where specified or shown.
1. Exterior ferrous metal fabrications are defined as those items which are indicated to be
installed in areas exposed to conditions which are not controlled by the building heating
and cooling systems.
2. Interior ferrous metal fabrications are defined as those items which are indicated to be
installed in areas exposed to conditions which are controlled by the building heating and
cooling systems.
2.8 STEEL LADDER
A. General: Fabricate ladder for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and
anchorages as indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055004
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
Gensler : Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012. La Quinta, CA
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
• B. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8 -by -2 -1/2 -inch, (10 -by -64 -mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges,
spaced 16 inches (406 mm) apart.
C. Bar Rungs: 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm-) diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches (300 nun) o.c.
D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
E. Support ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or
bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3.
F. Prime paint ladder.
2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry construction. Drill
plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize exterior plates after fabrication; prime paint interior plates after fabrication.
2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS.
A. Fabricate loose structural -steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
• openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one -twelfth of clear
span, but not less than 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. Prime paint loose steel lintels located in
interior walls.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work
and which are not a part of the structural framework, including but not limited to framing and
supports for overhead lobby door frames, and tube framing for partial height walls, mechanical
and electrical equipment.
B. Fabricate units from structural -steel shapes, plates, and bars 'of welded construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to
receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports at exterior locations; prime paint miscellaneous
framing and supports at interior locations.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural -steel shapes, plates, and bars of •
profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and
use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from each end, 6 inches (150 mm) from
corners, and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim; prime paint interior miscellaneous steel trim.
2.13 PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8 -inch- (10 -mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete. Drill
baseplates at all four corners for 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) anchor bolts.
C. Galvanize bollards after fabrication.
2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for •
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces by removing oil, grease,
and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC -SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning," followed with the
SSPC surface -preparation specifications listed below and environmental exposure conditions of
installed metal fabrications. Surface preparation shall be done after fabrication and immediately
prior to shop painting. Apply shop coat of paint within 4 hours after cleaning and before rust
bloom occurs.
1. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply a minimum of one coat of shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except
those with galvanized finishes and those to be field welded, and those to be embedded in
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler , ; . _ •-,, ; Bank of America : Point Happy
,07.2022.012, La Quinta, CA
concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated.. Comply with SSPC-
• PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
1. - Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. .
2. Dry Film Thickness of Primer: 2.5 to 3.0 mils, dry film thickness. Apply paint
thoroughly and evenly to dry surfaces, free from holidays and pinholes, in accordance
with manufacturers directions. _.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 _ INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete
and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
Drill holes for bolts to the exact diameter of the bolt. Provide screws threaded full length to the
screw head.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
0C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into masonry,
or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
3.2 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to
surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and -plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.3 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Support and brace bollards in position in
footing excavations until concrete has been placed and cured.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-7
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
05500/2-01/ttt
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
Gensler-
Bank of America: Point Happy
.07.2022.012.:
La Quinta, CA
• SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
w
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
' A. Work Included: Furnish and install'Rough Carpentry required for the project as shown
on the Drawings and specified herein. This Section also includes:
1.
Structural floor, wall, and roof framing.
2.
Built-up structural beams and columns.
3.
Floor, wall and roof plywood sheathing.
4.
Furring for wall finishes.
5.
Rough hardware.
6.
Blocking for roofing systems and related metal flashings.
7.
Preservative treatment.
8.
Concealed wood blocking and backing for support of accessories, wall cabinets,
finish hardware.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
3. Section 06181 - Glue Laminated Structural Units.
4. Section 06190 - Prefabricated Wood Trusses.
1.2 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following references, codes and standards
are hereby made a part of this Section and rough carpentry work shall conform to the applicable
requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing
contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.
A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards.
B. APA (American Plywood Association) - Guide to Plywood Grades.
C. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
D. ASTM D3498 - Adhesives for Field -Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor
Systems.
E. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) - Book of Standards.
F. - AWPB (American Wood Preservers Bureau) - Book of Standards.
• G. DFPA (Douglas Fir Plywood Association)
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
H. FS FF -S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and nail, Drive Screw (Devices,
Anchoring, Masonry).
I. FS TT -W-571 - Wood Preservation - Treating Practices.
J. NLMA (National Lumber Manufacturers Association) - National Design Specification
for Stress -Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings.
K. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection bureau) - Standard Grading Rules 16, 1
September 1970 and Revised 1984.
L. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association) - Western Lumber Grading Rules 81, 1
June 1981.
M. CBC - California Building Code, 2001 Edition.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature describing products.
C. Samples: Only as requested by the Architect.
D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Submit certificates of compliance with standards noted.
E. Submit design calculations, shop drawings and model code evaluation reports for
engineered wood products.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to
edges, ends, and surfaces.
C. Deliver and store packaged products in original containers or bundles with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of use.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
C7
•
Gensler _ Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012, La Quinta, CA
D. Keep materials dry. Where necessary, stack materials off ground on level flat forms,
• fully protected from weather.
•
E. Protect 'kiln -dried' and 'S -Dry' materials from moisture. Separate from contact with soil
or earth.
PART 2. - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS:
A. Lumber shall be dressed, S4S, 15 percent maximum moisture content for 2 -inch
thickness or less, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. Refer to Drawings for
additional requirements.
2.2 PLYWOOD MATERIALS:
A. Refer to Drawings for schedule.
2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS:
A. Engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with
allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those
indicated.. Manufacturer's published values shall be demonstrated by comprehensive
testing.
B. Wood I -Joist: I -shaped members with either sawn lumber flanges or laminated veneer
lumber flanges and either plywood or oriented strand board webs.
1. Extreme fiber stress in bending: 2100 psi for LVL flange material.
2. Modulus of elasticity: 2,000,000 psi (13 800 MPa).
3. National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-200, or equal.
4. Each joist shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist series, code report
number, manufacturer's name, plant number, and the independent inspection
agency's logo.
5. Submit structural calculations sealed by a registered Engineer.
C. Wood / Steel Open -Web Truss: Open web truss members with either sawn lumber
flanges or laminated veneer lumber flanges and steel webs.
1. National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-148, or equal.
2. Each truss shall be identified by a stamp indicating the truss series, code report
number, manufacturer's name, plant number, and the independent inspection
agency's logo.
3. Submit structural calculations sealed by a registered Engineer.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
2.3 ACCESSORIES: •
A. Rough Hardware: Exterior hardware nails and fasteners shall be hot -dipped galvanized,
plain finish for interior locations, size and type to suit application. Nails to be common
nails or ICBO approved equivalent, unless authorized otherwise in writing.
B. Bolts: Hexagonal heads, Grade A conforming to ASTM A307; galvanized for exterior,
exposed applications only.
C. Lag Screws and Lag Bolts: Meet requirements of National Design Specifications for
Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings.
D. Washers: Washers for bearing against wood shall be provided under all bolt heads, lag
screw heads, and nuts. Malleable iron or steel plate having an area equal to 16 times the
area of bolt or lag screw. Steel washers shall have a thickness not less than 1/10 the
length of the washer's longest side. Malleable iron washers shall have a thickness not
less than 1/2 the bolt or lag screw diameter and having a bearing surface for the nut or
head equal in diameter and having a bearing surface for the nut or head equal in diameter
to not less than the long diameter of the nut or head.
E. Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins with special corrosive -resistant plating or
coating. Pins shall have guide washers to accurately control penetration, maximum 3/4
inch. Fastening shall be accomplished by low-velocity piston -driven powder -actuated
tool. Pins and tool shall be same as manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems; Impex •
Tool corporation; or equal product substituted under provisions of Section 01630.
F. Expansion Bolts: FS FF -S-325, Group II, Type 4, size as noted. Same as McCulloch
Industries "Kwik -Bolt Concrete Anchors"; Wej-It Expansion Products, Inc.'s "Wej-It
Concrete Anchors," or approved equal.
G. Fabricated Sheet Metal Timber Framing Connectors: Fabricate from hot -dipped
galvanized steel. Connectors shall be at least 20 gauge material (1/8 inch plate materials
where welded), unless otherwise noted, punched for nailing. Nails and Nailing shall
conform to the manufacturer's instructions with a nail provided for each punched hole.
Types as noted on the drawings. Same as Simpson Co.; KC metal Products; or equal
product substituted under provisions of Section 01630.
H. Glue: Conforming to ASTM D3498 and APA Performance Specification AFG-01.
2.4 WOOD TREATMENT:
A. Materials:
1. Wood Preservative, Pressure Treatment: FS -TT -W-571, AWPA treatment C2
and C9 and C23, using pentachlorophenol in light oil.
2. Wood Preservative, Surface Application: Copper green, manufactured by
Willard Products. •
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
[7
Gensler -
07.2022.012,
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
B. Shop Treatment of Wood Materials:
1. Provide pressure treatment for lumber other than foundation grade redwood
located within 1-1/2 inches of concrete, in contact with bituminous roofing,
waterproofing, and related metal flashings, and where noted on Drawings.
2. Lumber: Treat in accordance with AWPB LP -3.
3. Plywood: Treat in accordance with AWPB LP -3.
PART 3. -EXECUTION
3.1 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS:
A. Apply non -pressure wood preservative to lumber and plywood embedded in and placed
against concrete.
3.2 FRAMING:
A. Erect wood framing members level and plumb..
B. Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side up.
C. Construct framing members full length without splices.
D. Double members at openings over one sq.ft.- Space short studs over and under opening to
stud spacing.
E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings. Frame rigidly into joists.
F. Make bearings full and finish bearing surfaces to give sure and even support.
G... Do not notch, bore, or cut members for pipes, vents, conduits or other reasons except as
shown on the Drawings or specifically authorized by the Architect.
H. Construct double joists under discontinuous walls.
I. Coordinate delivery of glue laminated structural units and plywood web joists.
J. Layout embedded items for entire project.
K. Shim, strip and furr as necessary to achieve described tolerances.
3.3 BRIDGING:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Copyright 2003 Gensler
-06100=5
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Install solid blocking between joists at points of support and wherever sheathing or
flooring is discontinuous. •
B. Blocking may be omitted where joists rests on ribbons and are -nailed to studs and where
joists are supported on metal hangers.
3.4 SHEATHING:
A. Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered. Secure
sheet edges over firm bearing.
B. Secure wall sheathing vertically parallel to wall studs, with ends staggered, over solid
blocking. Secure sheet edges over firm bearing.
C. Secure subfloor and flat roof sheathing perpendicular to floor framing with end joints
staggered. Secure sheet edges over firm bearing. Attach sheathing with subfloor glue
and nail as shown.
D. Nail panel edges to framing members or blocking at least 1-1/2 inches thick. Space nails
at panel edges as indicated on drawings, or if not shown, in accordance with UBC
requirements. Place nails not less than 3/8 inches from panel edges and drive solidly'into
the support.
3.5 FASTENING: ,
A. In general, provide nail penetration into the piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2
the length of the nail or spike provided; however, 16d nails may be used to connect two
pieces of 2 inch (nominal) thickness.
B. In diaphragms, the minimum penetration shall be 1-1/2 inches for 8d nails and 1-5/8
inches for 10d nails.
C. Perform nailing without splitting wood, preboring as required; replace split members.
D. Drill bolt holes 1/16 inches larger in diameter than the bolts being used; drill straight and
true from one side only.
E. Bolt threads must not bear on wood; use washers under head and nut where bolts bear on
wood; use washers under nuts.
F. Lag screw anchorage embedment in piece lagged to shall not be less than 0.6 times lag
screw length nor less than 8 times lag screw diameter.
G. Prebore holes for lag screws same diameter as root of thread; enlarge holes to shank
diameter for length of shank.
H. Do not drive lag screws. •
ROUGH CARPENTRY = 06100-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
Gensler _ Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012. La Quinta, CA
3.6 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY:
A. Install miscellaneous blocking, furring, cants, nailing strips, framing and sheathing.
B. Install members true, plumb, and level. Secure in place.
C. Space miscellaneous framing and furring at 16 inches o.c.
D. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
3.7 TOLERANCES:
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position.
B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum. .
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-
7
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
• SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
L1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes miscellaneous carpentry.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Bank of America: Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1. Submit data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
2. Submit data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664.
3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, submit statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
4. Submit copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: Submit research/evaluation reports that are acceptable to the
authorities having jurisdiction and that show compliance with building code in effect for
preservative -treated wood and fire -retardant -treated wood.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire
retardant treated product from one source for both treatment and fire retardant formulation.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
• 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
Copyright 2003 Gensler
06105-1
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La-Quinta, CA
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. •
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S.
4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Panels (Plywood):
1. Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1.
2. Factory mark panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade
requirements.
2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Pressure treat above ground items with waterbome
preservatives to comply with AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood) for retention,
penetration, and other requirements applicable to the species, product, treatment and condition
of use specified and indicated.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Chromated copper arsenate (CCA). is
B. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and
15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with
requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of the SPIB.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in
connection with roofing and flashing.
2. Wood blocking and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Treatment Level: Using CCA chemicals for Southern Pine the required preservative
retention shall be 0.40 lbs./cubic foot.
E. Complete fabrication of items to be treated prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after
treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or
plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply
with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify
fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL or another testing and Is
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY - ..06105-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
Gensler * t-. -. , .
07.2022.012,
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. .The selected treatment shall
produce the following properties under conditions present after installation:
1. No reduction takes place in bending strength, stiffness and fastener holding capacities
below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation that are based on tests
by a qualified independent testing laboratory of treated wood products identical to those
indicated for this Project under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating
installed conditions.
2. No other form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to
manufacture and treatment. ,
3. Metal fasteners do not corrode.
B. Use:
1. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations where indicated.
2. Interior Type (Typical): Type A High Temperature (HT).
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop
equipment bases, support curbs, blocking, cants, and nailers.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimensional lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes
shown.
C. For items of dimension lumber size, provide SPIB No. 2 or better grade lumber with 19 percent
maximum moisture content.
2.5 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment, Mirror, Backing Panels: APA Exposure 1, C -D Plugged,
fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
thick.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
I. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails: FS FF -N-105.
C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws:.ASME B 18.6.1.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
Copyright 2003 Gensler
06105-3
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); •
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,
blocking, and similar supports for attaching other construction. •
C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated
lumber.
D. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated and
according to applicable codes and recognized standards.
E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Install members without splitting wood; predrill
when required.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attachment of adjacent work. Form to shapes
indicated or required and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached to it.
Coordinate location of adjacent work.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces.
3.3 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," and local utility company •
requirements, if any, for plywood backing panel applications indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
L
Gensler r _ Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1.. Plywood Backing 'Panels; Secure to wall using proper fastening devices for substrates
encountered spaced 12" o.c. maximum at perimeter t/z" from corners and three rows of 3
fasteners each in the backing panel field. Countersink fasteners flush with plywood
surface. Butt adjacent panels without lapping.
END OF SECTION 06105
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
Copyright 2003 Gensler
06105-5
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
• SECTION 06181 - GLUED -LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
•
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included: Furnish and install Glued Laminated wood beams required for this
projects as shown on drawings and specified herein.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
2. Section 06190 - Prefabricated Wood Trusses.
1.2PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION:
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Provision of steel plates, beam seats, ties, clip
angles, and bolts.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction
1. AITC 117 - Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of
Softwood Species - Design, 1984 Edition.
2. AITC A190.1 - Structural Glued Laminated Timber.
B. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards.
C. ASTM D2559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under
Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions.
D. CBC - California Building Code, 2001 Edition.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units
with three years minimum experience, and certified by the AITC, in accordance with
ANSI A190.1, to apply AITC "Quality Inspected" mark.
1. Place AITC mark on timber surfaces that will not be exposed to view.
GLUED -LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06181-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
B. Glue Laminated Timber Members: Conform to UBC Standards Nos. 25-10. 25-11 and
AITC 117.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Conform to UBC.
1.6 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
B. Certificates: AITC certificate of conformance with gluing procedures.
C. Submit product data including specifications and installation instructions.
D. Submit shop drawings showing full dimensions of each member and layout of entire
structural system. Show large scale details of connections, connectors, and other
accessories.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
C. Protect members in accordance with AITC requirements for moisture resistant bundle
wrapped material.
D. Leave wrapping in place until finishing occurs.
1.8 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate work with the various sections of specifications to assure efficient and
orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for
accommodating items installed later.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Lumber: Douglas fir larch lumber conforming to AITC A190.1. Grade combination 24F
for glue laminated beams.
GLUED -LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06181-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Cl
•
Cl
•
t
•
Gensler ; T :,, Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
B. Lamination Combinations: Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, conform to AITC
117 requirements.
C. Adhesive: ASTM D2559 for wet condition of service.
D. Anchorage hardware and Fastenings: Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
E. Finish: See Structural Drawings for finish appearance grades.
2.2 FABRICATION:
A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with ATTC A190.1, industrial
grade.
B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
C. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.
D. Fabricate member with camber built in, where shown on drawings.
E. Do not splice or join members in locations other than that indicated, without written
authorization from the Architect.
F. After end trimming, seal in accordance with ATTC requirements. Seal drilled out areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Verify that supports are ready to receive beams.
B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. Do not install until
improper conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Coordinate placement of support items.
3.3 . INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions.
GLUED -LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
06181-3
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America: Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
B. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently
secured. •
C. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or any other unauthorized
modification.
3.4 TOLERANCES:
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION 06181
•
GLUED -LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06181-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
Gensler. ' , . . .. ,
07.2022.012
SECTION 06190 - PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 -GENERAL
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Provide prefabricated wood trusses for roof framing,'including bridging,
bracing, and anchorage.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Metal Fabrications are specified in Section 05500.
2. Rough Carpentry is specified in Section 06100.
1.2 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS: The following references, codes and standards
are hereby made a part of this Section and prefabricated wood truss work shall conform to the
applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings.
Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code
requirements.
A. ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards.
B. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip.
C. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Sheet Steel, Zinc -Coasted (Galvanized) by the Hot -dip Process,
Physical (Structural) Quality.
D. AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association.
E. FS TT -W-571 - Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
F. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
G. SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association.
H. TPI - Truss Plate Institute
1. Quality Control Manual (QCM-77).
2. Design Specifications for Light Metal Prefabricated Wood Trusses (TPI).
I. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
J. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard Grading Rules No. 16 for
West Coast Lumber.
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06190=1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
K. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. •
L. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction.
M. CBC - California Building Code, 2001 Edition.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. All roof trusses shall be designed and constructed in accordance with AITC, TPI, and
IBC requirements, and shall be designed for all dead plus live or lateral loads and other
criteria as shown on the drawings.
B. Design trusses under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in
structural framing design of trusses registered in the State of Arizona.
C. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
D. Truss Plates: In accordance with Truss Plate Institute. All plates 3 inches in width and
wider and at least 25% of plates less than 3 inches in width shall be individually marked
with the name or symbol of the manufacturer.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Conform to IBC for loads, seismic zoning, and other governing load criteria.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit shop drawings and product data, indicating test reports documenting allowable
connector plate loads.
B. Submit design drawings and calculations stamped and signed by a registered Engineer in
the State of Arizona. Indicate framing system, sizes, and spacing of trusses and truss
members, species used, loads, cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing,
framed openings and connection details.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Transport and store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends.
B. Protect trusses from moisture, warpage, and distortion during transit and when stored.
Prevent damage to edges, ends, and bearing surfaces. Such damage shall be sufficient
cause to reject trusses.
C. Deliver to top plate line of each building, coordinate with Section 06100.
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06190-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
Gensler ;. ; , Bank of America: Point:Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
•PART 2. -PRODUCTS .
•
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: WCLIB. Use Douglas Fir or kiln -dried hem/fir only. Lumber
shall bear grade stamp of governing grading bureau. Moisture content shall be 19
percent or less at time of delivery to site.
B. Steel Connector Plates: Shall be manufactured in accordance with QCM-77
recommendations.
1. Thickness: Not less than 0.036 inches (coated thickness), minus 0.000 inch
tolerance (20 gauge). '
2 Meet or exceed ASTM A446, Grade A, and ASTM A525, Coating Designation
G60, or alternately meet or exceed ASTM A591, Coating Class C, with
minimum structural quality equivalent to ASTM A446, Grade A.
3. Minimum steel mechanical requirements shall include:
a. .Yield point: Fy - 33,000 psi.
b. Ultimate Strength: ,Fu - 45,000 psi.
4. Plates shall be manufactured with teeth, prongs, holes, or plugs, uniformly
spaced and formed.
5. - On connection plates without integral teeth, there shall be provided some means,
such as holes, dimples, bosses or marked pattern, to indicate the location of any
separately applied nails or fasteners. Blank plates without any type of indicated
minimum spacing for nails or fasteners will not be acceptable.
C. Fasteners: Galvanized for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations; plain
finish elsewhere; size and type to suit condition. FS -FF -N -105B, common wire,
galvanized.
2.2 - FABRICATION:
A.. Manufacture trusses in a permanent facility staffed by skilled workers.,
B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
C. Cut members accurately to length to achieve tight joint connections.
D. Connect truss members using metal connector plates.
E. Jig trusses during fabrication to assure accurate configuration. Press connectors into
lumber, both sides of joint simultaneously.
F. Build camber into truss.
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES ._06190-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
G. Coordinate with work of other sections as necessary for proper construction.
H. Do not begin fabrication of trusses until review of Submittals is complete. •
I. For ease of recognition, each type of truss shall have its designation marked on the side
of the truss. Designation shall match truss shop drawing layout.
PART 3. - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses. Do not load trusses until
shear walls are nailed, braced, and ready to receive trusses.
B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. Do not install until
improper conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Coordinate placement of bearing and support items. •
3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, at a maximum spacing of
24 inches on center, or as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Place trusses true to line and level.
C. Provide temporary bracing to hold trusses in place until permanently secured.
D. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in
correct position before inducing loads.
E. Do not field -cut trusses, or remove truss members.
F. Place headers and supports to frame openings required.
G. Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Section 06100.
H. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section.
I. Provide lifting apparatus, slings, or other equipment for erection of trusses. Verify that
lift point locations and erection loads do not over -stress members in bending or shear. •
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06190-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler , . '..,,. Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012. La Quinta, CA
3.4 TOLERANCES:
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION 06190
�a
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06190=5
Copyright 2003 Gensler ,
•
•
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs -on -grade.
2: Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill).
3. Concealed building insulation.
4. Vapor retarders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
C. Research/evaluation reports.
1..3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84
for surface -burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards and, for preformed units, in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths].
B. Extruded -Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m)
and fabricated with one side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels.
C. Glass -Fiber Board Insulation:
1. Foil -Faced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or
ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III; faced on one side with foil -scrim -kraft vapor retarder;
BUILDING INSULATION
Copyright 2003 Gensler
07210-1
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively;
and of the following properties: •
a. Nominal density of 1.0 lb/cu. ft. (16 kg/cu. m), thermal.resistivity of 3.7 deg F x h
x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (25.7 K x m/W at 24 deg Q.
b. Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nor more than 1.7
lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at
75 deg F (27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg Q.
2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum
permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
B. Vapor -Retarder Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
B. Protection Board: Premolded, semirigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 1/4 inch (6 mm)
thick, formed under heat and pressure, of standard sizes. 0
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions
applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to
envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with
insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
B. Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces by setting units in adhesive.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below
exterior grade line.
2. Protect below -grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by
applying protection board set in adhesive.
C. Protect top surface of perimeter underlab insulation from damage during concrete work by
applying protection board.
D. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method
indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is
i
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
C7
Gensler
07.2022.012 .
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide
permanent placement and support of units.
1. Set vapor -retarder -faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
2. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm) support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to
flanges of metal studs.
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is
in place.
3. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window
frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold
insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of
dimension indicated between insulation and glass.
4. Stuff glass -fiber, loose -fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a
density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
E. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected
from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as
indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including
those filled with loose -fiber insulation.
1. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor -retarder tape according
to vapor -retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations
with vapor -retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid
substrates.
2. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor -retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
Copyright 2003 Gensler
07210-3
Gensler
07.2022.012
• SECTION 07320 - ROOF TILES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 ' RELATED DOCUMENTS
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Mission -barrel -design clay tile units.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for sheathing; roof deck; and wood battens,
nailing strips, and framing.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters, downspouts, flashing,
and other sheet metal work not included in this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections
of units showing the full range of profiles, textures, and colors available for each type of roof
tile indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of roof tile indicated; in sets for each
color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these
characteristics.
1:4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with labels
intact.
B. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical
damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for Project
site storage, handling, and protection.
ROOF TILES 07320-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roof tile Work only when existing and forecasted weather •
conditions permit Work to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and
when substrate is completely dry.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be
in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or
replace roof tiles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of roof tiles beyond normal
weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Roof Tile Units: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each size, •
shape, and color indicated, but not less than 1 square (10 sq. m).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. US Tile Co.
2.2 ROOF TILES
A. Clay Tile: Molded -clay roof tile units of shape and configuration indicated, kiln fired to
vitrification, and free from surface imperfections. Include specially shaped, color -matched units
as indicated or required for eaves, rakes, ridges, hips, valleys, and other conditions. Provide
with fastening holes prepunched at factory before firing.
1. Durability: ASTM C 1167, Grade 1.
2. Durability: ASTM C 1167, Grade 2. •
3. ' Durability: ASTM C 1167, Grade 3.
ROOF TILES 07320-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
,Gensler _ _ Bank of America: Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
-4. Appearance: ASTM C 1167, Type I.
5. Appearance: ASTM C 1167, Type H.
6. Appearance: ASTM C 1167, Type III.
7. Provide tiles of diminishing widths for circular bays or round towers.
B. Colors, Blends, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide
roof tiles with the following requirements:
1. Refer to architectural construction drawings.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT
A. Felt Underlayment: No. 30, unperforated organic felt, complying with ASTM D 226, Type II,
36 inches (900 mm) wide. Provide multiple layers as recommended by roof tile manufacturer
for application required.
B. Perimeter Underlayment: Polyethylene -sheet -backed, self -adhering, polymer -modified,
bituminous sheet underlayment; complying with ASTM D 1970; minimum 40 mils (1 mm)
thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
2.4 SHEET METAL FLASHING
A. Metals: Provide flashing fabricated from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90Z275 A 653M, ASTM
( ) coating
designation; commercial or lock -forming quality; 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metals, and other characteristics of item
indicated.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Nails: 0.135 -inch- (3.4 -mm-) diameter shank, copper, chisel -point tiling nails, minimum 5/16-
inch- (8 -mm-) diameter head, and of sufficient length to penetrate through or at least 3/4 inch
(19 mm). into sheathing.
B. Tile Vents and Eave Closures: Manufacturer's recommended noncorroding screen vents and
solid eave closures as required for application.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Plastic Cement: Nonasbestos-fibrated asphalt cement complying with ASTM D 4586,
designed for trowel application.
ROOF TILES 07320-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
2.7 MORTAR
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Materials for mortar preparation are as follows:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
3. Aggregate: ASTM C 144.
4. Mortar Pigment: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides.
5. Water: Potable.
B. Mix according to ASTM C 270, proportions for Type M mortar. Include colored pigment to
produce mortar matching the color of tile selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or
other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with noncorrosive roofing nails.
B. Coordinate installation with flashing, gutters, and other adjoining work to ensure proper
sequencing. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through
roof have been installed and are securely fastened against movement.
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and recommendations, but not less
than those recommended by NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual":
Section "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual."
B. Felt Underlayment: Apply 1 layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to
receive roof tile, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm), ends a minimum
of 4 inches (100 mm), and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). Fasten felt with a
sufficient number of roofing nails or noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until
roof tiles are applied.
1. Provide additional layer of felt underlayment when recommended by roof tile
manufacturer for slope or application.
2. Omit felt underlayment at areas of perimeter underlayment. Lap felt underlayment over
perimeter underlayment as recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 2 inches (50
mm).
ROOF TILES 07320-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
0
•
Gensler , Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
C. Perimeter Underlayment: Apply minimum 24 -inch- (600 -mm-) wide layer of perimeter
underlayment at eaves. Extend perimeter underlayment a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm)
inside exterior wall line at eaves.
1. In addition to eaves, apply perimeter underlayment along entire perimeter of surface to
receive roof tiles, including ridges,valleys, and rakes.
D. Roof Tile Installation: Beginning at eaves, install roof tiles according to manufacturer's written
instructions and with details and recommendations of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual": Section "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual." Unless otherwise
indicated, provide minimum 3 -inch (75 -mm) lap between succeeding courses of tile. Drive
nails to clear the tile so the tile hangs from the nail and is not drawn up..
1. Install with color blend approved by Architect. Install matching, specially shaped units at
ridges, rakes, and hips.
2. Set ridge and hip tile in a full bed of mortar and strike mortar flush with face of ridge or
hip cover tile.
3. Cut tile at valleys to form a straight border. Taper valleys from a 2 -inch (50 -mm)
exposure on each side of valley at top and increase exposure by 1 inch (25 mm) on each
side per 96 inches (2400 mm) of valley length.
4. Cut and fit tile at roof vents and other roof penetrations. After tiles are laid, fill voids
with mortar.
E. Installation of Accessories: Install eave closures, wind locks, snow guards, hurricane clips, tile
vents, closures, and other accessories with roof tile installation and according to manufacturer's
written installation instructions and specified requirements.
F. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated and according to details and specified
requirements.
1. Where flashings occur perpendicular to slope, return sheet metal at least 3 inches (75
mm) under tile and turn metal up at least 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Fabricate metal flashings at open valleys with a minimum 1 -inch- (25 -mm-) high
standing rib at center of valley to break force of water flow. Extend metal flashing a
minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) onto roof deck on each side of valley.
3. If valley length exceeds 12 feet (3.6 m), increase width of valley flashing by 1 inch (25
mm) on each side per 96 inches (2400 mm) of valley length.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Replace damaged materials specified in this Section with new materials that meet requirements.
END OF SECTION 07320
ROOF TILES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
07320,-:5
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
• SECTION 07552 - SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
is
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY .
A. ' This Section includes SBS -modified bituminous membrane roofing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at
which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop -applied roofing asphalt and 75 centipoise for
mechanical spreader -applied roofing asphalt, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F
(14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application.
1.3 - SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system.
D. Research/evaluation reports.
E. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roofing system manufacturer.
C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire -test -response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by
UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class [A] [B] [C]; ASTM E 108, for application and roof
slopes indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation and signed by
manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system •
that fail in materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Failure includes roof leaks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. SBS -Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing:
a. Barrett Company.
b. Bitec Inc.
C. CertainTeed Corporation.
d. Danoza Caribbean Inc.
e. Ecology Roof Systems.
f. Firestone Building Products Company.
g. GAF Materials Corporation.
h. Garland Co., Inc. (The).
i. Hickman, W. P. Systems Inc.
j. Honeywell Commercial Roofing Systems.
k. IKO Industries.
1. Johns Manville International, Inc.
m. Koppers Industries, Inc.
n. Malarkey Roofing Company.
o. MBTechnology Corporation.
p. Monsey-Bakor; Div. of Henry Company.
q. Polyglass USA, Inc.
r. Siplast, Inc.
S. Soprema Roofing and Waterproofing Inc.
t. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc.
U. Tremco, Inc.
V. U.S. Intec, Inc.
2.2 SBS -MODIFIED ASPHALT -SHEET MATERIALS
A. Roofing Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Grade S, Type I or H, composite polyester- and
glass -fiber -reinforced, SBS -modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application
method specified.
SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
r�
W.
Gensler , - - h;-,-_. . .- � Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012: La Quinta CA
B. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D. 6162, Grade S, Type I or II, composite polyester- and
glass -fiber -reinforced, -SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application
method specified.
C. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type I or II, composite polyester- and
glass -fiber -reinforced, SBS -modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application
method specified, and as follows:
1 1. Granule Color: Gray.
2.3 BASE -SHEET MATERIALS
A. Sheathing Paper: Red -rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).
B. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, nonperforated, asphalt -impregnated and -coated, glass -
fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS -modified, asphalt -impregnated and -coated sheet,
with glass -fiber -reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
D. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4897, Type II, venting, nonperforated, heavyweight, asphalt -impregnated
and -coated, glass -fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels
on bottom surface.
2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS
A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type .II, asphalt -impregnated and -coated, glass -fiber sheet,
dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
B. • Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Grade S, Type I or II, .composite polyester- and glass -fiber -
reinforced, SBS -modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method
specified.
C. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass -fiber -
reinforced, SBS -modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method
specified, and as follows:
1. Granule Color: Gray.
2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with roofing membrane.
B. Asphalt Primer: - ASTM D 41.
C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for application.
SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING _ _ _ 07552".:13
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
D. Cold -Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt -based, one- or two-
part, asbestos -free, cold -applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with •
roofing membrane and base flashings.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
F. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to
substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
G. Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D 1863, No. 6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, water -worn gravel
or crushed stone, free of sharp edges.
2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 36, Type X gypsum wall board, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick.
B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2
inch (13 mm) thick.
C. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, seal coated.
D. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 0
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m)
minimum density, square edged.
B. Molded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 Type II, 1.35-lb/cu. ft. (22-kg/cu. m)
minimum density.
C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on
both major surfaces.
D. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, faced with insulation board on
one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass -fiber mat facer on the other.
1. Type III (perlite-insulation-board facer), 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2. Type IV (cellulosic -fiber -insulation -board facer), Grade 1, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
E. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers,
binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal -coated.
SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler .. .
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
F. Cellulosic -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, fibrous -felted wood fiber or
• other cellulosic -fiber and water-resistant binders, asphalt impregnated, chemically treated for
deterioration.
G. Glass -Fiber -Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin
binders, faced on one side with asphalt -coated fiberglass scrim and kraft paper.
H. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch
per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated.
I. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B.
Cold Fluid -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied adhesive formulated
to adhere roof insulation to substrate.
C.
Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board.
• D.
Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type H, Grade 1, cellulosic -fiber insulation board.
E.
Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
F.
Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board.
G.
Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic -fiber insulation board.
H.
Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 726, glass -fiber insulation board.
0
I. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic -fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch (13
mm) thick.
J. Cover Board: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, with top surface
seal -coated.
K. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch
(13 mm) thick.
2.9 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Pads: Mineral -granule -surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip -resisting pads,
manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 1/2
inch (13 mm) thick, minimum.
SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type I or Il, composite polyester- and
glass -fiber -reinforced], SBS -modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; •suitable for application •
method specified, and as follows:
1. Granule Color: Gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
B. Nailer Strips: Mechanically fasten 4 -inch nominal- (89 -mm actual-) width wood nailer strips of
same thickness as insulation perpendicular to sloped roof deck at the following spacing:
1. 16 feet (4.88 m) apart for roof slopes greater than 1 inch per 12 inches (1:12) but less isthan 3 inches per 12 inches (3:12).
2. 48 inches (1220 mm) apart for roof slopes greater than 3 inches per 12 inches (3:12).
C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45 -degree insulation cant strips at junctures
of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.
D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness.
Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches (50 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with
joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches
(150 mm) in each direction.
F. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
I. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.3
L/sq. m) and allow primer to dry.
2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid -applied adhesive.
H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof •
insulation to deck type.
SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler ,
07.2022.012 '
Bank of America : Point Happy
La.Quinta, CA
I. . Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first
•
layer, of insulation to -deck -using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for
fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type.
1. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid -applied adhesive.
J. - Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing membrane _ system according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines
for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing."
B. Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches (1:24), install roofing membrane sheets
parallel with slope.
1. Backnail roofing membrane sheets to substrate according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and. other components of the roofing
membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered
at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
D. Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering
building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. .
E. Loosely lay one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2 inches (50
mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), respectively.
F. Install one . lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over -and terminating beyond cants.
Attach base sheet as follows:
1. . Mechanically fasten to substrate.
2. Spot- or strip -mop to substrate with hot roofing asphalt.
3. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
4. Adhere to substrate in a uniform coating of cold -applied adhesive.
G. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane sheet and cap sheet according to roofing
manufacturer's -written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing
membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:
1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than
425 deg F (218 deg C).
2. Adhere to substrate in cold -applied adhesive.
3. Torch apply to substrate.
4. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period
• required by manufacturer.
SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552--7
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
H. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side
and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.
1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
I. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water.
J. Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofing membrane, base flashing,
and stripping, flood -coat roof surface with 60 lb/100 sq. ft. (3 kg/sq. m) of hot roofing asphalt.
While flood coat is hot and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform
course:
1. Aggregate Weight: 4001b/100 sq. ft. (20 kg/sq. m).
3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at
penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Extend -base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing
membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
D. Install roofing membrane cap -sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on
membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of
manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: Install roofing membrane walkway cap sheet strips over roofing
membrane in hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F (218 deg Q.
END OF SECTION 07552
SBS -MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
is
Gensler i
07.2022.012
Bank of America: Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
• SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and
fastener disengagement.
B. Fabricate and install copings capable of resisting the following forces according to
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49:
1. Wind Zone 2: For velocity pressures of 31 to 45 lbf/sq. ft. (1.48 to 2.15 kPa): 90-lbf/sq.
ft. (4.31 -kPa) perimeter uplift force, 120-1bf/sq. ft. (5.74 -kPa) corner uplift force, and 45-
lbf/sq. ft. (2.15 -kPa) outward force.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements
resulting from surface temperatures ranging from +17 to +180 deg F (-8.3 to +82 deg C),
without buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist
rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements.
1. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature of
+70 deg F ( +21 deg C). Fabrication and installation procedures shall take into account
the ambienttemperature range at the time of the respective operations. .
D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to
building interior.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Subcontract the sheet metal flashing and trim work to a firm which is specialized in
the fabrication and installation of sheet metal flashing and trim and who has successfully
installed work similar in design and extent to that required for the project, in not less than three
projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 5 years.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM _ 07620-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Where sheet metal flashing and trim work details
have not been specifically detailed on the drawings or specified the Contractor shall submit, for •
th,� architect's approval, proposed sheet metal detailing.
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
C. Thermal Expansion Provisions: Sheet metal flashing and trim shall be detailed and installed for
a temperature of 70 degrees F. at time of installation with an allowance made for a maximum
exposed surface temperature range from +17 to +180 deg F.
D. Design Modifications: Submit design modifications necessary to meet the performance
requirements and field coordination. Variations in details or materials which do not adversely
affect the appearance, durability or strength of components shall be submitted to the Architect
for review. Maintain the general design concept without altering size of members, profiles and
alignment.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing
and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials
that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Submit Installer's warranty against water leakage resulting from
defects of sheet metal flashing and trim materials and workmanship. Upon notification of such
defective work, and within the warranty period, make the necessary repairs and replacements at
the convenience of the Owner.
1. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
Is
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
Gensler ;.;t Bank of America : Point.Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
A. Zinc -Coated .(Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation;. structural quality, smooth surfaced (not embossed). -
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
B. Slip Sheet: Rosin -sized paper, 6.1b/100 sq. ft. (0.32 kg/sq. m), complying with FS UU-B-
790A.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim
installation.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, and other suitable
fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
C. Solder: Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet : ASTM B 32, 50/50 solder and neutralize flux
after soldering.
D. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or silicone polymer sealant; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim
and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil
(0.4 -mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
I. Wood Nailer Strips: Provide wood nailer strips, fabricated to sizes indicated, from lumber
complying with the requirements of Section 06105, MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY, and
fire retardant treated by pressure process using chemical solution which is non -hygroscopic and
non -corrosive to sheet metal used.
J. Plywood Decking: Refer to Division 6 Section Structural Glue -Laminated Timber.
2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Copyright 2003 Gensler
_. 07620-3
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated. •
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
2. Surface -Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top
edge.
3. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to
match thickness of applied finish materials.
4. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
5. Counterflashing Wind -Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with the referenced
standards that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop
fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet metal
flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored.
Cleats shall be 2" wide by nominal 3" long typically, minimum 26 ga. thick, punch for
minimum 2 nail or screw holes. One end shall be locked into seams, or into folded edge of
sheet metal sheets, the other end shall be secured with nails or screws and folded back over nail
or screw heads.
2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
is
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076204
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler r .
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to
• exterior, 4 -inch- (100 -mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches (100 mm)
beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.
•
1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
2.7 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm-) long, but not exceeding 10 -foot- (3-m-)
long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous
cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg.
Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight.
1. Joint Style Butt, with 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) wide exposed cover plates.
2. Fabricate copings from the following material:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
B. Roof and Roof to Wall Transition, Roof to Sheet Metal Roof Edging Transition, Expansion -
Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick.
C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
F. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through -Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm-)
long, but not exceeding 12 foot (3.6 m) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where
indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm)
beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2 -inch- (50 -mm-) high end dams. Fabricate
from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Copyright 2003 Gensler
07620-5
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2 -inch- m (50- •
m-) high end dams. Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal
flashing and trim system.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and butyl sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600
mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM -07620-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler . '.x A.-
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La: Quinta, CA
0
used 'or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges; not less than 1 ind°h (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not.less than 1-1/4 inches (32
mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 nun) for wood screws.
H. Seal joints with butyl sealant as required for watertight construction. Where sealant -filled joints
are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm)..into sealant.
Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
I. Soldered Joints: Edges of sheets to be soldered shall be in close contact at every point along the
joint before soldering. Edges of all sheets of sheet metal to be soldered shall be tinned with
solder on both sides for a minimum width of 1-1/2". Where specified, all seams shall be
thoroughly soldered to produce watertight joints. All soldering shall be done slowly with well
heated metal - to heat sheet thoroughly and to sweat solder completely through full width of
seam. Ample solder shall be used and seam shall show at least one full inch of evenly flowed
solder. Wherever possible all soldering shall be done in flat position.' Remove every trace of
flux residue from metal promptly after tinning. Comply with manufacturer's recommended
methods for cleaning and neutralization. Clean exposed surfaces of sheet metal flashing and
trim of every substance which is visible or might cause corrosion of metal surfaces. Use
soldering irons (3 lb. Minimum each). Do not use abrasives in preparing the sheet metal
surfaces for soldering. All exposed parts of finished soldered joints shall be smooth and free of
smeared solder.
3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to the referenced standards and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter
flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support
scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered
edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
and the referenced standards. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line,
and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently
watertight.'.
B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at
16 -inch (400 -mm) centers.
•
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM "07620-7
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 18 -inch (450 -mm)
centers. is
C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close -fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base
flashing. Install galvanized -steel draw band and tighten.
D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum
of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with butyl sealant.
1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap -in installation and sealant or lead
wedges and sealant .
E. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with
flashing.
2. Seal with butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead
flashing on vent piping.
3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to the referenced standards and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing
with installation of wall -opening components such as windows and doors.
3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with
installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
B. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners,
metal filings, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07620
07620/11 -00/ttt •
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
r�
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America: Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Firestoppping penetrations through fire rated assemblies, such as fire rated walls, floors and roof
assemblies:
a. Voids around pipes, ducts, conduits, cable trays, cables and wires, and structural members.
b. Construction joints between intersection points between walls and floors, ceilings or rated roof
systems.
C. Openings shown or required by other sections.
B. Related Work:
1. 07200 Thermal Insulation.
2. 07810 Fireproofing.
3. 07900 Joint Sealants.
4. Divisions 15 and 16: Mechanical, electrical and plumbing penetrations.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C719 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants under
Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle). -
B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
E. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750
Degrees C.
F. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops.
G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops:
H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Fire rated assembly: Includes fire rated walls. Ratings in accordance with ASTM E119 or UL 263.
B. Firestopping: A material, or combination of materials, to retain the integrity of time -rated construction by
maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke and &ases. Through Penetration
firestop systems are designed to prevent the spread of fire through openings in fire rated assemblies for a
specified period of time. Incorporating the use of specific products installed in a specific manner, they
shall only be. installed in configurations for which they have .been specifically tested and listed by
Underwriters Laboratories or Factory Mutual in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479.
C. Flame spread and smoke developed ratings: Numerical Value of a material when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84.
1.04' SUBMITTALS
A. Installation instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for firestop systems to be
installed.
FIRESTOPPING
Copyright 2003 Gensler
^-07840-1
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
•
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed data sheets for all products used in the firestop systems,
indicating product characteristics, performance and any limiting criteria.
C.
Manufacturer's certifications and recommendations: For installations or configurations not covered by a
tested or listed firestop system, provide recommendations from manufacturer and provide subsequent
opinion or decision from regulatory authorities.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Each firestop system shall be properly installed with the materials as tested for the
specific application, or based on manufacturer's written recommendations when conditions above are met.
B.
Contractor qualification: Minimum two years experience installing UL listed or Factory Mutual
approved firestop systems in similar type construction.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery: Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with labels
indicating brand and type, and bearing a label of a recognized testing agency.
B.
Storage: Store materials in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of firestop systems when job site conditions are not within the limits
permitted by the manufacturer.
B.
Do not use materials that are damaged or beyond indicated shelf life.
1.08
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Pre -installation conference: Convene a pre -installation conference to establish procedures to maintain
optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.
B.
Sequence: Perform work of this and other sections in proper sequence to prevent damage to the firestop
systems and to ensure that their installation will occur prior to enclosing or concealing work.
C.
Install all firestop systems after voids and joints are prepared sufficiently to accept the applicable firestop
system.
D.
Do not cover firestop systems until they have been properly inspected and accepted by the authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.09
WARRANTIES
A.
Warrant the firestop systems against degradation or failure for five years.
PART
2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with one another and with substrates under
conditions of application and service, as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and actual
experience.
B.
Comply with requirements of ASTM C 719 and ASTM C 920 for fire rated systems applied to
construction joints and voids that are subject to cyclical movement, while maintaining the fire rating
required.
C.
Comply with the requirements of ASTM E814.
•
FIRESTOPPING 07840-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
is
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
D. All firestop systems shall comply with the interior finish flame' spread and smoke developed
requirements, for the area in which they are installed, in accordance with ASTM E84 and ASTM E814.
Firestop materials shall not exceed a flame spread of 15 and a smoke developed of 0.
E. Painting or coating of installed firestop systems: Follow firestop system manufacturer's recommendations
for painting or coating.
F. All products shall be free of asbestos.
G. Firestopping systems shall be capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases
in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814 and UL 1479.
H. Contractor shall supply firestop systems for all new and existing penetrations including steel, glass,
plastic and insulated pipe.
I. All firestop materials shall be non combustible as required by ASTM E136.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers, subject to meeting all firestop system requirements of this specification, are:
1. Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, MI 48686-0994, phone (517)496-6000.
2. United States Gypsum Company, phone (800)9644874.
3. Cafco TPS firestop products, Stanhope, N.J., phone (201)347-1200.
4. Hilti Firestop Systems (800)879-6000.
5. Specified Technologies Inc./GE Pensil (STI), Somerville, NJ 08876, phone (800)992-1180
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examination: Examine openings, voids or joints where firestop systems are to be installed and verify
they are in accordance with manufacturer's drawings. Do not proceed until unacceptable conditions are
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive firestopping materials. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust or other
substances that may affect installation or the fire resistance. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
guidelines for any additional surface preparation recommended, prior to installation of the firestop
system.
B. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent
surfaces. Remove masking materials promptly following application of product.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Firestop systems: Installation shall be in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer's instructions,
recommendations and drawings.
B. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective fire barrier.
C. Protection: Protect installed firestop systems to prevent contact with contaminating.substances or damage
from other trades.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. All firestop systems, after installation, shall be properly identified. Identification shall occur at the
location where the firestop system has been installed. Installation shall include:
FIRESTOPPING
Copyright 2003 Gensler
- 07840-3
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA •
1. Identify the firestop system that has been installed with a permanent sign indicating 'Rated Through -
Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb".
2. Indicate the appropriate firestop system Reference Number.
B. Contractor shall submit reports on the following:
1. Verify that proper, specified firestop materials are used in the firestop system.
2. Verify that the firestop system is installed in exact accordance with the manufacturer's latest
published requirements.
3. Verify that the firestop system complies with the appropriate Building Code requirements.
4. Verify that the firestop system is installed in all specified, indicated and required locations in rated
assemblies.
C. Areas of work shall remain accessible until inspection and approval by the applicable code authorities.
END OF SECTION
is
FIRESTOPPING 078404
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in-place concrete.
b.. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
C. Control and expansion joints in exterior Portland cement plaster (stucco).
d. Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies.
e. Joints between different materials listed above.
f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
g. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a.
Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs.
b.
Joints between different materials listed above.
c.
•
. Other joints as indicated. ,
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a.
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b.
Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C.
Tile control and expansion joints.
d.
Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete
walls and partitions.
e.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and
windows.
f.
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g.
Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
B. Single Subcontract Responsibilities: Refer to Division 8 Section, `Aluminum Entrances and
Storefronts', for requirements applicable to single subcontract responsibility.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
JOINT SEALANTS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
"07920-1=
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of exposed joint sealant required. Provide
fully cured joint sealant samples in 3/4 -inch (19 -mm-) wide joints formed between two 12 -inch
(300 -mm-) long strips of materials to be sealed.
B. Warranties: Submit specified warranties.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Exposed sealant work (sealants used for air and weatherseals which are
external to entrances and storefronts at their perimeter, exterior unit masonry, exterior Portland
cement plaster (stucco) joints) shall be performed by a single (i.e. one) firm specializing in the
installation of sealants who has successfully produced work comparable to this project, in not
less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 10
years. Concealed sealant work (sealants which are internal to entrances and storefronts and
providing an air seal) shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor providing erection of the
respective system.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from a single manufacturer.
C. Adhesion Testing (All Exterior Wall Sealants Only):
1. General: Test results confirming adhesion are mandatory for all exposed sealant
materials in contact with exterior unit masonry cladding, exterior Portland cement plaster
(stucco), other sealants, flashings, metal entrance and storefront framing.
a.. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the
progress of the work.
b. Investigate materials that fail adhesion testing and obtain sealant manufacturer's
written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of primers,
cleaners, cleaning measures, curing time, temperature limitations (surface and air),
humidity conditions, moisture content of substrate, etc.
C. Definition:
1) Adhesion: The mechanical or chemical ability of the sealant materials and
substrates to adhere or bond together at their interface.
2. Tests Required:
a. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing exposed exterior
elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1) Locate test joints .where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2) Conduct field tests for each type of exposed exterior elastomeric sealant and
joint substrate indicated.
3) The Architect and manufacturer's technical representative, shall be present
when joints are tested.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
C7
•
Gensler. - 4
07.2022.012:
1.4
1.5
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
4) , Test Method: Test exterior elastomeric joint sealants by hand -pull method
described below:
a) Install primers and joint sealants in 60 -inch (1500 -mm-) long joints
using same materials and methods for joint preparation, primer and
joint -sealant installation in accordance with manufacturers final
laboratory testing recommendations. Allow primers and sealants to
cure.
b) Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two
cuts approximately 3 -inch (75 mm) long at sides of joint and meeting
cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 -inch (25 mm) from cross -cut end
of 3 -inch (75 -mm) piece.
c) Use fingers to grasp 3 -inch (75 -mm) piece of sealant between cross-
cut end and 1 -inch (25 -mm) mark; pull firmly down at a 90 -degree
angle to the joint and hold sealant in this position for ten seconds;
following the ten second time duration pull sealant at a 180 degree
angle parallel to the joint and hold the sealant in this position for ten
seconds. Pull sealant away from joint to the distance recommended
by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesion.
'd) Repair joint as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
5) Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure with substrate during testing will be
considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint
substrates during testing.
3. Report: Provide written summary of each compatibility and adhesion test.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg Q.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
07920-3
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. is
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealant work which has failed to provide a weathertight system within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranties: Written warranties (weatherseal and stain resistance),
signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to
repair or replace those that fail to provide airtight and watertight joints, or fail in adhesion,
cohesion, abrasion -resistance, stain -resistance, weather resistance, or general durability or
appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified in the manufacturer's data as an
inherent quality of the material within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible •
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as stated
by sealant manufacturer's published data, and as substantiated by the manufacturer for each
application through testing.
B. Colors: For fully concealed joints, provide manufacturer's standard color of sealant which has
the best overall performance characteristics for the application shown. For exposed joints
provide custom colors to match Architect's samples of the following:
1. Exterior entrance and storefront framing, each color.
2. Decorative masonry units, each color.
3. Walks and pavings, each color.
4. Exterior Portland cement plaster (stucco) system, each color.
C. Manufacturer's Representative: Do not use elastomeric sealant produced by any manufacturer
who will not agree to send a qualified technical representative to the project site when
requested, for the purpose of rendering advice concerning the proper installation of his
materials.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Use self leveling compounds for horizontal joints in pavements and non -sag
compounds for all other areas except as shown or specified. •
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
Gensler. Bank of America : Point, Happy
07.2022.012 La. Quinta, CA
B. Two Part Polyurethane Sealants (Non -Sag):
1. Typical Exterior Wall Joints (Two-part Polyurethane Sealants):
2.3
a. Properties:
1), Standards: Comply with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; use
NT, M, A and O.
2) Performance: Non -stain, non -bleed, non -streaking to sealed and adjacent
substrates. The minimum pli value after 7 day immersion shall not be less
than 13 when tested in strict accordance with ASTM C794 Adhesion in
Peel.
b. Products and Manufacturers: One of the following: .
1) Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol H.
2) Sonnebom Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolastic NP -2 TM.
3) Tremco, an RPM Co.; Dymeric 240.
C. Two -Part Polyurethane Sealant (Self Leveling): ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25;
use T; one of the following:
1. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR -200.
2. Sonnebom Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolastic SL 2 TM
3. Tremco, an RPM Co.; THC 900.
D. Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant (use for joints at toilet fixtures, toilet room countertops and
vanities, and at janitor closet mop receptor to wall transition): Complying with ASTM C920,
Type S (single component), Grade NS (non -sag), class 25, Use NT (non -traffic), Substrate uses
G, A, and O; and containing a fungicide for mildew resistance.
I. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. Dow Coming; 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant.
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS 1700.
C. Pecora Corporation; 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Non-elastomeric, one part, non -sag, paintable latex sealant that is recommended
for exposed applications on the interior. Complying with ASTM C 834.:
1. • Products: Provide one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 + Silicone
b. Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolastic Sonolac.
c. Tremco, an RPM Co.; Tremflex 834.
2.4 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING
JOINT SEALANTS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
::07920=5
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: One of the following preformed, compressible, resilient,
nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding backings of flexible plastic foam complying with
ASTM C 1330, and of type indicated below. Select shape and density of cylindrical sealant
backings in consultation with the manufacturer for proper performance in specific condition of
use in each case.
1. Type C: Closed -cell polyethylene foam material with a surface skin, which is
nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing in unruptured state; one of the
following:
a. HBR Closed Cell Backer Rod; Nomaco, Inc..
b. Sonneborn Sonolastic Closed -Cell Backer -Rod; ChemRex, Inc.
2. Type B: Bi -cellular reticulated, polymeric foam material with a surface skin,
nonoutgassing, with a density of between 24-48 kg/cubic meter per ASTM D1622 and
minimum tensile strength of greater than 200 kPa per ASTM D1623, and with water
absorption less than 0.10 gm/cc per ASTM C1016; one of the following:
a. SofRod; Nomaco, Inc.
b. Sonolastic Soft Backer -Rod; ChemRex, Inc.
C�
C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene, TFE fluorocarbon, or other plastic tape recommended by •
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D. Weep and Vent Tubes: Clear plastic (PVC) tubing, minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) inside
diameter; and of length as required to extend between exterior face of sealant and open cavity
behind.
E. Cork Joint Filler: Resilient and nonextruding, ASTM D1752, Type II.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended, as verified through compatibility and adhesion testing, by joint
sealant manufacturer for the substrates indicated to be sealed.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and which
will not stain nor mar the finish of surfaces adjacent to joints to which it is applied.
JOINT SEALANTS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
07920-6
•
,, Gensler . , .• {
07.2022.012
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -
sealant performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), oil, grease,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean .concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of tile, and similar porous joint substrate
surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of
these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond
with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by
vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, glazed surfaces of tile, -and other nonporous surfaces with chemical
cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of
interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming (Elastomeric Sealants Only): Prime joint substrates where recommended in
writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on prior testing and experience., Apply primer to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply -with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following
requirements:
JOINT ,SEALANTS :07920-7
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Trim for tight fit around
obstructions or elements penetrating the joint.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
C. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry sealant backings.
Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and back of joints.
Install weeps and vents into joints at the same time sealants are being installed. Unless
otherwise shown on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, locate weeps and vents
spaced as recommended by the sealant manufacturer and the entrance and storefront
fabricator and erector. Do not install vents at horizontal joints immediately below shelf
angles, sills, and through wall flashings.
C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant
backings are installed.
Apply sealants in the depth shown or, if none is shown, apply in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and the following general proportions and limitations:
a. Apply elastomeric sealants in sidewalk, pavement and similar horizontal joints to a
depth equal to 75% of the joint width, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) and not
more than 3/4 inch (19 mm).
b. Apply elastomeric sealants, in joints not subject to traffic or other abrasion, to a
depth equal to 50% of the joint width, but not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) and not
more than 1/2 inch (13 nun).
C. Apply non-elastomeric sealants to a depth approximately equal to the joint width.
Pour self leveling sealants to a depth approximately equal to the joint width.
D. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform, beads to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from
surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to the profile shown, or if none is shown, tool slightly
concave.
1. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
2. Provide a slight wash on horizontal joints where horizontal and vertical surfaces meet.
3. Against rough surfaces or in joints of uneven widths avoid the appearance of excess
sealant or compound by locating the compound or sealant well back into joint wherever
possible.
•
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler - Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
3.4- CLEANING
• A. Clean off excess sealants or, sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Workro resses b
P g )
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 07920
07920/11-97/ttt
t
•
JOINT -SEALANTS '07-920-9
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
• SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. This Section includes steel doors and frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. Include material descriptions,
core descriptions, and finishes for each type of door and frame specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit door and frame schedule using same reference designations indicated
on Drawings. Include opening size(s), handing of doors, frame throat dimensions, details of
each frame type, elevations of door design types, details of construction, location and
installation requirements of door hardware and reinforcements, hardware group numbers, details
of joints and connections.
1.3 . QUALITY ASSURANCE
• A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations
of the following publications by Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Div. of
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), unless more stringent
requirements are indicated in the Contract Documents:
HMMA "Hollow Metal Manual".
HMMA 861 "Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing steel doors and frames
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project site storage.
B. Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Tool marks, rust, blemishes, and any other
damage on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Remove and replace damaged items as
directed by Architect. Store doors and frames at building site in a dry location, off the ground,
and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.
• PART 2 -PRODUCTS
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, CS (commercial steel), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. Not less than 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) thick where
frames are indicated to be built into exterior walls, hot dip galvanize after fabrication in
compliance with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.
B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, CS (commercial steel), and
ASTM A 568/A 568M, free from scale, pitting, coil breaks, or other defects, exposed (matte)
dull finish.
C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A924/A924M and ASTM A 653/A 653M, CS
(commercial steel), Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc -iron -alloy
(galvannealed) coating, mill phosphatized.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel.
1. Expansion Bolts and Shields: FS FF -S-325, Group III, Type 1 or 2.
2. Machine Screws: FS FF -S-92, carbon steel, Type III cross recessed, design I or II recess,
style 2C flat head.
E. Filler: Sound deadening and heat retarding mineral fiber insulating material.
2.2 DOORS
A. General: Provide flush -design doors, 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, of seamless hollow •
construction, unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with sheets joined at their vertical
edges by continuous welding the full height of the door, with no visible seams on their faces or
vertical edges, and all welds ground and finished flush.
For single -acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches Q mm in 50
mm).
B. Core Construction: Provide one of the following core constructions welded to both door faces:
I. Steel -Stiffened Core: 0.032 -inch (0.8 -mm) steel vertical stiffeners extending full -door
height, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) apart and spot welded to face sheets a
maximum of 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Place filler between stiffeners for full height of
door.
2. Continuous Truss -Form Inner Core: 0.013 -inch- (0.33 -mm-) thick steel reinforcement
spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 2-3/4 inches (69.9 mm) o.c. vertically and
horizontally.
C. Top and Bottom Channels: Spot weld metal channel not less than thickness of face sheet to
face sheets not more than 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
1. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted horizontal channels of same material
as face sheet so flanges of channels are even with bottom and top edges of face sheets.
2. For exterior doors, close bottom edge with metallic -coated steel closing channel and top
edge with filler channel of same material, so webs of channels are flush with bottom and •
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
top door edges. Weld inverted steel channels to both face sheets or form integrally with
• edge construction of door.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing from the same material as door to comply with
the following. , Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with
door surfaces.
1. . Hinges: 0.167.inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 9 inches (229 mm).
2. Lock Front, Strike, and Flushbolt Reinforcements: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick by size as
required by hardware manufacturer.
3. Lock Reinforcement Units: 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick by size as required by hardware
manufacturer.
4..:. Closer Reinforcements: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick one piece channel by size as required
by hardware manufacturer.
5. Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.
6. In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturers recommended reinforcing
units may be used.
7. Exit Device Reinforcements: 0.250 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 10 inches (245 mm) high by
4 inches (101 mm) wide centered on exit device case body, unless otherwise
recommended by exit device manufacturer.
E. Interior Steel Doors: Flush design with 0.042 -inch- (1.06 -mm-) thick cold -rolled stretcher -
leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from hot- or cold -rolled steel sheets.
F. Exterior Steel Doors: Flush design with 0.053 -inch- (1.3 -mm-) thick metallic -coated stretcher
leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from metallic coated steel sheets. Provide
weep -hole openings in bottom of doors to permit entrapped moisture to escape.
2.3 FRAMES
A. Fabricate steel door frames, formed to profiles indicated, with full 5/8 inch (16 mm) stops, and
of the following minimum thicknesses.
1. For exterior, use, form frames from 0.067 -inch- (1.7 -mm-) thick, metallic -coated steel
sheets.
2. For interior use; form frames from cold- rolled steel sheet of the following thicknesses:
a: Openings up to and Including 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).
b. Openings More Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 0.067 inch (1.7 mm).
.B. ' Provide frames either saw mitered and full (continuously) welded, or machine mitered and full
welded, on back side at frame corners and stops with edges straight and true. Grind welds
smooth and flush on exposed surfaces.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcements from same material as frame to comply
with the following. Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with
surface of the frame.
I. Hinges: 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 10 inches (254
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America: Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
2. Strike Reinforcements: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick by size as required by hardware
manufacturer. •
3. Closer Reinforcements: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick one piece channel by size as required
by hardware manufacturer.
4. Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.
D. Jamb Anchors: Locate jamb anchors above hinges and directly opposite on strike jamb as
required to secure frames to adjacent construction. At metal stud partitions locate the additional
jamb anchor below the top hinge.
Masonry Construction: Adjustable, corrugated or perforated, anchors to suit frame size;
formed of same material and gauge thickness as frame; at non -rated frames use friction fit
T-shaped anchors, at rated frames use anchors consisting of spot welded strap and
adjustable anchor; with leg not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm)
long. Furnish at least the number of anchors per jamb according to the following frame
heights:
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1500 to 2250 mm) in height.
2. Metal -Stud Partitions: Metal channel stud zee anchor sized to match stud width, welded
to back of frames, formed of same material and gauge thickness as frame. Provide at
least the number of anchors for each jamb according to the following heights:
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1500 to 2250 mm) in height.
In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8 -inch- (9 -mm-)
diameter countersunk flat head bolts into expansion shields or inserts 6 inches (150 mm)
from top and bottom of each jamb with intermediate anchors spaced a maximum of 26
inches (650 mm) o.c. Soffit face of frame shall be punched and dimpled to accept
countersunk bolt head. Reinforce frame with spacer to prevent bowing. Bolt head shall
be set slightly below soffit face, filled and ground smooth at time of installation.
E. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, formed
of same material as frame, 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick, and punched with two holes to receive
two (2) 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) fasteners. Where floor fill or setting beds occur support frame by
adjustable floor anchors bolted to the structural substrate. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
F. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches (1200 mm) wide in masonry wall
openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick for full
width of opening, welded to back of frame at head. Head reinforcements shall not be used as a
lintel or load bearing member for masonry.
G. Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs
to serve as bracing during shipment and handling and to hold frames in proper position until
anchorage and adjacent construction have been completed.
H. Door Silencer Holes: Drill strike jamb stop to receive three silencers. Insert plastic plugs in
holes to keep holes clear during installation.
is
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
shy rr .
r ,
Gensler a Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
I. Plaster Guards and Removable Access Plates: Provide 0.016 -inch- (0.4 -mm-) thick plaster
• guards or dust -cover boxes of same material as frame, welded to frame at back of hardware
cutouts to close off interior of openings and prevent mortar or other materials from obstructing
hardware operation.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors and frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects, warp, wave, and
buckle. Accurately form metal to sizes and profiles indicated. Accurately machine, file, and fit
exposed connections with hairline joints. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, fill, dress,
and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
B. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk -flat heads for exposed screws and bolts, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware, including cutouts,
reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to final hardware schedule and
templates provided by hardware supplier. Secure reinforcement by spot welding. Comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI Al 15 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for
hardware. Factory reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware.
1. Locate hardware as indicated on the drawings or in Division 8 Section `Door Hardware'
or, if not indicated, according to HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for
Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
2.5 METALLIC -COATED STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside and
out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and
other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to
be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply
galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Apply a sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtain
uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots.
1. Shop Primer: ' Manufacturer's or. fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -
free, primer complying with. ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for zinc -coated steel; compatible with substrate and field -applied finish
paint system indicated.
• 2.6 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES .._.08110-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
A. General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside and
out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction. •
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove
dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale,
shavings, filings, and rust, if present, complying with SSPC-SP 3, 'Power Tool Cleaning,"
C. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Apply a sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtain
uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast -curing, corrosion -inhibiting,
lead- and chromate -free, universal primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance
criteria; compatible with substrate and field -applied finish paint system indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and frames according to DHI AI15.IG, the Architect reviewed shop
drawings, and manufacturer's written recommendations and installation instructions.
B. Frames: Install frames where indicated. Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes.
Coordinate the installation of built-in anchors for wall and partition construction as required
with other work. is
1. Welded Frames:
a. Set masonry anchorage devices where required for securing frames to in-place
concrete or masonry construction.
1) Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location as specified and
anchorage device manufacturer's written instructions. Leave drilled holes
rough, not reamed, and free of dust and debris.
b. Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position; plumb; align, and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete,
remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1) At concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with
machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. Anchor bottom of frames
to floors with anchor bolts or power driven fasteners.
2) Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings.
Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing on
exposed faces.
3) Remove spreader bars only after frames are properly set and secured.
C. Doors:
•
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
Gensler. ,
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Q.uinta, CA
1. Non -Fire Rated Doors: Fit non -fire -rated doors accurately in their respective frames,
with the following clearances:
a. • Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch (2 mm).
b. Bottom: 3/8 inch (9 mm), if no threshold or carpet.
C. Bottom: 1/8 inch (3 mm), at threshold or carpet.
D. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and Division 8
Section `Door Hardware'. Drill and tap for machine screws as required. Do not use self
tapping sheet metal screws. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and
jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. Adjust hardware items just prior to final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just before final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work,
including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer.
1. Finish Painting: Refer to Division 9 Section "Interior Painting".
C. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or
otherwise defective.
D. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to
ensure that steel doors and frames will be without any damage or deterioration, at time of
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 08110
08110/5-98/ttt
CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
.08110-7
•
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 08125 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. This Section includes extruded aluminum frames for doors, and for interior locations:
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors to be installed into aluminum frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and gasketing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include frame designation, type, level and model,
material description, label compliance, fire -resistance ratings, smoke- and draft -control ratings,
finishes, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame throat dimensions, details of each frame type, elevations of
door design types, details of construction; location and installation requirements of door
hardware and reinforcements, hardware group numbers; details of joints and connections; and;
finishes.
C. Samples: For each type of corner construction and each type of exposed finish required.
Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work.
D. Door and Frame Schedule. Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer, with not less than five years experience, who
has completed interior aluminum framing systems similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted Jn construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames through one source from a single manufacturer
with the capacity and resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining
construction dimensions. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be
considered. Refer.to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
08125-1
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects If modifications are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
2. Sizes and Configurations: As shown on the Drawings.
3. Provide installed frames and other components for assemblies identical to manufacturers
listed and certified assemblies.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors and frames from damage during transit, job storage, and installation.
B. Inspect frames on delivery for damage. Tool marks, rust, blemishes and any other damage on
exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be
repaired as directed by Architect. Store frames at building site in a dry location, off the ground,
and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Raco Altura; Solutions Series 375/487, with #700 trim and head and jamb seals.
•
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper
required to suit structural and finish requirements.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide interior aluminum frame components that comply with dimensions, profiles,
and relationships to adjoining work of components indicated on Drawings.
B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, reinforced for
hinges and strikes with 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick hinge back up plates.
C. Glass Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, designed for glass
thickness indicated.
D. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. .
E. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, glass stops and door stops
without exposed fasteners.
1. Trim Profile: Flat -faced 1-1/2 inch wide by 1/2 inch deep (38 mm wide by 13 mm deep)
snap -on trim with 90 degree return.
INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 08125-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
,07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners
compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items
being fastened.
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate 1/4"
thick glass.
C. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
D. Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
E. Gaskets/ Silencers:
1. Door Openings: Provide vinyl or pile continuous gasket/silencer in Architect's choice of
white, gray, or black.
2. Glazed Units: Provide continuous vinyl gasket in Architect's choice of white, gray, or
black.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.
B. Fabricate frames with butt, mitered, or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless
face joints. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for precise butt or
mitered connections.
C. Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware
schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier.
D. Reinforce frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Machine jambs and prepare for
hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required, and fastened
within frame with concealed screws.
E. Locate hardware as indicated
F. Provide terminated stops
G. Door Silencers: Continuous gasket at frame head and both jambs.
H. Fabricate frames for glass to allow glass replacement without dismantling frame.
I. Glazing Stops: Provide nonremovable stops on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers,
and other panels in doors: Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass,
louvers, and other panels in doors.
J. Clearances for Non -Fire -Rated Door Frames: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and
heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch
(19 mm) at bottom.
INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
_ 08125-3
Gensler
07.2022.012
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Anodic Finish: Class I, clear, complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Install frames plumb and square, securely anchored to substrates with fasteners recommended
by frame manufacturer.
B. Install partition components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 48 inches (1200
mm) long must be one piece. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 48 -inch (1200 -
mm) centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer.
1. Use concealed installation clips to ensure that splices and connections are tightly butted
and properly aligned.
2. Secure clips to main structural extrusion components and not to snap -in or trim members.
3. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.
C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from frames. Refinish or replace frames
damaged during installation. Touch up marred areas so touchup is not visible from a distance of
48 inches (1200 mm). Remove and replace frames that cannot be refinished to satisfaction of
the Architect.
END OF SECTION 08125
08125/2-98/dub
INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 08.1254
Copyright 2003 Gensler
is
•
•
Gensler_ ' Bank of America : Point Happy
•
07.2022.012
La Quinta, CA
SECTION 08200 — WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
_
A.
Section Includes:
1. Standard and fire rated type solid core wood doors, with flush faces.
2. Custom type stile and rail wood doors'with wood faces.
recessed pariel
3. Custom type stile and rail wood doors with recessed glass lites.
B.
Related Work:
1. 06401 Architectural Woodwork..
2. 08125 Aluminum Frames.
3. 08711 Door Hardware.
4. 08800 Glass and Glazing.
5. 09912 Painting: Field painting.
1.02
REFERENCES
A:
ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
B.
ANSUHPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
C.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
D.
E.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.
NFPA 80 Fire Doors
- and Windows.
F.
NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
G.
NWMA - Standard Door Guarantee.
H.
WDMA - Window and Door Manufacturers Association Standard I -S.1 Series for Wood Doors.
I.
UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
J.
WIC - Manual of Millwork.
K.
UBC Standard 7-2 - Fire Test of Door Assemblies: Positive pressure testing.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, specified rail sizes and locations, jointing methods,
hardware blocking and hardware locations, door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings,
undercuts required, special beveling, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers.
B.
Product data: Manufacturer's standard literature and specifications. Indicate door core materials and
construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.
C.
Samples:
1. Submit two samples of door construction, minimum 8" x 11" in size cut from top corner of door.
2. Submit two samples of door veneer, minimum 8" x 11" in size illustrating wood finish
grain, texture
and color.
3. Submit two samples of finished door veneer with shop applied paint finish, minimum 8" x 11" in
size illustrating color and finish texture.
D.
Certification: AWI certification is required. Submit certificate of compliance.
WOOD DOORS '08200-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA •
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Rated assemblies and components: Conform to UL and NFPA 80.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors with resilient packaging. Do not store in damp or wet areas; avoid exposure to direct sun.
Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. Comply
with manufacturer's written recommendations for storage of doors.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty for the following term:
1. Lifetime of installation.
B. Provide written warranty in accordance with NWMA "Standard Door Guarantee", modified as follows:
Provide for replacing, including re -hanging and refinishing. Provide temporary doors to maintain security
and privacy during replacement or repair operations.
1. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials and telegraphing core construction.
2. Opaque finish doors shall be warranted by the door fabricator. All other doors shall be warranted by
the door fabricator in conjunction with the architectural woodwork fabricator.
3. All transparent and opaque finished doors. shall be warranted by the door fabricator in conjunction
with the architectural woodwork fabricator.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Weyerhaeuser Company.
B. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
C. Eggers Industries.
2.02 DOORS
A. Flush interior doors (transparent finish): 1-3/4" thick; solid core 5 ply, hot press laminated construction
with stiles and rails bonded to core; Premium Grade per WIC standards.
B. , Flush interior doors (opaque finish): 1-3/4" thick; solid core 5 ply, hot press laminated construction with
stiles and rails bonded to core. Face veneer of "sound" grade birch or other dense closed grain hardwood,
or a paintable medium density plastic overlay. Face veneer shall be at least 1/50" thick before filled
sanding. Premium Grade per AWI or WIC standards.
2.03 ADHESIVE
A. Facing Adhesive: Type I -waterproof.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing; Wood with metal clips for rated doors. •
WOOD DOORS 08200-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
• 07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
•
•
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of above referenced Quality Standards and as modified
herein. In case of conflicting requirements, most restrictive shall govern.
B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) or
Warnock Hersey. Provide manufacturer's letter of conformance, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Solid core door stiles and rails:
1. Stiles: Not less than 1" ± 1/16", mill option, except clear white birch where oversize bottom rails
occur.
2. Rails: All bottom and top rails shall be 6" ± 1/16", manufacturer's standard hardwood.
3. Stiles and rails shall meet performance criteria as required by AWI.
D. Bevel strike edge of single -acting doors, 1/8" in 2". Radius strike edge of double acting swing doors as
recommended by hardware manufacturer.
E. Hardware reinforcement blocking: In addition to stiles and rails as specified, provide solid wood
blocking for mounting all door hardware, including special door closers or pivots if indicated. No
throughbolts shall be permitted to permanently mount hardware on door. If blocking is not practical,
provide stave glued low density lumber core or solid particle board core with minimum 32 PCF density
conforming to Type I, density C, Class I of CS236, hot press resin bonded.
1. Refer to section 08710 Door Hardware for reinforcement requirements.
F. Machining: By manufacturer or shop licensed to machine labeled doors. Machine doors for cutouts,
hinges, locks and other hardware that requires routing or mortising,
1. Refer to section 08710 Door Hardware for reinforcement requirements.
2. Refer to section 08710 Door Hardware for hardware requirements.
G. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel or Treated wood as noted, overlapping and recessed at face
edge, specifically for double doors.
2.06 SHOP FINISH
A. For transparent and opaque finishes: Refer to Architectural Woodwork Section for veneer application
and finishing requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine door frames, and verify that frames are the correct type and have been installed as required for
proper hanging of corresponding doors. Do not proceed with installations until satisfactory conditions
have been achieved.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install fire rated assemblies in conformance with fire label requirements.
B. Install wood doors plumb and square, with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16", and in compliance
with the referenced standards.
C. Undercut doors in place to clear floor finishes by t/4 inch, unless otherwise noted. _
D. Install hardware in accordance with requirements of section 08710 Door Hardware.
E. Touch up shop finishes as required to assure complete integrity of finish system.
WOOD DOORS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
. .= .08200-3
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA •
F. Replace doors where damages are in excess of repairs which may be corrected by touch up process.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
3.04 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with the requirements of the referenced standards.
B. The completed work shall be rigid, plumb or level as appropriate; free from damage, flaws, blemishes or
other defects detrimental to appearance; have joints in proper position and alignment and be uniform in
plane, color and finish.
END OF SECTION
•
r�
WOOD DOORS 08200-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
• SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
L Exterior aluminum -framed storefronts.
a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum -framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
without failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
5. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
d. Glazing -to -glazing contact.
e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
g. Sealant failure.
h. Failure of operating units to function properly.
B. Structural -Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress in structural -sealant joints
of less than 20 psi (138 kPa).
C. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through
fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static -air -
pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24
lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
D. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have condensation -
resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.
ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS .08411--1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012
E. Average Thermal Conductance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have average U -
factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.92 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to •
HAMA 1503.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
2. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Preconstruction Sealant Test Reports: For structural -sealant -glazed systems.
E. Product test reports.
F. Field quality -control test and inspection reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparation of data for •
aluminum -framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis
of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for
testing indicated.
C. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: For structural -sealant -glazed systems, perform sealant
manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility and adhesion of sealants with each material that
will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by aluminum -framed systems.
1. Determine corrective measures required to prepare each material to ensure compatibility
with and adhesion of sealants, including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers.
D. Structural -Sealant Glazing: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1401, "Guide for
Structural Sealant Glazing."
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with
requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: •
ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America: Point Happy
•
a.- Structural failures including,.but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
f. Failure of operating components to function properly.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
•
0
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for aluminum -framed systems is based on `Kawneer',
1600 series. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
2. CMI Architectural Products, Inc. -
3. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.
4. EFCO Corporation.
5. Kawneer.
6. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.
7. Tubelite Inc.
8. United States Aluminum.
9. Vistawall Architectural Products.
10. YKK AP America Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant primer.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS .
Copyright 2003 Gensler
0841.1 - 3
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. •
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded -aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
Construction: Framing members are one-piece members that are internally slotted at
regular intervals.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system.
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts:. Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant nonstaining, noribleeding flashing
compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to
match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible
deflection.
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer
for joint type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded,
that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to
which sealants will not develop adhesion.
E. Glazing Sealants: For structural -sealant -glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for
joint type and as follows:
•
ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler ,. Bank of America: Point -Happy
07.2022.012
1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral -curing silicone formulation compatible with
• system components with which it comes in contact.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and
O; neutral -curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other
system components with which it comes in contact.
a. . Color:• Matching structural sealant.
2.5 DOORS
A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 1 -3/4 -inch (44.5 -mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 -inch
thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners
with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
a. . Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum
members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
2. Door Design: As indicated on plans.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
(255 mm) above floor or ground plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation."
B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum -framed systems, as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil (0.762 -mm) thickness per
coat.
2.7' FABRICATION
• A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or •
grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).
E. Structural -Sealant -Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary
support device (dutchman) to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
F. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single -door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
G. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip
mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
H. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and
tap for factory -installed hardware before applying finishes.
I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked -Enamel Finish: Thermosetting, modified -acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system
complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm),
medium gloss.
1. Color: As specified on architect's construction drawings. •
ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
Gensler • ..... .
07.2022.012
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
Bank of America : Point Happy
1. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
2. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to. prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
4. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints,- condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp
or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
1. Structural -Sealant Glazing:
a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and
according to sealant, manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof
joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight
closure.
2. Field -Installed Hardware: Install surface -mounted hardware according to hardware
manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
08411-7
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012
I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section 'Joint Sealants" and to produce
weathertight installation. •
J. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum -framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet
(3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 nun).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch
(0.8 mm).
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch
(3 mm).
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Structural -Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested according to
recommendations in ASTM C 1401.
1. Destructive test method, Method A, Hand Pull Tab (Destructive) in ASTM C 1401, •
Appendix X2 shall be used.
a. A minimum of two areas on each building face shall be tested.
b. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
C. Structural -Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of aluminum -framed systems is
complete, structural -sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated according to
ASTM C 1401 recommendations.
D. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet
(23 m) by 1 story of aluminum -framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested
according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
E. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 08411
i
ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
1
Gensler ,' ,
07.2022.012
• SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY -
A. This Section includes door hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit door hardware schedule prepared by or under the supervision
of door hardware supplier. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames,
and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
The Architect's review of schedule shall neither be construed as a complete check nor shall it
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissions from.the specified
requirements to provide complete door hardware for the project.
B. Keying Schedule: Submit keying schedule prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and
index each key set to unique door designations.
C. Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier, who has completed a minimum of three (3)
projects over the last 5 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated
for the project - as determined by the Architect — and which have resulted in construction with a
record of successful in service performance, and who is or employs a qualified Architectural
Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor,
Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
1. Provide hardware items complying with the, applicable provisions for accessibility and
usability by the, disabled and handicapped in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG),".
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
•
DOOR HARDWARE -.•.08711-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to. the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Furnish templates and door hardware schedules, coordinated for the application of
door hardware items with door and frame details, to door opening fabricators and trades
performing door opening work to permit the preparation of doors and frames to receive the
specified door hardware. Where the door hardware item scheduled is not adaptable to the
finished size of door opening members requiring door hardware, submit an item having a
similar operation and quality to the Architect for review. Each door hardware item shall be
fabricated to templates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Faulty operation of door hardware.
2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty Period for All Hardware: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section,
door hardware sets are keyed on the drawings at each door opening, and the Door Hardware
Schedule.
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named
manufacturer's products.
The hardware supplier shall review each hardware set and compare it with the door types,
details, and sizes as shown and verify each hardware item for function, hand, backset, and
method of fastening through shop drawing submittals.
2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS
A. Butt Hinge Products and Manufacturers:
1. Standard Weight, Ball Bearing, 5 Knuckle, Steel: FBB 179, USP Finish; Stanley
Commercial Hardware (STH).
DOOR HARDWARE .08711-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
is
,Gensler :.
07.2022.012 '
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
2. Heavy Weight,. Ball Bearing, 5 .Knuckle, Stainless Steel: FBB 199, US32D Finish;
Stanley Commercial Hardware (STH).
B. Pivot and Pivot Hinge Products and Manufacturers:
Offset Pivot with Jamb Mounted Bottom Pivot: 7215 Pivot Set, US32D Finish; Ives: H.
B. Ives (IVS).
2. Intermediate Pivots: 7200 INT Series Pivots, US32D Finish; Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS).
C. General Hinge and Pivot Characteristics: Where door jamb or trim projects to such an extent
that the width.of leaf specified will not allow the door to clear such frame or trim, furnish
hinges and pivots with leaves of sufficient width to clear. Hinges and pivots shall be template
hinges conforming to BHMA A156.1 and in accordance with door and frame material
requirements. -
D. Butt Hinge Sizes: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) h. x 4 inches (102 mm) or 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) w.
for doors up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) in width; 5 inches (127 mm) h. x 4 inches
(102 nun) or 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) w. for doors greater than 36 inches (914 mm) in width.
E. Hinge Characteristics: Full mortise type with square corners. All butt hinges are to have non -
rising pins for interior hinges and all exterior butt hinges are to be made of non-ferrous base
metal and have non-removeable pins (NRP)..All butt hinges shall be furnished with button tips.
F. Fasteners: Package all hinges and pivots with machine and wood screws as required by door
• and frame construction.
2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Bored Lock and Latch Sets: Heavy duty, commercial, cylindrical bodies complying with
BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Cylindrical type, lock and latch sets with deadlocking
latch bolts having a minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) throw together with guard (auxiliary) latch
added to bolt, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset. All lock and latch sets, to be furnished complete
with steel cylindrical bodies, trim, beveled square cornered fronts, and 6 pin tumbler key in
lever core. Provide box strikes for each lock and latch set with curved lips of sufficient length
to protect frames.
I. Sargent, T Zone, with "L" rose and "J" lever, US26D Finish; Sargent Lock Company
(SAR)
B. Mortise Lock Sets: Heavy duty, commercial, mortise bodies complying with BHMA A156.13
Series 4000, Grade 1, with throughbolted lever trim. Furnish mortise type, field reversible, lock
and latch sets with 2 piece anti -friction deadlocking brass or stainless steel latchbolts having a
minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset. All lock sets, to be furnished
complete with heavy gage wrought steel zinc dichromate or chrome plated case, trim, adjustable
beveled square cornered armored fronts, steel or stainless steel hubs, and 6 pin cylinders.
Conceal fastenings, washers and bushings. Provide box strikes for each lock and latch set with
curved lips of sufficient length to protect frames. Provide solid forged or cast levers with
wrought roses. Provide non -handed guard bolt and stainless steel deadbolt with a minimum 1
• inch (25 mm) throw.
DOOR HARDWARE 08711-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
Sargent, 10 Line, with "L" rose and "J" lever, US26D Finish; Sargent Lock Company
(SAR). 0
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. High Security Grade cylinders and cores , complying with UL 437; Sargent Lock Company
(SAR).
B. Keying System: Factory registered key control system. Final keying to determine lock
cylinders, keyed alike sets, level of keying, master key groups, grandmaster keying system shall
be as directed by the Owner. Supplier and Contractor shall meet with the Owner and obtain
final instructions in writing. Provide 3 nickel silver change keys for each lock, and 3 master
keys for each masterkey set, and 3 grandmaster keys. Provide 1 blank key for each lock for the
Owner's convenience in making additional keys. Each key shall be inscribed with a visual key
control number and "DO NOT DUPLICATE" notation. Permanent cores shall be removable
cores with finish face to match lockset.
1. Construction Keyed Cylinders: Provide construction keyed cylinders in locks during
construction and as may be necessary for security or as may be requested by the Owner.
Upon completion of the construction phase, construction keyed cylinders shall be voided
mechanically without the removal of the cylinders from the locks. All construction keyed
cylinders shall be individually keyed as required and subject to a single master key.
Provide 10 construction master keys. •
C. Key Control System: Provide key control system. Furnish complete accessories including key
gathering envelopes, labels, reserve pattern key tags with self-locking key clips, key receipt
forms, key receipt holders, 3 way visible card index, temporary key markers and permanent key
markers.
2.5 STRIKES
A. Strikes for Locks and Latches: All strikes for locks and latches shall be provided by the lock
and latch manufacturer unless otherwise specified or scheduled, refer to Article `Locks and
Latches'.
2.6 OPERATING TRIM (PUSHES AND PULLS)
A. Fabricate push pulls for back to back mounting from 1 1/2 -inch (25 -mm) diameter stainless
steel bar stock in finish as scheduled. Fabricate pulls with minimum 2-1/4 inch projection, 18 -
inch center to center of bases with center line of pull centered on door stiles. Fabricate push
bars with minimum 2-1/4 inch projection, with center line of push bar ends centered on door
stiles. Furnish spanner turning washer and stud assemblies threaded to accept concealed
throughbolt attachment including provision for spanner tightening of bolts of push/pull
assembly. Do not provide baseplates at -stile to pull interface.
RM322, US32D Finish, Rockwood Manufacturing, 800.458.2424
DOOR HARDWARE 087.11-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler . F ,'- ;t. ,,_ Bank of America: Point Happy
. 07.2022.012 .. La Quinta, CA
2.7 ACCESSORIES FOR, PAIRS OF DOORS
• A. Lock Protectors: Fabricated from heavy gauge metal and in finish as scheduled. Fabricate lock
protectors with no exposed fasteners on face of lock protector. Furnish protectors sized to cover
the latch bolt area of the door and lock and narrow enough to clear rose and escutcheon lock
trims, offset formed to clear strike projection. Machine lock protectors where required to
accommodate rose and escutcheon trims, and cylinders.
•
1. LP Series Lock Protectors; Glynn -Johnson (GJ).
2. 180 Series Lock Guards; Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS).
2.8 - CLOSERS
A. Surface -Mounted Closers: Properly detail closers to meet application requirements by
providing drop plates, brackets, etc. to meet application and installation requirements as
indicated. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for size of door closer depending on
size of door, stack pressure conditions, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
1. 8501, Aluminum Finish, Norton (NOR)
B. Overhead Concealed Closers, Offset Hung: Closers shall meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
Closers shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship
for a minimum of 10 years. Properly detail closers to meet application and installation
requirements as indicated. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for size of door closer
depending on size of door, stack pressure conditions, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide
manufacturers standard cover plate finished to match exposed portions of pivots provided.
1.. 2010/2030; LCN Closers (LCN).
2. RTS 88 Series, Offset Slide Arm; Dorma.
2.9 STOPS
A. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Type L03011; grey rubber, minimum
diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled -in application to frame, specifically designed
to form an air pocket to absorb shock and reduce noise of door closing.
B. Floor Stops: Dome floor stop, #436, US26D Finish, Ives (IVES)
2.10 DOOR GASKETING
A. Type. l: Self adhesive flexible silicone type, continuous gaskets for installation at all heads and
jambs of doors:
1. 5050C; National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
2. S88BL; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
3. 18813K; Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). _
DOOR HARDWARE 08711-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
2.11 THRESHOLDS
A. 1/2 inch (13 mm) high extruded aluminum panic threshold with resilient bumper gasket. •
1. 477S; Hager Companies (HAG).
2. 950; National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
3. S257AV; Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
4. 566A; Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE ITEMS
A. Cypher Locks: Trilogy T-3; Model # DL 3000 / 26D 232243DR w/ unique DL3000 features.
Provide where required by Owner.
2.13 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Provide each door hardware item without exposed manufacturers
labels, names, or designs.
B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips oval -head screws with
finished heads to match surface of door hardware item being attached. Machine screws and
expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete and masonry.
1. Concealed Fasteners: All new doors and door frames have been specified with adequate
P q
blocking and reinforcement provisions to eliminate exposed throughbolting of hardware
items. Doors installed with exposed throughbolts will be rejected and replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
2.14 FINISHES
A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Finishes of the same designation, that come from 2 or more
sources, shall match when the items are viewed at arms length and approximately 2' apart.
Unless otherwise scheduled, match each hardware item in a single hardware set with the
scheduled latch or lock set finish. Painting of BHMA 600 (USP) surfaces is required and is
specified under Division 9 Section 'Painting':
C. Designations: The abbreviations used to schedule hardware finishes are generally BHMA
(Federal Standards where indicated in parenthesis) designations. Comply with base material
and finish requirements indicated by the following:
1. BHMA 600 (USP): Primed for painting.
2. BHMA 626 (US26D): Satin chromium plated.
3. BHMA 630 (US32D): Satin stainless steel.
4. US28: Satin aluminum. •
DOOR HARDWARE 08711-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
C.
•
•
Gensler � ;
07.2022.012
Alum.: Aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION.
Bank of America : Point Happy
LaQuinta, CA
A. Install hardware for non -labeled and non -smoke door assemblies in accordance DHI A115 (for
steel doors and frames, and hardware manufacturers installation instructions for doors and
frames fabricated from other than steel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at the following heights, unless specifically
indicated on the drawings or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Locks and Latches: 38 inches (956 mm) to center of lever from finish floor.
2. Door Pulls: 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to center of grip._ Pull bases centered
on door stiles, unless otherwise indicated.
3. = Horizontal Push/Pull Bar: 42 inches (1067 mm) from finish floor to center of pull/pull.
Push/Pull bases centered on door_ stiles, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Butt Hinges: 10 inches (254 mm) to bottom of lowest hinge from finish floor; 5 inches
(127 mm) to top of upper hinge from top of door; space intermediate hinges equally
between lower and upper hinges.
5. Deadbolts: Not more than 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to operating trim.
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
overhead surface closers for maximum degree of opening obtainable. Place on room side of
corridor doors, secondary corridor side of doors between corridors. Where cutting and fitting
are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be finished,
coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing
work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have
been completed on substrates involved.
C. Do not install permanent key cylinders in locks until the time of preliminary acceptance by the
Owner. At the time of preliminary acceptance, and in the presence of the Owner's
representative, permanent key all lock cylinders. Record and file all keys in .the key control
system specified, and turn system over to Owner for sole possession and control.
D. Key control storage system shall be installed where directed by the Owner.
E. Thresholds: Thresholds shall be secured with a minimum of 3 fasteners per. single door width
and 6 fasteners per double door width, with a maximum spacing of 12 inches (305 mm).
Minimum screw size shall be No. 10 length, dependent on job conditions, with a minimum of
3/4 inch (19 mm) thread engagement into the floor or anchoring device used. Screw heads to
be countersunk and flush with face of threshold. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors
in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
DOOR HARDWARE
Copyright 2003 Gensler
:. , 08711-7
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper •
operation or function of every hardware component. Replace hardware components that cannot
be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for building
stack pressures and final operation of forced air mechanical equipment and to comply with
referenced accessibility requirements.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean hardware components as
necessary to restore proper finish. Provide protection during the progress of the work and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is in perfect working order and without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08711
DOOR HARDWARE 08711-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
IBJ
•
•
i,Gensler *, i j • ..
07.2022.012.-
SECTION
7.2022.012.-
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
Bank of America : Point Happy
La..Quinta, CA
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications,. including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Doors.
2. Interior borrowed lites.
3. Storefront framing.
B. Refer to Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts" for requirements applicable
to single subcontract responsibility for glazing.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide and install watertight and airtight glazing systems capable of withstanding
thermal movement and wind and impact loads without failure of any kind, including loss or
breakage of glass, failure of seal or gaskets, exudation of glazing sealants, and excessive
deterioration of glazing materials.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses and heat treatments indicated are minimum requirements.
Glazing details shown are for convenience of detailing only and are -to be confirmed by the
Contractor relative to cited standards and final framing details. Confirm glass thicknesses and
heat treatments, verified by analysis, as required to meet the performance and testing
requirements specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts".
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide insulating glass with performance
properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data:
1. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a
nominal 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) wide interspace.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.
Thermal Stress and Wind Load Analyses: Submit the following from the glass manufacturer:
1. Thermal stress analysis for each exterior glass unit type, each building elevation. The
analysis shall clearly indicate all the expected service temperature ranges and the effects
of partial and full shading on the glass. Append to the thermal stress analysis a statement
from the glass manufacturer that based upon this analysis that the resulting thermal
stresses will not reduce the specified "statistical probability of breakage".
GLAZING
Copyright 2003 Gensler
08800-1
Gensler
07.2022.012
2. Wind load analysis for each glass unit type
statistical probability of breakage at the
specified statistical probability of breakage.
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
. The analysis shall clearly indicate that the
design wind pressure will not exceed the
C. Samples: Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and locations in the work. Furnish
samples of the following:
1. Except for clear glass, submit samples of each glass type specified, in the form of 12-
inch- (300 -mm-) square Samples.
2. Submit samples of each glass type specified where production run variations, and defects
are expected.
D. Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Glass and Glass Accessories: Obtain glass and glass accessories from
one source for each product indicated below:
1. Primary glass.
2. Heat treated glass.
3. Insulating glass.
4. Glazing gaskets.
C. Safety Glass: Comply with the applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and
regulations of Federal and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction, wherever requirements
conflict the more stringent shall be required. Obtain approvals from all such authorities. As a
minimum provide Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
(Consumer Product Safety Commission "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials",
as published in the Code of Federal Regulations), ANSI Z97.1, and UBC Standard 24-2.
Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with
certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
I. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual."
2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM -3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines."
E. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass
Certification Council (IGCC).
GLAZING 08800-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
C,
•
t
• -Gensler r Bank of America : Point Happy
'07.2022.012: La Quinta, CA
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.6 • PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: . . Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
RKEEMENWIETRIT017MIM
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner
and signed by insulating -glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating -
glass units whose hermetic seal has failed within specified warranty period indicated below.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass. Upon notification of such deterioration within the warranty period furnish replacement
glass units for failed glass units at the convenience of the Owner.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
•
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to the drawings for the extent of glass types and locations. Glass types indicated on the
drawings are keyed to the Part 3 Glass .Schedule Articles at the end of this section. The
Contractor shall confirm the levels of heat treatment required for each glass type scheduled as
contained in Articles Performance Requirements, Submittals and Quality Assurance.
2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as
indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
A. General: Heat treat glass where the need is determined by thermal stress analyses, by wind load
analyses, and where required to meet safety glazing requirements.
B. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave -distortion parallel to
bottom edge of installed glass unit.
GLAZING '108800-3
08800-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
C. Sizes and Cutting: Prior to heat treatment, cut glass to required sizes as determined by accurate
measurement of openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and
process edges in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat
edges in the field.
D. Heat -Strengthened Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C1048 Kind HS. Surface
compression range shall be between 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) and 7,000 psi (48 MPa).
E. Fully Tempered Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C1048 Kind FT and meeting the
requirements of ANSI Z97.1. Surface compression shall be equal to or greater than 10,000 psi
— (69 MPa).
F. Flatness Tolerances: All heat treated glass shall be fabricated to the following flatness
tolerances:
1. Overall Bow and Warp: Not greater than the maximum bow and warp tolerances in any
direction as listed in ASTM C1048 Table 2. Localized warp limited to 1/32 inch in 12
inches (0.79 mm in 304.8 mm).
2. Roll Ripple: The deviation from flatness at any peak (peak to valley deviation) shall not
exceed 0.003 inches for 6 mm (0.0762 mm for 6 mm) thick glass.
2.4 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating -Glass Units: Preassembled units, with dehydrated entrapped air, consisting of sheets
of glass hermetically sealed at all edges with a polyisobutylene primary and a silicone •
secondary elastomeric sealant. The lites of glass shall be separated by dessicant containing
aluminum spacers. All insulating glass units shall be IGCC certified to comply with
ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the
Insulating -Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass where needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety
glass is indicated.
B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating -
Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are
measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. * .
2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. Gasket and Blocking Wet Glazing Materials: Silicone, compatible with and adherent to each
material it will be in contact with, as recommended by the manufacturer to fulfill performance
requirements.
2.6 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets:
GLAZING
Copyright 2003 Gensler
�11
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1. Neoprene:. Continuous extruded neoprene with, cross sectional. profile, physical
•
properties, -and tolerances as recommended by the entrance and storefront manufacturer,
and as required, to comply with the performance requirements specified and shown all in
compliance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C864, Option II.
•
•
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Continuous extruded expanded foam with, cross sectional profile,
physical properties, and tolerances as recommended by the curtain wall manufacturer, and as
required, to comply with the performance requirements specified and shown all in compliance
with the applicable provisions of ASTM C509, Option II, Type II; provide the following:
1. Neoprene.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces, and wet glazing materials,
contacted in installation. -
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Silicone complying with ASTM C1115 (Type C), blocks, 85 +/- 5 Shore A
durometer hardness, 1/16 inch (1.5 -mm) less than the channel width, and length based on the
square footage of the glass unit to be supported in accordance with GANA standards and glass
manufacturer recommendations but not less than 4 inches (101.6 mm).
D. Edge Blocks: Silicone complying with ASTM C1115 (Type C), blocks, 65 +/- 5 Shore A
durometer hardness, minimum 4 inches (101.6 mm) long and sized to allow 1/8 inch (3.18 mm)
clearance between edge of glass and block.
2..8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for
Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with
written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with
system performance requirements.
Edge and Surface Conditions: Comply with the recommendations of AAMA "Structural
Properties of Glass" for "clean-cut" edges, except comply with manufacturer's
recommendations when they are at variance therewith.
B. . Cutting: - Do not nip glass edges. -Edges may be wheel cut or .sawed and seamed at
manufacturer's option. For glass to be cut at site, provide glass 2 inches (50.8 mm) larger than
required in both dimensions, so as to facilitate cutting of clean cut edges without the necessity
of seaming or nipping. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade heat-treated glass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
GLAZING
Copyright 2003 Gensler
08800=5
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass framing, with glazier and glass framing erector present, for compliance with the •
following:
1. Compliance with the specified manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those
for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing stops, glazing channels, and rabbets which will be in contact with the glazing
materials immediately before glazing. Loose particles present or resulting from fabrication and
cleaning shall be removed by blowing out joints with oil free compressed air, or by vacuuming
joints. Remove protective coatings, oils from cutting and drilling operations, and residue on
metallic surfaces with solvents that leave no residue. Do not allow solvent to air dry without
wiping. Use only lint free towels for wiping of surfaces. Wipe metal surfaces with IPA
(isopropyl alcohal) or xylene unless otherwise required by the wet glazing manufacturer for
proper compatibility and adhesion.
Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds. When priming, comply with wet glazing
manufacturers recommendations. 0
B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any pieces which are
improperly sized or have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage.
Remove labels from glass immediately after installation.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
All glass units shall be installed in accordance with the glass manufacturers
recommendations.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project
conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
•
GLAZING 08800-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
is
•
Gensler Bank of America: Point Happy
07.2022.012 4� La Quinta, CA
D. Apply primers to surfaces indicated to receive glazing materials.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless more stringent requirements are recommended by glass manufacturer.
Place blocks to allow water passage to weep holes.
1. For Glass Units Less Than 72 inches (1830 mm): Locate setting blocks at sill one-
quarter of the width in from each end of the glass unless otherwise recommended by the
glass manufacturer.
2. For Glass Units 72 inches (1830 mm) or Greater: Locate setting blocks at sill one-eighth
of the width in from each end of the glass, but not less than 6 inches (150 nun), unless
otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide edge blocking to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, sized
and located to comply with the glass manufacturers recommendations and the requirements.in
referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics, producing the
greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance on the entire exterior wall elevation.
1. Set glass units with void between edge of units and glazing channel.
2. Orient and install insulating glass units made up with one light of tinted glass with the
untinted glass light on the inboard (building) side.
I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize gasket on
opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement..
J. Miter cut gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket
manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away and join with sealant recommended by
gasket manufacturer which will provide an airtight and watertight seal at the joint.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.. -If, despite such protection, .contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. -
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete surfaces at frequent intervals
during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
GLAZING
Copyright 2003 Gensler
08'800-7
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way and
from any source, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.5 GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Monolithic Uncoated Clear Float Glass (Interior Glass Only): Provide Type I (transparent
glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) glass lites for interior glass units.
B. Insulating Glass (Exterior Glass Only): Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide
uncoated insulating -glass units complying with the following:
1. Product: `PPG', Solarban 80 Insulating Glass.
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6 mm.
3. Interspace Content: Air.
4. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass, Class 2 (tinted, heat absorbing,
and light reducing).
6. Visible Light Transmittance: 47%.
7. Winter Nighttime U -Value: 0.29.
8. Shading Coefficient: 0.27.
•
END OF SECTION 08800
•
GLAZING 08800-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler 1, ." tF ,
07.2022.012
• SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Portland cement plaster (stucco).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Samples: Submit samples at least 12 inches (300 mm) square of each type of finish indicated;
in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations
expected in these characteristics.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain plaster materials from a single manufacturer to ensure
consistency in quality of performance and appearance.
B. Machine applied plaster work shall be performed by a firm having 3 years experience in the
machine application of plaster on projects similar to this Project.
C. Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply
with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, where standards conflict
the more stringent shall apply:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. ASTM C 1063 "Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Based
Plaster."
b. _ ASTM C 926 "Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster."
2. "Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual" published by the Portland Cement
Association.
D. Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, construct panels for each type of finish and
application required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
2. Erect mockups 48 by 48 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) by full thickness in presence of
Architect using materials, including support system, and control joints, indicated for final
Work.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER -09220-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
3. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed. •
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of plaster Work.
6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed portland cement plaster Work.
a. When directed, remove mockups from Project site.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or bundles,
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, and lot number.
B. Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster
application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental
conditions before, during, and after plaster application.
B. Cold -Weather Requirements: Provide heat and protection, temporary or permanent, as required
to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for at least 24 hours after set has occurred. Is
Distribute heat uniformly to prevent concentration of heat on plaster near heat sources; provide
deflection or protective screens.
C. Warm -Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and
from strong flows and blasts of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as
required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable
coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as
required.
D. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) or
below.
1. Do not apply plaster to frozen base or to base containing frost. Plaster mixes shall not
contain frozen ingredients.
E. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plastering. Provide
temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on
other work.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESSORIES
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
Copyright 2003 Gensler
69220-2
•
-Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
A. -General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated
• below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
1. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) _ minimum coating
designation.
B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large -mesh, diamond -metal lath fabricated from zinc -
alloy or welded -wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475 -inch- (12 -mm-) diameter, zinc -coated
(galvanized) wire, weighing not less than 1.75 lb./s.y., and specially formed to reinforce
external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster
encasement.
C. Cornerbeads: 1/8" Small nosed comerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with
minimum 2-7/8" expanded flanges of large -mesh diamond -metal lath allowing full plaster
encasement.
1. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
D. Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with minimum 3-1/8" expanded flanges of the following
material:
1. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
E. Strip Lath Reinforcement: Minimum 6" wide, flat, diamond mesh, expanded metal lath
manufactured from zinc -coated (galvanized) carbon steel sheet weighing not less than 1.75
lb/ydZ.
F. Control Joints: Prefabricated one piece folded pair of zinc alloy nonperforated screeds in
M -shaped configuration, with solid minimum 3/4" wide flanges and a minimum 1/4" wide
expansion joint. Provide with removable plastic tape for temporary expansion slot protection.
G. Foundation Sill Screed: Manufacturer's, standard profile designed for use at sill plate line to
form plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting damp earth, fabricated from. zinc -coated
(galvanized) steel sheet.
H. Lath and Accessory Attachment Devices: Hot dipped galvanized coated devices of material and
type required by referenced standards and recommended by lath and accessory manufacturers
for secure attachment of lath and accessories to masonry and concrete substrates.
2.2 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Base -Coat Cements: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I.
B. Stucco Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory -packaged stucco, including portland
cement, aggregate, and other proprietary ingredients.
1. Oriental Finish Exterior Stucco; U.S. Gypsum.
i
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER _09220-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
C. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S; or special hydrated
lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S. •
D. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897, Article `Sand Aggregate for Base Coat.'
E. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline -resistant (AR) glass or polypropylene fibers, complying with
ASTM C 1116, 1/2" to 2" long, free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement
plaster. Provide the quantity per batch in strict accordance with the published directions of the
fiber manufacturer; in no case shall more than 2 lb of fiber per cubic foot of cementitious
material be permitted.
F. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Drinkable and free of substances capable of affecting
plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
2.3 PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish -coat mixes as applicable to plaster
bases, materials, and other requirements indicated.
B. Base Coats: Proportion materials for respective base coats to comply with the following
requirements. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to following scratch coat mix after ingredients have mixed at
least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions but do not exceed
1 lb/cu. ft. (16 kg/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities
accordingly to maintain workability.
2. Base Coats for Two -Coat Work over Concrete Unit Masonry:
a. 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 3 to 4 cubic feet of base coat sand, fibered.
C. Stucco Finish Coats: Add water only; comply with stucco manufacturer's written instructions.
2.4 MIXING
A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials, with sufficient water to produce
workable consistency and uniform color, for plasters to comply with applicable referenced
application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer.
1. Hand mixing is not permitted.
B. Base coat plasters that have stiffened because of evaporation of water shall be permitted to be
tempered one time only to restore required consistency. Plaster not used within 1-1/2 hour from
start of initial mixing shall be discarded.
C. Stucco finish coat plasters shall not be tempered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
Copyright 2003 Gensler
09220-4
•
, Gensler t t` . , ; , Bank of America : Point Happy
.07.2022.012 ,1 La .Quints, CA
3.1 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING
• A. Clean plaster bases and substrates for'direct application of plaster, removing loose material and
substances that may impair the Work.
•
B. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces;
1. coordinate with scratch -coat work.
C. Flashing: Refer to Division 7 Section 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM for
installing flashing as indicated.
D. Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen concrete unit masonry surfaces
that are indicated for direct plaster application. Determine and apply amount of moisture and
degree of saturation that will result in optimum, and uniform, suction for plastering.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES
A. General: Install plaster accessory materials in accordance with ASTM C 1063, this
specification, and the plaster accessory manufacturer, where standards conflict the more
stringent shall apply. Provide accessories in single lengths where the length of the accessory
does not exceed the manufacturer's standard lengths. Attach accessories securely to plaster
bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering. Securely fasten 'with
hardened galvanized screws. Space fastenings not more than 8" apart and staggered.
1. External (Outside) Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners and angles.
Set beads level, plumb and true to line.
2. Terminations of Plaster: _
a. Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. Set beads level, plumb and true to
line.
b. At bottom of exterior walls install a drip screed and through wall flashing to drain
away any water that may get behind the plaster.
3. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying
with the.following criteria and approved by Architect:
a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly
behind plaster membrane.
b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet (5.4 m) in either direction
. = or a length -to -width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.
C. Wall Areas: Not more than 100 sq. ft..(9, sq. m) in area.
d. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height
of plaster field.
,PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER -_09220-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America: Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
4. Strip Lath Reinforcement: At corners of openings exceeding an area of 2 s.f., install
strips of metal lath 6" wide x 24" long at a 45 degree angle. •
3.3 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with
ASTM C 926, the manufacturers recommendations, and the following.
Each plaster coat shall be applied to an entire wall without interruption to avoid cold
joints and abrupt changes in the uniform appearance of succeeding coats. Wet plaster
shall abut set plaster at naturally occurring interruptions in the plane of plaster, such as
corner angles, rustications, openings, and control joints where this is possible.
2. Joinings, where necessary, shall be cut square and straight and not less than 6 inches
away from a joining in the preceding coat.
B. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials.
C. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials. The amount of water used
in the plaster mix shall be determined by the applicator. Factors such as suction of base, or of
the previous coat, water content of the aggregate, drying conditions, and finishing operations
shall be considered in determining water usage. Use of excessive water may result in dropouts,
fall or slide off, excessive shrinkage, high porosity, and lower strength.
D. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet Q mm in 3
m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 -foot (3-m) straightedge •
placed at any location on surface.
E. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will
be damaged by installation of other.
F. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster
ground, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners square and true with
plaster faces on exterior work.
H. Number of Coats: Apply plaster in two (2) coats over concrete unit masonry (solid) bases and
as follows. Apply plaster by hand or machine application except limit machine application to
basecoats.
Scratch (Base) Coat: The first (scratch) coat shall be applied with sufficient material and
pressure to ensure tight contact and complete coverage of the solid base, to a nominal
thickness of 3/8". Where masonry surfaces vary in plane, plaster thickness required to
produce level surfaces shall not be required to be uniform. As soon as the first (scratch)
coat becomes firm, the entire surface shall be scored in the horizontal direction only.
2. Stucco Finish Coat: Apply a thin coat well ground into base coat and immediately
double back, filling out to a uniform thickness of approximately 1/8". Work from wet
unset edges to complete an entire unbroken area in one continuous operation to eliminate •
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler . .
07.2022.012.
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
joinings. Trowel uniformly level before starting to texture. Do not over trowel as this
may cause color to concentrate on the surface. When material stiffens finish with a float
to an even, fine grained texture; Do not use water in floating or texturing.
I. Control Joints: Remove plastic tape at control joint slots.
J. Curing:
1. Basecoat: Rewetting of the plaster base coat will need to be increased as required for the
hot, dry, and windy environment in which the project is to be. installed. Moist cure by
applying a fine fog spray of water as frequently as required, generally twice daily in the
morning and evening. Exercise care to avoid erosion damage to the Portland cement
basecoat surfaces.
2. In order to provide more intimate contact and bond between coats and to reduce rapid
water loss, the second coat should be applied as soon as the first coat has developed
enough rigidity to resist cracking or other physical damage when the finish coat is
applied.
3. Stucco Finish Coat: After setting, fog spray surface with water periodically for several
days to cure finish and help prevent glazed spots and lime bloom in accordance with the
finish plaster manufacturers recommendations.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
• A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work.
Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point -up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built
into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles,
excessive crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, excessive pinholes,
and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.
•
B. Sand smooth -troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arrises.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on
other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be
plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. When
plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster
debris.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER _ _. 09220-7
Copyright 2003 Gensler -
•
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gypsum board assemblies.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance:
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1. Typical Walls: All standard wallboard areas shall be constructed for deflection not to
exceed 1/240 of the wall height when subjected to a positive and negative pressure of 5
psf.
2. Walls with Ceramic Tile Finish: All standard wallboard areas to receive ceramic tile
finishes shall be constructed for deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the wall height when
subjected to a positive and negative pressure of 5 psf.
3. Ceilings, bulkheads, sous, ceiling transitions, ledges, and coves shall be constructed for
a deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the distance between supports.
4. All exterior soffits shall be constructed for a deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the
distance between supports when subjected to an upward and downward pressure as
required by IBC 2000, Exposure B, using a Minimum Basic Wind Speed of 90 mph.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples for the following products:
I. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
B. Calculations: Submit, for information only, complete engineering data for design of exterior
soffits bearing the seal of a licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of Arizona.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
I. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to •
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. STC -Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA -600, "Fire Resistance
Design Manual."
C. Single -Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other
panel products from a single manufacturer.
D. Single -Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the
same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer
acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or
otherwise damage metal corner beads, trim, track, and studs.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installation of wallboard joint treatments shall not start when outside temperature is below 55
degrees F, unless building is enclosed and heated to maintain a continuous and uniform
temperature of not less than 55 degrees F, from one week prior to beginning of joint treatment
until joint treatment is completed and thoroughly dry. Ventilation, either, natural or supplied by
fans, circulators or air conditioning systems shall be provided to remove excess moisture during
joint treatment. Temperature requirements may be waived only on recommendation of
wallboard materials manufacturer.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. General: For fire rated assemblies, provide materials, including accessories and fasteners
produced by one manufacturer, or, when products of more than one manufacturer are used in a
rated system, they shall be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 STEEL EXTERIOR SOFFIT FRAMING
•
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler - „
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. , General: Provide steel framing members sized and spaced as indicated but not less than that
• required .to comply with ASTM C 754 under the maximum deflection conditions specified
under Article `Assembly Performance Requirements'.
B. Tie Wire For Tying Furring Channels to Runner Channels: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc
coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0625 -inch- (1.59 -mm-) diameter wire.
C. Hanger Attachments to Overhead Concrete Decks: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion resistant materials, with eyepins, clips, or other devices for attaching hangers
and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by the complete
soffit system.
D. Hangers: Galvanized round steel threaded or flat strap types, sized as required to comply with
the maximum deflection conditions specified under Article `Assembly Performance
Requirements' for the maximum soffit areas to be supported.
1. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel.
a. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized.
2. . Flat Hangers: Commercial -steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip
galvanized.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a minimum 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-)
wide flange, with manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant coating sized as required to
comply with the maximum deflection conditions specified under Article `Assembly
Performance Requirements' for the maximum soffit areas to be supported.
F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial -steel sheet, gauge as required to comply
with the maximum deflection conditions specified under Article `Assembly Performance
Requirements' for the maximum soffit areas to be supported.
1. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep, G60 hot-
dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM C653.
2.3 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING
A. General: Provide steel framing members sized and spaced as indicated but not less than that
required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the maximum deflection conditions specified
under Article `Assembly Performance Requirements'.
B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- (1.59 -mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- (1.21 -mm-) diameter wire.
C. Hanger Attachments to Overhead Concrete Decks: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion resistant materials, with eyepins, clips, or other devices for attaching hangers
and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by the complete
ceiling systems.
• D. Hangers: As follows:
.GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch
(4.12 -mm) diameter. •
2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel.
a. Diameter: 1/4 -inch (6.34 -mm).
b. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized.
3. Flat Hangers: Commercial -steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip
galvanized.
a. Size: 1 by 3/16 inch (25.4 by 4.76 mm) by length indicated.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538
inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) wide flange, with manufacturer's standard
corrosion -resistant coating.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm).
F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial -steel sheet with manufacturer's standard
corrosion -resistant coating.
1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538 inch bare steel thickness, with minimum '/2 inch wide
flange, 3/a inch deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C645, with flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to
form 3/16" minimum lip (return), minimum 0.0312 inch thickness of base (uncoated)
metal and minimum depth as required to suit deflection criteria.
3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) deep members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
2.4 STEEL PARTITION FRAMING
A. General: Provide steel framing members sized and spaced as indicated but not less than that
required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the maximum deflection conditions specified
under Article `Assembly Performance Requirements'.
1. In areas where top of partitions are dependent on ceiling system for lateral support,
coordinate design and installation to comply with the above deflection limitation.
2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled
over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for
minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth: is
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America: Point.Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
1. - Minimum Base Metal Thickness:
• a. Typical: As required to comply with deflection criteria.
b. Partitions Supporting Wall Mounted Casework: 16 ga. minimum.
•
2. Depth: As indicated
C. Deep -Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- (50.8 -mm-) deep flanges.
D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated
assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate
depth of studs; one of the following:
1. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak.
2. Metal -Lite, Inc.; The System.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing for fixture attachment in
length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
F. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: For channel bridging for fixture attachment or lateral bracing
provide 0.0538 -inch (1.37 -mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) wide
flange.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068 -inch- (1.73 -mm-) thick,
galvanized steel.
G. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
2. Depth: 7/8".
H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
I. Z -Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall
attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45
mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
J. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates involved; complying with the
recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.
K. Backerplates: 36 inch wide x 18 ga., galvanized per ASTM A653, G60 or heavier, length as
required, fastened to studs for the attachment of surface mounted items and accessories, at
locations indicated.,
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
2.5 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints. is
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1. Regular Type:
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type X:
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Location: Where required for fire -resistance -rated assembly.
C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular -type panels of the same thickness.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Location: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
D. Sag -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than
regular -type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 nun).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Location: Ceiling surfaces.
E. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M, with manufacturer's standard edges.
1. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type, unless otherwise shown.
2.6 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints.
B. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M.
1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
2.7 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Steel Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047; formed metal sheet steel zinc coated by hot
dipped process. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C1047:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. •
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
Gensler.
07.2022.012 `
2.8
0
Bank of America : Point Happy
La. Quinta, CA
2. LC -Bead with both face and back flanges to receive joint compound: Use at exposed
panel edges.
3. U -Bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of
joint compound: Use where indicated.
4. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with
removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated.
5. Curved -Edge Comerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering slot opening.
b. Ventilated exterior soffit perimeter reveals.
C. Aluminum Trim Accessories: Extruded aluminum trim with t/a" diameter holes in fins for
attachment to wallboard or studs; longest lengths available in profiles indicated; primed for
finish painting; sized for scheduled wallboard thickness shown.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the
recommendations of both the manufacturers of the wallboard products and joint treatment
materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape:
C.
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Exterior Soffits and Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound.
3. -Second coat: For filling over tape, beads and fasteners. Use setting -type, sandable
topping compound.
4. Third coat: For finishing over tape, beads and fasteners. Use drying -type, all-purpose
compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying -type, all-purpose compound.
Joint Compound for Exterior Soffit Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable
topping compounds.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
%09260-7
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type,
sandable topping compounds.
2.9 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
D. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow
metal door frame anchors.
E. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane fading)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of
assembly.
G. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation."
H. Wood Blocking Concealed in Partition Construction: Fire retardant treated, refer to Section
06105, MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY.
I. Metal Post for Tube Framing at Partial Height Walls: Refer to Section 05500, METAL
FABRICATIONS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, welded hollow -
metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, with installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
C7
is
Gensler . , . - _ . ..
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La..Quinta, CA
A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
• overhead structure to ensure that provisions for anchorages to building structure have been
installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings.
C7
•
3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. General: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754, ASTM C840 and the gypsum board
manufacturers recommendations, where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, backerplates, and bracing at terminations in gypsum
board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet
accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with
gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States
Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural
movement.
1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
2. Where partition framing and wall furring abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip -type
joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly while laterally
supporting the assembly.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 - INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
-2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Where structural deck is unfilled metal deck, install supplemental suspension members to
span between structural beams and joists supporting the structural deck. Size
supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by the referenced standards.
4. Secure wire hangers by looping -and wire -tying, directly to inserts that are secure and
appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
5. Secure rod, flat and angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members,
by attaching to inserts, or other devices using fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
09260-9
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members
for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet Q mm in 3.6 m) measured
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
C. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
D. Wire -tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for
assemblies indicated.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than
that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards unless more stringent
spacings are recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer.
3.5 INSTALLING STEEL EXTERIOR SOFFIT FRAMING
A. General: Install exterior soffit framing in accordance with Article `Assembly Performance
Requirements' and ASTM C754.
•
B. Provide hangers and strap iron hanger inserts necessary to support soffits below structural deck.
Give particular attention to the correct location and alignment of hangers and inserts. Frame
openings with furring strips so that recessed items finish flush. Provide cross bracing and
additional framing as required to resist wind loads. 0
C. Where structural deck is unfilled metal deck, install supplemental suspension members to span
between structural beams and joists supporting the structural deck. Size supplemental
suspension members and hangers to comply with Article `Assembly Performance
Requirements'.
D. . Provide sufficient hangers for runner channels on each side of light fixtures, access panels, and
other items penetrating the soffits.
3.6 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Install continuous runners (tracks) sized to match studs at floors, ceilings, and structural walls
and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. Secure runners to
substrates with fasteners spaced a maximum of 24" o.c. unless closer spacing is recommended
by the framing manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved. Provide fasteners
at all corners and ends of runner tracks.
B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary
not more than 1/8 inch Q mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings and at partial
•
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-10
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
'07.2022.012 1 La "Quinta, CA
height partitions. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts
• penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
1. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. Do not fasten
studs to top track to allow independent movement of studs and track.
2. For fire -resistance -rated and STC -rated partitions that extend to the underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid -structure surfaces to obtain ratings.
install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and
decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
3. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings as indicated.
4. Terminate partial height partition framing as indicated.
D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by
the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and
minimum loading requirements specified, unless more stringent requirements are recommended
by the gypsum board manufacturer:
1. Space studs 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel
can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F. Install backerplates for support of wall mounted items.
• G. Curved Partitions:
1. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2 -inch (50 -mm) intervals for
arc length. In cutting lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12
inches (300 mm) at ends of arcs. -
2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1 -inch- (25 -mm-) high -
by -thickness of track metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners.
4. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at
stud spacing recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated.
On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm)
O.C.
H. Frame door openings to comply with GA -600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable
written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb
anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to
jamb studs..
1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Install one additional stud no
more than 6" from jamb studs at single doors greater than 4'-0" and at all pairs of doors.
2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud. Provide runner track and typical
studs above door openings with studs spaced not more than 24" o.c.
3. At all welded frames with fixed anchor clips secure stud reinforcing to jamb anchor clips
with not less than two self tapping screws per clip.
4. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-11
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
I. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above •
door heads.
Z -Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced 24 inches
(610 mm) o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven
fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.
4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10 -inch (250 -mm) staples
fabricated from 0.0625 -inch- (1.59 -mm-) diameter, tie wire and inserted through slot in
web of member.
K. Stiffeners: Use two rows at third points for studs with finish one side only; one row at midpoint
for studs with finish both sides. Snap into punched web of each stud; nest laps and wire tie.
3.7 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing, General: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply
with ASTM C 840, GA -216, and the gypsum wallboard manufacturer's recommendations,
where standards conflict, the more stringent shall apply.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Single Layer Application:
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. Install ceiling
board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end
joints or avoid them entirely.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of board.
b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire -resistance -rated assembly.
D. Multilayer Application: •
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-12
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler a r.; t
07.2022.012,11
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
L On- Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
• vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face -layer, joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
2. On Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers
on walls/partitions; apply base layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles
to framing members and offset face layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated
assembly.
E. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
F. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a
substrate (other than studs, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with
gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum
panels until fastening adhesive has set.
H. Curved Partitions:
1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface
plus 12 -inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.
2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius
® prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written
recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and
other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels.
3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten
gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start
fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels
to framing with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.
4. For double -layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws
spaced 12 inches o.c.
5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment.
I. Tile Backing Panels:
I. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: For substrates indicated to receive thin -set
ceramic tile, install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to
produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
J. Apply exterior soffit board perpendicular to supports, with end'joints staggered over supports.
Install with t/2" ventilated perimeter reveal. Fasten with corrosion resistant screws as
recommended by the'manufacturer.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-13
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
K. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels.
Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) •
of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
L. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining
panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field -cut edges abut field -cut edges and
ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over
different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where
possible.
M. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
N. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
O. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
P. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for all doors. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip
and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames.
Q. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
2. Where partitions intersect joists, interior and exterior wall kickers, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to
fit profile formed by joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- (6.4- to
9.5 -mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
3. Where chase walls are shown, provide bracing between parallel rows of studs. Unless
otherwise shown, provide gypsum wallboard braces no less than 1/2" thick x 12" wide
and cut to width of chase. Locate at quarter points in wall height between each pair of
parallel studs. Fasten with not less than 3 screws at each stud.
R. Isolate perimeter of non -load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
S. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing
off sound -flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing
partitions above acoustical ceilings.
T. Cut openings in wallboard for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close
tolerances so that edges will be covered by plates and escutcheons. Cut both face and back
paper. Do not install electrical outlets back to back on opposing sides of partitions.
•
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-14
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 ! La Quinta, CA
U. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.
3. Install fasteners not less than 3/8" from ends or edges of wallboard sheets, spacing
fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges.
4. Begin fastening from center of wallboard and proceed toward edges and corners.
5. Apply pressure on surface of wallboard adjacent to fasteners being driven to ensure that
wallboard will be secured tightly to supporting members.
a. Drive fastener with shank perpendicular to face of board.
b. Drive screws with a power screwdriver as recommended by wallboard
manufacturer. Set heads of screws slightly below surface of paper without cutting
paper.
3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: Fasten trim accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for type,
length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install corner beads at external corners. -
C. Install interior trim accessories where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or
• semiexposed. Provide interior trim accessories with face flange formed to receive joint
compound.
D. Install aluminum trim accessories where indicated.
•
E. Install control and expansion joints at soffit locations indicated, and where not indicated
according to ASTM C 840, and in locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints, flanges of interior trim and aluminum
trim accessories, interior angles, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and
elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum
board finish indicated. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of
type indicated. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840 and GA -214, for locations indicated:
J
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-15
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies
and sound -rated assemblies as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer.
2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges where water resistant gypsum backing board panels are substrate for
ceramic, or stone, tile and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for
fire -resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies as recommended by the
gypsum board manufacturer.
Level 5 (For Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Wall Coverings and Paints): Embed tape
and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and
trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface at exposed walls
to receive wall covering or paint.
E. Exterior Soffit Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as
exposed soffit board.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean floors of all wallboard debris and leave broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools
and other equipment are to be removed upon completion of the work.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09260
•
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-16
Copyright 2003 Gensler
. <Genslec
07.2022.012:.'
SECTION 09310 -,CERAMIC TILEIs
4
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. This Section includes ceramic tile.
1.2 SUBMITTALS _
A. Samples: Submit samples of the following:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each
color and finish required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square and mounted on rigid panel.
Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.
3. Metal edge strips in 6 -inch (150 -mm) lengths.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
• Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
CERAMIC TILE _ : -' : 09310-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide tile matching the Architect's samples which have
been selected from the product lines and manufacturers indicated in the Finish Schedule
in the drawings.
B. Ceramic Floor and wall Tile Factory -mounted flat tile; provide, trim shapes matching
characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat
tile.
1. Module Size: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).
3. Product: As indicated in the finish schedule of the drawings.
C. Porcelin Tile: Provide trim shapes matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and
coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile to the extent indicated.
1. Facial Dimensions:
a. As indicated in the finish schedule of the drawings..
2. Products:
a. As indicated in the finish schedule of the drawings..
D. Crack Suppression Membrane (Anti -Fracture): LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete Blue
92 Anti -Fracture Membrane. 0
2.2 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Prepackaged dry -mortar mix combined with styrene -butadiene -rubber liquid -latex additive. For
wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition
to the other requirements in ANSI Al 18.4.
B. Polymer -Modified Tile Grout: ANSI Al 18-7.
1. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene -butadiene rubber in liquid -latex form for addition
to prepackaged dry -grout mix.
a. G1: Mapei Classic Collection #39 Ivory.
b. G2: Mapei Classic Collection #11 Sahara Beige.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sanitary Sealant: Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
r�
CERAMIC TILE 09310-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler w_ _ t ;
07.2022.012...
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Metal Edge Strips: Provide extruded aluminum transition and reducer metal edge stripping in
• single lengths wherever possible, keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum and of
height required to protect exposed edges of tile. Provide in quantities and locations as job
required based upon the recommended good practice. of the industry; include in every location
where tile terminates and other flooring continues.
1. Schulter Trim Transition #H-10; M-100 brushed aluminum finish
B. Grout Sealer: Porous Plus as manufactured by Miracle Sealants and Abrasives Co.
2.5 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions. ;
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present:
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and
curing compounds. Grind concrete substrates to remove films, sealing, and curing
compounds if they are determined to be present on the substrate.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove paint, coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that are incompatible
with tile -setting materials.
B. Blending: Blend tiles for color blending at Project site before installing.
1. Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of the building (i.e.
corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each other, etc.).
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL -
A. Extend the work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
• obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
L Cut field tile, not trim shapes.
B. Accurately_ form intersections and.returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring •
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
C. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile
fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize the cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
D. Expansion Joints: Locate sealant filled expansion joints where recommended by the
manufacturers of mortar and tile materials but not less than the requirements of TCA EJ171, and
as accepted by the Architect. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,
and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
E. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 0
3.4 CRACK -SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack -suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to
produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate at all slab control joints.
3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule,
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation
standards.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Quarry and Paver Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).
C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
D. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout -sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove
excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. •
CERAMIC TILE 0931'0-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
IBJ
•
Gensler f.: Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012... La. Quinta, CA
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall
Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI
setting -bed standards.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic. Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
2.. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
3.8 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior floor installation on concrete; thin -set mortar; TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5.
1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. Provide crack suppression membrane
at all concrete slab control joints.
2. Grout: Polymer -modified grout.
3.9 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior wall installation over gypsum board; thin -set mortar; TCA W243 and ANSI A108.5.
L. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
2. . Grout: Polymer -modified grout.
END OF SECTION 09310
.CERAMIC TILE
Copyright 2003 Gensler
09310-5
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
• SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panel ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples for each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Samples shall show the full range of color and
texture variations to be expected in the final installation.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 -inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 -inch- long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer, with not less than 5 years experience in the
installation of materials specified, and who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Performance Requirements: In areas where gypsum wallboard partitions are dependent on the
ceiling suspension system for lateral support, design and install suspension system components
to sustain the imposed load .from the completed partition system including a minimum inward
and outward pressure of 5 psf normal to the plane of the wall.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed •
(building exterior doors and windows are in place and glazed) and weatherproof, wet work
(painting, drywall, interior tilework, concrete, and concrete leveling) in spaces is complete and
dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are
maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish and store at the site where directed, 2% of each type of acoustic panel installed in the
Project, packaged in manufacturer's unopened cartons and identified as to contents.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Basis of Design: Wet formed mineral fiber acoustical panels with factory applied acrylic latex •
painted finish, complying with ASTM E1264 Classification Type III, Form 1, Pattern E1. UL
listed with a flame spread rating of 25 or less — Class A, beveled tegular edged, CAC range of
35 — 39 (ASTM E1414 for transmission loss), NRC range of .65 to .75 (ASTM C423 for sound
absorption), non -directional fissured, LR grade 1.
a. Manufacturers and Products: One of the following:
1) As indicated in the finish schedule in the drawings.
2) As indicated in the finish schedule in the drawings.
b. Size: 24" x 24".
C. Thickness: 3/a".
2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Grid and Molding Finish and Color: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied white
finish.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
U
r
Gensler rs - Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012. La. Quinta, CA
C. Hanger Attachments to Overhead Structural Decks: Suitable for. application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with eyepins, clips, or other devices for attaching
hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load
indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung.
1. Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005
mm) for Class SC service condition (mild).
D. Hangers: As follows:
1. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following
requirements: .
a. Zinc -Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
b. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 12 ga. diameter for hanger wire.
2. Hanger Rods: ASTM A510, mild carbon steel.
a. Diameter: t/a-inch.
b. Protective Coating: ASTM A153/A153M, hot dip galvanized.
3. Flat Hangers: Commercial -sheet steel, ASTM A653/A653M, G60, hot dip galvanized.
a. Size: 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.
E. Carrying Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled steel channels, 1-1/2", 475 lbs. Per 1000 linear ft.
F. Moldings and Trim Accessories: Types and = profiles as indicated, or if -.not indicated,
manufacturers standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge
details and suspension systems -specified; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish
as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners; provide in longest standard
single piece lengths.
1. Shadow Molding: Provide '/2" x t/2" metal shadow line reveal at edges of ceiling fields
where they meet vertical walls and columns. Provide outside and inside corner molding
accessories to accommodate corner transitions.
2. F Moldings: Provide F moldings at ceiling breaks, soffits, bulkheads, and changes in
elevation other than vertical walls and columns to the extent indicated.
G. Clips: Provide support clips, clamps, fasteners, splines, and other attachment devices as
required to align components and to connect components and transfer imposed loads of
suspension system.
1. Provide partition attachment clips, for reveal edge panels, and fasteners for areas where
partition ceiling runners are secured to the ceiling suspension system.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS _.:. `09511-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
2. Provide attachment clips for runner to angle molding to avoid use of pop rivets.
3. Provide grid converter accessories as required to change main tee direction 90 degrees is
from adjacent main tee.
4. Provide light fixture clips.
5. Provide hold down clips at entryways to reduce flutter as required.
H. Suspension System:
1. Narrow -Face, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from hot dip galvanized coated, cold -rolled steel sheet, with prefinished baked on
enamel finished 9/16" wide exposed metal flanges with '/a" wide center recess; other
characteristics as follows:
a. Face Design: Narrow face with t/a" center regress reveal.
b. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system.
C. Exposed Metal Finish: Steel sheet painted to match color of acoustical panel.
d. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Armstrong; Silouette XL 9/16" Bolt Slot — t/a" Reveal Exposed Grid.
2) USG; Fineline DXF.
3) Chicago Metallic Corp.; Ultraline 3500 System.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS .095114
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Layout the work to center board pattern both directions around work points shown in each major
space or room as shown on the drawings or directed and, where possible, adjust pattern so that
edge pieces will be not less than 1/2 unit in width.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per
manufacturer's instructions, the CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook".
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
2. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA
"Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers as follows:
Fasten hangers to anchors that extend into structural decks. Space hangers not more than
48" o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers; and provide hangers not
more than 6" from ends of each member. Provide additional hangers for support of
fixtures and other items including but not limited to light fixtures and diffusers, as
required to prevent overloading of deck attachment, eccentric deflection or rotation of
supporting runners.
2. Hangers:
a. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers directly to drilled in anchors (eye
screws), or other devices that are secure, and are appropriate for substrate.
b. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to drilled in anchors, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the
type of hanger involved.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
4. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
is
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed. Locate so that sealant will be concealed after •
installation.
2. Align moldings accurately and fasten securely to construction by screw attaching to
substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with
ceiling suspension system.
a. Join straight runs of shadow moldings at corners with prefabricated outside, and
inside, corner shadow molding accessories and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Clip runners to angle moldings do not use exposed fasteners. Finish to lines and levels shown,
with maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the span between supports. Laser level
accurately in all directions, leveling to a tolerance of 1/8" noncumulative. Remove and replace
dented, bent, or kinked members.
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Run grain of units in one direction as accepted on shop drawings.
Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit.
1. For reveal -edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
•
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler , ,,• a t, s,
07.2022.012
• SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT PRODUCTS Y
PART 1 -GENERAL
Bank of America : Point.Happy
La Quinta, CA
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes resilient floor tile, wall base, and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Tile: Submit full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor the required.
2. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Submit manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but
not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient. product color and pattern
required.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg Q. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg Q.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
• 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
RESILIENT PRODUCTS -:' 09651-1
1 Copyright 2003 Gensler x. -
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. •
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and
pattern of floor tile installed.
2. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet Q linear m) for
every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and
size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066.
1. As indicated in the finish schedule of the drawings.
B. Class: 2 (through -pattern tile).
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. As indicated in the finish schedule of the drawings
B. Type (Material Requirement): TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid).
D. Style: Cove (with top -set toe).
E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
F. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
H. Outside Corners: Job formed.
I. Inside Corners: Job formed.
J. Surface: Smooth.
•
RESILIENT PRODUCTS 09651-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
Gensler " Bank of America: Point Happy
07.2022.012. � La Quinta, CA
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Portland cement based formulation provided or
approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
1. Schulter Trim Transition #H-10; M-100 brushed aluminum finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare concrete substrates as, follows:
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Moisture, Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Apply primer to concrete slabs, if recommended by the flooring manufacturer, prior to
application of adhesive.
RESILIENT PRODUCTS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
0965:1-3
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
F. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation. 0
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless otherwise indicated.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket weave pattern).
C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, and thresholds.
Extend unexposed edges of flooring under set on bases and similar trim work.
D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce
a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
0
RESILIENT PRODUCTS 09651-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler 1,
07.2022.012 .
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
D. Do not stretch wall.base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Job -Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends
occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to
produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an
inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave
back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Metal Edge Strip Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout. length of each piece. Install edge strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash or apply floor polishes until flooring adhesives have cured unless
otherwise recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible
adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. .
a. - Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper
until Substantial Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood
panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects
• over panels without moving panels.
RESILIENT PRODUCTS _ 0965,1-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
END OF SECTION 09651
RESILIENT PRODUCTS
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
- 09651-6
C7
0
•
•
[7
C7
Gensler - a •:
'.07.2022.012.
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes carpet.
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the
applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
1. The Carpet and Rug Institute "The Carpet Specifiers' Handbook."
2. The Carpet and Rug Institute "CRI 104 Commercial Carpet Installation Standard."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the following:
1. Seam locations. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in
cabinets, and locations where cut outs are required in carpet.
2. . Dye lots, pattern types, repeats, locations, direction, and starting points per floor.
3. Type of installation.
4. Pile direction.
5. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
6. Transition details to other flooring materials.
7. Include on shop drawings dimensions which verify field conditions.
B. Samples: Submit samples showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected.
Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Label each Sample with
manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on
Drawings and in schedules. Submit the following:
1. Carpet: 24" square samples of each type of broadloom carpet required
2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12 -inch- long Samples of each type, and color,
of edge strip.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage a carpet installer, who has completed a minimum of three (3)
projects over the last 10 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated
for the project - as determined by the Architect — and which have resulted in construction with a
record of successful in service performance.
.CARPET
Copyright 2003 Gensler
--.09680-1
" '!4
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver carpeting in original mill protective wrapping with mill register numbers and tags •
attached.
B. Deliver other materials in manufacturers unopened containers identified with name, brand, type,
grade, class, and other qualifying information.
C. Store materials in a dry location, in such a manner as to prevent damage.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
A. Installation Warranty: Submit copies of written warranty signed by the carpet manufactuer and
Contractor, warranting the carpet installation, for a period of 2 years, that the carpeting will not
tear, crack, separate, deteriorate or pull loose from substrate, or experience seam failure, ripples,
scallops, pilling or puckering. i,
B. Manufacturers Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet that does not comply with the specified warranty requirements or that fails within
specified warranty period.
1.8 ATTIC STOCK AND EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Attic Stock: Package and deliver usable remnants of carpet to the building storage room as
directed by the Owner at the conclusion of the job. Include pieces of broadloom 20 square feet in
area or greater.
B. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet: Full width rolls equal to 5% of amount installed for each type indicated, but not
less than 10 s.y.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TYPES
A. Carpet Type Cl:
CARPET 09680-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
:Gensler r ; . , . Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
1. Commercial quality textured/mniti level loop broadloom carpet for glue down
• installation, with pile height of 0.133 inch, 26 oz./sq. yd. weight, density of 7037, 1/8
gauge, a thermoplastic hot melt Unibond backing, skein dyed yarn. Carpet flammability
of 0.45 critical radiant flux (CRF) or greater, passing DOC FF 1-70 pill test. Static build
up of 3.0 kV maximum. All carpet will be warranted for the following:
a. Anti -static protection for life of carpet.
b. Abrasive Wear: Carpet shall have no more than 10% face yarn loss, by weight, for
lifetime of the carpet.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Lees Carpet, MBH Collection Style #DQ580, Color 416
Tut's Treasure, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
B.. . Carpet Type C2:
1. Commercial quality textured/multi level loop broadloom carpet for glue down
installation, with pile height of 0.133 inch, 26 oz./sq. yd. weight, density of 7037, 1/8
gauge, Uniplus System I backing, skein dyed yarn. Carpet flammability of 0.45 critical
radiant flux (CRF) or greater, passing DOC FF 1-70 pill test. Static build up of 3.0 kV
maximum. All carpet will be warranted for the following:
a. Anti -static protection for life of carpet.
b. Abrasive Wear: Carpet shall have no more than 10% face yarn loss, by weight, for
lifetime of the carpet.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Lees Carpet, MBH Collection Style #DQ582, Color 416
Tut's.Treasure with Uniplus System I, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Portland -cement-based formulation provided
by or recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Do not use gypsum based compounds.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining, high solids, low VOC emitting
specifically recommended, as verified through compatibility and adhesion testing, by the carpet
manufacturer for the application shown, type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated,
that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and as follows:
1. Broadloom Installation: Permanent type adhesive.
C. Carpet Seaming Cement: Water-resistant and flame -resistant carpet adhesive for sealing raw
edges, seaming, reinforcing seams and patching. Provide fast drying, easy spreading carpet
seaming adhesive having excellent aging characteristics recommended by the carpet
manufacturer.
D. Carpet Edging: Provide extruded aluminum carpet edging in single lengths wherever possible,
keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum and of height required *to protect exposed
• edges of carpet. Provide in quantities and locations as job required based upon the
CARPET 09680-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
recommended good practice of the industry; include in every location where carpet terminates
and other flooring continues. •
1. Schulter Trim Transition #H-10; M-100 brushed aluminum finish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Prior to the installation, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the project site to review the
material selections, substrate preparations, installation procedures, coordination with other
trades, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics
related to the Work. The meeting shall include the Owner, Architect, the Contractor, the
installer, material manufacturer's representatives, and representatives of other trades or
subcontractors affected by the installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate the installation of carpet so as not to delay the occupancy of the building or interfere
with the completion of construction.
B. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to
be installed. Verify recommended limits for moisture content and alkalinity of concrete
substrates with carpet manufacturer. 0
1. Moisture Content: Verify moisture content using a standard calcium chloride crystal test
or a 1 yd. x 1 yd. clear plastic test. Perform testing at a frequency as recommended by
the carpet manufacturer. Perform testing at a frequency of not less than once every 1,000
square feet.
2. Alkalinity Test: Verify alkalinity of concrete substrates by drilling a 3/8" diameter hole
approximately 1/4" deep, remove all residue; fill with distilled water, allow water to stand
3 minutes and test with a calibrated electronic meter or Ph paper. Perform testing at a
frequency of not less than once every 1,000 square feet.
3. Alternative test procedures for moisture content and alkalinity may be acceptable subject
to the Architect's review.
C. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with the following:
1. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using
solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the carpet manufacturer
2. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the carpet
manufacturer. •
CARPET 09680-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point .Happy
La Quinta, CA
3. - Use leveling and patching compounds recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling
• cracks, holes and depressions in the substrate. Surface shall be smooth, level and at
proper elevation. Remove ridges, roughness and protrusions from concrete surfaces by
grinding.
•
•
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Direct Glue Down of Broadloom Carpet: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions, specified
industry standards and recommendations, and as required to match the accepted sample
installations.
Carpet Layout, Cutting and Edge Trim Seaming: Prior to applying adhesives, place seams
at locations indicated on accepted shop drawings. Maintain direction of pattern, texture
and lay of pile. Side to end seaming shall not be allowed. All edges of all rolls of carpet
shall be finish trimmed prior to laying to assure a perfect seam condition and carpet
match. All trimmed edges shall then be treated with latex seaming adhesive to assure that
loose and cut yarns are not left to ravel or pull out.
a. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-
in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, and thresholds. Bind or seal
cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
b. Extend carpet into closets and offsets, and under movable equipment of the rooms
and spaces shown or scheduled to receive carpet.
At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams
perpendicular to door frame in direction of traffic through doorway.
d. Cut openings in carpet for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations.
Maintain close tolerances so that edges of carpet will be covered by plates and
escutcheons.
2. Apply adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's directions.
3. Adhere carpet with a full spread of adhesive. Ensure uniform bond over the entire area.
a. Butt carpet tightly together to form seams without gaps or entrapped pile yarns and
aligned with adjoining rolls of carpet. Seams shall be pressed by hand and/or
suitable tool to produce the best possible even top pile width -to -width. Adjacent
widths of carpet must be installed to finish at exactly the same elevation.
b. - Roll carpet uniformly, removing air pockets and bubbles.
C. If the pile of the carpet has been compressed while laying in storage, so that there
appears to be a difference in color in adjacent widths of material, the Contractor
shall neutralize the pile with a steam machine and obtain a uniform pile direction
CARPET
Copyright 2003 Gensler
,. 09680-5
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
throughout by brushing the carpet while it is still damp, at no additional cost to the
Owner. •
4. Edge Strip Installation: Install edge strip at every location where edge of carpet is
exposed to traffic, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise directed by Architect
install in single lengths and secure in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
5. Traffic over adhesive installations shall be restricted until adhesive has properly cured in
accordance with the adhesive manufacturers recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: As the carpeting is installed, remove and dispose of all trimmings, excess pieces of
carpeting and laying materials from each area as it is completed. Vacuum carpeting with a
commercial vacuum, having a cylindrical brush or beater bar and high suction. Remove
adhesives, stains, and soil spots in accordance with the carpet manufacturers recommendations.
B. Protection: Protect carpeting against damage of every kind as any damaged carpeting shall be
rejected. Use non -staining cover material for protection. Tape joints of protective covering.
Plastic and polyethylene sheet protective coverings shall not be permitted over glue down
installations.
2. Remove and replace rejected carpeting with new carpeting. At the completion of the
work and when directed by the Architect, remove covering, vacuum clean carpeting and
remove soiling and stains (if any) to the satisfaction of the Architect. 0
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET 09680-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
1Gensler . , , , .. • . Bank of America: Point :Happy
07.2022.0121 La Q.uinta, CA
SECTION 09912 - PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL .
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
N.
•
B.
C.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is
not to be painted. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface
the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect
will select from standard colors and finishes available.
DEFINITIONS
Gloss ranges used in this Section include the following:
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an
85 -degree meter. -
2. Low Luster refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60 -degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60 -degree meter.
Exterior Surfaces: Exterior surfaces to be painted are defined as those surfaces which are
indicated in areas exposed to conditions which are not controlled by building heating and
cooling systems.
Interior Surfaces: Interior surfaces to be painted are defined as those surfaces which are
indicated in areas exposed to conditions which are controlled by building heating and cooling
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples for each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including primers. Use
representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen,
color, and texture are achieved.
. • PAINTING , -.'.'09912-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
Sample for location and application. •
3. Submit paint samples on 12" square of hardboard for the Architect's review of each color
and texture required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the
finish coats.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and other identifying information.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. •
PAINTING 09912-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler Bank of America: Point -Happy
07.2022.012 ` La. Quinta, CA
I. Quantity: 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each topcoat -material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).
3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
4. Kelly -Moore Paint Co. (Kelly -Moore).
5. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
6., Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one
another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on, testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will
not be acceptable.
I. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. .
C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match the Architect's samples.
2.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory -formulated high-performance latex block fillers.
I. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils (0.206 mm).
2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Latex Block Filler No. M88: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 8.1 mils (0.206 mm).
3. Coronado; 946-11 Super Kote 5000 Commercial Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry
• film thickness of not less than 8.4 mils (0.214 mm).
PAINTING -'099.12-3
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
4. ICI Dulux Paints; Bloxfil 4000-1000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 to 14.5 mils (0.178 to 0.368 mm). •
5. Kelly -Moore; 521 Fill and Prime Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 10.0 mils (0.254 mm).
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-7 SpeedEde Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler: Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 mils (0.152 to 0.318 mm).
7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils (0.203 mm).
2.4 EXTERIOR PRIlVIERS
A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory -formulated alkali -resistant acrylic -latex primer
for exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Acrylic Masonry Sealer No. 066: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm).
2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Masonry Sealer No. 077: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.7 mils (0.069 mm).
3. Coronado; 48-11 Elast-O-Meric Acrylic Masonry Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness
of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
4. ICI Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex
Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
5. Kelly -Moore; 247 Chem -Guard Acrylic Masonry Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness
of not less than 1.9 mils (0.048 mm).
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant
Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
7. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer A24W300: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
8. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Exterior Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Primer: Factory -formulated alkyd- or alkali -resistant acrylic -
latex primer for exterior application.
I. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm).
2. Coronado; 8-11 Supreme Acrylic Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex
Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 250 Color Shield Exterior Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness
of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm).
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant
Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
C. Exterior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated rust -inhibitive metal primer for exterior
application.
•
PAINTING - 09912-4
Copyright 2003 Gensler
4. j
'.Gensler ; .
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La.Quinta, CA
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051.mm).
2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer.
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
5. Sherwin-Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/1350WZ1: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
D. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer
& Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm).
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate.
E. Exterior Aluminum Primer under Alkyd Finishes: Factory -formulated acrylic -based metal
primer for exterior application.
I. , Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
2. Coronado; 180-11 High Performance Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer
& Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm).
4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 nun).
5. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Wash Primer B71Y1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm).
2.5 INTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory -formulated latex -based primer for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer
No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm).
2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer -Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness
of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied
• at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
PAINTING •'09911-5
Copyright 2003 Gensler _ .
Gensler Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
4. Kelly -Moore; 971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 nun). •
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick -Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
B. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated quick -drying rust -inhibitive alkyd -based
metal primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4130-6130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
C. Interior Zinc -Coated Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm).
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate.
2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Low -Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated low -sheen (eggshell) acrylic -latex paint
for exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
2. Coronado; 408 -Line Supreme Acrylic Satin Exterior: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Satin
Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 1245 Acry-Velvet Exterior Low Sheen Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 nun). •
PAINTING 09912-6
Copyright 2003 Gensler
ti t.rtyzN
j• �
Gensler , c- ', . .
07.2022.012 "
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1, Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Satin --Acrylic Latex:
• Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-400 Series Pitt -Tech One Pack High Performance Waterborne Satin
DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076
mm).
7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series: Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
B. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic -latex
enamel for exterior application.
L Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm).
2. Coronado; 12 -Line Supreme Acrylic Semi -Gloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi -
Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 1250 Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi -Gloss Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi -Gloss Acrylic
Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
2.7 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Flat Latex -Emulsion Size: Factory -formulated flat latex -based interior paint.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
2. Coronado; 28 Line Super Kote 5000 Vinyl Latex Flat Wall: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall
& Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 450 Pro -Wall Interior Flat Latex Wall Paint:. Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm).
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat -Latex Paint: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series: Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
B. Interior Low -Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
2. Coronado; 30 -Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Eggshell Enamel: - Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). :.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall &
Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
•
PAINTING 09912-7
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
4. Kelly -Moore; 1686 Dura-Poxy Eggshell Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness
of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).. •
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils (0.032 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg -Shell Enamel B20W200 Series:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semigloss acrylic -latex enamel for
interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel No.. 276: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
2. Coronado; 32 -Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Interior Wall &
Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
4. Kelly -Moore; 1685 Dura-Poxy Semi -Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
6. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
2.8 TRAFFIC PAINT
A. Traffic paint: Set Fast Zone Marking Paint, A303; Sherwin Williams. •
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface -applied
protection before surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to
completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
•
PAINTING 09912-8
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler _ Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La.Quinta, CA
B. Cleaning:- Before.applying paint or other_surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that
• could impair bond of the various coatings.- Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. . Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. -
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster,
surfaces to be painted: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and concrete
release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze from concrete. If hardeners or
sealers have been used to improve curing of concrete, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning, methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign substances in accordance with SSPC
SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning". After solvent cleaning prepare any bare metal surfaces by
removing all stratified rust (rust scale), all loose mill scale, all loose or non -adherent rust
and detrimental' welding deposits by methods specified in SSPC SP -3 "Power Tool
Cleaning".
a. Touch up bare areas, heads of bolts, welded surfaces which are unpainted, and
shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with
solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as
the shop coat.
b. Surfaces requiring touch up painting shall be cleaned and primed as soon as
practicable after erection and before excessive rusting or other damage occurs to
such surfaces from weather or other exposure.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents in
accordance with SSPC SP -1. "Solvent Cleaning", and pretreat in accordance with the
recommendations of SSPC "Good Painting Practice", Vol. 1, Chapter 22.
5. Gypsum Wallboard: Repair all surfaces in gypsum wallboard with wallboard joint
finishing compound or spackling compound, filled out flush and sanded smooth. Clean
all surfaces and taped joints of dust, dirt and other contaminants and be sure they are
thoroughly dry before applying paint.
D. Material Preparation: Mix and preparepaint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
L Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
PAINTING 09912-9
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface •
film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when
multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish
coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental
to formation of a durable paint film.
1. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
2. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these
areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces. Access panels, electrical panels, air diffusing outlets, supply and exhaust grilles,
louvers, exposed conduit, primed hardware items, primed outlet covers, primed wall and
ceiling plates and other items in painted areas shall be painted to match the areas in which
they occur unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a
dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
PAINTING 09912-10
Copyright 2003 Gensler
C
t
Gensler Bank of America : Point'Happy,
07.2022:012 ' La Quiinta, CA
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
• surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
D. application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool'as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
-3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish- coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.
I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no
evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections. -
K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: ,At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
1: After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
• paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
PAINTING 09912-11
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012.
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete and Stucco: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, and stucco,
substrates:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior low luster acrylic paint.
B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Provide the following finish systems over exterior gypsum
soffit board:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over an exterior alkyd- or alkali -resistant primer.
a. Primer: Exterior gypsum soffit board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior low luster acrylic paint.
C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop -primed items.
1. Full -Gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss alkyd enamel.
D. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over all exterior zinc -coated metal
surfaces that are not part of the exterior fagade system.
1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
E. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces:
1. Full -Gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under alkyd finishes. •
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss alkyd enamel.
PAINTING 09912-12
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
F. Traffic and Parking Lane and Stall Marking:
• 1. One coat Traffic Paint, minimum dry film thickness of 2.5 mils.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry:
1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum_board surfaces:
1. Low -Luster Acrylic -Enamel Finish (Typical System): Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel.
2. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish (Provide only where scheduled): Two finish coats over
a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
• C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
D. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc -coated metal
surfaces:
1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
E. All -Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas
insulation covering:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew
proof.
2. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex -emulsion size.
• 3.8 COLOR SCHEDULE
PAINTING 09912-13
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Reference to a particular manufacturer's number or color name is used only as a convenience for
the Architect in order to establish the Project color requirements. These references are not •
intended to describe the required generic paint systems. For generic paint systems
requirements, refer to the "Schedule of Exterior Painting" and .the "Schedule of Interior
Painting" as applicable to the respective conditions of use.
B. The selection of paint colors are indicated on the drawings by manufacturer and color type.
Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of the building (i.e.
corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each other, etc.).
END OF SECTION 09912
•
•
PAINTING 09912-14
Copyright 2003 Gensler
•
•
•
Gensler
07.2022.012
SECTION 10520.- FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire protection specialties.
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire -protection cabinets to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire -protection cabinets through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire -protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire -protection cabinet
indicated.
B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL -rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-1b (4.5 -kg)
nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled -steel
container.
2.2 FIRE -PROTECTION CABINETS
FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
10520-1
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of
types and capacities specified. •
B. Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind
smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
1. Cabinet Mounting: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit
style of trim indicated.
2. Trim Style: Trimless with hidden flange of same metal and finish as box (tub) that
overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door.
3. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material
indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
a. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard flush, hollow steel door construction
with tubular stiles and rails.
b. Door Glazing: Complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3; clear
tempered glass.
4. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, Duo -Panel with 1/4" thick glass.
5. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type
for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style specified. Provide exposed door
pull and friction latch. Provide concealed continuous -type hinge permitting door to open
180 deg. 0
C. Product and Manufacturer: Larsens Manufacturing Company: Occult Series Fire Extinguisher
Cabinets, Model 0-2409 with vertical duo door.
2.3 FINISHES FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish application
recommendations except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are
assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to shipment.
B. Painted Finishes: Provide painted finish to comply with requirements indicated below for
extent, preparation and type:
1. Extent of Painted Finish: Apply painted finish to both concealed and exposed surfaces of
cabinet components.
2. Color: Provide color or color matches indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and loose rust or mill scale.
4. Field-Paintable Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply to
surfaces indicated below, manufacturer's standard factory -applied paint system which is •
FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
,.Gensler .. Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
` suitable, after deglossing, as. an. undercoat for field -applied paint system specified in
• Section 09912 PAINTING:
a. . Exterior of cabinet except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.
'b. Interior of cabinet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Is
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire -protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and
trim style.
3.2 l INSTALLATION
A. General: Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. Install fire -protection
specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights
indicated below:
1. Fire -Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet.
B. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire -protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust fire -protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
B. On completion of fire -protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10520
.FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
Copyright 2003 Gensler
'10520-3
Gensler . . Bank of America : Point Happy
07.2022.012 La Quinta, CA
SECTION 10801- TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and
servicing of accessories.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing
to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period
indicated.
1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 22 ga. minimum
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with
silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-
M -411.
C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication.
D. Fasteners: Provide'concealed fastenings for all accessory items. Exposed fastenings will be
permitted only where specifically approved by the Architect and are required to match finish of
the accessories fastened thereby.
E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-1
Copyright 2003 Gensler
Gensler
07.2022.012
Bank of America : Point Happy
La Quinta, CA
A. Grab Bars: Provide stainless steel grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18 ga., in the
configurations shown on the drawings and as follows:
1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages; cover secured to
flange by snapping on.
2. Clearance: 1-1/2" clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture.
4. Heavy -Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2".
5. Basis of Design: B-6806-36 and B6806-42; Bobrick.
B. Recessed Toilet Seat Cover, Dispenser, Sanitary Napkin Disposal, and Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
B-3574; Bobrick.
C. Mirror: B-165-2448; Bobrick.
D. Soap Dispenser: B-4112; Bobrick.
E. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: B-43944; Bobrick.
F. Underlavatory Guard: Brocar Kit C500 -R.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective
coatings. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10801
•
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2
Copyright 2003 Gensler
BANK OF.AMERICA . -15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -1
SECTION 15050
• BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1. APPLICABLE
REQUIREMENTS
A.
All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions, Supplemental
Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements, and shall include all Mechanical
.
Sections specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
OF THIS SECTION
A.
Description of Work-
orkB..
B..
Description of Bid Documents
C.
Definitions
D.
Related Work
E.
Code and Standards
F.
Quality Assurance
G.
General Requirements
H.
Minor Deviations
I.
Shop Drawings, Equipment
J.
Coordination Documents
K.
Record Drawings
L.
Start-up Service and Building Commissioning
M.
Instruction, Maintenance, and O & M Manuals
N.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
O.
Temporary Facilities
P.
Posted Operating Instructions
Q.
Safety and Indemnity
R.
Cleaning and Closing
S.
Warranty
•
T.
Guarantee
U.
Supports and Anchors
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -2
V. Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation
W. Pipe Portals •
X. Roof Curbs
Y. Equipment Rails
Z. Access Panels and Doors
AA. Identification Markers
BB. Electrical
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Contract Documents, including Specifications and Construction Drawings, are intended to provide all
material and labor to install complete plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning and fire protection
systems for the building.
B. Every effort has been made on the design to meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Codes;
therefore, unless Contractor before signing his Contract, shall have notified the Architect in writing, of any
items in conflict with said Codes, he shall, thereafter, make any minor adjustments necessary to meet
said Codes at no cost to the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior details, floor plans, elevations, and the structural and
other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other trades to avoid
interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of the fixtures, equipment,
and pipe lines and are not to be scaled; all dimensions and existing conditions shall be checked at the
building.
D. The Contractor shall comply with the project closeout requirements as detailed in General Requirements
of Division 1.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. Specifications:
1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment.
2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences.
B. Drawings:
1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicate sizes, locations, connections to equipment and
methods of installation.
2. Before proceeding with work check and verify all dimensions.
3. Assume all responsibility for fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of equipment and
structure.
4. Make adjustments that maybe necessary or requested, in order to resolve space problems, preserve •
headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of other trades.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -3
5. Where existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts prevent installation of new work as indicated, relocate, or
is
arrange for relocation, of existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts. Verify exact location and elevation of
existing piping prior to any construction.
6. If any part of Specifications or Drawings appears unclear or contradictory, apply to Architect or
Engineer for his interpretation and decision as early as possible, including during bidding period.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
•A. "Above Grade": Not buried in the ground and not embedded in concrete slab on ground.
B. "Actuating" or "Control' Devices: Automatic sensing and switching devices such as thermostats,
pressure, float, electro -pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling operation of equipment.
C. "Below Grade": Buried in the ground or embedded in concrete slab on ground.
D. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within double
partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in enclosures. In general, any item not visible
or directly accessible.
E. "Connect': Complete hook-up of item with required service.
F. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed."
G. "Furnish": To supply equipment and products as specified.
H. "Indicated," "Shown" or " "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on Drawings or Specifications.
I. "Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
J. "Motor Controllers": Manual or magnetic starters (with or without switches), individual push buttons or
hand -off -automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors.
K. "Piping": Pipe, tube, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, strainers, hangers, supports, unions, traps, drains,
insulation, and related items.
L. "Provide": To supply, install and connect as specified for a complete, safe and operationally ready
system.
M. 'Reviewed," "Satisfactory" or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, or directed by or to
Architect/Engineer/Owner.
N. 'Rough -In": Provide all indicated services in the necessary arrangement suitable for making final
connections to fixture or equipment.
O. "Shall': An exhortation or command to complete the specified task.
P. "Similar" or "Equal': Of base bid manufacture, equal in materials, weight, size, design, and efficiency of
specified products.
Q. "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.
R. "Will': - A desire to complete the specified task. Allows some flexibility in application as opposed to
"Shall."
S. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -4
T. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items required for
proper and complete installation.
1.6 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. All Division 15 Mechanical sections included herein.
B. Division 2: Site Work.
1. Coordination of excavation of trenches and the installation of mechanical systems and piping on site.
C. Division 3: Concrete.
1. All concrete work for Mechanical Division shall be included in Division 15 under the appropriate
Sections and shall include:
a. Concrete curbs and housekeeping pads for the mechanical equipment.
b. Thrust blocks, pads, and boxes for mechanical equipment.
c. Coordination of floor drain and floor sink installations in sloped floors.
D. Division 7: Thermal and Moisture Protection.
1. Flashing and sheet metal.
2. Sealants and caulking.
3. Firestopping.
E. Division 9: Painting:
1. Division 15 installers shall perform all painting, except where specifically stated otherwise in Division
9.
2. Painting of all exposed steel, piping, ductwork, insulation, equipment and materials.
3. Paint all exposed gas piping, interior and exterior to the building, yellow.
F. Division 10: Miscellaneous Metals.
1. Exterior louvers and grilles shall be included in this Section.
G. Division 16: Electrical is related to work of:
1. Fire protection alarms and relays.
2. Smoke detector and monitoring.
3. Power connections to all mechanical equipment.
4. Life safety provisions.
1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work shall be in full accordance with all Codes, Ordinances and Code rulings.
•
•
•
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -5
B. - The Contractor shall furnish without any extra charge the labor and material required for the compliance
of codes.
C. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 15 Sections. Provide
written reports on all tests.
D. Electrical devices and wiring shall conform to the latest standards of NEC; all devices shall be UL listed
and labeled.
E. All plumbing and mechanical work.shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
F.. All excavation work must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification to all owners of
underground utilities at least 48 business day hours, but not more than 10 business days, before
commencing an excavation.
G. Provide in accordance with rules and regulations of the following:
1. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in California:
a. 2001 California Building Code (CBC) based on 1997 Uniform Building Code (UBC) with State
Amendments.
b. 2001 California Mechanical Code (CMC) based 2000 Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC) with State
Amendments.
c. 2001 California Plumbing Code (CPC) based 2000 Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State
Amendments.2001 California Fire Code (CFC) based 2000 Uniform Fire Code (UFC) with State
Amendments.
e. 2001 California Electric Code (CEC) based 1999 National Electric Code with State Amendments.
f. 2001 Title 24, Part 6 California Energy Efficiency Standards for Residential and Nonresidential
Buildings.
2. Local, city, county and state codes and ordinances.
3. Local Bureau of Buildings.
4. Local Health Department.
5. Local and State Fire Prevention Districts.
6. State Administrative Codes.
H. Provide in accordance with appropriate referenced standards of the following:
1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
2. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council.
3. AGA - American Gas Association.
4. ADC - Air Diffuser Council. -
5. AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
6. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -6
7. ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
8. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning Engineers. i
9. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
10. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.
11. AWS - American Welding Society.
12. AWWA - American Water Works Association.
13. FM - Factory Mutual.
14. MSS - Manufacturer's Standardization Society.
15. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association.
16. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
17. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories.
18. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act.
19. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories.
20. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineers.
21. PDI - Plumbing and Drainage Institute.
22. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.
23. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Current Models. All work shall be as follows:
1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the manufacturer.
2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA.
B. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15,
manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation or repair, on
other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project.
1.9 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all existing conditions at building site.
B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided.
C. Provide and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections. •
D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the
final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -7
panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. This
• work shall include furnishing and installing all access doors required for mechanical access.
..E. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual
equipment to be connected. Refer to Equipment Specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough -in
requirements.
F. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components.
G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
H. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical
installations.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured -in-place
concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
J. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow
of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the
building.
K. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of
mechanical equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching required for
installation of his work unless otherwise noted.
L. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead
equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
M. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or. replacement of equipment
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, without interference with other installations.
N. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with ductwork, piping,
conduits, suspension system, light fixtures, cable trays, sprinkler piping and heads, and other
installations.
O. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and
controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
P. Coordinate installation of floor drains and floor sinks with work of other trades, such that finished floor
slopes to drains and floor sinks are flush with surrounding floor.
Q. Products made of or containing lead, asbestos, mercury or other known toxic or hazardous materials are
not acceptable for installation under this Division. Any such products installed as part of the work of the
Division shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne solely
by the installing Contractor.
1.10 MINOR DEVIATIONS
A. The Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general arrangements of all mechanical work and
requirements to be performed. It is not intended to show or indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories
which will be required as a part of the work of this Section.
B. The Contractor shall carefully review and study the structural and architectural conditions affecting all of
his work, and it is the specific intention of. this section that all. such work imposed on this section by
structural and architectural conditions of the Contract shall be borne by this section at no extra cost to the
Owner.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -8
C. The Contractor shall study the operational requirements of each system, and shall arrange his work
accordingly, and shall furnish such fittings, offsets, supports, accessories, as are required for the proper
and efficient installation of all systems from the physical space available for use by this section. This i
requirement extends to the Contractor's coordination of this section's work with the "Electrical Work."
Should conflicts occur due to lack of coordination, the time delay, cost of rectification, demolition, labor
and materials, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall not be at a cost to the Owner.
D. Minor deviations in order to avoid conflict shall be permitted where the design intent is not altered.
E. Advise the Architect, in writing, in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment.
Bear all costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly coordinate the installation or
failure to advise the Architect of conflict.
1.11 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products other than
those scheduled or shown on the drawings as a basis of design:
1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing,
structural supports, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution.
3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified
warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed substitute. 0
B. The Contractor further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent
or superior to specified item.
C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in the
contract documents apply to this proposed substitution.
1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for review all materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1
requirements.
B. Preliminary List of Materials: Within thirty (30) days after awarding of the Contract, submit to architect for
preliminary approval a complete list of manufacturer's names and model numbers of proposed materials
and equipment.
1. Indicate substituted items.
2. Identify test and balancing agency.
3. Identify independent testing laboratory for water analysis.
C. After approval of preliminary list of materials, the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's Certified Drawings to the Architect for approval.
D. The Contractor shall submit approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's equipment cuts, of all
equipment requiring connection by Division 16, to the Electrical Contractor for final coordination of
electrical requirements. Contractor shall bear all additional costs for failure to coordinate with Division 16.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -9
E. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be submitted as a complete package bound in a 3 -ring binder with
tabs for each specification section. The approved submittals shall be converted into O & M Manuals at
the completion of the project. Submit six (6) typed copies of submittals. Refer to Division 1 for additional
requirements.
1.13 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractors shall prepare coordinated Shop Drawings to coordinate the installation and location of all
HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, lights, audio/video systems, electrical
services and all system appurtenances. When conflicts are identified, modify system layout as necessary
to resolve.
B. Advise the Architect in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment. Bear all
costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly coordinate the installation or failure to
advise the Architect of conflict.
C. Provide means of access to all valves, dampers, controllers, operable devices, and other apparatus that
may require adjustment or servicing.
D. Final Coordination Drawings with all appropriate information added are to be submitted as Record
Drawings at completion of project.
E. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for their use when doing their
work.
1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS
• A. Before commencing installation, obtain an extra set of prints from Architect, marked "Record." Keep this
set of Drawings at the job site at all times, and use it for no other purpose but to mark on it all the changes
and revisions to the Contract Drawings resulting from coordination with other trades. At the completion of
the project,
1. Obtain a clean set of reproducibles from the Architect or Engineer, at cost plus, and transfer the
revisions to these reproducibles in a neat and orderly fashion.
OR
2. Edit project AutoCAD files to incorporate all site markups, changes, and revisions to the Contract
Drawings. Submit plots of Record Drawings and six copies CD Roms labeled with all record
AutoCAD drawing files. -
B. Provide copy of Record Drawings to Testing and Balancing Contractor for use when doing his work.
C. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both exterior and interior;
including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes and similar units requiring
periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts
and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and
branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions
located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e. — valves, traps, strainers, expansion
compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.
D. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials
• used.
E. Refer also to Special Conditions for full scope of requirements.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -10
1.15 INSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE, AND O&M MANUALS
A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect complete set of
operating instructions, maintenance instructions, part lists, and all other bulletins and brochures pertinent
to the operation and maintenance for equipment furnished and installed as specified in this section, bound
in a durable binder. Refer to Division 1.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper instruction of Owner's personnel for operation and
maintenance of equipment, and apparatus installed as specified in Division 15 to be no less than 2 hours
for each piece of equipment.
1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance
labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to
prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site, unless off-site storage is
authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. Piping shall be stored in
bundles covered with visqueen. Piping showing signs of rust shall be removed from site and replaced.
C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion.
Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and
efficient flow of installations.
1.17 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical sections for S
use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams, control diagrams,
and control sequence for each principal system and equipment.
1.18 SAFETY AND INDEMNITY
A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site including safety of
all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and
not be limited to normal hours of work.
B. No act, service, Drawing, review, or Construction Review by the Owner, Architect, the Engineers or their
consultants, is intended to include the review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures, in, on,
or near the construction site.
C. The Contractor performing work under this Division of the Specifications shall hold harmless, indemnify
and defend the Owner, the Architect, the Engineers and their consultants, and each of their officers,
employees and agents from any and all liability claim, losses or damage arising, or alleged to arise from
bodily injury, sickness, or death of a person or persons, and for all damages arising out of injury to or
destruction of property arising directly or indirectly out of, or in connection with, the performance of the
work under the Division of the Specifications, and from the Contractor's negligence in the performance of
the work described in the Construction Contract Documents; but not including the sole negligence of the
Owner, the Architect, the Engineers, and their consultants or their officers, employees and agents.
1.19 CLEANING AND CLOSING
A. All work shall be inspected, tested, and approved before being concealed or placed in operation. •
B. Upon completion of the work, all equipment installed as specified in this section, and all areas where work
was performed, shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the Architect.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -_11
1.20 WARRANTIES ;
• A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor. Refer to
individual Equipment Specifications for extended or longer-term warranty requirements.
B. Provide complete warranty information for each item, to include product or equipment, date of beginning
of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, telephone numbers and
procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
C. Service during warranty period: Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere during the
12 -month warranty period.
1.21 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented by him
and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which may become
defective within the period of one (1) year after the Date of Final Acceptance, ordinary wear and tear
excepted.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects in his
work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS .
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install all new material, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter specified unless specifically
noted otherwise. All material, equipment, and apparatus shall be.identified by the manufacturer's name,
nameplate, and pertinent data. .
B. All materials, equipment, and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise. The words
"or approved equal" shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturers' names used herein,
unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed.
2.2 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and
anchors, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products, which are UL listed and FM approved.
2. MSS Standard Compliance: Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS).
3.. SMACNA: "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
4. NFPA: Pamphlet number 13 and 14 for fire protection systems.
5. Provide copper plated or plastic coated supports and attachment for copper piping systems. Field
applied coatings or tape is unacceptable.
6. Manufacturer: B -Line, Grinnell, Michigan, Tolco, Kin -Line or Superstrut.
•
B. Horizontal Piping Hangers and. Supports: Except as otherwise indicated, provide .factory -fabricated
hangers and supports of one of the following MSS types listed.
1.. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -12
2. Adjustable Steel Swivel Band Hangers: MSS Type 10.
3. U -Bolts: MSS Type 24. •
4. Pipe Slides and Slide Plates: MSS Type 35, including one of the following plate types:
a. Plate: Unguided type.
b. Plate: Guided type.
c. Plate: Hold-down clamp type.
5. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange.
6. Pipe Saddle Supports with U -Bolt: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast iron
floor flange.
7. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38, including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor
flange.
C. Vertical Piping Clamps: Provide factory -fabricated two -bolt vertical piping riser clamps, MSS Type 8.
D. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated hanger -rod
attachments of one of the following MSS types listed.
1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
2. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
4. Malleable Iron Eye Sockets: MSS Type 16.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
E. Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated building attachments of
one of the following MSS types listed.
1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18.
2. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading:
a. Light Duty: MSS Type 31.
b. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32.
c. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33.
3. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58.
4. Anchor Bolts: Heavy duty, drilled -in concrete expansion wedge anchor bolts, Hilti or Red Head.
F. Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers •
and supports, factory -fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate
with pipe insulation.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -13
1. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation
• matching adjoining insulation.
2. Insulation Protection Shields: MSS Type 40, 18" minimum, or of the length recommended by
manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. High-density insulation insert lengths shall match or
exceed shield length.
3. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360° insert of waterproofed calcium silicate (60 psi flexural
strength minimum) encased in 3600 sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as
adjoining insulation. Shield length shall match or exceed length of calcium silicate insert.
G. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML1.
2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36.
3. Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded,
natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand by volume,
with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.
4. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required. Weld steel in
accordance with AWS standards.
5. Pipe Brackets: "HoldRite" copper plated brackets. Insulate brackets attached to metal studs with felt.
• 2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT/VIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment, piping, ductwork and all system appurtenances (including weight of normal operating
contents) shall be adequately restrained to resist seismic forces. Restraint devices shall be designed and
selected to meet seismic requirements as defined in Chapter 16 of the latest edition of the UBC, with
State Amendments, and applicable local codes in accordance with Seismic Zone 4 and the applicable
Importance Factors and Soil Factors.
B. Isolated Equipment:
Spring type isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable and complete with 1/4" neoprene
acoustical friction pads or neoprene cup between the spring and the base plate. All mountings shall
have leveling bolts. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated
deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflections compressed spring height and solid
spring height. A steel housing shall be included to' resist motion due to earthquake loads. A
minimum clearance of '/4" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and
the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. The housing shall be out of contact during
normal operations. Mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Manufacturer:
Mason Industries #SLR series or approved equal.
2. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases designed to prevent
excessive base flexure at start up, prevent misalignment of equipment and provide attachment points
for seismic restraints. Bases shall be rectangular in shape and constructed of welded steel main
members with cross bracing located at or near each restraint location.
C. All non -isolated piping and ductwork shall be protected in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines. At
the Contractor's option, for ease of installation, cable restraint system may be used. Installations not
addressed in'the SMACNA Guidelines shall be designed by a registered professional engineer who
designed the seismic bracing for the suspended piping and ductwork.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -14
2.4 PIPE PORTALS
A. Where pipe portals are not provided by other sections of Specification, provide prefabricated insulated •
pipe portals as required for piping penetrating through the roof where shown on plans. Field built pipe
portals are acceptable alternatives - provide detail of construction for review.
B. Standard pipe portals, unless otherwise noted, shall be constructed as follows:
1. Curb shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with continuous welds on shell seams.
2. Insulation to be 1-/2' thick, 3 Ib density rigid fiberglass.
3. Curb to have a raised 3" (minimum), 45° cant.
4. Curb to have 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" wood nailer (minimum).
5. Curb height to be 8" (minimum) above roof deck.
6. Cant shall be raised to match roof insulation thickness.
7. Cover or flashing to be constructed of galvanized steel or other suitable material to provide sturdy
weather tight closure. Provide collars and rubber nipples with draw bands of sizes required by piping.
8. Size curb, cover and nipples per manufacturer's recommendations.
9. Manufacturer: Roof Products Systems or Pate.
2.5 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide all access doors and panels to serve equipment under this work, including those which must be
installed, in finished architectural surfaces. Frame of 16 -gauge steel, door of 20 gauge steel. 1" flange
width, continuous piano hinge, key operated, prime coated. Refer to Architectural Specifications for the
required product Specification for each surface. Contractor is to submit schedule of access panels for
approval. Exact size, number and location of access panels is not shown on Plans. Access doors shall
be of a size to permit removal of equipment for servicing. Access door shall have same rating as the wall
or ceiling in which it is mounted. Provide access panel for each trap primer or concealed valve, for fire
and combination fire/smoke dampers, and for volume dampers. Use no panel smaller than 12" x 12" for
simple manual access, or smaller than 24" x 24" where personnel must pass through. Provide cylinder
lock for access door serving mixing or critical valves in public areas.
B. Included under this work is the responsibility for verifying the exact location and type of each access
panel or door required to serve equipment under this work and in the proper sequence to keep in tune
with construction and with prior approval of the Architect. Access doors in fire rated partitions and ceilings
shall carry all label ratings as required to maintain the rating of the rated assembly.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milcor, Karp, Nystrom, or Elmdor/Stoneman.
D. Submit markup of architectural plans showing size and location of access panels required for equipment
access for approval by Architect.
2.6 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
•
A. Mechanical Identification Materials: Provide products of categories and types required for each •
application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. Where more than single type is specified for
application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. Stencils
are not acceptable.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -15
B. Plastic Pipe Markers:
• 1. Snap-On Type: Provide pre-printed, semi-rigid snap -on, color coded pipe markers, complying with
ANSI A13.1.
2. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive
vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. Secure both ends of markers with color coded
adhesive vinyl tape.
3. Insulation: Furnish 1" thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be
installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F (52°C) or greater. Cut length
to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
4. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping
system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Craftmark, Seton, Brady, or Brimar.
2.7 ELECTRICAL
A. General:
1. All electrical material, equipment, and apparatus specified herein shall conform to the requirements of
Division 16. -
2. Provide all motors for equipment specified herein. Provide motor starters, controllers, and other
• electrical apparatus and wiring which are required for the operation of the equipment specified herein.
3. Set and align all motors and drives in equipment specified herein.
4. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical
equipment are scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. Electrical components and materials shall be UL or ETL listed/labeled as suitable for location and use
no exceptions.
C. Motors:
1. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more
detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment Specifications.
2. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads.
3. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the
service factor range. Unless otherwise noted on plans, all motors t/z HP or larger shall be rated for
208 or 460 volt, 3-phase, operation. Unless otherwise noted on plans, all motors less than 1/2 HP
shall be rated for 120 volt, single phase operation.
4. Temperature Rating: Rated for Class B Insulation.
5. Service Factor:," 1. 15 for poly -phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors. .
6. .Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty; Design "B", except
"C where required for high starting torque.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -16
a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 56; use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit
specific application. is
b. VFD driven motors. To be provided of the same manufacture as the VFD rated for invertor duty.
If motor is not of the same manufacture as the drive provide the motor with a shaft grounding
device or as an isolated bearing motor.
c. Bearings:
1) Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2) Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular
maintenance.
3) Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives product lateral or axial
thrust in motor.
4) For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted.
5) Enclosure Type:
a) Open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located
during operation.
b) Guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.
c) Weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. •
d. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection where external overload protection is
not provided and, where indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping
motor at starter.
e. Noise Rating: "Quiet."
f. Efficiency: Motors shall have a minimum efficiency per governing State or Federal codes,
whichever is higher.
g. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction,
special features and similar information.
D. Starters and Electrical Devices:
1. Motor Starter Characteristics:
a. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet locations
shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs.
b. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven
equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.
2. Manual switches shall have pilot lights and all required switch positions for multi -speed motors.
Overload Protection: Melting alloy or bi-metallic type thermal overload relays; sized according to
actual operating current (field measured).
3. Motor Connections: Liquid tight, flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically
indicated.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -17'
E. Low Voltage_ Control Wiring:
• 1. General: 14 gauge, Type THHN, color coded, installed in conduit.
2. Manufacturer: General Cable Corp., Alcan Cable, American Insulated Wire Corp., Senator Wire and
Cable Co., or Southwire Co.
F. Disconnect Switches:
1. Fusible Switches: For equipment 1/2 HP or larger, provide fused, each phase; heavy duty;
horsepower rated; spring loaded quick -make, quick -break mechanism; dead front line side shield;
solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver
plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN"
position; arc quenchers; capacity and characteristics as indicated.
2. Non -Fusible Switches: For equipment less than 1/2 horsepower, switch shall be horsepower rated;
toggle switch type with thermal overload quantity of poles and voltage rating as required.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master mechanics and shall result in an
installation consistent with the best practices of trades.
B. Install work uniform, level and plumb, in relationship to lines of building. Do not install any diagonal, or
otherwise irregular work unless so indicated on Drawings or approved by Architect.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of articles
used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or covered in these
Specifications.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the work between the various Mechanical Sections and with the work specified under other
Divisions. If any cooperative work must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make
proper and timely provisions, the alternations shall be made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at the
Contractor's cost. Coordinate wall and ceiling work with the General Contractor, and his subcontractors in
locating ceiling air outlets, wall registers, etc.
B. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any damaged or defected
materials.
3.4. SUPPORTS AND HANGERS ,
A. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors, and associated work, installer shall meet at projects ite
with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing agency
representatives, (if any), installers of other work with requirements specified.
B. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping properly from building structure.
• Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers
where possible. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space
hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire
or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
BANK OF AMERICA 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -18
C. Install hangers within 12 inches of every change in piping direction, end of pipe run or concentrated load,
and within 36 inches of every major piece of equipment. Hangers shall be installed on both sides of •
flexible connections. Where flexible connection connects directly to a piece of equipment only one hanger
is required.
D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and
supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
E. Support sprinkler piping and gas independently of other piping.
F. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated,
or by other recognized industry methods.
G. Hanger Spacing in accordance with following minimum schedules (other spacings and rod sizes maybe
used in accordance with the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual using a. safety factor of five):
1. Steel Pipe (Water Filled):
Pipe Size
Max. Hanger Spacing
1/2" to 1 1/4"
5 feet
1 '/z' to 2"
7 feet
21/2" to 3"
10 feet
4" and larger
12 feet
2. Steel Pipe (Gas/Air Filled):
Pipe Size
1/2" to 1 1/4"
1 Y2" and larger
3. Copper Pipe:
Pipe Size
1/2" to 2"
2 ''/2" and larger
Max. Hanger Spacing
6 feet
10 feet
Max. Hanger Spacing
6 feet
8 feet
Rod Size
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
Rod Size
3/8"
1/2"
Rod Size
3/8"
1/2"
4. Caulked Bell and Spigot and Glass Pipe: Provide hanger for each section of pipe, located at shoulder
of bell. Where an excessive number of fittings are installed between hangers, provide additional
reinforcing.
H. Sloping, Air Venting, and Draining:
Slope all piping as specified and as indicated, true to line and grade, and free of traps and air
pockets. Unless indicated otherwise, slope piping in the direction of flow as follows:
Service
Domestic Water
Soil and Waste
Storm Water
Sanitary Vent
Provisions for Movement:
Inclination Slope
Down 1 " per 100'
Down 1/4" per foot
Down 1/4" per foot
Up (towards roof terminal) 1/4" per foot
1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of
movement between pipe anchors.
is
•
BANK OF_AMERICA __ _ 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -19
2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses
• from movement will not be transmitted to connecting equipment.
3. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements:
a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers, (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through
insulation.
b. Shields: Where low compressive strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or
chilled water piping, install shields or inserts.
c. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated install protection saddles.
J. Installation of Anchors:
V. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent excessive stresses and to prevent transfer of loading
and stresses to connected equipment.
K. Adjusting:
1, Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
2. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper
level and elevations.
3. Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's
touch-up paint.
3.5 VIBRATION CONTROL ISOLATORS
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials
and units except as otherwise indicated. Comply with minimum static .deflections recommended by
ASHRAE, of vibration isolation materials and units where not otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials
and units except as otherwise indicated. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom
out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks
and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation.
C. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.
D. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required
where substrate is not level.
3.6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with Division 16 work to provide complete systems as required to
operate all mechanical devices installed under this Division of work.
3.7 PAINTING
• A. All painting shall be provided under this Division work, unless otherwise specified under Section 09900:
Painting. Painting schemes shall comply with ANSI A13.1. Paint all exposed materials such as piping,
ductwork, equipment, insulation, steel, etc --Exposed gas piping inside and outside the building shall be
painted with two coats of "Rust-O-Leum" Yellow. The inside surface of visible ductwork above
diffusers/grilles shall be painted flat black.
AMERICA
15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -20
B. All exposed work under Division 15 shall receive either a factory finish or afield prime coat finish, except:
1. Exposed copper piping. •
2. Aluminum jacketed outdoor insulated piping.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
A. General: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting, or other
covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion
of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar
removable concealment.
B. Piping System Identification:
1. Install pipe markers on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show
normal direction of flow.
2. Locate pipe markers as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at
branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non -accessible
enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 10
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced horizontally at maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run, with minimum of one in
each room.
C. Mechanical Equipment Identification: Locate engraved plastic laminate signs on or near each major item
of mechanical equipment and each operational device. Provide signs for the following:
1. Fans.
2. Packaged HVAC units.
3. Tanks and pressure vessels.
4. Sprinkler and standpipe equipment.
D. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units,
inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations. Equipment signs shall include an identification of the area or other
equipment served by the equipment being labeled.
3.9 TESTING
A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment, including
test pumps, gauges, instruments, and other equipment required. Test all rotational equipment for proper
direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing, certify to the Architect, in writing, that the specified tests
have been performed and that the installation complies with the specified requirements and provide a
report of the test observations signed by qualified inspector.
•
BANK OF AMERICA. ` 15050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS -21
B. Ductwork: ; Test all air quantities as specified in Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
Pressure tests per SMACNA.
C. Registers and Diffusers: Test for proper operation of manually operated control feature. Test all air
quantities as specified in Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
D. Ductwork Specialties: Test all operable ductwork specialties for proper operation. Check all fire, smoke
and fire/smoke dampers to ensure that they are 100% open.
E. Temperature Control: Test all control functions to assure that all systems are controlling as specified or
as otherwise necessary and that all controls are adjusted to maintain proper room temperatures. The
manufacturer's representative shall perform all tests.
END OF SECTION
BANK OF AMERICA 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION -1
SECTION 15080
• MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to,
providing insulation for the following:
1. All supply air ductwork, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
2. All return air ductwork, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
3. Acoustical duct lining, where shown on drawings and in vertical supply and return ducts.
4. Domestic hot water supply and return piping.
5. Drains from electric drinking fountains to first connection.
6. Exposed waste and hot water piping below h n
Bicap accessible lavatories.
B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this Section include the following:
1. Fiberglass pipe insulation.
2. Cellular glass pipe insulation.
3. Fiberglass duct insulation.
4. Insulation jackets.
5. Insulation accessories.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods.
B. Section 15180: HVAC Piping.
C. Section 15400: Plumbing.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
• A. Insert: Spacer placed between the pipe support system and the piping to allow for the space required for
insulation.
B. Insulation Group (IG): Definition of Insulation Materials and Operating Temperatures.
BANK OF AMERICA 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION -2
C. Insulation Shield: Buffer material placed between the pipe support system and the insulation to prevent
the insulation material from crushing. •
D. Jacket: Protective covering over the pipe insulation; may be factory applied such as "all service jacket" or
field applied to provide additional protection; of such materials as canvas, PVC, aluminum or stainless
steel.
E. Piping Insulation: Thermal insulation applied to prevent heat transmission to or from a piping system.
F. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Insulation jacket material that impedes the transmission of water vapor.
G. Freezing Climate: Where outdoor design temperature is less than 33° F, as stated in ASHRAE
fundamentals under 99% column for winter design conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Provide products conforming to the requirements of the following:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Manufacture and test insulation in accordance
with the ASTM Standards, including:
a. 8209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plat.
b. C165 -Recommended Practice for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulation.
c. C167 - Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal Insulations.
d. C177 -Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission. 0
e. Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus.
f. C195 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
g. C196 - Specification for Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Thermal Insulating Cement.
h. C302 - Test Method for Density of Preformed Pipe -Covering -Type Thermal Insulation.
i. C303 - Test Method for Density of Preformed Block -Type Thermal Insulation.
j. C305 - Test for Thermal Conductivity of Pipe Insulation.
k. C356 - Test for Linear Shrinkage of Preformed High -Temperature Thermal Insulation.
I. C411 - Test for Hot -Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation.
m. C449 - Specification of Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
n. C533 - Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
o. C534 - Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and
Tubular Form.
p. C547 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. •
q. C552 - Specification for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
BANK OF AMERICA 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION -3
r. , C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket -Type Pipe Insulation (Industrial Type).
• s. C592 -Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket -Type Pipe Insulation (Metal -Mesh Covered).
t. C612 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
u. C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation.
v. C921 - Practice for Determining Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
w. C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation.
x. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
y. E119 - Test for Fire Resistance.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): Provide and
install pipe and duct insulation in accordance with the following ASHRAE Standard:
a. 90 Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Manufacture insulation in accordance with the following
NFPA standards:
a. 255 Test Methods, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. Do not provide materials with flame proofing treatments subject to deterioration due to the effects of
0 moisture or high humidity.
C. Flame/Smoke Rating: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers,
mastics and adhesives) with flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less,
as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) Method. In addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame
particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or listing; or
satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for
materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified.
D. Corrosiveness: Provide insulation such that when tested in accordance with the following test, the steel
plate in contact with the insulation shows no greater corrosion than sterile cotton in contact with a steel
plate for comparison.
1. Test Specimen: Two specimens shall be used, each measuring 1" by 4" by approximately Yi' thick.
2. Apparatus: Provide a humidity test chamber in which two polished -steel test plates, 1"wide, 4" long
and 0.020" thick, shall be placed. Plates shall be clear finish, cold -rolled strip steel, American quality,
quarter hard, temper No. 3, weighing 0.85 Ib/sq. ft.
3. Procedure: The steel test plates shall be rinsed with cp benzol until their surfaces are free from oil
and grease and allowed to dry. One piece of cold -rolled steel shall be. placed between the two
insulation specimens and secured with tape or twine. The test specimen and uncovered plate shall
be suspended vertically in an atmosphere having a relative humidity of 95% (plus or minus 3%), and
a temperature of 120°F (plus or minus 30F), for 96 hours, and then be examined for corrosion.
E. Insulation thickness shall be the greater standard of that specified here or the State energy conservation
0 requirements.
BANK OF AMERICA. 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION -4
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of •
mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, K -value, thickness, and
furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Also furnish necessary test data
certified by an independent testing laboratory. Submit samples.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical
insulation. Include this data and product in maintenance manual.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coating to the site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.
B. Store and protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Johns Manville, Owens-Corning, Knauf, Armstrong, Pittsburgh -Corning, Certainteed, Halstead, Rubatex,
3M FireMaster, Pabco, or approved equal. Manufacturer and insulation types listed below indicate a
minimum acceptable level of quality required for each classification.
2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATIONS 0
A. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: Johns Manville Microlite Type 75 meeting ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2;
9 YP 9 YP
Flexible Blanket:
1. 'K' Value: 0.27 at 75°F installed.
2. Density: 0.75 Ib/cu ft.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK, aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn and laminated to fire-
resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded
staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.
B. Duct Liner: Johns Manville Linacoustic Mat Faced or Permacote Meeting ASTM C1071; Flexible
Blanket:
1. 'K' Value: ASTM C518, 0.25 at 75°F.
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 or higher based on "Type A mounting."
3. Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft/min.
4. Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type.
5. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened.
0
BANK OF AMERICA 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION -5
2.3 PIPE INSULATIONS
• A. Glass Fiber: Molded fibrous glass pipe insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 547 and
meet ASTM C 585 for sizes required in' the particular system. For all fluid distribution temperatures below
40°F the system shall be of a wicking type.
1. Non -Wicking: Johns Manville Micro -Lok Meeting ASTM C547; Rigid Molded Noncombustible:
a. 'K' Value: 0.23 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 850°F.
c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: AP -T PLUS white kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yam and bonded
to aluminum foil,- secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP jacket with
outward clinch expanding staples or vapor barrier mastic as needed.
2. Wicking: Owens Corning VaporWick Meeting ASTM C547; Rigid Molded Noncombustible:
a. 'K' Value: 0.23 at 75°F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 850°F.
c. Jacket: Polymer facing with factory -applied adhesive closure to provide positive mechanical and
vapor sealing of longitudinal seams.
B. Field Applied Jackets (For Interior Applications):
• 1. All longitudinal seams shall be located on bottom of pipes.
2. PVC Plastic: Johns Manville Zeston 2000. One piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing
material, gloss white. Connect with tacks and pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
3. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq. yd. plain weave cotton, treated with dilute fire retardant
lagging adhesive.
4. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016" thick sheet, [smooth/embossed] finish., with longitudinal slip joints and 2"
laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Secure stainless steel or aluminum jackets with 3/8" or Yz' stainless steel bands on 12" centers.
C. Removable Covers:
1. Provide removable covers on valves, fittings, flanges,- strainers, traps, etc., where periodic
maintenance or removal of insulation may is required.
2. Use of premolded fittings with PVC covers is acceptable.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that piping and ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with specifications before
• applying insulation materials. All piping and ductwork shall be inspected by Owner's Representative prior
to installation of insulation. Any insulation applied prior to inspection s hall be removed and new insulation
BANK OF AMERICA 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION -6
applied at no additional cost to Owner. Notify Owner's Representative five (5) working days prior to
insulation installation. •
B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry and free of foreign material.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's, recommendations, building codes and industry
standards.
B. Continue insulation and vapor barrier at penetrations and duct supports except where prohibited by code.
Instances where this is required include:
1. Ductwork support angle or struts. To prevent crushing of low density insulation, provide separator or
high density insulation at point of support. Vapor barrier to continue unbroken at point of support.
C. External Ductwork Insulation:
1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with vapor retardant jacket.
Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant
adhesive.
2. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations except where
prohibited by code.
3. The underside of duct work 24" or greater in width shall be secured with mechanical fasteners and
speed clips spaced approximately 18" on center. The protruding ends of the fasteners shall be cut off
flush after the speed clips are installed, and then, when required, sealed with the same tape as •
specified above.
D. Duct Liner:
1. Adhere insulation to sheet metal with a UL listed adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied to the sheet
metal with a minimum coverage of 90%.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners as indicated by SMACNA or manufacturer. Pin
length should be as recommended by the liner manufacturer.
3. All exposed edges of the liner must be factory or field coated. Unless factory coated, all transverse
edges and longitudinal joints of the duct liner shall be coated. For systems operating at 4,000 fpm or
higher, a metal nosing must be installed in all liner leading edges.
4. Repair liner surface penetrations with UL listed adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated on plans are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size
to allow for insulation thickness.
E. Piping Insulation:
1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations unless otherwise specified.
2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
3. Provide insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature •
with vapor retardant jackets with self sealing,laps. Insulate complete system.
BANK OF AMERICA 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION -7
4. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature, secure jackets with self sealing lap
• or outward clinched, expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at equipment, flanges, and
unions.
5. Provide insert between support shield and piping on piping 1'/2" diameter or larger. Fabricate of
Johns Manville Thermo -12, or other heavy density insulating material suitable for temperature.
Insulation inserts shall not be less than the following lengths:
a. 1'/2' to 2'/z' pipe size 10" long
6. Use of metal saddles is acceptable as specified in Section 15050. Fill interior voids with segments of
insulation matching adjoining pipe insulation.
7. For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 7 feet above finished
floor, finish with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC jacket and fitting covers, or aluminum or stainless
steel jacket.
8. Where valves, strainers, etc., with insulation require periodic opening for maintenance, repair, or
cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without
damage. Use of premolded covers or lace -on type insulation blankets is required.
3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
THICKNESS FINISH
(inches)
A. Flexible Fiberglass:
1. Supply ducts 1 1/2 FSK
2. Return ducts 1 1/2 FSK
B. Duct Liner:
1. Where indicated 1" or 2"as noted on Linacoustic Permacote
plans. or Mat Face
REMARKS
3.4 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. "All insulation thicknesses shall meet or exceed state energy code requirements as noted below. Increase
thickness Y2" if exposed to ambient air. Minimum thermal resistance in range of 4.2 to 4.6 per inch of
thickness.
B. Fiberglass Insulation:
1. Domestic hot water
2. Domestic hot water return
C7
END OF SECTION
PIPE SIZE -THICKNESS REMARKS
(inches) (inches)
Upto2
2'/z and
over
All Sizes 1
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -1
SECTION 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division
1, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Pipe and Fittings
a. Sanitary waste and vent
b. Storm drain and overflow
c. Cold water
d. Hot water
e. Fuel gas
2. Valves
7.
a.
Backwater valves
b.
Natural gas valves
c.
Balancing valves
d.
Backflow prevention valves
e.
Pressure reducing valves
f.
Gas pressure regulator valves
g.
Thermostatic mixing valves
h.
Solenoid valves
i.
Water valves
3.. Thermometers and gauges
4. Piping specialties
a.
Pipe escutcheons
b.
Strainers
c.
Drip pans
d.
Air vent
e.
Dielectric unions
f.
Unions
g.
Flanges
h.
Pipe sleeves
i.
Sleeve seals
j.
Valve boxes
k.
Pipe coating
•
I.
Gas connectors
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -2
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE •
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 15400: Plumbing
C. Section 15440: Plumbing Fixtures
D. Section 15450: Plumbing Equipment
E. Division 16: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications:
1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the manufacturer.
2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. All work shall be in full accordance with all applicable codes, ordinances and code rulings.
2. The Contractor shall furnish without any extra charge the labor and material required for compliance
of codes.
3. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and as required under all Division 15 Sections.
Provide written reports on all tests.
4. Electrical devices and wiring shall confirm to the latest standards of NEC; all devices shall be UL
listed and so identified.
5. All plumbing work shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
6. All excavation work must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification to all owners of
underground utilities at least 48 business day hours, but not more than 10 business days, before
commencing an excavation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for all piping, valves and specialties
indicating dimensions, valve CV, tolerances etc.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating underground piping installation showing all fittings with
inverts. Indicate all footings and grade beams.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions on accordance with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL •
A. Furnish and install all new material, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter specified unless specifically
noted otherwise. All material, equipment, and apparatus shall be identified by the manufacturer's name,
nameplate, and pertinent data.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -3
• B. All pipe, pipe fittings and valves shall be domestically made. FOREIGN made products other than pipe,
couplings and fittings, may be accepted, but must be identified and approved prior to bid.
C. Type M copper piping is not acceptable for any pressure water piping unless specifically noted otherwise.
D. All materials, equipment, and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise. The words
"or approved equal" shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturer's names used herein,
unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed.
E. Products made of, or containing, lead, asbestos, mercury, or other known toxic or hazardous materials
are not acceptable for installation under this Section. Any such products installed as part of the work of
this Section shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne
solely by the Contractor(s).
2.2 - STANDARD PIPE AND FITTING
A. Natural Gas Pipe & Fitting (Above Grade)
1. Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black steel.
2. Fittings: 150 Ib. rating. ANSI 816.3, malleable iron threaded; ANSI 816.5, flanged; ANSI 816.9,
steel.
3. Joints: 2" and smaller, threaded (except in the case of piping located in shafts <<or plenums>> which
must be welded); all piping inside the building 2-1/2" and larger, ANSI B16.25 bevelweld, ANSI 816.5
flanges, or ANSI B16.11 socket weld.
B. Natural Gas Piping (Below Grade)
1. Polyethylene, Grade 23, Type II, ASTM 2513, plain ends, heat fused joints, orange finish.
C. Trap Primer Piping:
1. Pipe: Domestic Only, ASTM B88, Type K, soft drawn copper water tube.
2. Fittings: No joints below ground. For pipes below grade double wrap with Scotch Wrap #51 or
PASCO Wrap, with 50% overlap.
D. Domestic Water Pipe & Fittings (Below Grade):
1. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn copper water tube.
2. Fittings: Domestic Only, Elkhart, ANSI B1 6.22, wrought copper, 95%-5% tin -antimony solder joints.
Wrap underground piping with Scotch Wrap or Pasco Wrap.
E. Condensate and indirect drains:
1. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn copper water tube.
2. Fittings: ANSI B16.22, wrought copper.
3. Joints: Lead-free solder joints. Solder shall be lead-free nickel/silver bearing solder meeting ASTM
B-32, ASTM B-828. Flux shall be water-soluble and shall meet CDA standard test method 1.0 and
'ASTM 8813-91.
4. Insulate condensate drain pipes with minimum Y2" insulation to prevent moisture dripping from pipe.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -4
F. Domestic Hof and Cold Water Pipe & Fittings (Above Grade):
1. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn copper water tube.
2. Fittings: ANSI B1 6.22, wrought copper, 95%-5% tin -antimony solder joints.
G. Sanitary Sewer, Vent, Rain water Leader pipe & Fittings:
1. Pipe: Tyler or A, B and I, ASTM A-74, ASTM A-888 cast iron, Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI)
Standard 301-90, bituminous coated, "No -Hub". Pipe showing rust or cracks in coating shall be
removed and replaced.
2. Fittings: No -hub, CISPI 301-90.
3. Couplings Above Grade: Husky, Ideal, Tyler or Clamp -All Neoprene sleeve, ASTM C-564/CISPI 301.
4. Couplings Below Grade: Husky, Ideal, Tyler or Clamp -All heavy duty stainless steel clamp and
shield, with 4 or 6 bands and neoprene sleeve, ASTM C-564-CISPI 301.
H. Rainwater Leader Pipe and Fittings (Exposed, Above Grade):
1. Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV class, copper tube.
2. Fittings: ANSI 816.23 cast bronze or ANSI B16.29 wrought copper. Drainage pattern fittings.
3. Joints: Lead free solder. Lead solder shall not be present at the job site.
I. Vent Piping (Above Grade) (Contractor's Option):
1. Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV class, copper tube.
2. Fittings: Elkhart, ANSI 816.23 cast bronze or ANSI 816.29 wrought copper, sweat solder no lead
joint. Submit sample of solder for Engineer's review and approval.
J. Water Service to Building:
1. Pipe: Class 52 ductile iron, ANSI A21.51, AWWA C1510-70, 150 psi cement lined; factory encased
with 8 mil polyethylene tube or sheet.
2. Fittings: ANSI A21.10 mechanical joint, AWWA C110-1971, 250 psi. fittings to be double field
wrapped with 2", 20 mil vinyl tape, 50% overlap.
3. All fittings shall be restrained with 2000 psi thrust blocks in accordance with NFPA
4. Fire Protection: Refer to Specification Section 15300.
2.3 VALVES: GENERAL
A. General: Valve ratings shall exceed respective system operating pressures by 50% (minimum). All
valves shall be line size unless otherwise noted.
C7
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each ,&
type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit valve
schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and valve features for each required
valve.
BANK OF AMERICA .15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -5
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type (exploded view) shop drawings for each type of
valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
D. Acceptable manufacturers (manufacturer and model number listed for individual valves indicates
minimum acceptable by all manufacturers):
1. Gate, Ball, Check or Butterfly: Apollo, Hammond, Nibco (commercial grade; US manufacturer only),
Milwaukee, Victaulic or Watts.
2. Lubricated Plug Valves: Homestead, Resun, or Rockwell.
3. Backflow Preventors: Ames, Febco, Cla-Val, Watts or Wilkins.
4. Pressure Reducing Valves: Cash -Acme, Cla-Val, Watts, or Wilkins.
5. Solenoid Valves: ASCO, Automatic or Magnatrol.
6. Circuit Setters: Griswold (Venturi with characterized ball valve only), Wheatley (Y -globe type only),
Armstrong, or Tour & Anderson.
E. Valve Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure rating clearly
marked on the valve body.
F. Operators: Provide handwheels; fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter -turn. Provide lever
handle for quarter -turn valves, other than plug valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves, and
one in each size. Provide extended levers/stems for valves on insulated lines. For manual valves 2 %'
and larger located 8 feet above the floor in mechanical rooms provide chain operator to permit operating
the valve from 4'-0" above floor.
G. Valve Features:
1. General:- Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide proper
valve features. Comply with ASME 831.9 for building services piping, and ASME 831.1 for power
piping.
2. Drain: Comply with MSS SP -45, and provide threaded pipe plugs.
3. Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI 816.1 (cast iron), ANSI 816.5 (steel), or ANSI 816.24
(bronze).
4. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.
5. Solder -Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.
6. Flangeless: Valve bodies manufactured to fit between flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron),
ANSI 816.5 (steel), or ANSI 816.24 (bronze).
2.4 DOMESTIC PLUMBING SERVICE VALVES
A. Gate Valves:
• 1. 2" and Smaller: Class 125, MSS SP -80,, ASTM B62 cast bronze body,,soldered ends, bronze bonnet,
bronze wedge, rising stem, brass packing gland, non -asbestos packing and aluminum hand -wheel.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -6
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Class 125, MSS SP -70, ASTM Al 26 Grade B cast iron body, flanged ends, cast
iron bonnet, cast iron wedge, bronze trim, rising stem, brass packing gland, non -asbestos packing
and cast iron hand -wheel.
B. Butterfly Valves:
1. 2-1/2" and Larger: MSS SP -67, lug wafer, ductile iron body, stainless steel disc, stainless steel stem,
EPDM seat, memory stop control, lever handle thru 5" size and worm gear operator for 6" and larger.
Mount stem in horizontal position.
C. Ball Valves:
1. 2" and Smaller: 600 psi, 3 piece, brass body, extended soldered ends for copper pipe and threaded
ends for iron pipe, chrome plated brass ball, Teflon seat, brass stem, steel handle, full port. Apollo
82-100 series.
D. Check Valves:
2" and Smaller: Class 125, MSS SP -80, ASTM B62 and ASTM B16, cast bronze body, soldered
ends for copper pipe, screwed cap, swing type, Teflon bronze disc.
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Class 125, MSS SP -71, ASTM Al 26 class B cast iron body, bolted bonnet flanged
ends, bolted cap, swing type, cast iron disc with bronze face rings.
3. Vertical or High Flow: Class 125, cast bronze, high-flow body, TFE seat, brass check, stainless steel
guide and spring. Watt #6015.
2.5 NATURAL GAS, SERVICE VALVES
A. Ball Valves:
1. 1/2' and 3/:': Brass body, U.L. listed, AGA approved for pressure of system, bronze ball valve, 175
WOG, with integral lever handle. Watts #FBV-1.
2. 1" thru 1-1/2": 175 psi working pressure, AGA and UL approved, bronze body, welded ends,
stainless steel ball, stainless steel stem, steel handle with memory stop tab, conventional port.
3. Lubricated Plug Valve, 2" and Larger: Class 125, MSS SP -78, 200 PSI, U.L. listed, AGA approved for
pressure of system, lubricated plug type, semi -steel body, loose wrench operated, straight way
pattern round port, combination button head fitting and lubricant screw, Teflon seal and discs.
B. Seismic Gas Shutoff Valves:
1. 3/4" thru 2" (low and medium pressure, screwed body): U.L. Listed valve meeting ASCE 25-97,
positive closure, soft seal seating, visual open -close indicator, manual reset, and closure time interval
within 5 seconds when subjected to a sinusoidal oscillation with peak acceleration of 0.3G and a
period of 0.4 seconds. Koso/California Valve Series EV, or approved equal, sized for 0.5 PSI or 20
PSI max operating pressure, respectively.
2. 2", 3" and 4" (High pressure, screwed body): U.L. Listed valve meeting ASCE 25-97,manual reset,
soft seat construction for positive sealing, visual open -close indicator, tripping mechanism with non -
creeping rolling latch, and closure time interval within 5 seconds when subjected to sinusoidal •
oscillation with peak acceleration of 0.3G and a period of 0.4 seconds. Koso/California Valve Series
EV315, or approved equal, sized for 20 PSI max. operating pressure.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES -AND SPECIALTIES -7
3. 6" (high Pressure, Flanged body): U.L. Listed valve meeting ASCE 25-97,manual reset, soft seat
construction for positive sealing, visual open -close indicator, tripping mechanism with non -creeping
rolling latch, and closure time interval within 5 seconds when subjected to sinusoidal oscillation with
peak acceleration of 0.3G and a period of 0.4 seconds. Koso/California Valve Series EV317, or
approved equal, sized for 60 PSI max. operating pressure.
2.6 BALANCING VALVES: MAXIMUM 125 PSIG SYSTEM WORKING WATER PRESSURE
A. Pressure Dependent Water Flow:
1. '/2" and Larger: Construction and attachment style as required by piping system. Ball or globe valve
design with memory stop. Valves shall be field adjustable. Install in pipe with minimum length of
unrestricted straight pipe equivalent to five pipe diameters upstream. and two pipe diameters
downstream. Presso Venturi B -Plus series, Armstrong, or Tour & Anderson.
2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTION VALVES
A. General: All backflow prevention valves shall be State approved and listed.
B. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer for High Hazard Applications:
1. 2" and Smaller: Assembly shall consist of shutoff ball valves in inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet.
Assemblies shall include test cocks and pressure -differential relief valve located between two positive
seating check valves and shall comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013 and AWWA C506.
Bronze construction, threaded ends, stainless steel internal parts, and air -gap fitting. Route pipe from
air gap fitting to approved waste receptor. Watts #909 -QT -S -HW valve with #909AG air gap fitting.
2.. 2-1/2" and Larger: Assembly shall consist of shutoff OS&Y gate valves in inlet and outlet, and
strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks and pressure -differential relief valve located
between two positive seating check valves and shall comply with requirements of ASSE Standard
1015 and AWWA C506. Epoxy coated cast iron body construction, flanged ends, stainless steel
internal parts, bronze seats, and air gap fitting. Route pipe from air gap fitting to approved waste
receptor. Watts #909-S-OSY valve with #909AG air gap fitting.
C. Double Check Valve for Low Hazard Applications:
1. 2" and Smaller: Assembly shall consist of shutoff ball valves in inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet.
Assemblies shall include test cocks and two positive seating check valves and shall comply with
requirements of ASSE Standard 1015 and AWWA C510. Bronze construction, threaded ends, and
stainless steel internal parts. Watts #007 -QT -S.
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Assembly shall consist of shutoff OS&Y gate valves in inlet and outlet, and
strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks and two positive seating check valves and shall
comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1015 and AWWA C506. Epoxy coated cast iron body
construction, flanged ends, and stainless steel internal parts. Watts #709-S-OSY.
D. Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: Assembly shall consist of a bronze vacuum breaker body with silicone
disc, and full size orifice. Device shall be IAPMO listed, meet ASSE std. 1001, and ANSI std. A113.1.1
Chrome plated in finish areas.
E. Pressure Vacuum Breaker: Assembly shall consist of a one piece bronze or stainless steel body, with
• - stainless steel.spring loaded check, rubber diaphragm, and atmospheric vent, breakaway set screw.
Provide chrome plated. in finish areas. `
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -8
2.8 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES 0
A. Single seated, direct operated type; high capacity, having bronze body with strainer, by-pass feature,
pressure gauge tappings and complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Select proper size
for maximum flow rate and fail -off at inlet and outlet pressure indicated.
2.9 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Pressure Relief Valves: Constructed in accordance with ASME, 125 -pound setting, and so stamped.
Size as required. Watts #740 Series.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: Constructed in accordance with ASME, 125 -pound setting, and
so stamped. Size as required. Watts #100XL, 40XL, 140, N240, or 340 Series.
2.10 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVES
A. Diaphragm operated, steel construction of size and capacity as indicated on drawings. Regulators shall
be approved serving gas supplier, AGA and UL listed. Fisher, Sherwood, or approved equal.
2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES
A. General: Thermostatic valve constructed of brass and stainless steel, with screwdriver locking temp.
regulator and adjustable check stops. Provide access door with cylinder lock. Finish as selected by
Architect. Leonard #210 SB.
B. Master: High -low master thermostatic assembly of size and capacity as indicated on drawings. Bi -metal
motor, adjustable checkstops, inlet and outlet pressure gauges, thermometer with full port outlet ball
valves shutoffs, locking temperature regulator and surface mount stainless steel cabinet as specified.
Leonard type TM 1 86-PRV-RF-LTR-STSTL.
2.12 SOLENOID VALVES
A. UL listed, globe pattern bronze valve with threaded ends, stainless steel pilot, bronze piston, malleable
iron solenoid assembly with Yz" tapped conduit connections and Class "A" coil, 120 Volt, 60 Hertz.
Solenoid valve shall be wired to the Fire Alarm System. The valve shall close instantly on application of
current and open when de -energized.
2.13 MEDICAL GAS VALVES
A. Refer to Section 15215.
2.14 PROCESS VALVES
A. Refer to Section 15211.
2.15 FIRE PROTECTION VALVES:
A. Refer to Section 15300.
2.16 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES
A. General: •
Certification: Provide meters and gauges whose accuracies, under specified operating conditions,
are certified by manufacturer.
li
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -9
• 2. No mercury shall be used in thermometers due to hazardous material classification.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Marshalltown or US Gauge.
B. Glass Thermometers:
1. General: Provide bi-metal glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated,
designed and constructed in service indicated. Accuracy shall be 1 % +/- full scale with adjustable
recalibration.
2. Case: Type 300 series stainless steel, hermetically sealed, glass window, 3" diameter dial, with
adjustable angle.
3. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 1800 adjustment in vertical plane, 3600
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
4.. Scale: Satin faced, .non -reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.
5. Stem: Stainless steel, adjustable angle socket, length to suit installation.
6. Range: Conform to the following:
a. Hot Water: 20°F - 240°F with 2°F scale divisions.
b. Cold Water: -40°F - 160°F with 2°F scale divisions.
C. Thermometer Test Wells:
1. Provide thermometer test wells as indicated, constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to
match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut
with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.
D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs:
1. Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200°F (93°C). Construct
of brass and finish in nickel -plate, equip with '/z' NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type
neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting '/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion
thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to
insulation thickness, for insulated piping.
E. Pressure Gauges:
1. General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and
constructed for use in service indicated.
2. Type: General use, 1% accuracy ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourbon type, bottom
connection.
3. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2" diameter.
4. Connector: Brass with'/a' male NPT.
• 5. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
6. Pressure differential range shall be 100-psig minimum for the appropriate application with maximum 1
psig divisions.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -10
F. Pressure Gauge Cocks: •
1. General: Provide pressure gauge cocks between pressure gauges and gauge tees on piping
systems. Gauge cock constructed of brass with Y:' female NPT on each end, and "T" handle brass
plug.
2. Syphon: %" straight coil constructed of brass tubing with '/," male NPT on each end.
3. Snubber: W brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid
is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.
G. Pressure Gauge Connector Test Plugs:
1. Provide pressure gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200°F (93°C). Constructed
of brass and finish in nickel -plate, equip with YZ' NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type
neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion
pressure gauge. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap an chain. Provide extension, length equal to
insulation thickness, for insulated piping.
2.17 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. General:
1. Provide factory -fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service
indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or
provide proper selection to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and
connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one •
type is indicated, selection is installer's option.
B. Pipe Escutcheons:
1. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside
diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon
to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if
any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime zinc base paint
finish for unoccupied areas.
2. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation
can be expected to accumulate, provide stainless steel, cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid
or split hinged.
3. Pipe Escutcheons for. Dry Areas: Provide stainless steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
C. Drip Pans:
Provide drip pans fabricated from 16 -gauge galvanized sheet metal with watertight joints, and with
edges turned up 2-1/2". Reinforce top by structural angles. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low
point for watertight joint and 1" copper drain line connection. Extend 1" drain to nearest approved
receptor.
D. Dielectric Unions:
1. Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated, which •
effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action,
and stop corrosion.
•
•
•
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -11
E. Dielectric Flanges: Provide dielectric flanges for flanged transitions between dissimilar metal piping.
Watts Series 3100 or approved equal.
F. Unions:
1. Unions shall be of type specified in following schedule:
a. Black Steel, 2" and smaller: 250 Ib. screwed malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat.
b. Black Steel, 2-1/2" and larger: 150 Ib. cast iron screwed flanged, flat faced, full faced gasket.
c: Soldered Copper or Brass Pipe, 2" and smaller: 150 Ib. cast bronze or copper, ground joint,
non-ferrous seat with soldered ends.
d. Screwed Copper or Brass Pipe, 2" and smaller: 150 Ib. cast brass, ground joint, brass to brass
seat, with threaded ends.
e. Flanged Copper or Brass Pipe, 2-1/2" and larger: two (2) 150 Ib. cast bronze flanges.
f. Manufacturer: EPCO, Mueller, Stanley G. Flagg or Watts.
G. Flanges:
1. Provide flanges at flanged connections to equipment, tanks and valves. Faces of flanges being
connected shall be alike in all cases. Connection of raised -face flange to flat -faced flange not
permitted.
2. Use ASTM A307, Grade B, bolts and nuts for cast iron flanges and ASTM A193 for steel flanges.
Regular square head unfinished bolts with heavy semi -finished hex nuts ASTM A194. Cadmium
plated where exposed to weather. Rating: 150 Ib. or 300 Ib. in high pressure portions.
3. Type of pipe and corresponding flanges as follows:
a. Screwed Black Steel Pipelines: 125 Ib. black cast iron screwed flange, flat faces.
b. Welded Steel Pipe, 150 Ib. black forges steel welding flanges, 1/16" raised fact ASTM A181
Grade I. Use flat face when connected to flat faced companion flange.
H. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Provide fire proof sleeve assemblies utilizing UL rated sealant systems at all fire rated penetrations.
For non -rated sleeve penetrations pack the annular space between the pipe and sleeve with
fiberglass and/or mastic.
2. Sleeves shall provide a minimum'/2" annular clearance around pipe.
3. Sheet metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded
spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gauges: 3" and smaller, 20
gauge; 4" to 6", 16 gauge; over 6", 14 gauge.
4. Steel pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
5. Iron pipe:, Fabricate from cast iron or ductile -iron pipe; remove burrs.._
6. Plastic and copper pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -12
7. Sleeves through interior concrete walls and floors: Telescopic, submerged, adjustable sleeves by
Adjust -to -Crete, AMI or Shamrock. Floor sleeves to extend a minimum of 1" above finished floor.
8. Through exterior walls and floor on grade: 150 -pound class cast-iron pipe sleeve. Where waterproof
membranes are used, provide membrane clamps. For insulated piping, sleeve diameter shall not be
less than diameter of insulated pipe.
I. Sleeve Seals:
1. All sleeves shall be sealed to prevent intrusion of moisture, dust or insects.
2. Underground: For sleeves passing through exterior or foundation walls, provide mechanical link seal
assembly.
3. Aboveground: For sleeves passing through walls or floors provide a non-toxic 3 -hour rated fire
resistant silicone foam sealant with a Flame Spread Rating of 20. Sealant to be tested and approved
under UL 263, ASTM E119, and NFPA 251 Standards. All fire rated penetrations shall be sealed with
approved UL System.
4. Local Approvals: All seals to be provided shall be in accordance with the regulations of all governing
agencies of the city, county, and State Fire Marshal's Office.
J. Valve Boxes: Concrete body, cast iron cover with vandal resistant screws, extensions as required to
extend full depth to valve. Valve box cover lettering shall correspond to the valve service, "Water", "Gas",
"Fire", "Sewer", etc. Christy #G8 or equal.
2.18 PIPE COATING
A. All underground steel and copper pipe fittings, and all above ground steel and copper pipe and fittings in
corrosive air environments shall be covered with one of the following methods:
1. Twice Wrap 20 Mil. Scotch Wrap PVC No. 51, 50% overlap.
2. Prefabricated extruded plastic cover with joints sealed with two coats of 20 Mil. Scotch Wrap No. 51
or Pasco Wrap 20 mil weight.
2.19 GAS CONNECTORS
A. General Areas: AGA rated, UL listed, braided stainless steel gas hose of size and capacity to meet
appliance input requirements.
B. Food Service Equipment: AGA rated, UL listed, plastic coated braided stainless steel gas hose with quick
disconnect, swivel fitting and coiled restraining device. Dormont #1675BPQS or approved equal.
C. Gas connectors for outdoor applications shall be listed for exterior use.
2.20 EXPANSION COMPENSATORS
A. General: Pipe expansion, in general, is to be absorbed in bends, swing joints, expansion loops, and
offsets. All piping mains, branches and runouts shall be installed to allow for free expansion and
contraction without developing leaks or undue stressing of pipe. Stresses shall be within allowable limits
of ASME 831.1 for pressure piping. Vertical piping for domestic hot water, chilled water, heating water,
steam and steam condensate shall be provided with expansion joints at each floor. Expansion products
to conform to the standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association. Expansion joints shall not
required packing. Installer shall select materials and pressure/temperature ratings to suit intended
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -13
service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 150% absorption capacity of calculated maximum
0 piping expansion between anchors. All connections shall have ends to match piping system application.
B. Expansion Compensators (Pipe Compression and Extension): Multiple stainless steel bellows and
stainless steel liner with shroud and end fittings. Keflex #311 series or approved equal.
C. Flexible Expansion Joint/Seismic Connector for Steel Pipe: Stainless steel hose and braid, 180° return,
AGA approved, and end fittings. Metraflex #Metraloop or approved equal.
D. Flexible Connection for Steel Pipe (Piping and Equipment Located Outside the Building): Stainless steel
hose and braid, with threaded or flanged ends. Metraflex #SST or approved equal.
E. Flexible Connection for Copper Pipe: Bronze hose and braid, copper tube ends. Metraflex #BBS or
approved equal.
1. For non-critical pump connections. Furnish with fluorelastomer tube and cover to ASTM D2000
Grade 1 HK710. The body shall be reinforced with rectangular body rings and six bias plies of
fiberglass/kevlar fabric rated 190#/26" vacuum at 250°F. Provide galvanized flat (not L shaped) back
up rings and control rods to limit maximum axial extension. Garlock #206 EZ-FLO or approved equal.
2. Flexible Ball Pipe Joints: Provide flexible ball pipe joints where indicated for piping systems, with
materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by installer to suit intended service. Design
joints for 3600 rotation, and with minimum of 50° angular flexing movement for sizes Y;' to 4". Provide
two composition gaskets for each joint. Barco or approved equal.
F. Pipe Alignment Guides: Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere
as indicated on drawings. Guide shall be of carbon steel construction with split guiding cylinder and
integral anchor base and internal four finger two-piece spider. Cylinder wall thickness shall be equal to
schedule 40 wall thickness of pipe being guided. Spider shall be capable of clamping directly to pipe and
moving only in an axial direction while inside cylinder. Anchoring directly to building substrate. Metraflex
#Style IV or equal.
G. Expansion Loops: Provide field fabricated pipe expansion loops as detailed on the drawings o r in place of
mechanical expansion joints.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Workmanship shall be performed by licensed journeymen or master mechanics and shall result in an
installation consistent with the best practices of trades.
B. Install work uniform, level and plumb, in relationship. to lines of building. Do not install any diagonal, or
otherwise irregular work unless so indicated on Drawings or approved by Architect.
3.2 -MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. Follow manufacturers' directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of articles
used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or covered in these
Specifications.
3.3 INSTALLATION :.
A. Coordinate the work between -the various Mechanical Sections and with the work specified under other
Divisions of the work or contracts toward rapid completion of the entire project. If any cooperative work
must be altered due to lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper provisions in time, then the
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -14
work hereunder shall include all expenses of such changes as are necessary in the work under other
contracts, and such changes shall be directly supervised by and made to the satisfaction of the Engineer. •
B. The cooperative work not included in the Mechanical Division related to'the general construction work is
as follows:
1. All formed concrete work.
2. Framed openings in masonry and other Architectural and Structural elements.
3. Wood grounds and nailing strips in masonry and concrete.
4. Sloping of floors to drains and floor sinks.
5. Sloping of roof -to -roof drains and overflow drains.
C. Inspect all material, equipment, and apparatus upon delivery and do not install any that maybe subject to
rejection as a result of damage or other defects. Provide tarps and visqueen cover to protect equipment
and piping delivered to and stored at the site.
3.4 WORKING PRESSURES
A. All fittings, valves, pipe, specialties equipment shall be rated for the working pressure subjected in the
installed locations.
B. Drawings indicate working pressure in each system. The rating of the equipment and material shall not
be less than that of the system pressures. 0"
3.5 PIPES SIZES TO EQUIPMENT
A. General: Pipe sizes indicated shall be carried full size to equipment served. Any change of size to match
equipment connection shall be made within one foot of equipment.
B. At temperature control valves with sizes smaller than connected lines, reduction shall be made
immediately adjacent to valve.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will
achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without
piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints or couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions
for disassembly and maintenance or replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where
indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment
tolerance. Comply with ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid
diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs
as shown or described by diagrams, details, and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in
shortest route which does not obstruct space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, and other structural and permanent -enclosure elements
of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but
allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside •
insulation. Whenever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in
column enclosures, in hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal
runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.
BANK OF AMERICA .15150
- _ t, PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -15
C. Elevator Machine Rooms, Switchgear, Generator, Telecommunications, Telephone Rooms, and Electrical
Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic
equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run
through electrical spaces. Route drip pan drain piping to floor drain, floor sink or other approved receptor.
3.7 WELDING
A. Qualifications of Welders: Welders performing work under this Contract shall be certified and qualified in
accordance with tests prescribed by the National Certified Welding Bureau (NCWB) or by other approved
test procedures using methodology and procedures covered in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section IX, "Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and
Welding and Brazing Operators". Installation shall conform to ANSI 31.1 "Power Piping".
1. Submit for approval the names, identification, and welder's assigned number, letter or symbol of
welders assigned to this project.
2. The assigned identification symbol shall be used to identify the work of each welder and shall be
indelibly stamped immediately upon completion of each weld.
3. Welders shall be tested and certified for all positions.
4. Submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by each operator.
5. Any or all welders may be required to retake welding certification tests without additional expense.
6. When so requested, a welder shall not be permitted to work as a welder on this project until he has
w been recertified in accordance with NCWB.
7. Recertification of the welder shall be made after the welder has taken and passed the required tests.
8. Where piping 1-1/2 inches and smaller is butt or socket welded, submit 3 samples of test welds for
approval.
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS
A. All piping shall be cut squarely, free of rough edges and reamed to full bore. Piping shall be mechanically
cleaned prior to make-up of joints and fully inserted into fittings.
B. Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.
C. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Remove excess cutting oil from piping prior to
assembly. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting
manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
D. Solder copper tube and fitting joints with lead free nickel/silver bearing solder meeting ASTM. B-32, in
accordance with IAPMO IS 3-93, ASTM B-828 and Copper Development Association recommended
procedures. Joints shall be cleaned by other than chemical means prior to assembly. "Shock" cooling is
prohibited. Fluxes shall be applied liberally to the outside of the pipe and the solder cup of the fitting.
Fluxes shall be water soluble for copper and brass potable water applications, and shall meet CDA
standard test method 1.0 and ASTM 8813-91. Solder shall be applied until a full fillet is present around
the joint.. Solder and flux shall not be applied in such excessive quantities as to run down interior of pipe.
• Lead solder or corrosive flux shall not be present at the jobsite.
1. Manufacturers:
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -16
a. Solder: JW Harris "Bridgit" or Englehard "Silvabrite 100". •
b. Flux: Laco "Flux -Rite 90", MW Dunton "Nokorode CDA Flux", Hercules "Fluid Action Solder Flux".
E. Braze copper tube and fitting socket or extrude joints (T -drill) with BCUP series filler metal without flux.
Listed brazing flux shall be used for joining of copper tube to brass or bronze fittings and shall meet AWS
F63A or FB3C. Medical gas system brazing shall be as specified in Section 15215. "Shock" cooling is
prohibited. A continuous fillet shall be visible around the completed joint. After cooling, flux residue shall
be thoroughly removed with warm water and a brush prior to testing. Do not use BCUP filler on copper
alloys containing over 10% nickel.
F. Piping shall be capped during construction to prevent entry of foreign material.
G. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:
1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0°F.
2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.50 angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal
particles, and dirt.
3. Use pipe clamps or tack -weld joints with 1" long welds, 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds for pipe
sizes 12" to 20".
4. Build up welds with stringer -bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass.
Eliminate valleys at center and at edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure
elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow -holes, and non-metallic inclusions. 0
5. Do not weld out piping system imperfections by tack -welding procedures. Refabricate to comply with
requirements.
6. At Installer's option, install forged branch -connection fittings whenever branch pipe is indicated, or
install regular T -fitting.
H. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment.
Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets.
Cast -Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards and
installation instructions.
3.9 VALVES
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements:
1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch
lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that
separate support can be provided as necessary. Install valves on all services connected to kitchen
equipment.
2. Install valves, except butterfly valves, with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in
no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane without prior written approval. Install
valve drains with hose -end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal
plane.
3. Install butterfly valves with stems mounted horizontally.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -17
• 4. All valves mounted higher than 7' above floor in mechanical rooms and where indicated shall be
installed with stem horizontal and equipped with chain wheels and chains extending to 6' above floor.
5. Provide Seismic shut off valve on gas main downstream of meter.
B. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended -stem valves, arranged in proper manner to
receive insulation.
C. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install valves with
the following ends of types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Pipe, 2-1/2" and Smaller: Soldered -joint valves.
2. Steel Pipe, 2" and Smaller: Threaded joint valves.
3. Larger Pipe Sizes: One of the following, at installer's option:
a. - Flanged valves.
b. Lug valves.
D. Non -Metallic Disc: Limit selection and installation of valves with non-metallic discs to locations indicated
and where foreign material in piping system can be expected to prevent tight shutoff of metal seated
valves.
E. Renewable Seats: Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.
F. Fluid Control: Except as otherwise indicated, install gate, ball, plug, circuit setter, globe, and butterfly
valves to comply with ASME B31.9.
G. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to center line
of pipe. Install for proper direction of flow.
H. Wafer Check: Install between 2 flanges in horizontal or vertical position.
I. Ball Valve: Ball valve used on gas systems shall be UL listed, AGA approved for pressure of system, no
exception
J. Valve Adjustment: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final testing,
adjusting, and balancing, inspect each valve for possible leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks,
replace valve if leak persists.
K. Valve Identification: -Tag each valve in accordance with "Mechanical Identification" section.
L. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's
touch-up paint.
3.10 TEMPERATURE GAUGES
A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by
observer standing on floor without supplemental illumination. All gages to be installed with snubbers to
absorb system shock.
B. Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At outlet of hot water heaters.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -18
2. At inlet and outlet of boilers.
3.11 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure plates located under each bolt head
and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form a watertight seal.
B. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound in compliance approved and
listed UL system number. Adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.12 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS (SEE 15050)
3.13 EQUIPMENT RAILS AND PIPE PORTALS
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate with other trades so units are installed when roofing is being installed.
C. Verify roof insulation thickness and adjust raise of cant to match.
3.14 VIBRATION CONTROL ISOLATORS
A. Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection and application of
vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.
C�
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. 0
C. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application
to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom
out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks
and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation.
D. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.
E. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required
where substrate is not level.
F. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves.
G. Upon completion of vibration control work, prepare report showing measured equipment deflections for
each major item of equipment as indicated.
H. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt or debris
in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.
3.15 EXPANSION LOOPS
A. Expansion Loops: Fabricate expansion loops as indicated, in locations. indicated, and elsewhere as
determined by installer for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Subject loop to cold spring
which will absorb 50% of total expansion between hot and cold conditions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe
alignment guides as indicated, and elsewhere as determined by installer to properly anchor piping in
relationship to expansion loops.
BANK OF AMERICA ` '' t ` 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES'- 1'9
• B. Expansion Compensation for Risers and Terminals: Install connection between piping mains and risers
with at least five pipe fittings including tee in main. Install connections between piping risers and terminal
units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in riser.
3.16 EXPANSION COMPENSATORS
A. Install as noted on plans. Where plans do not indicate spacing of guides or other pertinent information,
install per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.17 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Underground piping shall be installed in stable, open trench work. Trench excavations shall be a
minimum of 16" wide, true to line and grade. Contractor shall exercise all due shoring and safety
procedures. No stones larger than 1" may be present in the trench to a minimum depth of 4" below the
trench bottom. The trench shall be free of job site debris, and free of corrosive media. Pipe crown shall
be not less than 24" below the finished ground surface for metallic pipe, and 30" for non-metallic pipe,
unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or directed by the Architect. Trenches shall be kept free of
excess moisture, and shall be kept open for only a short a time as necessary for installation, testing and
inspection. Dispose of surplus excavation and seepage water as directed by the Architect.
B. Piping shall be properly bedded and backfilled over stable trench bottom to a level of at least 12" above
the pipe crown with thin layers of unwashed sand, dampened but not puddle, and free of organic or
corrosive materials and excessive moisture. Backfill shall be placed in thin layers not to exceed 6" and
tamped by mechanical tampers to a minimum 90% Modified Proctor Density, in accordance with ASTM D -
1557-58T. trenches shall be backfilled to a minimum depth of 36" prior to being wheel loaded. Replac a to
their original condition all turf, plants, concrete, asphalt, or other improvements which constitute
landscaping, traffic areas or other improved areas which become disturbed by excavation. In graded and
undeveloped areas, in addition to procedures specified above, backfill trenches with crown 8" above the
surrounding surface.
yx,. C. Excavated and backfill in soils of unstable nature shall be provided as directed by Architect.
3.18 PIPE INSPECTIONS
A. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that systems be inspected at completion of each phase while
under tests required for administrative authorities, and prior to concealment, i.e. "Rough -in" "top -out" and
final.
B. Inspection — Below Grade: All piping installed below grade shall be inspected prior to burial by the
Architect, the Owner's Representative or the'Engineer. Contractor must notify Architect no less than 24
working hours prior to inspection time. Should the piping be buried prior to inspection the contractor may
be requested to uncover the piping at no delay to the project and at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Inspection — Above Grade: All piping installed above grade shall be made available for inspection upon
completion and prior to finish of walls and ceilings. Notify the Architect, the Owner's Representative or
the Engineer. Contractor must notify Architect no less than 24 working hours prior to the desired
inspection time. Should the piping be hidden within the structure prior to inspection the contractor may be
requested to uncover the piping at no delay to the project and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.19 CLEANING, FLUSHING, DISINFECTING
40A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for
application of specified coatings (if any).
B. Flush out piping systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of
each system for completion of joints, supports, and accessory items.
BANK OF AMERICA 15150
PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES -20
C. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31. is
D. Disinfect water mains and water service piping in accordance with Section 15400.
3.20 TESTING
A. Provide all tests specified hereinafter and as otherwise required. Provide all test equipment, including
test pumps, gauges, instruments, and other equipment required. Test all rotational equipment for proper
direction of rotation. Upon completion of testing, certify to the Architect, in writing, that the specified tests
have been performed and that the installation complies with the specified requirements and provide a
report of the test observations signed by qualified inspector.
B. Piping: Remove from the system, during testing, all equipment which would be damaged by test
pressure. Replace removed equipment when testing has been accomplished. The system may be tested
in sections as the work progresses; however, any previously tested portion shall become a part of any
latter test of a composite system. Correct leaks by remaking joints with new material.
C. Test time will be accrued only while full test pressure is on the system. Unless indicated otherwise.
"Tolerance" shall be no pressure drop, except that due to temperature change in a 24-hour period.
Inspect and test all work prior to burying or concealing.
System
Test Medium
Test Pressure
Tolerance -Test Period
Domestic Water
Water
150 psig
None — 8 hours
Soil and Waste
Water
10 ft head, 5 psi
No leaks — 8 hours
Vent
Water
Top of Vent Terminal
No leaks — 8 hours
Storm
Water
Top of Roof Drain, 5
psi
No leaks — 8 hours
Automatic Fire
Water:=
200 psig
None — 8 hours
Natural Gas/
Air
160 psig
None — 24 hours
D. Final Drainage, Waste and Vent Test: Upon project closeout, Contractor shall perform and certify that the
DWV system has passed the following test:
After all plumbing fixtures have been installed and their traps filled with water, all vent terminals and
building drains shall be closed and a U-tube water manometer shall be inserted into the trap of water
closet and an air compressor testing apparatus shall be. attached to any suitable opening. An air
pressure of 1"water column as indicated on the manometer shall be introduced into the system. The
pressure shall hold constant for a period of 15 minutes without the introduction of additional air.
Leaks revealed during this test may be located by smoke test of other recognition methods.
E. Valves: Test all valve bonnets for tightness. Test operate all valves at least once from closed -to-open-to-
closed position while valve is under test pressure. Test all automatic valves, including solenoid valves,
and temperature and pressure relief valves, safety valves, and temperature and pressure relief valves not
less than three (3) times.
F. Piping Specialties: Test all thermometers, pressure gauges, and water meters for accurate indication;
automatic water feeders, air vents, trap primers, and vacuum breakers for proper performance. Test all
air vent points to ensure that all air has been vented.
G. Backflow Preventers: Each testable backflow prevention device shall be tested and approved by certified
testers after installation. Submit test results.
•
END OF SECTION 0
•
•
BANK OF AMERICA .15300
FIRE PROTECTION =1
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 -APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes providing anew complete and fully operable automatic sprinkler system as described
in this Section of the Specification and as shown on the contract construction drawings and shall be in
accordance with'rules, regulations and standards as required by the following governing agencies.
1. State of California.
2. City of La Quinta.
3. Governing Building Department.
4. Governing Fire Prevention Division, Fire Marshal's Office.
B. Work to be in accordance with criteria of the following:
1. State of California Structural Specialty Code.
2. National Fire Protection Association.
a. No. 13 - Sprinkler Systems
b. No. 70 - National Electrical Code.
c. No. 101 -Life Safety Code.
3. Uniform Fire Code, with latest amendments.
4. Factory Mutual (product listing, only). (Project Review and Product Listing).
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
6. Industrial Risk Insurance Underwriters. -
7. Owner's insurance agency.
C. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Automatic Wet Type Sprinkler System.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit six copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for fire
protection materials and products.
1. Thirty days after the awarding of contract, contractor shall submit list of manufacturer's names and
• -model numbers for approval to architect. This list shall identify any prior approved substituted items
contractor wishes to use. Do not submit Aechnical data until list has been approved. This is
mandatory.
BANK OF AMERICA 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -2
B. Fabrication Drawings: Prepare scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not
necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, and elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall •
and floor penetrations, and connections. Indicate interface between and spatial relationship to piping and
adjacent equipment. See Section 15050, "Coordination Documents", for further information.
C. Submittal Drawings: Submit shop drawings to Agency having jurisdiction for approval bearing preparer's
NICET stamp. Submit six approved copies, bearing stamp and/or signature of governing Fire Marshal to
the Engineer for review and approval.
1. Contractor shall submit sprinkler head locations to architect for approval.
D. Hydraulic Calculations: Prepare hydraulic calculations of fire protection systems. Submit to governing
Fire Marshal for approval. Submit six approved copies, bearing stamp, and/or signature of Agency having
jurisdiction to Owner's representative for review and approval. If hydraulic calculations are prepared on
computer programs, submit disc copies of calculations in addition to above.
Contractor shall submit published piping friction loss data from manufacturer with hydraulic
calculations.
E. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates
that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete,
and has no defects.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for fire protection materials and products.
Include this data, product data, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculation, certificate of
installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of the General
Conditions and of Div. 1, Section 01700.
1.4 DESIGN DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the specification combined with any of the contract drawings are intended as a guide to
establish a basis of design for the systems required.
B. Contractor shall examine the Architectural, Interior Design, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical
drawings, layout and install a completely hydraulically sized sprinkler system for all areas. Space shall be
provided for any valving and equipment to be used. System shall start 5-0" from perimeter wall and
extend throughout the building. Fire main beyond 5'-0" perimeter is provided under Division 2 work.
1. Contractor shall contact Owner's insurance agency to incorporate insurer's design requirements in
this layout document. <<<(Factory Mutual shall review layout drawings and calculations. Incorporate
all of their design criteria into documents.)>>>
C. Office Areas: The main building shall be served with a wet type sprinkler system. A main riser shall be
located in the Mechanical Room with sprinkler zone valves on each floor.
D. All areas shall be provided with an operational sprinkler system as the construction progresses, including
accessible pipe chases, elevator pits, etc. Provide shutoff valve with tamper switch for elevator pit.
E. Pressure restricting devices shall be installed on any branch outlet exceeding 100 PSI.
F. All electrical devices used for this system shall be compatible with the fire alarm system, refer to Division
16.
G. Seismic Requirement: All automatic sprinkler and standpipe systems shall be seismically braced and •
anchored for Seismic Zone 4 California Coast and Southern California.
1. Submit shop drawings showing materials and methods.
a •, �1.'r .s .ley.
BANK OF AMERICA 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -3
2. Comply with requirements of NFPA-13. Do not use NFPA Earthquake Zone Chart A-6-4.1.
• 1.5 HYDRAULIC DESIGN
A. System shall be a straight line or gridded system per NFPA No. 13 with the following exceptions:
1. For all systems the design area shall be the hydraulically most demanding rectangular area having a
dimension parallel to the branch lines at least 1.4 times the square root of the sprinkler operation
used.
2. Velocity in overhead piping shall not exceed 20 feet per second in overhead piping and 16 feet per
second in underground piping.
3. Maximum sprinkler discharge pressure used at the starting point of calculated areas shall not exceed
60 psi.
4. Minimum pressure for any sprinkler head shall not be less than 7 psi.
B. Light Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.10 GPM per square foot calculated for an area of 1500 sf in the
most remote location.
C. Ordinary Group I Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.16 GPM per sf calculated for an area of 1500 square
feet in the most remote locations.
D. Ordinary Group II Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.19 GPM per sf calculated for an area of 2000 square
feet in the most,remote locations.
• E. Extra Group I Hazard Areas: Water density of 0.30 GPM per sf calculated for an area of 2500 square feet
in the most remote locations.
F. Head spacing shall not exceed the limits described in NFPA Pamphlet No. 13.
1. Light Hazard: 225 sf (smooth ceiling), 200 sf for pipe schedule.
2. Ordinary Hazard: 120 sq. ft. .
3. Extra Hazard: 100 sq. ft., 90 sq. ft. for pipe schedule.
G. -Maximum floor areas protected by any one sprinkler system riser:
1. Light Hazard: 52,000 sf
2. Ordinary Hazard: 52,000 sf
3. Extra Hazard: 40,000 sq. ft.
H. Flow Data: Contractor is to verify flow data (static pressure; residual pressure and GPM flowing) available
at site and provide design for available pressure and flow.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
• A. All.products.to be commercial grade,.new_and of the manufacturer's latest design model. FOREIGN
products will not be a.ccepted without written approval from engineer prior to submission of bid.
B. All products to be UL listed and/or FM approved, no exceptions.
BANK OF AMERICA 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -4
C. All products to be delivered and stored in original containers. Containers shall be clearly marked or
stamped with manufacturer's name and rating. •
D. The following items to be included but specified under Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods.
1. Hangers and supports.
2. Escutcheons plates, flashings and sleeves.
3. Access panel and doors.
4. Identification markers and signs.
5. Expansion compensators and flexible connectors.
6. Anchors, alignment guides, and seismic restraints.
7. Excavation and backfill.
8. Flexible sprinkler connector
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS - ABOVE GROUND
A. General: The piping products listed below by manufacturer's name and model numbers are the only
acceptable materials listed for this project. Substitutions of pipe must be submitted and approved in
writing by the architect prior to bid. No copper pipe shall be allowed in the wet fire sprinkler system.
B. Piping or fittings that show any rust or breaks in coating will be removed and replaced. •
C. Allied or American Tube: Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A-135 or ASTM A-795 stamped on pipe, UV
cured acrylic finish; Stockham, Grinnell or Warwick Class 150 threaded malleable, ASTM A197, ASTM
A126, or Victaulic roll -grooved fittings and couplings, only.
D. Allied or American Tube: Schedule 10 light wall black steel pipe, ASTM A-135 or ASTM A-795 stamped
on pipe, UV cured acrylic finish; Victaulic roll -grooved fittings and couplings. Allied "Super Flo" or
American Tube "Dyna -Flow", high tensile steel pipe ASTM A-795, type E, Grade A: acrylic finish; roll
grooved fittings or couplings.
E. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic grooved couplings style 07, 75 or 77, or equal by Gruvlok.
F. Mechanical Tees: Victaulic style 920, Gruvlok. Victaulic style 921 mechanical tees are not acceptable.
G. Flexible sprinkler connector for ductwork sprinkler application: Flexhead or equal Factory Mutual
approved system.
2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS - UNDERGROUND
A. Class 52 ductile iron pipe and fittings, white, cement lined, mechanical or Tyton joint fittings. Piping to be
factory encased with 8 mil polyethylene tube or sheet. Fittings to be double field wrapped with 2" wi de, 20
mil vinyl tape, 50% overlap.
B. Provide 2000 PSI concrete thrust blocks at all fittings.
C.. Manufacturer: United States Pipe and Foundry, Griffin or Pacific States, only. •
1
BANK OF AMERICA 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -5
2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS - GENERAL
• A. Sprinkler heads shall be regular automatic closed -type heads of ordinary degree temperature rating
except that sprinkler heads installed in the vicinity of heating equipment or in special occupancy areas
shall be of the temperature rating as described in NFPA No. 13.
B. The Contractor shall furnish spare heads. The heads shall be packed in a suitable container and shall be
representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating head installed. In
addition to the spare heads, the contractor shall furnish not less than two special sprinkler head
wrenches. Refer to NFPA 13, Paragraph 2-2.7 "Stock of Spare Heads". -
C. Location of sprinkler piping is critical.
1. Ceiling space is at a minimum under beams. Location of ductwork takes precedence, coordinate
accordingly. Install heads for coverage and floor coverage.
2. Include in base bid (3) two-hour coordination meetings with Owner, Architect, and Engineer for
coordination of sprinkler pipe routing.
3. Coordinate beam and shear wall penetrations with Structural Engineer. Obtain written approval for all
beam penetrations from Structural Engineer.
2.5 SPRINKLER HEADS AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Sprinkler heads installed shall be upright or pendent, as conditions require, and shall be of the following
type and finish for the areas designated. Unless otherwise specified, sprinklers shall be small frame type,
center bulb capsule for finished areas, fusible link for unfinished areas,
and 1/2" orifice.
Building
Sprinkler
Sprinkler
Escutch.
Temp.
Area
Head
Finish
Finish
Deq-
Unfinished
Upright/
Brass
None
155° F
Retail,
Pendant
-'
Garage,
Star
Rooms &
Nova Q/R
Office'
- LD -2 (QR)
Model "M"
Micromatic
Mechanical,
Upright
Brass
None
286° F
Electrical,
Star
Telephone &
LD -2
Switchgear
Rooms
Finished
Concealed
Brass
White
155° F
Ceilings
Pendant
Star
Phantom
PH -1
Soffit
Recessed
White
White
155° F
Sidewall
Star
Star-
2085
•
Galaxy
SG
BANK OF AMERICA 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -6
Misc Vertical Chrome Chrome 155° F
Sidewall •
Star
Model E
(17/32" orifice)
Misc Dry -Pendant Chrome Chrome 155° F
Star SG -QR
B. Manufacturer: Reliable, Star or Viking.
2.6 VALVING
A. 2" or Smaller:
1. Control Valve: OS&Y rising stem type gate valve bronze body, bonnet and disc, copper alloy stem,
threaded ends, 175 PSI WOG min. Provide with tamper switch.
2. Check Valve: Swing check type with bronze body, cap and disc, threaded ends, 175 PSI WOG min.
3. Drip Valve: 3/4", cast brass automatic ball drip type, threaded ends, 175 PSI WOG min.
4. Testing Valve: 1-1/4", test and drain, sight glass, %' test orifice, lever operated, 300 psi WOG. Drain
to mop sink or drain riser.
5. Main Drain Valve: 2", angle gate valve, bronze body, copper alloy stem, threaded ends, 175 psi
WOG. Drain to mop sink or drain riser.
B. 2-1/2" or Larger:
1. Control Valve: Lug type wafer valve with tamper switch, ductile iron body, nickel plated ductile iron
disc, stainless steel stem and Puna -N seat, 175 PSI WOG min.
2. Control Valve: OS&Y rising stem type gate valve, cast iron body and bonnet, bronze stem, seat and
disc, flanged ends, 175 PSI WOG min. Provide with tamper switch.
3. Check Valve: Swing check type with cast iron body, bolted cap and disc, flanged ends, 175 PSI
WOG min.
4. Manufacturer: Grinnell, Stockham, Milwaukee, Mueller, Kennedy, Elkart or AGF.
2.7 WET SPRINKLER ALARM CHECK VALVE
A. Contractor shall provide, where required, a completely engineered horizontal wet alarm check valve,
retarding chamber, and trim assembly. Viking #H-2, Star or Reliable.
2.8 UNDERGROUND WATER VALVE
A. Resilient seated gate, valve, non -rising stem, 2" square valve nut, ductile iron construction with epoxy
coated surfaces, both interior and exterior, 250 PSI, mechanical joint ends. Provide yard box and cover.
B. Manufacture: American Darling, Clow, Dresser, or U.S. Pipe.
BANK OF�AMERICA . -a : _ _ _._ . __,_.._ . _ 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -7
2.9 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
• A. Fire Service: 150 class pressure rating, cast iron body with brass main valve trim, control system cast
bronze with stainless steel trim.
1. Manufacturer: Cla-Val #90-21 UL.
B. Sprinkler System: Rough bronze body with red enameled handwheel with integral check valve of the
pressure reducing type. Outlet pressure shall not exceed 165 PSI at maximum system pressures.
Pressure settings to be field adjustable.
1. Manufacturer: Zurn #Z-3004.
2.10 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
A. Provide 3/4" pressure relief valve on discharge side of Sprinkler system pressure reducing valve. Set to a
maximum of 175 PSI.
1. Manufacturer: Zurn #P1000A.
2.11 DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. Construction: • Epoxy coated, ductile iron construction, 175 PSI working pressure, complete with two
spring loaded "Y" type check valves. "Y" strainer with hose bibb in suction side of assembly, two OS&Y
gate valves, test cocks, bypass water meter and bypass double check.
1. Manufacturer: Febco #806YD-DCDA, Watts #709 -DDC, Wilkins #550=DCDA.
2.12 TAMPER SWITCHES
A. Switch shall be mounted so as not to interfere with normal operation of the valve and be adjusted to
operate when handle of valve has traveled more than one-fifth the distance of its normal operating
position. Electrical Contractor shall provide conduit from switch to fire alarm panel.
B. Housing shall be of aluminum, acid -treated, primed and -finished in baked red enamel. Removal of
housing shall cause switch to operate. Inside shall be single pole, double throw micro switch with
connection for electrical conduit.
C. Install on all control valves.
D. Manufacturer: Potter -Electric, Notifier, Ellenco, or Simplex.
2.13 WATER FLOW ALARM - VANE TYPE
A. Indicator shall be for either vertical or horizontal installation. Indicator shall not be installed in a fitting that
changes direction of water flow and shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals
or exceeds the discharge from one sprinkler head. Provide retarding device to prevent false alarms from
line surges.
B. Whenever a water flow alarm is installed in the piping system, an approved floor control valve shall be
provided upstream of the alarm indicator. In addition, a drain is required downstream of the alarm
indicator.
C. Each water flow alarm shall be wired to a Fire System. All wiring and conduits as required will be
provided under Division 16. An alarm will automatically activate the local fire alarm system.
D. Manufacturer: Potter -Electric, Ellenco, Notifier, or Simplex.
BANK OF AMERICA 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -8
2.14 EXTERIOR ALARM
A. Electric bell, 10" diameter, U.L. listed, weather-proof back box housing, 120 VAC, 84 dB at 10 FT. •
B. Electric Horn: Potter -Electric, Ellenco, Notifier, or Simplex weatherproof, 120 VAC.
2.15 EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire extinguishers shall be U.L. listed, type 2A10B:C. Cabinet door and frame shall be steel, recessed
with gray enamel prime coat. Refer to Architectural drawings for exact location and elevation of each
cabinet.
2.16 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Flush wall mounted unit or freestanding unit with individual clapper valves, plugs and chains, locations as
indicated on drawings. Escutcheon plate to be lettered "AUTO SPRINKLER". Unit shall be polished
chrome or brass finish, mounted 36" above finished grade. Number of inlets required shall be in
accordance with regulations of the Fire Marshal or local fire department.
B. Fire Department Valves: 2-1/2" brass construction female to male angle valve with cap and chain, rough
chrome finish, mounted 48" above finished floor.
C. Pressure Restricting Fire Department Valves: 2-1/2" tamper proof, automatic pressure reducing, all brass
male to female angle, rated at 300 PSI rough chrome finish, mounted 48" above finished fl oor. This valve
may be used on sprinkler branch exceeding 100 PSI in lieu of control valve specified; provide with tamper
switch and bracket.
D. Roof Manifold: Vertical unit with (3) 2-1/2" fire department valves, rough chrome finish, mount 36" above
finished floor.
0—
E. Manufacturer: Croker, Elkhart, Powhatten Brass or Potter -Roemer.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This system to be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of automatic
sprinkler system as specified by the requirements of the Specifications.
3.2 PERFORMANCE OF WORK
A. Examine areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed. Layout the system to suit the
different types of construction and equipment as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with NFPA
Pamphlet No. 13, 14, 20 and 24.
B. Work to start immediately after authorization has been given to proceed so that the overall progress of the
construction is not delayed.
C. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to properly interface components of the sprinkler system.
D. Follow manufacturer's directions and recommendations in all cases.
E. The omission from the drawings or Specifications of any details of construction, installation, materials, or Ak
essential specialties shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing the same in place for a complete
system.
• t.. l� 4�ti � 1 t
1
BANK OF AMERICA15300
FIRE PROTECTION -9
3.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION ♦
• A. Provide all temporary valving, piping, Siamese connections and other components as directed by the fire
agency office during all phases of construction.
3.4 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Fire protection system shall be installed in accordance with the approved Drawings. The finished ceiling
is not to be erected until all fire protection piping has been installed, tested, and inspected. Sprinkler
heads located in the electrical equipment, elevator, or similar rooms shall be furnished with deflectors to
prevent water spray on equipment.
B. Before connection to the overhead piping, all underground piping shall be flushed with water flowing at
velocity and quantity required .by the installation standards specified above in this Section of the
Specifications. ♦
C. The arrangement of all pipes shall conform to all architectural requirements and field conditions, shall be
as straight and direct as possible, forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls and other pi pes,
and shall be neatly spaced. Offsets will be permitted only where required to permit the pipes to follow the
walls. Standard fittings shall be used for offsets. All risers shall be erected plumb and true, shall be
parallel with the walls and other pipes, and shall be neatly spaced. All work shall be coordinated with
HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical and Structural work in order to avoid interference and unnecessary cutting of
floors or walls. All underground or concealed work shall be before the construction is closed up.
` D. Sprinkler heads in all finished areas are to be installed on a true axis line in both directions, with
maximum deviation from the axis line of/z inch plus or minus and shall be plus or minus. 1 " within center
of tile. At the completion of the installation, if any heads are found to exceed the above mentioned
tolerance, they shall be removed and reinstalled.
E. No pipes or other apparatus shall be installed so as to interfere in any way with full swing of doors.
F. The arrangement, positions, and connections of pipes, drains, valves, etc., shall be as required by NFPA
Pamphlet #13 for all areas to be sprinklered. However, the right is reserved by the Architect to change
the location of any item to accommodate conditions which may arise during progress of the work, without
additional compensation for such changes provided that no additional heads are required prior to the
installation of the work.
G. Where required, piping shall be installed concealed in building construction, or though steel beams, to
obtain adequate head room.
H. All pipe throughout the job shall be reamed smooth before being installed. Pipe shall not be split, bent,
flattened, or otherwise injured either before or during installation.
I. Provide protective pans under pipes passing over high voltage electrical bus duct or switchgear
equipment. The pan shall be constructed of 12 gauge black iron with a 6 inch lip, the corners being
welded to make the pans watertight. Each pan shall be given three coats of Rust-Oleum paint and shall
be supported by pipe hangers. The pan shall drain clear of the bus duct or switchgear.
J. All pipe inter iors shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before installation, and shall be kept clean
during installation by plugging or other approved means. Piping shall be covered with visqueen during
storage. Piping that shows.signs of rusting will be removed from job site and replaced.
K. Field Connections: Any modifications to system required by field conditions, physical equipment changes
0' . or compliance with code regulations shall be made promptly without cost, to Owner.
BANK OF AMERICA 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -10
L. Interference: No piping or sprinkler devices shall interfere with the operations of any door, window or
mechanical and electrical systems. No part of this system shall visibly be installed in the physical •
parameter of any window.
M. Prohibited Fittings "Threaded": XL, POZ-LOK, U -bolt Mechanical T, Roustabout, Plain End, Hooker style
fittings, quick disconnect, boltless, snap -joint, field drilling or welding of any main or branch lines, and any
device specifically prohibited by the local governing agencies. NO UNIONS SHALL BE PERMITTED
FOR ANY SIZE PIPE.
N. Threaded Pipe: Threads shall be clean cut, standard and tapered. Threads shall be made up using
flaked graphite and lubricating oil or a piping compound applied to the male threads only.
O. Grooved Pipe: Installation shall be as prescribed in the Victaulic Piping Manual only. Holes in the piping
are to be made in the fabrication shop, not at the job site. Contractor shall provide at the project site a
sample of each type of coupling (threaded, standard grooved coupling and mechanical type), showing
complete assembly with pipe connections. Couplings will not be installed until samples are approved by
the Architect. Architect's approval does not eliminate the Contractor's final approval by the fire agency's
office.
P. Elevator Pits: Provide sprinkler heads in elevator pits per elevator code. Provide control valve with
tamper switch to each pit area. Coordinate with Division 16 Fire Alarm System.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to the requirements of Section 15050, provide pipe markers every 20 feet, once in every room,
and at each building level traversed, minimum.
B. Equipment such as Siamese connections, valves, drains, pumps, alarm gongs, etc., shall be provided
with signs that identify type of equipment and service.
0-
3.6 AS -BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS AND CERTIFICATION
A. As -Built Record Drawings are to be kept up-to-date and the Master Copy kept at the job site. Prior to final
acceptance of work being approved, these drawings are to be turned over to the Owner's Representative
for approval.
B. Written certification from the insuring agents, and authorities having jurisdiction that the tests were
satisfactory.
C. After installation is complete and tests satisfactorily approved, deliver test certificates and approval by the
local Fire Authorities and the FMA to the architect. Final acceptance of sprinkler/standpipe system by
Owner's Representative shall be contingent upon receipt of certificate and approval from authorities
having jurisdiction and for the delivery of final As -Built Drawings.
END OF SECTION
BANK OF AMERICA . 15400
PLUMBING -1
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART 1— GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 15080: Mechanical Insulation
C. Section 15150: Plumbing Piping, Valves and Specialties
D. Section 15440: Plumbing Fixtures
E. Section 15450: Plumbing Equipment
1.3 SCOPE
A. All work includes providing new plumbing. Systems as specified under this section shall include but not
necessarily be limited to the following:
1. Connection to utilities at five (5) feet from the building. Coordinate with the Civil Engineering Plans
and/or Division 2 work.
2. Connection of all waste, vent, and water piping to all plumbing fixtures, drinking fountains, sinks,
electric water coolers, drains and mechanical equipment.
3. Provide for future expansion as indicated.
4. Connect to new mechanical equipment, domestic hot water heaters, etc.
5. Connect hot and/or cold water to hose bibbs and wall hydrants. Provide individual shut-off valves at
each location. '
6. Provide double check valve assembly on incoming water service provided under Division 2. Provide
reduced pressure type backflow preventor assembly on connection for make-up water to mechanical
equipment as indicated.
7. Provide traps on all floor drains with trap primer where specified. Pipe to trap shall be Y2' minimum.
8. 120°F hot water shall be provided to kitchen areas. Mixing valves shall be provided to reduce to
desired temperatures within each service area.
9. 100°F hot water shall be mixed at point of use for service to public fixtures including lavatories.
10. Provide floor drainage in toilets rooms, mechanical rooms and equipment rooms.
BANK OF AMERICA 15400
PLUMBING -2
11. Provide connections for all area drains, catch basins, downspouts, roof drains and overflow drains to
storm sewer system. •
12. Gas service and meter assembly for HVAC equipment shall be by "Southern California Gas
Company". Location of new meter to be approved by Owner, Facility Engineer, Architect, and
Engineer before installation.
13. Contractor to start gas system at discharge flange of meter setting assembly. Provide regulator
assembly to reduce pressure to 6"-8"W.C. maximum entering building.
14. Provide gas shut-off and regulator assembly. Supply to any piece of equipment shall not exceed 0.25
psi.
15. Temporary Water Service: As directed by the General Contractor, the plumber shall provide a
temporary metered water service and temporary water risers with four (4) hose bibbs installed at each
level as the building proceeds upwards to the roof.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for approval all materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1.
Submit manufacturer's data, installation instructions, and maintenance and operating instructions for all
components of this section including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Plumbing specialties.
2. Trap primers.
3. Cleanouts.
4. Drains
5. Roof flashing
6. Wall hydrants and hose bibs
7. Mixing valves
8. Backwater valve
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged products - remove from project site.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year (12 months) warranty. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs, and living
expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials and equipment under this Division of the Specifications shall be new, of best grade and as
listed in printed catalogs of the manufacturer.
•
B. All manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers. Equipment shall be
clearly marked or stamped with the manufacturer's name and rating. 0
C. All items shall be furnished Vandal Proofed. One type of vandal proof screw is to be used through out this
facility. Coordinate with general contractor for type. -
BANK OF AMERICA.. -15400
PLUMBING -3
D. The following products to be included as part of this work but specified under Section 15050 Mechanical
• Requirements and Section 15150 Plumbing Piping, Valves and Specialties:
1. Piping:
2. Valves.
3. Hangers and supports.
4. Escutcheon plates, flashings, and sleeves.
5. Identification markers and signs.
6. Anchors, alignment guides and Seismic Zone 3 requirements.
7. Excavation and backfill.
8. Pressure and temperature gauges.
9. Access Panels.
E: Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to Section 15440.
F. Plumbing Equipment: Refer to Section 15450.
G. Products made of, or containing, lead, asbestos, mercury, or other known toxic or hazardous materials
are not acceptable for installation under this Section. Any such products installed as part of the work of
this Section shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne
solely by the Contractor(s).
2.2 VALVES: DOMESTIC WATER AND NATURAL GAS
A. General: Refer to Section 15150 for details.
• B_ Shut -Off, 2" and Smaller: Ball valve or gate valve.
C. Shut -Off, 2-1/2" and Larger: Lug wafer butterfly valve.
D. Check Valve: Swing type.
E. Backflow Preventer:
1. Domestic Water Service: (Watts 007 -QT -PC -S orWilkins 975XLS) Double check valve type with'Y'
strainer.
2. Equipment: (Watts 009 -S -QT -PC or Wilkins 950XLS) Reduce pressure type with 'Y' strainer.
3. Acceptable manufacturers: Watts, Wilkins or Cla-Val.
F. Gas:
1. 3/4" and smaller: AGA, ball valve.
2. 1 Y2" and larger: AGA, lubricated plug valve.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanout Plugs: Bronze, taper thread countersunk head.
B. Floor Cleanouts: Service weight cast-iron body and frame, flange with flashing clamp, adjustable cast -iron
• collar, caulk inside, Ty -seal or No -hub joints, neoprene plug gasket seal.
1. Carpeted Areas: Zurn ZN-1400-KC-VP-CM or J. R. Smith 4026'C - F- C - Y— U
2. Tiled Areas: Zurn ZN-1400-X-KC-VP or J.R. Smith 4146 - F - C — U
3. Unfinished Areas.- Zurn ZN-1400-HD-KC-VP or J.R. Smith 4106 C - F - C — U
BANK OF AMERICA 15400
PLUMBING -4
4. Yard Areas: Zurn Z 1474 -IN -VP or J.R. Smith 4256 - C — U
C. Cleanout Tee: Cast iron cleanout tee with countersunk brass plug, neoprene plug gasket seal and •
smooth stainless steel cover.
1. Manufacturer: Zurn ZN-1446-BP or J. R. Smith 4531 S (Y)
2.4 ROOF FLASHING
A. Flashing: Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings flashings for pipes through the roof shall be
galvanized sheet metal, 24 gauge minimum << or sheet copper, 8 oz. per sq. ft. minimum >> with seams
and joints lapped and soldered watertight. Coordinate with Architectural Sections for flashings and
roofing.
B. Vent Pipes: Provide caulk type, vandalproof hood with Allen head vandal proof screws for all vent pipes
through roof or preformed vinyl/galvanized steel assembly.
2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Piston Type: Hard drawn copper construction, mirror finished internal surfaces; machine finished brass
piston, air charged, 250 psi rated, tested and certified per PDI WH -201 and ASSE 1015. Coordinate
location of access panels with Architect or provide access panel where none are shown.
1. Manufacturer: Watts Series 15, Precision Plumbing series SC, or Sioux Chief.
2.6 ANTI -CONTAMINATION WALL HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS
A. Anti -contamination Hose Bibbs, Bronze body construction, polished chrome plated finish, renewable
composition disc, wheel handle, '/i' NPT inlet, 3/4" threaded hose end, vacuum breaker/backflow
preventor, solder joint, ANSI 1011.
1. Manufacturer: Woodford series 24P or Zurn Z1341.
B. Anti -contamination Hose Bibbs: Toilet Rooms, Stainless steel recessed hose box with door and lock, cast
bronze valves with integral stops, 3/4"H & CW outlet with vacuum breakers.
1. Manufacturer: Acorn 8000 or Willoughby.
C. Ice Maker Hook-up, IM -1: 10 3/4" x 9" x 3 5/8" steel wall box, '/2" sweat connection with '/2' x '/4" angle
valve with compression fitting.
1. Manufacturer: Guy Gray BIM875
2.7 TRAP PRIMER
A. Cast bronze construction, vacuum breaker, '/2" sweat solder connection. Install in accessible location or
provide access panel.
B. Manufacturer: PPP Oregon #1 or E&S, for use for up to 8 drains using PPP trap primer distribution units.
C. Option: Sloan F -72-A1 used in conjunction with water closet flush valve.
D. For Multiple Units or Kitchen Areas: PPP Prime Time electronic trap primer Series PT. Coordinate 120 •
V, electrical service with Division 16.
BANK OF AMERICA 15400
- - PLUMBING -5
2.8 MIXING VALVES ASSEMBLY
• A. Mixing Valve: 300 psi, Brass construction,.thermostatic controller with check stops. Refe r to drawings for
schedule of each valve. Use high/low type for uses over 20 gpm.
B. Manufacturer: Holby, Lawler, Symmons or Leonard.
2.9 BACKWATER VALVE (FOUNDATION DRAINAGE)
A. Drain Tile Sump: Enamel coated body with extension frame and solid cover. Zurn # Z-753 or J.R. Smith
#7098.
B. Backwater Valve. Enamel coated body and cover with removable wheel handle, bronze gates and flapper
valve and cast iron extension. Provide 30" diameter fiberglass or cast iron basin with access top,
minimum. Zurn #Z-1088 or J.R. Smith series 7150-Y.
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This system to be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of plumbing
systems as specified by the requirements of the Specifications.
B. Install all'items specified in this section of the Specification under the full purview of local and state
governing agencies.
C. Refer to Section 15050: General Mechanical Requirements for installation of piping, valves and other
requirements.
3.2 PERFORMANCE OF WORK
A.- Examine areas, physical conditions and phasing requirements under which materials are to be installed.
Layout the system to suit the different types of construction and equipment as indicated on the drawings.
B. Work shall start immediately after authorization has been given to proceed so that the overall progress of
the construction is not delayed. No foundry items to be installed until submittals have been approved.
C. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to properly interface components of the plumbing system.
D. Follow manufacturer's directions and recommendations in all cases where the manufacturers of articles
used on this Contract furnish directions covering points not shown on the drawings or covered in these
Specifications.
E. The omission from the drawings or Specifications of any details of construction, installation, materials, or
essential specialties shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing the same in place for a complete
system.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. The word "piping" shall mean all pipes, fittings, nipples, valves and all accessories connected thereto.
B. Run piping generally parallel to the axis of the building, arranged to conform to the building requirements
• and to suit.the necessities of clearance for, other -mechanical ducts flues, conduits and work of other
trades and close to ceiling or other construction as practical, free of unnecessary traps or bends.
C. Run horizontal sanitary drainage at uniform pitch of not less than 1/8" per foot, unless otherwise indicated.
Pitch horizontal vent piping downward from stack to fixtures.
BANK OF AMERICA 15400
PLUMBING -6
D. Run drainage piping as straight as possible with long radius turns. Offsets shall be made at an angle of
450 or less. is
E. Grade water supply piping for complete drainage of the system. Install hose bibbs at low points.
F. Piping connections to all equipment shall be made up with unions.
G. Provide sufficient elbows, swings and offsets to permit free expansion and contraction.
H. Use reducers or increasers. Use no bushings.
I. Ream or file each pipe to remove burrs. Inspect each length of pipe and each fitting for workmanship and
clear passageway.
J. Vent pipes to terminate at least 6" above the roof. Provide vandal proof hood assembly.
K. Cover, cap or otherwise protect open ends of all piping during construction to prevent damage to threads
or flanges and prevent entry of foreign matter. Disinfect water supply piping as specified.
L. Exposed connections to equipment shall be installed with special care, showing no tool marks or threads
at fittings and piping. No bowed or bend piping to be permitted.
M. All ferrous to non-ferrous connections shall be made by means of dielectric fittings. Submit shop
drawings for approval.
N. Use extra heavy pipe for nipples, where unthreaded portion is less than 11/2". Use no close nipples. Use
only shoulder nipples.
O. All piping shall be inspected for defects and flaws prior to installation. Remove any damaged piping from
job site. Piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, debris or rust.
P. Cleanouts to be provided at each change in direction greater than 1350 or 100' maximum intervals on
underground piping.
Q. Cleanouts to be same size as pipe except cleanout plugs larger than 4" shall not be required.
R. Cleanouts on concealed piping to be extended through and terminate flush with the finished wall or floor.
Cover plates to be provided on all cleanout plugs in finished areas.
S. The bodies of cleanout ferrules to conform in thickness to that required for pipe and fittings of the same
metal.
T. Route piping on roof on manufactured polyethylene pipe pier supports "Pipe Pier" by Erico.
3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Install as per PDI Standard WH -20 and equipment manufacturer's recommendation and as shown on
working drawings. Provide before each quick closing valve (flush valve, solenoid valve, etc.) or bank of
fixtures.
B. Install at each plumbing fixture, bank of fixtures, equipment and as indicated.
3.5 TESTING AND DISINFECTING - PLUMBING SYSTEMS •
A. General: The Contractor to perform all field tests and provide all labor, equipment, and incidentals
required for the tests. Owner to witness all field tests and conduct all field inspections. The Contractor to
BANK OF AMERICA 15400
PLUMBING -7
give the Owner ample notice of the dates and times scheduled for tests. Any deficiencies to be
• completely retested at no additional cost.
1. Inspection: Inspection to continue during installation and testing. Perform a final inspection of the
equipment prior to installation to determine conformity to the type, class, grade, size, capacity, and
other characteristics specified herein or indicated. Correct or replace all rejected equipment prior to
installation.
2. Water Distribution Piping Test: Before fixtures are set, subject the entire hot and cold piping system to
a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch with'water for not less than 8 hours in order
to permit inspection of all joints with no evidence of leakage. Where a po rtion of the water distribution
piping is to be concealed before completion, test this portion separately as specified for the entire
system.
3. Sanitary, Waste, Storm, Rainwater, and Vent Piping Test: Before the installation of any fixtures or
drains, cap the ends of the system and fill all lines with water to the roof level and allow to stand for at
least 30 minutes without leakage. Make tests within building with piping exposed. If the system is
tested in sections, tightly lug each opening, except the highest opening of the section under test, and
fill each section with water and test with at least a 10' head of water. Sanitary Drainage Vent, Storm,
Rainwater and Fixture System Final Test: Give sanitary, drainage vent, and fixture systems an in-
service test after complete installation. After all fixtures are installed, test the entire vent and sewer
system and prove gas and water tight. Final test shall be with air. Before proceeding with test, fill all
traps with water. Close all stacks and line openings during test, for a minimum period of 24 hours. If
test reveals leakage of air at any point, repair and retest the system.
4. Disinfection of Water Distribution System: After pressure tests have been made thoroughly flush the
entire domestic water distribution system with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been
removed, and sterilize by chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be liquid chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million and shall be
introduced into the system or part thereof in an approved manner. Retain the treated water in the
pipe for 24 hours, or, fill the system or part thereof with a water -chlorine solution containing at least
200 parts per million of chlorine and allow to stand for three hours. Open and close all valves in the
system being disinfected three times during the contact period. Then flush the system with clean
potable water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0 ppm. During the flushing period
open and close all valves and faucets three times. From at least three divergent points in the system,
take samples of water in properly sterilized containers for bacterial examination. Repeat the
disinfecting until tests indicate that satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
5. Taking of samples shall be witnessed by Architect or Owner's representative. Samples are to be
taken and tested by an independent analytical testing laboratory. Written reports shall be supplied to
Architect for approval.
3.6 OPERATING TESTING AND CERTIFICATION - PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. Upon completion and disinfection, and prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor to subject the
plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory, functional, and operating efficiency. Such
operating tests to include the following information in a report with conclusions as to the adequacy of the
system.
1. Time, date, and duration of tests.
2. Water pressures at most remote location.
3. Operation of all valves and hydrants.
• 4. Operation of all floor drains by flooding with water.
5. Quality of domestic water.
6. Read all indicating instruments at half-hour intervals unless otherwise directed
the test report to the Owner.
Supply four copies of
BANK OF AMERICA 15400
PLUMBING -8
3.7 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. In addition to the requirements of Section 15050, provide for the safety and good condition of all materials •
and equipment until final acceptance by the Owner. Protect all materials and equipment from damage.
Provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. Special care to be taken
to provide protection for bearings, open connections, pipe coils, pumps, compressors, and similar
equipment.
B. All piping, finished surfaces, and equipment to have all grease, adhesive labels, and foreign materials
removed.
C. All piping to be drained and flushed to remove grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating
assemblies, traps, flush valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Remove and thoroughly
clean and reinstall all liquid strainer screens after the system has been in operation for ten days.
D. When connections are to be made to existing systems, the Contractor is to do all cleaning and purging of
the existing systems required to restore them to the condition existing prior to the start of work.
3.8 OPERATION MANUALS, START-UP SERVICE, WARRANTIES, ACCEPTANCE AND GUARANTEES
A. General: Refer to Section 15050 for details.
END OF SECTION
is
'BANK OF AMERICA _ _ •15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES' -1
• SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the
` installation of plumbing fixtures and trim.
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 15400: Plumbing
C.- Section 15450: Plumbing Equipment
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for approval all materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1.
Submit manufacturer's data, colors, installation instructions, and maintenance and operating instructions
for all components of this section including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Plumbing fixtures.
2. Piping specialties.
3. ' Toilets.
4. Urinals.
5. Lavatories.
6. Sinks.
7. Drinking fountains.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit rough -in drawings. Detail dimensions, rough -in requirements, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages. Coordinate requirements with
Architectural Woodwork shop drawings specified in Division 6 for fixtures installed in countertops and
cabinets. Furnish templates for use in woodwork shop.
C. Samples: Submit samples of any piece of equipment requested by Architect for review and approval.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for power supply to
units. Cleary differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and field installed portions.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
• A. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State Amendments.
B. All fixtures and faucets must meet all requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
C. State Energy Code
BANK OF AMERICA 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES -2
D. ARI Standard 1010: "Drinking Fountains and Self -Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water •
Coolers."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged products. Remove damaged products from project site.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Stock:
1. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures, flush valves,
and trim to Owner with receipt in a quantity of one device for each 10 fixtures.
2. Furnish faucet repair kits complete with all necessary washers, springs, pins, retainers, packings, o -
rings, sleeves, and seats in a quantity of 1 kit for each 10 faucets.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide fixtures as specified. Fixtures in any secure or public areas shall be vandal proofed.
B. Architect/Engineer shall review and approve any substitution requested by Contractor prior to bid •
submittal.
C. Provide fixture as specified, acceptable manufacturers:
1. Vitreous China or Cast Iron Fixtures: American Standard, Eljer or Kohler.
2. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay or Just
a. All stainless steel is 18 gauge, type 304 unless otherwise specified.
3. Drinking Fountains: Elkay, Haws, Sunroc or Oasis.
4. Terrazzo Service Sinks: Florestone or Stern Williams.
D. Provide faucet as specified. Acceptable manufacturers: Chicago Faucets, Zurn, Symmons, T and S or as
indicated.
E. Provide flush valve as specified. Acceptable manufacturers: Sloan or Zurn.
F. Provide commercial grade toilet seat as specified. Acceptable manufacturers: Beneke, Bemis, Church or
Olsonite.
G. Provide heavy-duty cast iron commercial grade carrier as specified. Provide compact carriers where
space is limited. Acceptable manufacturers: Ancon, Jay R. Smith, Wade or Zurn. No plastic parts on
foundry items.
1. Wall hung water closet: J.R. Smith figs: 0210L/RY-M12, 0240URY-M12, 0410R/LY-M12 and 0410Y- •
M12.
2. Wall hung urinal: J.R. Smith fig: 0634-M12 or Zurn Z-1221-58.
t.
BANK OF AMERICA, 15.440
PLUMBING FIXTURES -3
• • 3. Wall hung lavatory: J.R. Smith fig: 0700(D) —M31 concealed arm carrier.
H. Provide heavy duty commercial grade 17 -gauge P -Trap and supplies with stops as specified. Provide
heavy duty commercial grade lavatory supplies. Supplies shall be 1/2"k 3/8" x 12" ground joint flexible
riser with loose key angle stop with chrome plates I.P.S. brass nipple. Sink supplies shall be 1/2" x 12"
ground joint flexible riser with loose -key angle stop with chrome plated I.P.S. brass nipple. Provide bell
type escutcheons for both P -trap and supplies. Acceptable manufacturers: Zurn, Brasscraft, Chicago, or
McGuire.
1. P -trap - Lav: McGuire C8902 -DF or Zurn Z-8701.
2. P -trap - Sink: McGuire C8912 -DF or ZurnZ-8702.
3. Supply for Lavatory: McGuire H2165 LK or Zurn ZH-8821-LK.
4. Offset supply for barrier free lavatory: McGuire 155 WC.
5. Supply for Sink: McGuire H2167 LK.
6. Supply for Water Closet: McGuire H2169LK
7. Escutcheons: McGuire WEOOD Series, wrought brass, bell type.
8. Lavatory grid strainer: McGuire 155A. .
9. Barrier -free lavatory offset grid strainer: McGuire 155WC.
10. Sink Strainer: Elkay LK -18B.
I. Provide white molded closed cell vinyl pre -fab insulation on P- Trap and on both hot and cold water supply
for barrier free lavatories and sinks. Acceptable manufacturers: Plumberex, True-Bro, and Pro -Wrap.
Bag type insulators are not acceptable.
J. Drinking fountain shall be lead-free construction only.
2.2 FIXTURE LISTING: REFER TO 'PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE'
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be installed in
accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.
B. Examine rough -in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installing fixtures.
C. Examine walls, floors and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
D. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions,
rough -in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced
• standards. -
E. Comply with the installation requirements of ADA with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically
handicapped.
BANK OF AMERICA 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES -4
F. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or within wall •
construction to provide rigid installation.
G. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.
H. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork.
I. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant as specified in Section 07900. Match sealant color
to fixture color.
J. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water
pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.
K. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.
L. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper
flow stream.
M. Replace washers or cartridges of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.
N. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials.
O. During construction cover all installed fixtures, sinks, and water coolers with cardboard boxes and wrap
with Visqueen.
P. Provide flush valve and faucet support behind wall.
END OF SECTION
•
0
•
0
BANK OF AMERICA
SECTION 15450
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
15450
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT -1
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall include but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
1. Water heaters
2. Domestic hot water recirculating pumps
3. Water meters
4. Curb inlets
5. Drop inlets
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 15400: Plumbing
C. Section 15440: Plumbing Fixtures
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction submit for approval all materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1.
Submit manufacturer's data, colors, installation instructions, and maintenance and operating instructions
for all components of this section including, but not limited to, the following:
t
1. Water heaters
2. Expansion Tank
3. Domestic hot water recirculating pumps
4. Water meters
5. Drop inlets
6. Curb inlets
B. Electrical Work: Refer to Division 15050 for requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit rough -in drawings. Detail dimensions, rough -in requirements, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for electrical power supply wiring.
Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final
• installation. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are to be
field installed.
K OF AMERICA
15450
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT -2
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type and size of water heater, •
control, and accessory, including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data,
shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual, in accordance with requirements of Division
1.
F. Certificates: Submit appropriate Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report as required by
provisions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
G. Start-up: Provide written report on start-up in accordance with Section 15050.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged products - remove from project site.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year (12 months) warranty. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs, and living
expenses to repair or replace products or systems.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 HOT WATER HEATER - ELECTRIC
A. The heater shall be a glass -lined dura -power supreme commercial electric. Refer to 'Electric Water
Heater Schedule' for Model.
B. Heater should berated at capacities indicated on contract documents and constructed in accordance with
ASME code shall bear appropriate symbol and listed with the National Board as required. Heater shall be
listed with Underwriters' Laboratories and approved by National Sanitation Foundation.
C. All internal surfaces of the tank shall be glass -lined with an alkaline borosilicate composition that has
been fused -to -steel by firing at a temperature of 1600° F. Tank shall be cathodically protected with
adequate extruded magnesium anode. The entire vessel is to be enclosed in a round steel enclosure with
baked enamel finish.
D. Control compartment to be hinged and shall house 120 volt control circuit transformer, transformer fusing,
magnetic contactor(s), immersion style operating thermostat(s), element fusing per NEC, and commercial
grade incoloy sheathed flange mounted elements with pre -wired thermal leads. Temperature controls
include limiting switch which will require resetting manually in the event the temperature reaches 190° F.
E. Foam insulation (R-16) shall exceed latest requirements of ASHRAE (currently 90A-1980) for heat loss
efficiency.
F. Heater shall include ASME T & P relief valve and drain valve.
G. Warranty: 3 years, professional start-up to be included.
H. Acceptable Equals: Lochinvar, A. O. Smith, Bradford -White.
0
BANK OF AMERICA 15450
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT -3
• 2.2 RELIEF VALVES r
0.,
C7
A. Relief Valve: Watts vacuum relief valve, -bronze body, silicone disc, threaded ends, installed on C.W.
supply line only, refer to H.W. Heater Detail on contract drawings.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: Watts, bronze body construction, thermostat and test lever,
temperature relief set at 210° F, and pressure relief set at 125 psi.
C. Acceptable manufacturers: Watts, Kunkle, Keckley or Cash Acme.
2.3 EXPANSION TANK
A. Furnish and install where shown on plans for domestic hot water system.
B. - ASME stamped and constructed vessel with the following:
1. Tanks rated for 150 psi maximum working pressure
2. Black steel construction painted with "Hammertone" blue enamel.
3. Tank ring base support.
4. Stainless connection opening.
5. Butyldiaphragm bonded to polypropylene liner.
6. Pre -charged air chamber permanently sealed.
7. Air valve.
C. Manufacturer: Amtrol AST, Adamson or RECO.
2.4 WATER METERS
A. Water meter shall have a mechanical drive with hermetically sealed registers; meter shall be equal to or
exceed AWWA Standards and shall have an all bronze case. Provide water meters installed complete
with gate valve on each side of meter and full line size bypass around meter. Provide flanges on valves
and support stands or wall brackets for meter support. Units shall be approved for use by local water
district. Hersey Products Inc #MHD, Niagra or Rockwell. Meter shall be rated 50 gpm at 70 psi inlet
pressure.
2.5 CURB INLET
A. Curb inlets shall be of the precast concrete type, as manufactured by Santa Rosa Cast Products or
approved equal. The structure shall consist of a precast unit with three exterior walls, monolithically
poured with a top slab. An opening shall be provided in the top slab for maintenance access and shall be
24 inch diameter minimum. The inlet side of the unit shall be provided with an integrally cast galvanized
structural steel nosing. The access opening shall be trimmed with galvanized steel frame, cast integrally
with the structure. A circular cover of reinforced concrete, trimmed with galvanized steel ring cast
integrally with the cover, shall be constructed to fit the access opening. All steel nosings and frames shall
be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication to requirements of ASTM specifications A123.
BANK OF AMERICA 15450
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT -4
2.6 DROP INLET
A. Drop inlets shall be of the precast concrete type as manufactured by Santa Rosa Cast Products
Company, Santa Rosa, California, or approved equal. Concrete shall contain no less than 6 sacks of
Type 2 cement per cubic yard and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.
Wall thickness and reinforcing mesh shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
All structures and grates in traffic areas shall be designed to withstand H-20 loading. Structural design of
concrete reinforcement and grates shall be performed and approved by licensed civil engineer and shall
take into consideration the intended loading and use. The precast units shall be constructed to conform
to the design dimensions for each specific job, and shall be provided with pipe openings as per job
requirements. Deflected pipe openings may be chipped by manufacturer in green concrete.
B. Drop inlets exceeding four feet in depth may be poured in two or more units, and shall be provided with
inter -locking keyed joints which shall be grouted with 1:4 mortar during installation. Two inch diameter
lifting holes shall be provided to facilitate job handling. Grates and frames shall be constructed of
structural steel. Steel grates and frames shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication to requirements
of ASTM specifications A123. All frames shall be integrally cast. The top surface of the drop inlet shall
be finished smooth, shall be square and clean. Wall surfaces shall be formed, shall be flat and true to
dimension.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine areas and conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level,
firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access.
D. Connect water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions as indicated.
E. Start -Up: Start-up, test, and adjust equipment in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions.
Check and calibrate controls. Start-up to be by authorized manufacturer's representative or agent.
3.2 OPERATION MANUALS, START-UP SERVICE, WARRANTIES, ACCEPTANCE AND GUARANTEES
A. General: Refer to Section 15050 for details.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
0
BANK OF AMERICA 15731
SMALL PACKAGED HVAC UNITS -1
SECTION 15731
SMALL PACKAGED HVAC UNITS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division
1, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Packaged unit.
2. Controls and control connections.
3. Electrical power connections.
1.3 RELATED WORK.SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 15080: Mechanical Insulation
C. Section 15880: Air Distribution
D. Section 15900: Controls and Instrumentation
E. Section 15990: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
F. Division 16: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide packaged units that are the standard product of an equipment
manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such units who issues complete catalog information
on such products. Units shall not be fabricated by the Contractor.
B. Codes and Standards: Provide air handling units conforming to the requirements of the latest addition of
the following:
1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):
2. 99 Standards Handbook
3. 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating [Unit shall bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal]
4. 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans [Unit shall bear AMCA Certified Rating
Seal]
BANK OF AMERICA 15731
SMALL PACKAGED HVAC UNITS -2
5. 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data
6. 500 Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters
7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
b. 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
c. 900 Test Performance of Air Filter Units
8. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
a. 210 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment
b. 270 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment
9. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
a. 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Except for motors, provide electrical
components required as part of air handling units, which comply with NEMA Standards.
11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Provide unit internal insulation having flame spread
rating not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not higher than 50: 0
a. 70 National electrical Code
b. 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
c. 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
12. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.-(SMACNA): Comply with
applicable SMACNA standards including "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
13. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Except for motors, provide electrical components required as
part of units, which have been listed and labeled by UL.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for packaged units showing dimensions,
weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly indicated, motor electrical
characteristics, finishes of materials, installation instructions, sound and vibration test report, and bearing
life calculations.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, filter
replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop
drawings, and wiring diagrams in operating and maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements
of Division 1.
•
'BANK.OF AMERICA 15731
SMALL PACKAGED HVAC UNITS -3
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,
bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect units against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged
units - remove from project site.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide general one-year (12 months) parts and labor warranty with five (5) year warranty on
compressors. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs, and living expenses incurred by the
manufacturer to provide factory authorized service.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lennox. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
v A. Provide roof -mounted, horizontal discharge unit having natural gas heating and electric refrigeration
capabilities. Refer to the drawings for options and accessories.
2.3 THERMOSTATS
A. Electronic thermostat with subbase. Seven-day programming with minimum of 2 occupied/unoccupied
periods per day. Individual temperature setpoints for heat and cool. Automatic heat/cool changeover.
Intelligent recovery to automatically optimize start time depending on building load and setpoints. Locking
setpoints and schedules to eliminate tampering. Subbase shall have a fan operation switch (On/Auto)
and a conditioning switch (Auto/Cool/Off/Heat). Honeywell #T7300 thermostat with #Q7300 subbase, or
approved equal.
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mounting surface, e.g. roof, is ready to receive work
B. Verify that proper power supply is available.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide layout drawings of units, locations and power requirements to electrical installer.
C. Install minimum 30% efficiency air filters in unit during installation phase. Do not operate the unit without
filters in place.
BANK OF AMERICA 15731
SMALL PACKAGED HVAC UNITS -4
D. Mount rooftop unit on roof mounting frame. Install roof mounting frame level.
E. Install 3" flexible duct connection at inlets and outlets of units.
F. Install condensate drain piping and traps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on
the Drawings.
G. Electrical installer shall install all line voltage power wiring and conduit. Coordinate with Division 16 work.
H. Install a new set of filters prior to air balance and another• set at occupancy.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
•
BANK OF AMERICA _ ._ 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -1
SECTION 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements,'and Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 SCOPE
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to,
the following applicable items:
1. Ductwork - Rigid, Flexible and Fabric
2. Ductwork Specialties
3. Flexible Connections
4. Sealants, Adhesives and Tapes
5. Flashings
6. Duct Access Panels and Doors
7. Diffusers, Grilles, and Registers
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 15080: Mechanical Insulation
C. Section 15900: Controls and Instrumentation
D. Section 15990: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
E. Division 16: Electrical
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Provide products conforming to the requirements of the following:
1. ADC 1062-R4 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual. Each item shall bear the ADC certified rating
seal.
2. AMCA-210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
• 3. ANSI S1.23 - Designation of Sound Power Emitted by Machinery and Equipment.
4. ASC -A7001 - Standard for Duct Sealants.
BANK OF AMERICA 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -2
5. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip. Type 304 or 304 stainless steel.
6. ASTM A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated
(Galvanized) Hot -Dip Process. G90 zinc -coated.
7. ASTM A527/A527M - Standard Specification for Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip
Process, Lock -Forming Quality.
8. TIMA AAC-101 - Standard for fiberglass duct liner with erosion proof facing.
9. UL 181 - Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connections, Class 1.
B. Conform to NFPA 90A "Standards for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
C. Provide and construct ductwork systems in conformance with the latest editions of the following
documents:
1. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible - 1995"
2. ASHRAE Systems and Equipment Handbook "Duct Construction" chapter
3. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook "Duct Design" chapter
D. Alternatives: The SMACNA standards and publications referenced in this Section of the specifications
establish ductwork construction requirements. 0
1. Alternatives to these standards and publications may be submitted. Approval will be based on
demonstration that such alternatives are equivalent and satisfy the functional requirements described
in the referenced standards.
2. Such demonstration shall include evidence that the alternatives proposed were tested in accordance
with SMACNA procedures and with test results certified by an independent testing laboratory.
E. All ductwork and equipment shall be seismically supported and braced per the SMACNA "Seismic
Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems".
F. Flame/Smoke Rating: All materials, including sealants and adhesives, shall have a flame -spread index of
25 or less, and smoke developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to construction, submit for approval on all materials and equipment:
1. Ductwork - Rigid, Flexible and Fabric
2. Ductwork Specialties
3. Flexible Connections
4. Sealants, Adhesives and Tapes and calculated leakage estimate based on Class 3 (3 cfm/sf).
leakage. •
5. Flashings
BANK OF AMERICA 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -3
6. Duct Access Panels and Doors
B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of sheet metal ductwork and plenums as follows:
1. Draw to a scale not less than W to one foot, with sheet sizes equal to Contract Drawings.
2. Show duct sizes,- where possible use even duct sizes.
• 3. Show fitting details.
4. Show coordination with lighting fixtures, fire dampers, smoke dampers, piping, diffusers, grilles,
registers, fans, major electrical runs, cable trays and bus ducts.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed.
B. Store and protect products against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged components. Remove damaged products from project site.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK
A. All interior ducts shall be constructed with G-60 or better galvanized steel (ASTM 527) LFQ, chem treat.
Exterior ductwork or duct exposed to high humidity conditions shall be G-90 or better galvanized steel
LFQ, chem treated. Construct all ducts and plenum of gauges, and with joints, bracing, reinforcing, and
other construction details in accordance with the latest construction standards previously listed. Metals
shall be manufactured by United States Steel, Kaiser, Rolok or equal.
B. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are net, inside, clear dimensions. For internally lined ducts, add
lining thickness to determine metal duct dimensions.
C. Ducts shall be constructed of material gauges and reinforcement per SMACNA pressurization
classifications to meet 150% of the pressure requirements for external static pressure scheduled on
drawings for the fans serving each system. Where differences exist between SMACNA and the prevailing
building code, the gauge or construction method of the submitted ductwork shall be the more stringent of
the two standards.
2.2 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK
A. Construct rectangular ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in Section VII, of the SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" 1995 Edition. This shall be subsequently
referred to as the SMACNA Manual. All ductwork must comply with all local, code requirements.
Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Diagonally cross break all panels on ducts 30 inches
wide and larger, or bead using automatic bead machine with beads at 12 inches on center or less. All
connections shall utilize 450 boot take -offs. Bullhead tees and straight taps are not permitted. All
ductwork shall be aluminum or stainless steel in, and around, magnetically/electrically sensitive rooms.
2.3 ROUND DUCTWORK
A. Round and oval ductwork shall be constructed to SMACNA round ductwork requirements of galvanized
sheet steel. Spiral lock seams, only, to 50" diameter. Lap or snap lock seams are not permitted for round
ductwork of any size. Provide beaded sleeve joints or flanges with gasket joints. Elbows shall be 5 -gore
mitered and welded. All elbows shall be long radius type with centerline radius to duct diameter of 1.5,
BANK OF AMERICA 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -4
exceptions will only be allowed at restricted space locations. All connections shall utilize welded conical
tees, aluminum conical fitting with damper by Flexmaster #CBD, or 450 boot take -offs by. Flexmaster
#STOD. Spin -in type or other types of butt tees, bullhead tees or straight taps are not permitted. Flat
oval shall be utilized in space -restricted areas. All ductwork shall be aluminum or stainless steel in, and
around, magnetically/electrically sensitive rooms.
2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. Flexible one -inch thick insulated round ductwork may be utilized where shown on the Drawings and at the
last seven (7') feet to each air outlet and inlet,- unless shown otherwise on the plans. Maximum of only
one 900 bend in any length. No intermediate joints are allowed. Connect each end with stainless steel
screw operated drawbands. Support duct to maintain smooth shape without sagging. Ail connections
shall utilize welded conical tees, aluminum conical fitting with damper by Flexmaster #CBD, or,450 boot
take -offs by Flexmaster #STOD. Spin -in type or other types of butt tees, bullhead tees or straight taps are
not permitted.
B. Final connections to diffusers, grilles and registers shall be Casco Silentflex II.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINER
A. Acoustic Duct Lining shall be installed where shown on the drawings and as specified for low velocity
supply, return and exhaust ductwork. Liner is to be utilized to line vertical supply duct risers, mechanical
shafts conveying return air, terminal box discharge plenums, and other horizontal duct runs where shown
on drawings. Dimensions of lined ducts given on the drawings indicate the inside dimensions of duct after
the lining has been installed. Black -coated (vinyl, acrylic or neoprene) duct lining shall be adhered by
100% covering of a fire retardant adhesive (3M EC -1128, Benjamin -Foster 85-20, or equal). When width
of duct exceeds 12" and also on sides when height exceeds 24", use non-ferrous mechanical fasteners
such as welded pins and speed clips, 12" on center maximum lateral spacing and 18" on center maximum
longitudinal spacing. Start fastening within 3" of upstream transverse edge of the liner and within 3" of the
longitudinal joint. Mechanical fasteners shall not pierce the duct walls. The pins shall be cut off flush,
washers shall be used and installation made so that no gaps or loose edges occur in the insulation. Apply
a brushcoat of Benjamin -Foster 30-36 to washers, extending onto lining surface a minimum of 2". Top
pieces shall be supported by the side pieces. Provide insulated build out frames for attaching dampers at
running vanes where required.
B. All transverse and longitudinal abutting edges of duct lining shall be sealed and lapped 3" with a heavy
coat of Foster 30-36, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All exposed edges shall
be installed with sheet metal nosings. At all openings in the ductwork there shall be a galvanized metal
flange, equal in depth to adjacent lining and having a 1'/2' lip to hold lining in place. All bolt holes shall be
sealed airtight.
C. Internal Duct lining shall be installed in complete accordance with the Sheet Metal and Air -Conditioning
Contractors National Association (SMACNA) Duct Lining Application Standard. Mechanical fasteners
shall conform to Mechanical Fastener Standard MF -1-1971 from SMACNA. Adhesive shall conform to
Adhesive and Sealant Council Standards for Adhesives for Duct Liner ASC -A-7001 C-1972.
D. Internal Duct Lining shall be 1" unless otherwise called out, matte -faced, 1.5 lb/ft' minimum density and
shall meet the requirements of NFPA90-A.
E. Acoustical duct liners shall comply with the following requirements and standards:
ASTM C 1071, Type 1.
2. NFPA 90A and 90B.
•
•
is
BANK OF AMERICA - 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -5
3. Resist fungal growth.
4. Support air velocities up to 5,000 fpm:_.
5. Per UL 723 test method, flame spread shall not exceed 25, and smoke developed shall not exceed
50.
6. Per test method ASTM C423 using Type A mounting, minimum allowable NRC shall be 0.45.
F. The following are acceptable, subject to the above:
1. Internal Duct Lining:
a., Aeroflex Type 150 from Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Toledo, OH.
b. Linacoustic/Spiracoustic Type 150 from Manville Products Corp., Denver, CO.
c. Ultralite Type 150 from Certain Teed Corp., Valley Forge, PA.
d. Pre -approved equal to above.
2. Mechanical Fasteners:
a. Gemco TYPE IH -A from Goodloe E. Moore, Inc., Danville, IL.
• b. Eckoustic-Klip from Eckel Industries, Inc., Cambridge or MA.
c. -Pre-approved equal to above.
2.6 , DUCTNAV UNIT SOUND CONTROL LAGGING
A. Where indicated on'the drawings, VAV unit or duct shall be wrapped with minimum 2" thick glass or
mineral fiber blanket, 1.5 lb/ft' minimum density and two layers of "mass -loaded" vinyl sheet. Each lead
vinyl sheet shall weight 0.4-0.5 Ib/ft2 and shall be 0.025 - 0.040 inches thick. The lead vinyl shall be
applied to the fiber base fabric with edges overlapped by at least 2 inches and sealed with duct tape.
Complete system or lead/vinyl material shall provide a minimum STC -20 as measured in an independent
accredited acoustical laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90 and/or E413.
B. The following are acceptable:
1. Gray Loaded Vinyl from Singer Partitions, Inc., Chicago, IL.
2. Soundfab from The Soundcoat Company, Inc., Santa Ana, CA.
3. EAR WB -5 from EAR Corporation, Indianapolis, IN or approved equal.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Duct tape is not allowed for any duct joints.
B. Joints — Sealing
1. ,Seal all transverse joints - this includes mechanical joints similar to ductmate on all supply, return,
exhaust and outside air intake ducts. Sealant systems by Hardcast, Arabol, United McGill or equal,
as recommended for ductwork application.
2. Interior Exposed: Water-based sealer. Hardcast Iron Grip:
3. Interior Concealed (Above 1" W.G. Pressure Ductwork): gypsum impregnated tape and adhesive.
BANK OF AMERICA 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -6
4. Interior Concealed (To 1" W.G. Pressure Ductwork): water based sealer. Hardcast Iron Grip, Mon- •
Eco EZ Seal 44-44 or equal.
5. Exterior (Above 1" W.G. Pressure Ductwork): gypsum impregnated tape and adhesive.
6. Exterior (To 1" W.G. Pressure Ductwork): oil based sealer. Hardcast Galva Grip or equal.
C. Joints - Rectangular Ducts
1. Slip drive joints, standard seams, flanges or welding as required by SMACNA Duct Construction
Standards. Ductmate, MEX Industries, or equal are acceptable joint methods, but must be sealed as
described previously.
D. Joints — Round
1. Exposed Ductwork: Slip drive and sheet metal screws.
2. Concealed Ductwork: Sheet metal screws.
E. Elbows
1. Construct long radius elbows with centerline not less than 1.5 times the duct width. Shorter radius
elbows may be used where required to fit in restricted spaces, or as shown. Provide single thickness
turning vanes on all short rectangular radius elbows less than 25" wide. Provide double thickness
turning vanes for short rectangular radius elbows 25" wide and greater. Number of vanes per
SMACNA.
F. Transitions
1. Construct transitions with minimum slope of 1 to 5 ratio and in conformance to SMACNA.
G. Branch Connections
1. Provide 450 entry boots or radius taps for rectangular duct take -offs and conical or bellmouth taps for
round duct take -offs. Straight 900 taps are not allowed, except where round take -off duct size equals
round branch duct size. Provide volume dampers at take -offs for balancing if not specifically noted as
provided at outlet or inlet. Provide insulation guards at transitions to lined ductwork.
2.8 DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES
A. Volume and Splitter Dampers: Galvanized sheet metal blade and frame with Ventfabrics Inc., Ventlok
operating hardware. For accessible dampers, provide #641 self -locking dial regulators and #644 self-
locking dial regulators for insulated ductwork, #637 square end bearing, and #635 spring end bearing, as
applicable. For inaccessible dampers, provide #666 or #677 concealed locking damper regulator with
bearings as above.
B. Flexible Connections: Provide flexible connectors at the discharge and inlet of fans, air handlers, rotating
mechanical equipment, and where shown on the Drawings for proper vibration isolation. Neoprene
impregnated glass cloth with 24 gauge galvanized metal frame. Neoprene -only connectors are not
allowed. Minimum dimensions - 3" metal, 3" fabric, 3" metal. Ventfabrics #Ventglas or approved equal
by Duro Dyne, Q Industries, consolidated Kinetics, Ductmate Proflex or Elgen.
C. Ducts through roof shall be 16 gauge (or minimum of 2 gauges heavier than attaching ductwork), flashed •
and counterflashed, and provided with storm collars to secure a watertight construction.
BANK OF AMERICA - 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -7
• 2.9 DIFFUSERS, -GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. All diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be selected to provide proper air distribution for the intended
occupant application. All supply air devices shall be selected to provide a maximum air velocity of 50 fpm
at three feet above the floor, unless otherwise noted. Manufacturer's representative shall carefully review
Architectural and Mechanical drawings and ensure diffuser/grille/register selections will provide proper air
distribution at NC 25 or less. Manufacturer at no additional expense to the Owner shall replace diffusers,
grilles, and registers not providing proper distribution or excessive noise at scheduled airflow.
B. All frames shall be selected to fit the ceiling type. Verify with Architectural Drawing. Each diffuser, grille
and register shall be individually capable of balancing via duct mounted balancing dampers or attached
opposed blade dampers. Provide unit opposed blade damper where individual duct mounted balancing
dampers are not provided.
C. Sizes, capacities and patterns shall be as shown on the Drawings. Manufacturer: Metal Aire, Titus,
Krueger, Price.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 DUCTWORK AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Ductwork is generally diagrammatically indicated and shall be generally installed as indicated. Do not
scale Drawings for exact location of ducts. Install ducts to best suit field conditions and cooperate with
other trades. Do not penetrate Structural members without consent of Architect or Structural Engineer.
Check with Structural drawings prior to locating any penetrations. Duct sizes are indicated as net inside
dimensions on the Drawings. The indicated dimensions shall be altered at the job site for the purpose of
avoiding interferences and clearance difficulties to other dimensions producing the same air handling
characteristics, provided such altered dimensions are approved by the Architect. Ducts shall be
constructed in accordance with the latest edition of codes and standards identified in Part 1 and as shown
on the Drawings.
1. Clean and pretreat surfaces before application of sealant. Conform to the manufacturer's cleaning
procedures. Install sealants in conformance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Provide 16 gauge metal sleeve with 1" clearance and pack space around ducts through walls tight
with fiberglass, and seal with Schuller Duxseal or approved 3M fire proof caulking, as required. For
exposed ducts through walls, provide flat, sheet metal escutcheon to conceal fiberglass and wall
opening.
3. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: Install flush, squared, tightly sealed, and entirely covering sheet
metal ductwork and gaskets. Thread sheet metal mounting screws tightly into sheet metal. All
frames shall be selected to fit the ceiling type. Verify with Architectural Drawing. Each diffuser, grille
and register shall be individually capable of balancing via duct mounted balancing dampers or
attached opposed blade dampers. Provide unit opposed blade damper only where individual duct
mounted balancing dampers are specifically noted as not provided. Duct connections shall fit
securely to necks or collars behind face area. Provide all necessary transition pieces and duct collars
to make connections from ductwork to neck sizes. Where ducts connect directly to necks or collars
provide a minimum straight duct section of two times the duct diameter to the last elbow. Where
minimum straight duct sections are not physically possible provide sheet metal plenum sized for
approximately 500 fpm air velocity with duct tapped directly to side of plenum. Where building walls,
floors and ceilings form portions of duct or plenum, provide gasketed angles or channels at junction
` points, securely bolted and sealed to building structure.
BANK OF AMERICA 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -8
4. Install turning vanes in all mitered elbows in all ducts, so that tips are parallel with the sides of the •
ducts. Vanes shall be single thickness type. Tips of acoustical turning vanes on outside radius shall
be flush with acoustical lining.
5. Provide flexible connections to completely isolate fans from direct contact with all sheet metal work.
6. Volume Dampers: Provide manual volume dampers in all low pressure supply, return and exhaust
branch ductwork to grilles, diffusers, inlet and outlet openings to facilitate balancing of systems.
These are to be provided as part of contract whether shown on plans or not. Where ceilings are not
accessible, provide access door or remote damper operator.
B. Hangers and Supports: Securely fasten all ductwork to the building construction by means of hangers,
supports, guides, anchors, and sway braces to maintain duct alignment, to prevent sagging, and to
prevent noise and excessive strain on ductwork due to movement under operating conditions.
1. Maximum spacing between hangers shall not exceed eight (8) feet.
2. Adequately mount and anchor all material and equipment as required. Include lateral bracing as
required to prevent horizontal, seismic movement. Refer to UBC and architectural Drawings for
seismic requirements.
3. Do not support ductwork from fans or any other pieces of equipment.
4. Hangers and supports shall conform to SMACNA section "Hangers and Supports". Nail inserts,
hangers and supports to formwork before slabs are poured. Cut off or remove nails, strap -ends and
other projections, flush with concrete after forms are removed.
C. Other: 0
1. Fans: Align fans, motors, and drives. Install fans to render bearings accessible for lubrication without
dismantling fans or ducts. Provide extended bearing oilers as required. Mount all fans on vibration
isolators as specified.
2. Insulation: Properly and neatly apply insulation on all material and equipment and apparatus, as
specified, including all fittings. Apply insulation over clean, dry surfaces, with adjoining sections firmly
butted together and canvas smoothly pasted over. When vapor barriers are specified, install
continuous overall external surfaces of the entire system.
3. Duct Sizing: Where duct sizes are not specifically shown on the plans or must be modified due to
physical limitations, supply ducts may be sized at a maximum velocity of 1,500 fpm or 0.08" sp friction
per 100 feet, whichever provides the larger duct, and return/exhaust/intake ducts may be sized at a
maximum velocity of 1,000 fpm or 0.06" sp friction per 100 feet, whichever provides the larger duct.
3.2 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
A. All HVAC equipment and machinery shall be anchored to withstand forces generated by earthquake
motions. As a minimum, equipment and equipment frames shall be designed to withstand a force of
100% of the weight of the equipment and frame acting at its center of gravity. Anchorage of the
equipment and/or frame to the structure shall be for a force of four times gravity also acting at the center
of gravity.
B. Piping and ductwork connecting to equipment shall be seismically braced per SMACNA "Seismic
Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems".
C. The seismic calculations shall be the responsibility of contractor.
BANK OF AMERICA 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -9
• 3.3 EQUIPMENT
L
A. Install equipment as shown on plans and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
recommendations.
3.4 SUPPLY DIFFUSER AND REGISTER LOCATIONS
A. Coordinate location of supply outlets with ceiling mounted smoke detectors. Locate outlets or outlet
distribution so as to prevent airflow from inhibiting the operation of smoke detectors. Locate ceiling
outlets a minimum of 3'-0" from smoke detectors.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Where the interior surfaces of ductwork are visible through the blades of supply outlets, return inlets, and
exhaust inlets - paint the interior visible surfaces with one coat of flat black paint.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Do not insulate or conceal ductwork before inspection by Owner's Representative, Architect or Engineer.
If ductwork is insulated and concealed prior this inspection the Contractor shall remove insulation and
ceiling to permit inspection at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall replace the insulation
and ceiling after final inspection at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Ductwork Deflection Criteria:
1. Maximum inward and/or outward deflection at sheetmetal panels shall be'/ under maximum static
pressure operating conditions. Additional intermediate stiffening angles shall be installed where
deflections exceed 3/<".
2. Maximum inward and/or outward deflection at sheetmetal elbows and joints shall be 1/4' under
maximum static pressure operating conditions. Additional stiffening angles shall be installed where
deflections exceed '/4'.
C. Ductwork Leakage Criteria:
1. All transverse. and longitudinal joints (seams) shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing
requirements. This classification requires all joints, seams, and wall penetrations to be sealed.
2. Where ductwork is not installed to the high construction level required per SMACNA the contractor
may be requested to provide system pressure testing and verification as'directed by the Owner
Representative at no additional cost to the Owner to prove that system is within allowable leakage
levels. Leak test in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" at 150 percent
(1'/z times) of maximum working pressure. Provide test fans, temporary power and instrumentation in
accordance with SMACNA testing specifications.
3. Constant volume supply system ductwork at pressures below 2" w.g. shall be have a maximum
leakage of 1 % of design cfm. Above 2" w.g. leakage shall be no greater than 2%.
4. Constant volume return system ductwork shall be have a maximum leakage of 2% of design cfm.
D. Acceptance of duct systems shall be contingent upon conformance with the requirements specified in
Section 15990 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing".
BANK OF AMERICA 15880
AIR DISTRIBUTION -10
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING •
A. Clean the inside of plenums, casings, enclosures, fans, and accessible ductwork before starting fans.
Blowout coils and condensate piping with compressed air. Install a clean set of filters in each system
prior to testing and balancing. Proceed with testing and balancing. All dampers shall be locked in place.
END OF SECTION
ej
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -1
• SECTION 15990
_ TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1. APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 . WORK RELATED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 15880: Air Distribution
C. Division 16: Electrical.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Scope: Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work required by this Section is indicated on the
drawings, in schedules, and by the requirements of this Section, and Section 15050 -Basic Mechanical
Requirements.
• B. Systems: Testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this Section shall include, but not be limited to, the
following systems:
1. Air distribution ductwork including supply, return and exhaust.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tester's Qualifications: A specialist certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) with at least 3 years of experience in those testing, adjusting and
balancing requirements similar to those required for this project, who is not the installer of the system to
be tested and is otherwise independent of the project.
B. Codes and Standards: Provide testing, adjusting and balancing conforming to American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), American National Standards Institute
(ANSI), and either NEBB or AABC, the following:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with the following:
a. S1.4Specification For Sound Level Meters.
b. S1.11Specification For Octave -Band and Fractional -Octave -Band Analog and Digital Filters.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (AHSRAE) -1995 HVAC
Applications, Chapter 34: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to measurements,
instruments, and testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3. NEBB or AABC: Comply with NEBB'S "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of
Environmental Systems" or comply with AABC MN -1 "National Standards," as applicable to
mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -2
C. Penalty: The Contractor shall submit the name of the organization he proposes to employ for approval •
within 30 days after contract award. If the Contractor fails to submit the name of an acceptable agency
within the specified time, a firm may be selected to accomplish the work, and this selection shall be
binding upon the Contractor at no additional cost.
D. Retainages: In addition to any other sums retained or withheld pursuant to the provisions of this Contract,
the amount of dollars will be withheld from payments to the contractor until such time as the work has
been completed and accepted. In no event will this amount be paid to the Contractor prior to 60 days
following acceptance of the project; during such time, the Contractor shall investigate and correct any
reported deficiencies unless such deficiencies are a result of unauthorized tampering by building
occupants.
E. Calibration of Testing Instruments: All measurement instruments used for testing, adjusting, balancing,
and commissioning shall be calibrated. The time between the most recent calibration data and the final
test report date shall not be over 3 years.
F. Testing and balancing agency, as part of its contract, shall act as authorized inspection agency
responsible to Consulting Engineer and Owner, and shall list all items that are in stalled incorrectly, require
correction, or have not been installed in accordance with contract Drawings and Specifications, pertaining
to air distribution, cooling and heating systems. The testing and balancing agency is required to provide
written reports of all deficiencies and proposed recommendations to the Owner' Representative,
Contractor, Architect and Engineer.
G. The testing and balancing agency shall provide with his bid a performance guarantee covering all phases
of the work as herein specified.
H. The General and mechanical contractors shall cooperate with the selected testing and balancing agency •
in the following manner:
1. Provide sufficient time before final completion dates so that tests and balancing can be accomplished.
2. The various system installers, suppliers and contractors shall provide all required materials, labor and
tools to make corrections when required without undue delay. Install balancing dampers as required
by testing and balancing agency.
3. The contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full
operation and shall continue the operation of the same during each working day of testing and
balancing.
4. Testing and balancing agency shall be kept informed of any major changes made to the system
during construction, and shall be provided with a complete set of Record Drawings.
5. The General Contractor shall make space and other facilities available to the testing and balancing
agency to enable their work to progress. The General Contractor shall schedule the work of other
trades to avoid conflicts with this work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to the Submittals requirements of Division 1.
B. Forms: The Contractor shall deliver a complete copy of either NEBB or AABC standard forms for testing
and balancing work associated with the project. These forms shall serve as specific guidelines for •
producing final test report. Hybrid or non -standards forms are not acceptable. Data shall include, but not
be limited to, a title page with building information, instrument lists, air flows, water flows, temperatures,
sound levels, capacities, nameplate data.
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -3
C. Test Reports: Provide six (6) certified test reports, signed by the test and balance supervisor who
• performed the work. The final reports shall include identification and types of instruments used, and their
most recent calibration date. I .. r
D. Maintenance Data: Include, in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports and identification of
instruments. ,
E. Qualifications: The Contractor shall submit the certified individ ual qualifications of all persons responsible
for supervising and performing the actual work and the name of the certifying engineer. Provide a
reference list of five (5) similar size projects with contact person and telephone number.
1.6 AGENDA
A. Agenda: A preliminary report and agenda shall be submitted and approved prior to the start of testing and
balancing work.
1. - Review plans and specifications prior to installation of any of the affected systems, and submit a
report indicating any deficiencies in the systems that would preclude the proper adjusting, balancing,
and testing of the systems.
2. The agenda shall include a general description of each air system with its associated equipment and
operation cycles for heating and cooling.
3. The agenda shall include a list of all air flows to be performed at all mechanical equipment.
4. Specific test procedures for measuring air quantities at terminals shall specify type of instrument to be
used, method of instrument application (by sketch) and factors for:
a. Air terminal configuration.
b. Flow direction (supply or exhaust).
c. Velocity corrections.
d. Effective area applicable to each size and type of air terminal.
e. Density corrections.
5. The agenda shall include identification and types of measurement instruments to be used, and their
most recent calibration date.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. General: Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until the following conditions have
been met.
1. Work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work yet to be
completed on the tested equipment.
2. Work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded
building materials.
3. All architectural openings (doors, windows, and other openings) which may affect the operation of the
system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced shall be at their normal states.
0'4. All related mechanical systems which may affect the operation of the system tobe tested, adjusted,
and balanced shall be at their normal operating conditions.
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -4
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST HOLES
A. Test holes shall be provided in ducts, housings and pipes as necessary for the proper air and water
measurements and to balance systems. At each location where ducts or plenums are insulated, test
holes shall be provided with an approved extension with plug fitting.
2.2 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. Material: Seal, patch and repair ductwork, piping and equipment drilled or cut for testing purposes.
1. Plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.
2. Piping shall be capped with materials the same as the piping system.
3. Insulation shall be neatly hemmed with metal or plastic edging, leaving test points visible for future
testing.
2.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS
A. Standards: Utilize instruments and equipment of type, precision, and capacity as recommended in the
NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and AABC
manual MN -1.
•
B. Test Instruments: All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration histories for
each instrument shall be available for examination. Each test instrument shall be calibrated by an
approved laboratory or by the manufacturer. A representative has the right to request instrument
recalibration, or the use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of readings is
questionable. 0
C. Additional Instruments: Permanently installed measuring instruments, such as temperature and pressure
gauges, shall be checked against transfer standard instruments. Any instrument which does not meet
specification requirement shall be replaced or recalibrated.
D. Cone Instruments: The Contractor shall employ manufactured enclosure type cones, capable of air
volume direct readings, for all diffuser/grille/register air flow measurements. The readout meters shall
meet calibration requirements.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 PROCEDURES AND INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL
A. Requirements: All systems and components thereof shall be adjusted to perform as required by drawings
and specifications.
B. Test Duration: Operating tests of heating and cooling coils, fans, and other equipment shall be of not less
than four hours duration after stabilized operating conditions have been established. Capacities shall be
based on temperatures and air and water quantities measured during such tests.
C. Instrumentation: Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the approved
agenda.
1. All instruments shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's certified instructions.
2. All labor, instruments, and appliances required shall be furnished by the Contractor. Permanently •
installed instruments used for the tests (e.g., flow meters and Btu meters) shall not be installed until
the entire system has been cleaned and ready for operation.
•
•
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -5
3.2
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. Adjustments: Adjust all air handling systems to provide approximate design air quantity to or through,
each component, and to maintain stable and comfortable interior temperatures, free of drafts or stagnant
conditions. Adjusting and balancing of all systems shall be conducted during periods of the year
approximating maximum seasonal operation.
B. Equalizers: Equalizing devices shall be adjusted to provide uniform velocity across the inlets (duct side
for supply) of terminals prior to measuring flow rates.
C. Balance: Flow adjusting (volume control) devices shall be used to balance air quantities (i.e., proportion
flow between various terminals comprising system) to the extent that their adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound (i.e., in excess of specified limits).
1. Balancing between runs (submains, branch mains, and branches) generally shall be accomplished by
flow regulating devices at, or in, the divided -flow fitting.
2. Restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in or at terminals shall be minimal.
3. Final measurements of air quality shall be made after the air terminal has been adjusted to provide
the optimum air patterns of diffusion.
D. Fan Adjustment: Total air system quantities, generally, shall be varied by adjustment of fan speeds or
axial -flow fan wheel blade pitch. Damper restriction of a system's total flow may be used only for systems
with direct -connected fans (without adjustable pitch blades), provided system pressure is less than 1/2 -
inch W.G. and sound level criteria is met.
E. Air Measurement: Where air quantity measuring devices are specified in other sections such systems
shall be used as a cross-check of portable measuring equipment.
1. Except as specifically indicated herein, pitot tube traverses shall be made of each duct to measure air
flow therein. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and techniques shall conform to the
ASHRAE "Handbook Fundamentals Inch Pound Edition."
2. For ducts serving modular office areas with movable partitions, which are subject to change, pitot
tube traverses may be omitted provided the duct serves only a single room or space and its design
volume is less than 2000 cfm. In lieu of pitot tube traverses, airflow in the duct shall be determined by
totaling volume of individual terminals served, measured as described herein.
3. Where duct's design velocity and air quantity are both less than 1000 (fpm/cfm), air quantity may be
determined by measurements at terminals served.
F. Test Holes: Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbows, bends,
take -offs, and.other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow measurements.
G. Air Motion: Air motion and distribution shall be as specified and indicated on drawings. The Contractor at
no additional cost shall, in addition to air motion measurements, make smoke tes is wherever requested to
demonstrate the air distribution from air terminals.
H. Air System Test and Balance Procedure: Perform the following tests, and balance each system in
accordance with the following requirements:
• 1. Test and adjust blower RPM to design requirements
2. Test and record motor full load amperes. .
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -6
3. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at fans. •
4. Test and record system pressures, suction and discharge.
5. Test and adjust system for design recirculated air, CFM.
6. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air.
7. Test and record entering air temperatures.
8. Test and record leaving air temperatures.
9. Adjust all supply, return and exhaust air ducts to proper design CFM.
10. Test and adjust duct systems and each diffuser, grille, and/or register to within 10% of design
requirements.
11. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location and area.
12. Size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers and all tested equipment shall be identified
and listed. Manufacturer's ratings on all equipment shall be used to make required calculations.
13. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall include required FPM velocity and test
resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustment.
14. Room thermostats shall be checked for cooling and heating response.
15. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas. •
16. Adjust overall system balances to allow all self-closing exterior doors to close from any open position.
Maximum interior air pressure shall not exceed 0.05" static pressure relative to the outside air
pressure.
17. As part of the work of this contract, the HVAC contractor shall make any changes in the pulleys, belts
and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance as recommended by air balance
agency, at no additional cost to Owner.
18. After air balancing is completed and RPM determined, HVAC Contractor shall provide fixed pitch
pulleys.
3.3 AIR SYSTEM DATA
A. Report: The certified report shall include for each air handling system the data listed below.
1. Equipment (Fan or Factory Fabricated Station Unit):
a. Installation data
1) Manufacturer and model
2) Size
3) Arrangement, discharge and class
4) Motor hp, voltage, phase, cycles, and full load amps •
5) Location and local identification data
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -7
• b. Design data .
1) Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications.
c. Fan recorded (test) data
1) cfm
2) static pressure
3) rpm
4) motor operating amps
5) motor operating bhp
2. Duct Systems:
a, Duct air quantities (maximum and minimum) - main, submains, branches, outdoor (outside) air,
total air, and exhaust:
1) duct size(s)
2) number of pitot tube (pressure measurements)
3) sum of velocity measurements (Note: Do not add pressure measurements)
4) average velocity
5) recorded (test) cfm
6) design cfm
3.4 CERTIFIED REPORTS
A. Submittals: Six (6) copies of the reports described herein, covering air and water system performance, air
motion (fpm), and sound pressure levels, shall be submitted prior to final tests and inspection.
B: Instrument Records: Types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments shall be included.
C. Reports: Reports shall conspicuously identify items not conforming to contract requirements, or obvious
malfunction and design deficiencies.
D. Certification: Certification shall include checking of adherence to agenda, of calculations, of procedures,
and evaluation of final summaries.
END OF SECTION
0
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -1
• SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General
Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 15050 - Basic
Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein.
1.2 WORK RELATED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods
B. Section 15880: Air Distribution
C. Division 16: Electrical.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Scope: Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work required by this Section is indicated on the
drawings, in schedules, and by the requirements of this Section, and Section 15050 -Basic Mechanical
Requirements.
0 B. Systems: Testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this Section shall include, but not be limited to, the
following systems:
1. Air distribution ductwork including supply, return and exhaust.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tester's Qualifications: A specialist certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bure au (NEBB) or
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) with at least 3 years of experience in those testing, adjusting and
balancing requirements similar to those required for this project, who is not the installer of the system to
be tested and is otherwise independent of the project.
B. Codes and Standards: Provide testing, adjusting and balancing conforming to American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), American National Standards Institute
(ANSI), and either NEBB or AABC, the following:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with the following:
a. S1.4Specification For Sound Level Meters.
b. S1.11 Specification For Octave -Band and Fractional -Octave -Band Analog and Digital Filters.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (AHSRAE) -1995 HVAC
Applications, Chapter 34: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to measurements,
instruments, and testing, adjusting, and balancing.
• 3. NEBB or AABC: Comply with NEBB'S "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of
Environmental Systems" or comply with AABC MN -1 "National Standards," as applicable to
mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -2
C. Penalty: The Contractor shall submit the name of the organization he proposes to employ for approval •
within 30 days after contract award. If the Contractor fails to submit the name of an acceptable agency
within the specified time, a firm may be selected to accomplish the work, and this selection shall be
binding upon the Contractor at no additional cost.
D. Retainages: In addition to any other sums retained or withheld pursuant to the provisions of this Contract,
the amount of dollars will be withheld from payments to the contractor until such time as the work has
been completed and accepted. In no event will this amount be paid to the Contractor prior to 60 days
following acceptance of the project; during such time, the Contractor shall investigate and correct any
reported deficiencies unless such deficiencies are a result of unauthorized tampering by building
occupants.
E. Calibration of Testing Instruments: All measurement instruments used for testing, adjusting, balancing,
and commissioning shall be calibrated. The time between the most recent calibration data and the final
test report date shall not be over 3 years.
Testing and balancing agency, as part of its contract, shall act as authorized inspection agency
responsible to Consulting Engineer and Owner, and shall list all items that are installed incorrectly, require
correction, or have not been installed in accordance with contract Drawings and Specifications, pertaining
to air distribution, cooling and heating systems. The testing and balancing agency is required to provide
written reports of all deficiencies and proposed recommendations to the Owner' Representative,
Contractor, Architect and Engineer.
G. The testing and balancing agency shall provide with his bid a performance guarantee covering all phases
of the work as herein specified.
H. The General and mechanical contractors shall cooperate with the selected testing and balancing agency
in the following manner: 0,
1. Provide sufficient time before final completion dates so that tests and balancing can be accomplished.
2. The various system installers, suppliers and contractors shall provide all required materials, labor and
tools to make corrections when required without undue delay. Install balancing dampers as required
by testing and balancing agency.
3. The contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full
operation and shall continue the operation of the same during each working day of testing and
balancing.
4. Testing and balancing agency shall be kept informed of any major changes made to the system
during construction, and shall be provided with a complete set of Record Drawings.
5. The General Contractor shall make space and other facilities available to the testing and balancing
agency to enable their work to progress. The General Contractor shall schedule the work of other
trades to avoid conflicts with this work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to the Submittals requirements of Division 1.
B. Forms: The Contractor shall deliver a complete copy of either NEBB or AABC standard forms for testing
and balancing work associated with the project. These forms shall serve as specific guidelines for •
producing final test report. Hybrid or non -standards forms are not acceptable. Data shall include, but not
be limited to, a title page with building information, instrument lists, air flows, water flows, temperatures,
sound levels, capacities, nameplate data.
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
' TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -3
• C. Test Reports: Provide six (6) certified test reports, signed by the test and balance supervisor who
performed the work. The final reports shall include identification and types of instruments used, and their
most recent calibration date.
D. Maintenance Data: Include, in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports and identification of
instruments.
E. Qualifications: The Contractor shall submit the certified individual qualifications of all persons responsible
for supervising and performing the actual work and the name of the certifying engineer. Provide a
reference list of five (5) similar size projects with contact person and telephone number.
r.
1.6 AGENDA
A. Agenda: A preliminary report and agenda shall be submitted and approved prior to the start of testing and
balancing work.
1. Review plans and specifications prior to installation of any of the affected systems, and submit a
report indicating any deficiencies in the systems that would preclude the proper adjusting, balancing,
and testing of the systems.
2. The agenda shall include a general description of each air system with its associated equipment and
operation cycles for heating and cooling.
3. The agenda shall include a list of all air flows to be performed at all mechanical equipment.
4. Specific test procedures for measuring air quantities at terminals shall specify type of instrument to be
• used, method of instrument application (by sketch) and factors for:
a. Air terminal configuration.
b. Flow direction (supply or exhaust).
c. Velocity corrections.
d.. Effective area applicable to each size and type of air terminal.
e. Density corrections.
5. The agenda shall include identification and types of measurement instruments to be used, and their
most recent calibration date..
1.7 - JOB CONDITIONS
A. General: Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until the following conditions have
been met.
1. Work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work yet to be
completed on the tested equipment.
2. Work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded
building materials.
3. All architectural openings (doors, windows, and other openings) which may affect the operation of the
system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced shall be at their normal states.
• 4. All related mechanical systems which may affect the operation of the system to be tested, adjusted,
and balanced shall be at their normal operating conditions.
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -4
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST HOLES
A. Test holes shall be provided in ducts, housings and pipes as necessary for the proper air and water
measurements and to balance systems. At each location where ducts or plenums are insulated, test
holes shall be provided with an approved extension with plug fitting.
2.2 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. Material: Seal, patch and repair ductwork, piping and equipment drilled or cut for testing purposes.
1. Plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.
2. Piping shall be capped with materials the same as the piping system.
3. Insulation shall be neatly hemmed with metal or plastic edging, leaving test points visible for future
testing.
2.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS
A. Standards: Utilize instruments and equipment of type, precision, and capacity as recommended in the
NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and AABC
manual MN -1.
B. Test Instruments: All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration histories for
each instrument shall be available for examination. Each test instrument shall be calibrated by an
approved laboratory or by the manufacturer. A representative has the right to request instrument
recalibration, or the use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of readings is
questionable.
C. Additional Instruments: Permanently installed measuring instruments, such as temperature and pressure
gauges, shall be checked against transfer standard instruments. Any instrument which does not meet
specification requirement shall be replaced or recalibrated.
D. Cone Instruments: The Contractor shall employ manufactured enclosure type cones, capable of air
volume direct readings, for all diffuser/grille/register air flow measurements. The readout meters shall
meet calibration requirements.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 PROCEDURES AND INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL
A. Requirements: All systems and components thereof shall be adjusted to perform as required by drawings
and specifications.
B. Test Duration: Operating tests of heating and cooling coils, fans, and other equipment shall be of not less
than four hours duration after stabilized operating conditions have been established. Capacities shall be
based on temperatures and air and water quantities measured during such tests.
C. Instrumentation: Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the approved
agenda. •
1. All instruments shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's certified instructions.
•
•
-BANK OF AMERICA 1.5990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -5
2. All labor, instruments, and appliances required shall be furnished by the Contractor. Permanently
installed instruments used for the tests (e.g., flow meters and Btu meters) shall not be installed until
the entire system has been cleaned and ready for operation.
3.2 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. Adjustments: Adjust all air handling systems to provide approximate design air quantity to or through,
each component, and to maintain stable and comfortable interior temperatures, free of drafts or stagnant
conditions. Adjusting and balancing of all systems shall be conducted during periods of the year
approximating maximum seasonal operation.
B. Equalizers: Equalizing devices shall be adjusted to provide uniform velocity across the inlets (duct side
for supply) of terminals prior to measuring flow rates.
C. Balance: Flow adjusting (volume control) devices shall be used to balance air quantities (i.e., proportion
flow between various terminals comprising system) to the extent that their adjustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound (i.e., in excess of specified limits).
1. Balancing between runs (submains, branch mains, and branches) generally shall be accomplished by
flow regulating devices at, or in, the divided -flow fitting.
2. Restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in or at terminals shall be minimal.
3. Final measurements of air quality shall be made after the air terminal has been adjusted to provide
the optimum air patterns of diffusion.
D. Fan Adjustment: Total air system quantities, generally, shall be varied by adjustment of fan speeds or
axial -flow fan wheel blade pitch. Damper restriction of a system's total flow may be used only for systems
with direct -connected fans (without adjustable pitch blades), provided system pressure is less than 1/2 -
inch W.G. and sound level criteria is met.
E. Air Measurement: Where air quantity measuring devices are specified in ,other sections such systems
shall be used as a cross-check of portable measuring equipment.
1. Except as specifically indicated herein, pitot tube traverses shall be made of each duct to measure air
flow therein. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and techniques shall conform to the
ASHRAE "Handbook Fundamentals Inch Pound Edition."
2. - For ducts serving modular office areas with movable partitions, which are subject to change, pitot
tube traverses may be omitted provided the duct serves only a single room or space and its design
volume is less than 2000 cfm. In lieu of pitot tube traverses, airflow in the duct shall be determined by
totaling volume of individual terminals served, measured as described herein.
3. Where duct's design velocity and air quantity are both less than 1000 (fpm/cfm), air quantity may be
determined by measurements at terminals served.
F. Test Holes: Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbows, bends,
take -offs, and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow measurements.
G. Air Motion: Air motion and distribution shall be as specified and indicated on drawings. The Contractor at
no additional cost shall, in addition to air motion measurements, make smoke tests wherever requested to
demonstrate the air distribution from air terminals.
H. Air System Test and Balance Procedure: " Perform the following tests, and balance each system in
accordance with the following requirements:
BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -6
1. Test and adjust blower RPM to design requirements.
2. Test and record motor full load amperes.
3. Make pilot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at fans.
4. Test and record system pressures, suction and discharge.
5. Test and adjust system for design recirculated air, CFM.
6. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air.
7. Test and record entering air temperatures.
8. Test and record leaving air temperatures.
9. Adjust all supply, return and exhaust air ducts to proper design CFM.
10. Test and adjust duct systems and each diffuser, grille, and/or register to within 10% of design
requirements.
11. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location and area.
12. Size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers and all tested equipment shall be identified
and listed. Manufacturer's ratings on all equipment shall be used to make required calculations.
13. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall include required FPM velocity and test
resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustment.
14. Room thermostats shall be checked for cooling and heating response.
15. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas.
16. Adjust overall system balances to allow all self-closing exterior doors to close from any open position.
Maximum interior air pressure shall not exceed 0.05" static pressure relative to the outside air
pressure.
17. As part of the work of this contract, the HVAC contractor shall make any changes in the pulleys, belts
and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance as recommended by air balance
agency, at no additional cost to Owner.
18. After air balancing is completed and RPM determined, HVAC Contractor shall provide fixed pitch
pulleys.
3.3 AIR SYSTEM DATA
A. Report: The certified report shall include for each air handling system the data listed below.
1. Equipment (Fan or Factory Fabricated Station Unit):
a. Installation data
•
1) Manufacturer and model •
2) Size
•
0
.BANK OF AMERICA 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING -7
3) Arrangement, discharge and class
4) Motor hp, voltage, phase, cycles, and full load amps
5) Location and local identification data
b. Design data
1) Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications.
c. Fan recorded (test) data
1) cfm
2) static pressure
3) rpm
4) motor operating amps
5) motor operating bhp
2. Duct Systems:
a. Duct air quantities (maximum and minimum) - main, submains, branches, outdoor (outside) air,
total air, and exhaust:
- 1) duct size(s)
2) number of pitot tube (pressure measurements)
3) sum of velocity measurements (Note: Do not add pressure measurements)
4) average velocity
5) recorded (test) cfm
6) design cfm
3.4 CERTIFIED REPORTS
A. Submittals: Six( 6) copies of the reports described herein, covering air and water system performance, air
motion.(fpm), and sound pressure levels, shall be submitted prior to final tests and inspection.
B. Instrument Records: Types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments shall be included.
C. Reports: Reports shall conspicuously identify items not conforming to contract requirements, or obvious
malfunction and design deficiencies.
D. Certification: Certification shall include checking of adherence to agenda, of calculations, of procedures,
and evaluation of final summaries.
END OF SECTION
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -1
SECTION 16000
• ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
tl
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements of Division 1 shall apply to this section.
B. These General Requirements apply to entire Division 16 and to electrical work, material and
equipment specified in other divisions.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Work under this section consists of all labor, material, equipment, services, permits, fees and
transportation necessary for, and/or reasonably incidental to, the construction and completion in
working order of electrical work shown on the accompanying drawings and/or specified herein.
,B. Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination with utility company to provide service to the facility. All work not provided by utility
company required to render service to the site. Utility company service charges.
2. Primary and/or secondary service conduit from point of utility company service to facility service
equipment. Primary and/or secondary service conductors not furnished by utility company.
Precast pads for utility company transformer. Pull boxes.
3. Distribution systems for power and lighting.
4. Grounding system for service and equipment.
5. Lighting system including fixtures, lamps, supports, outlets, devices, plates, branch circuiting and
control.
6. Outlet system including outlets, devices, plates and branch circuiting.
7. Public telephone service conduits from point of utility company service to main telephone
terminal. Pull boxes.
8. Telephone and data raceway system including raceways, outlets, pull wires, sleeves, terminals,
grounding.
9. Conduit and wiring system for heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbing, including
connection, disconnect switches and items of industrial control (where not part of package
controls). Connection to packaged controls furnished under Division 15.
10. Conduit and wiring for HVAC control where not furnished under mechanical section.
11. Conduit, wiring, outlets, devices and connections to electrical equipment furnished under other
sections or by Owner for a complete installation. Installation of controls furnished under other
sections.
012. Code required access panels to electrical equipment in concealed locations. Location
coordinated with Architect.
13. Excavation and backfill for work under this section.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -2
14. Precast pull boxes and transformer pads, pull irons, cable racks, concrete conduit encasement. •
15. Templates and coordination of installation of formed concrete for electrical work such as concrete
bases, trenches, equipment pads, light pole foundations, curbs.
16. Shop drawings, wiring diagrams, equipment data, record drawings, operation manuals.
17. Hanger, anchors, sleeves, chases, core drilling, metal supports, channels, plywood backing,
vibration isolation, seismic bracing, as required for work under this section.
18. Cleaning, patching, repairing and touch up painting as required for work under this section.
19. Permits and fees.
20. Testing, adjusting of completed work, inspections and instruction.
21. Temporary power and lighting for work under this section.
22. Emergency standby power and/or lighting system.
23. Signal and communication empty raceway and outlet systems. Equipment and wiring under other
sections or by Owner.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE OR BY OTHERS
A. Temporary service and wiring except as required for this section (Division 1).
B. Setting of motors furnished under other divisions (Trades).
C. Finish painting of flush mounted electrical equipment in public areas (Section 'Painting").
D. Formed concrete except templates (Section "Concrete").
E. Furnishing of packaged air conditioning controls (Division 15).
F. Telephone cable and instruments (utility company or Owner).
G. Signal and communication systems wiring and equipment (separate section or by Owner).
H. Primary and/or secondary service conductors, service meter (coordinate with utility company).
I. Fire alarm and security system (separate section).
1.4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS
A. Codes and regulations: Comply with applicable sections of national, state and local codes, laws,
ordinances, rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including:
1. California Energy Commission (CEC).
2. California State Building Code, Title 24.
3. City and State Electrical Codes. Applicable portion of local Building Codes.
4. National Electric Code (NEC). •
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -3
6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
•
7. Serving utility company (service ann
d metering requirements).
8. State and local fire regulations and requirements.
9. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
B. Standards: Comply with latest editions of applicable regulations and standards of:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
3. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM).
4. Energy Policy and Conservation Act (EPCA) National Energy Conservation Amendments
(NAECA).
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
7. National Bureau of Standards (NBS).
8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
9. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
10. National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG).
C. Minimum Requirements:
1. Comply with the requirements of authorities and listed standards as minimum acceptable work.
In case of conflict between the requirements, the most stringent govern.
2. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they call for materials or construction of
better quality or larger size then required by codes, laws, rules and regulations.
D. Permits: Obtain permits and inspections, and pay for all fees, unless otherwise specified. Deliver all
certificates of inspection to the Architect.
E. Guarding:
1. Provide protection for moving parts and hazardous conditions.
2. Provide industrial accident and warning signs per ANSI and OSHA.
3. Erect and maintain suitable barriers, protective devices, lights and warning signs for the
protection of the public and employees from the work under this section.
4. Conform with applicable safety regulations, including those of the Architect and Owner.
1.5 SERVICES
• A. Provide all labor and material, not furnished by the public utility companies, required to render service
to the project from utility company service points. Verify service charges (e.g., excess facilities,
cable) and requirements, and pay all costs thereof, unless specified otherwise. ' .
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -4
B. Ground service transformer, and service switchboard as detailed and specified and per utility
company and code requirements. Provide ground at public telephone main terminal.
C. Verify exact location of utility service points. Install primary and secondary conduit and terminate as •
specified and as directed by the utility company. Provide duct banks for utility company service
conductors as indicated and specified and not less than utility company standards. Obtain utility
company approval for duct installation.
D. For utility service conduit, provide sweep radii per utility company standards but not less than
specified.
E. Verify construction details of transformer pads, service switchboards, conduit and cable details, and
service related work with respective utility company and observe utility company standards. Obtain
written utility company approvals prior to construction and submit evidence of approval.
F. Upon award of the contract, notify the public utility companies and supply them estimated completion
date of the work and desired service date. Supply electric utility with required data regarding
electrical loads.
G. Where primary and/or secondary service conductors are provided under Electrical Section,
coordinate terminations with utility company. Where primary and/or secondary service conductors
are provided by utility company, provide terminations as required by utility company.
H. Where service exists, make required modifications, extend to new work, and pay all costs.
I. Obtain settings of utility company primary devices and coordinate main breaker settings with utility
company devices.
1.6 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A. The applicable paragraphs of General Requirements, Division 1, shall apply herein. Substitutions
after award of the contract will not be considered.
B. Basis for Design: Manufacturer's names, products and numbers listed on the drawings or in these
specifications, along with specific descriptions in these specifications, set the standards of quality and
performance. Select products of one of the listed manufacturers meeting these standards and modify
standard catalog items where required to meet specifications. Provide specified material and
equipment unless specifically approved otherwise.
C. Equivalence: The phrase "or equivalent by" followed by manufacturer's name means that this
manufacturer's product shall match the performance, construction, fit and features specified.
D. Substitutions: Submit proposed substitutions along with alternate price, complete descriptive data
and a comparison of the substitute manufacturer's product with specified product. In proposing a
substitution, assume full responsibility for any associated modifications in building openings,
circuiting, control wiring, and space considerations, and bear all costs. Architect reserves right to
reject any proposed substitution.
E. Liability of Substitutions: Substituted items to perform equivalent to or better than the item used for
basis for design, and meet all requirements of above "or equivalent by" clause. Should the
substituted item fail to perform in accordance with specifications, replace with the originally specified
item without extra compensation.
1.7 SUBMITTALS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
•
A. General: Make submittals in accordance with the General Conditions, in order as listed. Submit •
material list, and obtain review, prior to submission of manufacturer's data and shop drawings.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -5
B. Submittals: Piecemeal submittals will not be acceptable. Submit in brochure form with all listings
• referenced to applicable paragraph in the specifications.
C. Review: Submittals will be reviewed for general design only, and not for method of assembly,
erection, construction, or detailed compliance with Contract Documents.
L
D. Condition of Acceptance of Submittals: No deviation from Contract Documents is permitted unless
specifically so noted by Contractor and accepted by Architect in writing.
E. Contractor Responsibility:
1. Error or omissions in submittals regardless of review status of submittals.
2. Coordination with work of other trades.
3. Space coordination and maintenance of code required aisle space.
4. Erection and installation techniques, including structural adequacy and bracing suitable for
stability and/or seismic conditions.
5. Maintenance of installation safety.
-6. Satisfactory performance of all work.
F. Manufacturer's Data:
1. Submit with associated shop drawings.
2. Furnish certification from suppliers and/or manufacturers of materials and equipment that such
items meet or exceed the requirements of the drawings and specifications.
G. Shop Drawings and Reports:
1. Identify with project name, number and item designation as indicated on. drawings. Reference to
applicable paragraphs of the specification.
2. Submit legible reproducible transparency and two prints minimum for Architect's record. Make
necessary prints of reviewed transparency for distribution. If reproducible is not available, submit
- a minimum of six copies of catalog cuts.
3. Prior to submission, check all shop drawings for conformance with requirements of latest issue of
the drawings and specifications, including bulletins and change orders, and against available
space. Obtain public utility company approval of service metering and indicate on shop drawing.
Have motor controls reviewed by respective mechanical trades for motor size and control
coordination. Have submittals signed by all reviewing parties. Make required corrections before
forwarding to the Architect for review.
4. Include dimensional data, weights, ratings, construction details, component descriptive data and
sufficient information to illustrate compliance with the specifications. List labeling and approving
agencies and standards of design employed in manufacture.
H. Required Submittals: Submit shop drawings and technical data on all equipment and auxiliary
systems in sufficient detail to indicate conformance with the drawings and specifications, including but
not limited to:
• 1. - Switchboards and metering facilities, including data on all components used in gear.
2. Branch circuit panelboards, terminal cabinets.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -6
3. Installation drawings.
4. Life safety fire alarm, signal and communication systems components, wiring diagrams, conduit •
and outlet diagrams, system function description.
5. Catalog cuts of interior and exterior lighting fixtures. Include finish data, socket specifications,
metal gauge, diffuser specifications, photometric data, agency labeling, weight, suspension
system details. Indicate compliance with general and specific specification requirements, ballast
specification and coordination with ceiling system construction.
6. Emergency systems, wiring and interwiring diagrams.
7. Wiring devices, all types and ratings.
8. Control devices, controllers.
9. Occupancy sensors.
10. Low voltage lighting control system.
1.8 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare dimensionally accurate floor plans of each electrical and signal room and/or closet, drawn to
1/4" scale minimum. Submit legible reproducible transparencies for review with two prints for
Architect's record. Indicate all equipment within the rooms to scale based on shop drawing data,
include structural support for suspended equipment and description of seismic bracing and fastening.
Submit with shop drawings.
B. Where conduit runs, 2" trade size and larger, are run in exposed locations, prepare dimensionally
accurate floor plans indicating routing, coordinated with work of other trades and the structure.
Submit legible reproducible transparencies with two prints for review.
1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record of Job Progress: Provide and maintain in good order a complete legible set of blue line
electrical contract drawings available at the site for inspection. Keep an accurate dimensional record
of installed locations and all job changes, including source and date of authorization.
B. Record of Installation: At the conclusion of the work, purchase from the Architect a set of electronic
(Auto Cad) files of electrical drawings and have incorporated by a competent CAD operator all
installed data in a clearly legible manner -utilizing contract drawing symbols and notations.
C. Include in Record Drawings the Following:
Corrected panel schedules indicating installed condition. Installed typed schedules reflecting
installed conditions in panels.
2. Revisions, including sketches, bulletins, change orders, written addenda and directives,
clarifications and responses generated by requests for information (RFIs), regardless of source of
the revision.
3. Physical routing of feeders and conduits 2" trade size and larger, underground, exposed and
above ceilings.
4. Location of underground conduit below building and on exterior, and stubouts dimensioned from •
building structure.
5. Location of site service conduits, pull boxes and transformer pads by elevation and dimensioned
from buildings and permanent structures.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -7
6. Location of floor mounted outlets, dimensioned from fixed building features.
• 1.10 SPARES, SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Provide to Owner as specified in other paragraphs of the specification.and as outlined herein.
B. Obtain receipts and include copy with Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual(s).
C. Provide lists of each category describing type, rating and use and include lists with Operating and
Maintenance Instruction Manual(s).
D. Fuses: Spares of each current rating for each type including signal, communication and control
system fuses.
E. Overload heaters: Two sets of three for each rating.
F. Receptacle Plugs: One for each receptacle excluding NEMA 5-15R and 5-20R types, unless
otherwise noted.
G. Device Plates: Two for each type of device used in excess of twenty.
H. Special Tools: Provide, as standard accessories, tools not readily available in commercial market
required for assembly, adjustment and/or maintenance of equipment provided under this section.
1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. General: As a condition for final acceptance of the system, submit to the Architect a minimum of
three copies of each of the following documents, complete and at one time, in looseleaf three ring
binders with permanent covers, identified, indexed and cross-referenced to the specifications. On the
edge of the binder, identify the project, year of construction and equipment involved. Where practical,
data may be combined in comprehensive manual.
B. Maintenance Instruction - Include:
1. Complete record material list:,. -
2. Catalog brochures for all components.
3. Motor starter overload schedules.
.4. Test reports.
5. Manufacturer's directions and conformance certificate.
6.. Guarantee and warranties.
7. Inspection certificates.
8. Reports on instruction of Owner's personnel.
9. Wiring and block diagrams, where applicable.
10. Detailed checkout procedures to insure operation of systems and gear.. -
11. Diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures for systems.and major equipment.
• 12. Recommended preventive maintenance program, including a list of mechanical items requiring
inspection and servicing. _ -
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -8
C. Parts list - Include for Replaceable Parts:
1. Description of part, manufacturer's part number, source to obtain part. •
2. Quantity of each replaceable part in system.
3. List of each type of lighting fixture lamp used, including fixture lamp is used in and lamp source.
D. Operation Instruction - Describe:
1. Start-up, checkout and shutdown procedures.
2. Emergency operation capability and procedures
3. Time switch operating schedule.
E. Shop Drawings - Include: Complete set of record shop drawings, cuts and brochures.
1.12 VERBAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Upon completion of the work, provide an engineer from each supplier of major equipment or system
to instruct Owner's designated operating personnel using the Operating and Maintenance data.
Include on-the-job training, conducted before and during the system test period. Provide instruction
proportional to the complexity of the system, but not less than one days.
B. Submit written report to Owner with copy to Architect, for each instruction period indicating date and
time of instruction, and personnel being instructed and signed by personnel participating.
1.13 INSPECTIONS
A. In addition to required service calls, make a minimum of two inspections accompanied by operating
personnel, within the warranty period, at no expense to the Owner, to insure that all systems are
maintained properly and in satisfactory operating condition.
B. Submit written reports to Owner with copy to Architect, signed by operating personnel witnessing
inspection, and indicating inspection results.
1.14 COMPLETION
A. Before Final Review: The work hereunder will not be reviewed for final acceptance until Operating
and Maintenance Data, Manufacturer's Literature, Identification, Warning Signs and Nameplates
specified herein have been reviewed and/or properly posted in the building and final cleaning has
been completed.
B. Before operating any equipment for demonstration or test, comply with manufacturer's preparation
instructions.
C. Demonstration of Operations: When the installation is complete and required adjustments have been
made, operate the systems for a period of one week. During this time demonstrate to the Owner's
representative that systems are completed and operating and performing in conformance with these
specifications.
1.15 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. Comply with guarantee requirements of Division 1. •
B. Guarantee all material, equipment and work for a period of one year (or greater where specified
elsewhere) from written acceptance of the work, against defects of any kind, covering all parts.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -9
C. Guarantee electronic fluorescent ballasts for both material and labor as described above except for a
period of two years after ballast manufacture and not less than thirty months after written acceptance
• of the work. Submit guarantee along with Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual(s) and
include name and telephone number designated representatives who will perform required
maintenance. -
D. Obtain guarantees and/or. warranties for factory assembled equipment and include with Operation
Instruction Manual.
E. In the event of failure of any work, equipment, or device during the life of the guarantee and at no cost
to Owner, repair or replace the defective work and remove, replace or restore any parts of the
structure or building which may be damaged as the direct result of the defective work or in the course
of making the replacement of defective work materials.
1.16 PRELIMINARY OPERATION
A. The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the electrical system on a preliminary basis
without voiding the guarantee or relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide material and equipment of new and recent manufacture, currently UL labeled and/or listed for
the specified use.
B. Where UL labeling is not. available, provide certification by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL).
• C. Use products of the same manufacture and type for each category of material and equipment.
2.2 RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS
A. Rigid Conduit including Couplings, Locknuts, Nipples: Steel, hot -dipped galvanized inside and out
after threading, galvanized, threaded malleable iron or steel fittings, notched, locknuts with gripping
teeth. Deliver with plastic thread protectors on exposed conduit threads.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit including Couplings, Locknuts, Nipples: Steel, hot process galvanized
outside, lacquered or enameled inside, galvanized threads, galvanized threaded malleable iron or
steel fittings, notched locknuts with gripping teeth. Deliver with plastic thread protectors on exposed
conduit threads. .
C. Electric Metallic Tubing including Locknuts, Couplings and Connectors: Galvanized steel, lacquered
or enameled interior; raintight gland ring compression or setscrew compression type fittings, insulated
throat connectors. Indenture fittings are unacceptable.
D. Flexible Conduit: Manufactured from single steel strip, galvanized on all four sides prior to
fabrication, die cast twist -in connectors, UL listed for ground continuity. Reduced wall or aluminum
flexible conduit is not acceptable.
E. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel core, with extruded polyvinyl chloride cover.
Liquid tight insulated throat fittings to seal and ground conduit. Provide separate bond wire where
integral ground conductor is not available.
F. Gutters and Wireways: Galvanized sheet steel, hinged covers, elbows and fittings without sharp
• edges or projections.
G. Nonmetallic Conduit: ;High, impact 90°C polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 40 extruded to iron pipe sizes
with factory spacers, couplings, bends and offsets. Plastic to plastic connections, tightly fitted and
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -10
butted, cement welded utilizing tinted primer per ASTM F656 and heavy body, medium set cement
per ASTM D2564, in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Plastic to metal connection with UL •
listed adapters. Bell endings are not acceptable.
2.3 FITTINGS, OUTLETS AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Provide bright new stock, stored where continuously protected from the weather and as described
herein.
B. Outlet Boxes and Covers: Steel, knockout type, with full access screw -on covers or plaster rings, hot -
dipped, galvanized, with cadmium plated or galvanized machine screws.
C. Cast Outlet Boxes: Cast ferrous metal construction, galvanized, complete with threaded hubs for rigid
conduit, number and location as required, and plugs in unused hubs; gasketed cast covers; cast
device plates suitable for indicated device; meeting NEC requirement for bending and permitted
number of conductors.
D. Small Junction and Pull Boxes: As specified for outlet boxes.
E. Large Junction or Pull Boxes: Galvanized code gauge sheet steel construction, with full access
screwed on covers and cadmium plated or galvanized machine screws; minimum size per the
governing electrical code or as noted on the drawings, whichever is greater; barriers for required
separation; special configurations, where determined from field measurements to surmount structural
conditions; factory painted with gray enamel. For flush mounting, extend covers 3/4" beyond edge of
boxes. Where used for cable support, brace box to support cable weight. For junction boxes larger
than 36" in any dimension, provide 3/4" diameter steel pipe cable supports with flanged ends with
continuous fiber insulating sleeve and bolted to box frame, spaced on 36" centers maximum. For
cover dimensions 3 ft. x 4 ft. or larger, provide two piece covers equipped with handles.
F. Junction Boxes on Exterior or Where Exposed to Moisture (e.g., Tunnels, Pits, Mechanical Rooms):
Edges welded and ground smooth, leaving interior fillets; galvanized after fabrication; gasketed
covers; stainless steel screws; factory painted with gray enamel. Gaskets to be factor made of an
approved type.
G. Floor Mounted Junction or Pull Boxes: Heavy wall cast iron with flanged lip; galvanized; gasketed,
screwed -on, watertight coverplate; drilled and tapped conduit openings as required; minimum size 6"
square by 4" deep.
H. Floor Boxes:
1. Fully adjustable before and after installation.
2. Watertight cast iron units in slabs on grade. Galvanized steel, concrete tight, in suspended slabs.
3. Minimum volume of 30 cubic inches but not less than required for the number of conductors
indicated considering any devices installed.
4. Compatible with slab thickness.
5. 4" diameter nominal, heavy brass coverplate with combination 2" and 1" plugs, or cover
compatible with device. Gasket between adjusting ring and box.
6. Conduit entrances as required, plug unused openings.
7. Ganged units with barriers for multiple outlets or special types where indicated. •
8. Brass carpet flange in carpeted areas.
9. For junction box use, provide conduit elbow with flush brass coupling for extension above floor.
•
•
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -11
10. For flush mounted duplex outlets,, provide brass cover with individual hinged caps.
11. For floor mounted outlets, provide -monuments as specified under Paragraph titled "Wiring
Devices".
I. Floor Boxes, Afterset:
1. UL rated for use in 2 hour rated floors.
2. Suitable for installation in 3" cored hole.
3. Integral junction box below floor for feed through.
4. For flush mounted duplex outlets provide brass cover with individual hinged caps.
5. For floor mounted outlets, provide monuments as specified under Paragraph titled "Wiring
Devices".
J. Backboxes: Refer to Communication and Signal Sections of the specifications. Provide outlet boxes
of dimensions and configuration required for devices and equipment specified therein. Verify with
equipment supplier.
2.4 CONCRETE PULL BOXES, TRANSFORMER PADS
A. Precast Concrete Pull Boxes Outside Building, Branch Circuiting: Where not otherwise noted or
detailed, provide bottomless units with reinforced bolt down concrete cover; outside dimensions 13"
by 19" by 12" deep minimum; in traffic areas, provide bolt down traffic covers. Provide minimum 12"
depth of crushed rock or pea gravel below boxes for drainage.
B. Pull Boxes Distribution:
1. Provide precast concrete pull boxes where indicated, 48" square by 48" deep minimum
dimensions, depth as required, complete with pull irons on four sides, conduit entry provisions on
four sides, 8" diameter x 5" deep dry sump, two cable racks per side, galvanized steel frame and
two piece, bolt down, cast iron or steel cover. Traffic type in traffic areas. Provide end bells for
all ducts.
2. Racks to be hot dipped galvanized, equipped with adjustable hooks and porcelain insulators as
required to separate feeders or signal systems, and keep conductors off bottom. .
3. Paint cover and frame with two coats of asphaltum paint.
4. Caulk between sections and coat exterior with waterproof compound.
5. Set pull boxes on 6" deep gravel or sand bed, flush with paving in paved areas with paving
sloping away from pull boxes. In unpaved areas locate boxes so that runoff water will not drain to
pull box, set cover 2" above finished grade and provide 6" thick by 12" wide concrete apron
around box, sloping away from cover.
6. Alternate: Poured in place pull boxes of equivalent characteristics may be . provided. Submit
structural details and calculation for review.
7. Identification: Cast system designation in covers in 2" size letters as directed. Secondary power
- ELECTRICAL. Communications systems - SIGNAL.
C. Precast Transformer Pads:
1. Provide dimensions, configurations and accessories as indicated on drawings and as required.
2. For utility company transformers, comply with utility company requirements.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -12
3. Where transformers are subject to vehicle damage, provide galvanized steel pipe barriers, 30"
into concrete, 30" exposed, poured full of concrete, on 4' centers. 0
D. Hand Holes (Grounding): 10" round (I.D.) cast traffic box with cast iron or galvanized steel cover.
E. Submittals: Provide shop drawings. Include for pull boxes structural data, loading characteristics,
accessories and boxes elevations of all sides, as constructed.
2.5 CONDUCTORS - 600V
A. GENERAL
1. Manufactured within eight (8) months of installation, of soft drawn copper of not less than 98
percent conductivity, conforming with ASTM Specification and NEC; 600V insulation unless
specifically noted otherwise, of the type specified, standard American Wire Gauge (AWG) sizes;
solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. Use Stranded conductors
below No. 8 AWG for fire alarm system, special applications and as noted.
2. Provide new conductors delivered to the site in original, unbroken packages, plainly marked or
tagged with Underwriters' labels; size, type, insulation and voltage rating of the wire; name of
manufacturing company and the trade name of the wire; date of manufacture.
B. Conductor Insulation:
1. XHHW-2, THHW/THWN in all locations.
2. For dry locations: XHHW, THHN/THWN.
3. Connections to Recessed Fixtures from Remote Outlet in Wet Locations: XHHW-2, THWN-2.
4. Through Ballast Housings, and for Connections to Recessed Fixtures in Dry Locations: RHH,
THHN, XHHW.
5. In Exposed Conduit on Roof or in Conduit Concealed under Roofing Material: MI (wet locations).
Exception: Short conduit extensions (6' or less) to roof mounted equipment may be same as
remainder of circuit.
6. For Communication and Signal Systems and for Control of Mechanical Equipment: THWN
throughout unless otherwise specified herein or in other sections of the specifications.
2.6 SWITCHBOARDS
A. GENERAL
Complete factory assembled, metal enclosed assembly with lifting means, consisting of the
required number of 90" high (unless available headroom requires 78" height), self -supported,
vertical sections, including pull and/or transition sections, bolted together to form a floorstanding
assembly, front and rear aligned. Service and feeder termination suitable for bus or wire
connections as indicated. Rated for 75°C feeder and circuit wiring. Ratings as indicated on the
drawings.
2. Device handle heights not to exceed 6'-6" above working surface (per NEC) considering
installation on a 3" high concrete base pad.
3. Rodent proof ventilation as required to maintain allowable temperature rise at rated capacity. •
4. Interfacing of external bus and/or cable conductors and control wiring with all related equipment
supplied herein, under other sections of the work, or by utility company.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -13
: 5. All devices, controls, auxiliaries, -and instrumentation, as indicated on the drawings and as
• required for the specified function, assembled, interwired and pretested, prior to shipment, at the
manufacturer's plant.
6. Switching and protective devices with visible means of ON-OFF identification.
7. Minimum RMS symmetrical rating of switchboards to be 25,000A (240V) but not less than 10%
above available. Smallest device rating not less than switchboard rating.
8. Where switchboard circuit breaker trip ratings do not exceed 70A power panelboards may be
used.
Anti -turn (two bolt), solderless, copper type incoming and outgoing feeder terminals per
paragraph titled "Connectors and terminations, Line Voltage Conductors".
10. Verify top or bottom entry and instruct equipment supplier.
11. Switchboard and device settings and ratings to be based on available short circuit capacity.
12. Submittals to include voltage/current rating, short circuit rating of board and devices, overall
dimensions, available conduit space, circuit schedule, circuit numbers, device rating and
description, conductor ratings, one line diagram with circuits numbered, nameplate schedule,
equipment weight and control panel internal and interconnecting wiring diagrams, certification of
conformance.
13. Shop drawings, operation and maintenance data, identification and testing as described in Part I.
B. Construction:
1. 12 gauge minimum sheet steel, phosphatized, primed and factory finished ANSI 61, with
removable, screwed on, pan type, side, top and rear access plates, capable of being moved into
installation position without deformation or damage, and bolted directly to the floor without use of
floor sills. Seismically braced and bolted.
2. Full height vertical wiring compartments with hinged pan type access doors, top and bottom
wiring compartments, cadmium plated or galvanized hardware and captive screws.
3. Drain roof of front access gear to front of gear and freestanding gear to rear of gear. Do not trap
water on roof of gear.
4. On exterior provide outdoor construction with fully accessible, gasketed weatherproof front doors
with three point latch and lock. Include integral space heater and exhaust fan, each controlled by
thermostat and energized fused control transformer. Design outgoing cable and/or bus
connections to maintain weatherproof integrity of gear.
C. Bussing:
1. Flat copper bussing,, silver plated at joints, mounted on high impact, nontracking insulators braced
for available fault current. Label boards for required short circuit rating.
2. Compression type bolts at all bus joints using a combination of flat and spring type washers.
3. Unreduced, fully rated horizontal bus for length of board, arranged for future expansion, and rated
not less than the main device. Incoming bus rated not less than the main device or sum of main
' devices.
4. Full height vertical bus in all sections. Switchboard vertical bus rating equal to sum of devices
and spare devices served, but.not less than two-thirds of the horizontal bus rating for two sections
or one-half for three or more sections.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -14
5. A -B -C bus arrangements throughout, left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear.
6. Bus assembly to maintain UL clearances without reliance on any insulating material. •
7. Full-length copper equipment ground bus 114" by 2" cross section secured and bonded to each
section of board, with terminals for feeder ground connections.
8. Fully rated neutral bus insulated from ground for all grounded neutral boards with a removable
neutral bus link.
9. Horizontal bus located not less than 8" from front panels and bottom of boards.
D. Features:
1. Spare devices for all switchboards as indicated on the drawings, but not less than one for each
board containing eight or more feeder devices and rated not less than the smallest feeder or
branch device in the board.
2. Fully equipped spaces including bus extensions, drilling and tapping of busses, suitable dead
plates, but less device connecting straps, as indicated, but not less than one per switchboard and
not less than one for each six devices or fraction thereof, rated not less than the smallest feeder
or branch device in the board.
3. Devices and wiring connected ahead of mains or energized from external sources to be isolated
with barriers and identified.
4. NEMA Type 13 dust tight and oiltight, transformer push -to -test type indicating pilot lamps with
lamps replaceable from exterior.
5. Metering as indicated or specified.
E. Wiring:
1. No. 14 AWG minimum, NEC switchboard type, terminated with spade lugs on screw stud type
terminal blocks, on bakelite frame.
2. Color coding reserving white for neutral and green for equipment ground. Colored tape
identification is equivalent to colored insulation. Conductors fanned, laced and identified with
number strips.
3. Isolate wiring from external sources and identify.
F. Circuit Devices: Types as designated on the drawings and meeting the requirements of applicable
paragraphs of the specifications, short circuit rating not less than switchboard rating. Provide for
padlocking in OFF position.
G. Switchboards of 2,500A and Lower Rating with Breakers 1,000A or Less: NEMA Class I, drip proof,
front accessible, switchboard construction with flush group mounted devices connected and removed
and maintained from the front, suitable for mounting with back against the wall. Weatherproof on
exterior.
H. Services Switchboards: Pull section for underground service. Main and utility company metering
section. Terminations per utility company standards. Minimum 25,000A symmetrical short circuit
rating but not less than that available.
2.7 UTILITY METERING: Per utility company standards. •
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -15
2.8 . PANELBOARDS
A. General Features:
1. Code gauge galvanized or galvannealed sheet steel cabinets, with corners lapped and welded or
riveted, dead front, dead rear, front accessible.
2. Flush mounted in areas exposed to public view. Surface mounted in electrical, communication,
mechanical and storage rooms.
3. Trim, portions of cabinet exposed to view and surface mounted cabinets to be factory
phosphatized, primed and finished medium gray to match switchboards. In painted walls where
exposed to public view (e.g., corridors, offices), field paint trim to match wall as directed by
Architect.
4. Full height unreduced copper bus, rigidly supported. Solderless, saddle type, copper lugs for
connection per paragraph titled "Connections and Terminations, Line Voltage Conductors". Bus
feeder sequence as for switchboards. Solid neutral bar for grounded systems. Lugs sized for
feeders rated for 75°C wiring. Subbreakers, split bus, main lugs, main breaker, double lugs,
voltage and current ratings,.all as indicated on the drawings.
5. Minimum bus rating of 225A, except where 100A is specifically indicated, but not less than feeder
protective device rating.
6. Main breakers, common trip, single handle, mounted vertically ahead of panel bus. Replacing of
branch devices with main breaker is not acceptable, except for panels in motor control centers.
7. Copper equipment ground bus for termination of feeder and branch circuit grounding conductors.
8. Oversize gutters for feed through, where indicated or required, sized not less than five times the
total cross-sectional area of the through feed cable and connectors in addition to required branch
circuit gutter. Where double lugs are indicated ahead of main breakers, provide oversized can
sufficient for connections.
9. Hinged lockable door covering all devices. Flush catch and cylinder lock. Vault handle on doors
over 4' high. All panels and cabinets keyed alike. Provide two keys per panel and cabinet. Keys
to match existing panelboards where adding to existing facility.
10. Raintight enclosures in damp locations.
11. Certify conformance with the specifications.
B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards Additional Features:
1. Minimum size 20" wide by 5-3/4" deep, unless specifically indicated otherwise.
2. Index cardholder on inside of door with typewritten circuit schedules reflecting as -built circuiting,
behind clear plastic cover on inside of door, metal sided.
3. Automatic circuit breakers, 1" wide nominal, molded case, trip free, quick -make, quick -break,
thermal magnetic type, bolted to the bus, with handles clearly indicating size and tripped position,
of size and arrangement as shown on schedules. Common internal trip for multi -pole breakers.
Permanent factory installed metal circuit numbers on adjacent trim (including spaces), screwed or
riveted to trim. Adhesively applied labels are not acceptable. Where indicated, or where used for
• switching, use UL listed SWD switching duty breakers.
4. Minimum panel interrupting rating of 10,000A below 150V to ground including main and subfeed
breakers. Where panels are subject to higher short circuit current on the basis of series rated
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -16
systems, provide nameplate describing the series rating characteristics, and submit
substantiation. _
5. Circuit breakers with integral ground fault detectors serving circuits on the exterior or in wet
locations, where indicated. Provide 1 or 2 pole units with ground trip setting at 30 mA.
6. Breaker lockout/lock on devices as specified under paragraph titled "Spares".
2.9 TERMINAL CABINETS
A. Construct as described for lighting panels and key alike with panels.
B. 12" wide by 18" high by 4-1/2" deep, minimum dimensions.
C. Vertical barrier between line and low voltage sections, and where required.
D. Fireproofed plywood backing 3/4" thick, for attachment of terminal strips. For fire alarm system, omit
plywood and provide metal channels.
E. Requirements of signal and communication systems suppliers as specified under applicable sections
of the specification, and as required by system supplier.
2.10 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
A. Full voltage, across -the -line, nonreversing, horsepower rated, size No. 1 minimum with three thermal
bimetallic type overload relays, ambient compensated where starters are remote from motors, and
with under voltage release. Overloads sized for actual motor nameplate data per manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide list of motor nameplate data and associated overloads. Coil 120V rated
and fused. 0
B. Arc extinguishing characteristics and silver to silver renewable contacts. Auxiliary contacts as
required by wiring diagrams but not less than two normally open, field convertible. If not field
convertible, provide additional normally closed contact.
C. Wiring points brought out to numbered terminals. Interlocked requirements, remote control, status
indicated, per control sequence and/or wiring diagrams on mechanical and electrical drawings.
D. Mount NEMA Type 13, dust tight and oiltight devices on starter face including manual reset button,
red RUNNING push -to -test, transformer type pilot light, hand -off -automatic switch for automatically
controlled motors and additional devices where indicated or scheduled.
E. Separately mounted combination starters to have magnetic motor starter and switch or circuit breaker
(as indicated) in common enclosure behind door with bypassable door interlock, features as specified
for components.
F. Enclosures to be NEMA type 12 dust tight for separately mounted units, NEMA Type 3R for
weatherproof units.
2.11 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A. Voltage as required, horsepower rated, padlockable, toggle operated, with pole and bimetallic
overload heater for each ungrounded leg, ON, OFF and TRIPPED indication, integral RUNNING pilot
light, flush mounted where practical.
B. Where located in motor control centers or panels, group in control section on dead plate assembly, •
with barriers between voltages.
C. Where used for motor disconnect switch, omit overloads and pilot light.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -17
2.12 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Provide ratings as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Do not utilize breakers
scheduled to be phased out of production. Certify that breakers provided will have replacements
available for a period of ten years.
B. Circuit Breakers, Molded Case:
1. Trip free, quick -make, quick -break, inverse time delay and instantaneous trip elements, handles
clearly indicating rating and ON, OFF, or TRIPPED position, type and rating indicated and
specified. Multi -pole breakers to be common trip with single molded handle. For nonautomatic
units, omit trip.
2. Individually mounted breakers in NEMA Type 12 enclosures generally, and NEMA Type 3R for
weatherproof units. NEMA Type 1 where flush mounting is indicated.
3. Padlocking provisions for breakers individually mounted and in switchboards, motor control
center, and power panelboards.
4. All breakers to be labeled for 75°C wire including enclosure.
5. Interchangeable plugs designed to prevent tampering.
6. Breakers ahead of transformers to meet transformer manufacturer's recommendations regarding
inrush current.
7. For switchboards, (except as scheduled for small motors), provide single handle three pole units,
unless otherwise indicated, UL labeled interrupting rating not less than the rating specified for the
equipment, or the following, whichever is higher.
Breaker
Minimum
Trip Rating Minimum Frame
RMS Symmetrical
15A to 60A 100A Molded Case
25,000A @ 240V
25,000A @ 480V
70A to 200A 250A Molded Case
25,000A @ 240V
with Adjustable
25,000A @ 480V
Magnetic Trip
225A to 500A 600A Electronic or
42,000A @ 240V
- Adjustable Trip Molded
30,000A @ 480V
- Case
C. Electronic Trip Breakers:
1. Microprocessor based, 9 function, true RMS sensing design with sensing accuracy through the
.thirteenth harmonic.
2. Continuous rating determined by interchangeable (field replaceable) rating plug, sensor, and
long-time pick-up switch. Anti -tampering rating plug seal.
3. Visual trip indication for ground fault.
® 4. Externally accessible test port.
5. Adjustable long time pick-up.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -18
6. Adjustable short time delay simultaneously adjusting magnetic pick-up and time delay or
adjustable short time pick-up with 12 ramp. 9
7. Ground fault (where indicated or specified) with adjustable pick-up and delay and switchable I` T
ramp.
8. Test probe receptacles to permit testing without exposing live parts. Provide one portable test kit
in container suitable for storage, and obtain receipt. Submit shop drawing.
D. Settings: Coordinate settings of main circuit breakers with serving utility company equipment in
accordance with the coordination study.
E. Current Limiting Breakers:
1. Provide current limiting breakers where indicated or required by indicated fault current.
2. In ratings as available, provide current limiting breakers meeting the specifications without the aid
of fuses.
2.13 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Heavy duty (HD) horsepower rated, quick -make, quick -break, safety type, externally operated, rating
and number of poles required, capable of switching 10 times switch rating. Fused for branch circuit
protection, and in elevator machine rooms, with UL rejection type clips. Nonfused for motor
disconnect where indicated. Switch and enclosure to be labeled for 750 wire for fuse ratings 125A
and larger.
B. Include bypassable interlock, padlock provisions, positive ON and OFF indications, molded case
breaker mechanism or visible blades, single switch mechanism to preclude mechanical single
phasing, solid neutral bar for four wire feeders, copper terminals, spring loaded clips with noncurrent
carrying springs. Provide wiring terminals as specified under paragraph titled "Connectors and
Terminations, Low voltage Conductors".
C. Enclosures to be NEMA Type 1 in interior dry locations, NEMA Type 3R on exterior and in wet
locations.
D. Use manual motor starting switches for manual control and/or disconnecting of 120V fractional
motors and for disconnecting of 3 phase motors up to 5HP at 230V and 10HP at 480V. Flush
mounted in finished areas. NEMA 1 enclosure on interior, NEMA 3R on exterior.
E. For flush mounted disconnects, provide manual motor starting switches, or where indicated,
nonautomatic circuit breakers with flanged trim.
2.14 FUSES, LOW VOLTAGE
A. NEC dimension, rejection type.
B. 600A and Smaller: Class RK1, low peak dual element with separate overload and short circuit
elements.
C. Provide label inside each switch cover indicating specific type of fuse required for replacement.
D. Provide spare fuses per Paragraph titled "Spares".
2.15 TRANSFORMERS, DRY TYPE
A. UL listed, dry type, ratings as indicated, built per IEEE, ANSI, and NEMA Standards, utilizing Group
III insulation, rated at 220°C (180°C for encapsulated type). Normal life expectancy and winding
temperature rise not exceeding 150°C in a maximum ambient of 40°C, and an average ambient of
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -19
30°C, with continuous rated nameplate load connected to the secondary side, at rated voltage. ANSI
• 61 factory finish.
B. Minimum impedance of 4.25% for ratings over 100 KVA, indicated on nameplate.
C. Delta primary and wye secondary connections for three phase units.
D. Vibration dampness between core and case. Exterior lifting holes.
E.• Two 2% percent taps each, minimum, above and below normal for ratings above 5 KVA.
F. Terminals below, bottom and side conductor entrance. Temperature rise in terminal compartment
suitable for 60°C or higher insulated conductors. Case temperature rise 35°C maximum at rated
load.
G. Rodent proof bottom enclosures. Ventilating openings arranged to prevent contact with live parts.
Weather shield on all ventilated units, for drip protection. .
H. Use wall mounted epoxy encapsulated units, sealed against moisture, dust, and fumes, for 15 KVA
and smaller units, and where indicated.
I. Braced per latest ANSI "Short Circuit Characteristics" specifications.
J. BIL Ratings: 600V class and below - 10KV.
K. Sound level to be 3 db below NEMA standards.
L. Provide anti -turn solderless, copper saddle type incoming and outgoing feeder terminals per
paragraph titled "Connections and Terminations, Line Voltage Conductors".
M. Control Transformers:
1. Machine tool type designed for high inrush.
2. Temperature rise below 55C at continuous rated full load.
3. Terminal board construction:
4. Secondary fuse blocks.
5. Rating not less than indicated or specified but adequate for inrush currents of connected control
devices.
2.16 WIRING
A. General:
1. Specification grade.
2. General Use: Ivory color (as available) unless otherwise noted or specified.
3. Emergency Standby: Red color (refer to Paragraph titled "Identification and Warning Signs").
4. Screw type terminals on all devices, suitable for up to No. 10 solid copper conductors.
• 5. Where not specified herein, provide configuration as indicated on drawings. I
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -20
B. Toggle Switches:
1. Flush tumbler, AC type, insulated base, completely enclosed. •
2. 20A, tungsten load rated, at 277V.
3. 1 pole, 2 pole, 3 -way, 4 -way or key operated as indicated on drawings. Symbols: S, S2 S3. S3.,
S4, Sk. 2 pole unit usable for (2) 120V circuits or (1) 208V Circuit.
4. Thermal overload switch, rated 1 HP at 120V. Refer to paragraph titled "Manual Motor Starters".
Symbol: Sm.
5. Momentary type, three position, single pole, double throw, two circuit, spring return to center OFF
position. Symbol: SR-
C. Pilot Lights (Lighting Control): Flush neon type with lucite jewel suitable for use in switch plate
opening, ganged on plate with associated switch, 120V or 277V as required, red jewel on emergency
systems, green jewel on normal systems, lighted in the ON position unless otherwise noted. Symbol:
SP.
D. Receptacles:
1. General: Number of poles and ampere rating as shown on drawings and of NEMA standard
configurations. Ground pole connected to circuit grounding conductor.
2. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 15A, 125V; grounding third pole; side wired for 2 wire circuit
use. Where 2 circuits are indicated, provide individual circuit for each half. NEMA 5-15R.
Provide 20 ampere, NEMA 5-20R for outlets where dedicated circuit is used.
3. Clock Receptacles for Surface Clocks (Non Central Systems): Flush type with recessed
grounding receptacle and clock support hanger with removable stainless steel plate, NEMA 5-
15R. For recessed clocks, install back box furnished by clock supplier.
4. Duplex Receptacles in Floor Boxes: Standard device behind special plate described under floor
boxes. NEMA 5-15R.
5. Ground Fault Interrupting (GFI) Receptacles: NEMA 5-15R duplex receptacle with integral
ground fault protection and lift cover.
6. Isolated Ground (IG) Receptacles: NEMA 5-20R duplex isolated ground receptacle with surge
suppression line to ground, line to neutral and neutral to ground, light and alarm.
7. Weatherproof Receptacles, Flush Mounting: NEMA 5-15R duplex GFI outlet in single gang
extension with gasketed cast aluminum lift cover.
8. Weatherproof Receptacles, Freestanding: NEMA 5-15R duplex GFI outlet mounted in cast box,
stub mounted, with gasketed cast aluminum lift cover. Provide plugged hubs in box sides for
extension.
9. Special Receptacles: Letter designation appears adjacent to special receptacle symbol. Simplex
unless otherwise noted. Refer to schedule on drawings.
E. Motor Control (For Magnetic Starters and Individual Mounting):
1. Push Buttons, Selector Switches. Oiltight for starter and contactor control, 10A tungsten lamp
rated, miniature type.
2. Pilot Lights: Oiltight, push -to -test, miniature, transformer type.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -21
F. Wall Plates:
1. Device plates of one make and design for all outlets, molded nylon.
2. Galvanized pressed steel plates, to conform with box and device. .
3. For Exterior Locations: Cast aluminum lift cover unless otherwise indicated.
4. Voice/data system plates by system supplier unless otherwise noted.
5. Engrave plates as described under other paragraphs.
G. Telephone and Signal Systems:
1. Telephone/Data Outlet: Two modular jack openings with blank fillers as required.
2.17 LOW VOLTAGE SIGNALS (WHERE NOT OTHERWISE NOTED)
A. Control Transformer: 40 VA minimum, at 16V and 24V, integral self -restoring circuit breaker, 120V
primary, install in flush mounted outlet box unless otherwise noted.
B. Push Button: Quick -make and break, momentary, flush outlet box mounting, with integral plate.
C. Foot Operated Alarm: Foot rail with SPDT switch, key operated reset switch, alarm indicator, toe
operated. Cord connects to junction box. Locate as directed.
218 LIGHTING FIXTURES,.GENERAL
A. Provide complete lighting system, wired, assembled and operable, including lighting equipment and
accessories as shown on the drawings, described in the fixture schedules, specified herein and
covered by allowance. Accessories include canopies, suspension of proper lengths, hickeys,
castings, sockets, holders, reflectors, ballasts, diffusing material, louvers, plaster and mounting
frames, lamps, recessing boxes, supporting brackets and channels, where required to span structural
members.
B. Fixtures to be factory prewired and preassembled. Catalog numbers are given for manufacturers'
identification. Conform to written descriptive requirements governing material and fabrication, either
in the general or specific sections. Where catalog numbers are indicated as modified, no modification
will be required if the standard unit fully conforms to all descriptive requirements in the specifications
and conforms with specified ceiling construction. Fixtures to be UL labeled for location and operating
conditions indicated.
C. Fixtures of the same type to be of one manufacturer and of identical finish and appearance. Where
not identified on drawings, provide same type as indicated in similar locations.
D. For recessed fixtures, provide frame and trim compatible with ceiling type and construction. Refer to
ceiling specifications and architectural drawings to determine types. For fixtures recessed in
concrete, provide galvanized steel housing with bitumastic finish approved for the purpose.
E. Provide adequate lamp shielding, proper ventilation and heat dissipation.
F. Secure diffusers to trim by devices not requiring tools for removal, or for relamping. Provide safety
chain attachment to fixture housing for portions of fixtures which are removed for servicing relamping.
• G.. Provide• shop drawings for custom and modified standard .fixtures, and, catalog cuts illustrating
conformance with specifications for standard fixtures. Drawings to indicate materials, assembly, and
finish. Coordinate fixture type with ceiling supplier and submit fixture compatible with ceiling system.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -22
H. Before ordering the specified lighting fixtures (for quantities of 30 or more), make available to the
Owner's representative, on request, samples for his final approval. These samples may be on display
at local distributor or manufacturer's showroom. The Owner reserves the right to change the fixture •
selection at no additional cost to himself except for actual fixture cost difference. Provide credit if
fixture cost is less.
I. General Constructions:
1. Sheet Metal: Free of tool marks and dents. Painted after punching and forming to eliminate
exposed unpainted edges. Intersections and joints formed true, sufficiently rigid to prevent
distortion after assembly.
2. Castings: Free of blemishes, scale and rust, and finished smooth.
3. Aluminum Surfaces, Nonreflecting: Anodized clear or with color as indicated. Castings to be
irradiated, sandblasted or anodized.
4. Aluminum Reflectors: Treat with alzak process to provide permanent reflective surface of 85%
minimum. Extruded reflectors to be unscored, bright dipped and clear anodized.
J. Lighting Fixture Description: Refer to schedule on drawings or in specifications and to General
Requirements in other paragraphs herein for full fixture description.
K. Provide only UL listed lighting fixtures. This applies to custom fixtures, as well as manufacturers'
standard fixtures that are modified.
L. All exterior lighting fixtures to be UL listed for damp or wet locations, whichever applies. Damp
locations are defined as exterior protected locations. Wet locations, completely exposed to the
weather. 10,
2.19 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE BALLASTS
A. General:
1. Provide ballast of proper type and voltage for each lighting fixture as scheduled on the drawings
or in other paragraphs of the specifications, and meeting requirements herein.
2. Provide electronic ballasts throughout.
3. Codes and Standards (Minimum):
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
b. California Electrical Code.
c. California Energy Commission (CEC).
d. Certified Ballast manufacturers (CBM).
e. Electrical testing Laboratories (ETL).
f. Energy Policy and Conservation Act (EPCA), National Energy Conservation Amendments
(NAECA).
g. Federal Communications Commission (FCC-) regulations Part18 and National Electrical
manufacturers Association (NEMA) limits for Electromagnetic Interference (EMI and Radio •
Frequency Interference (RFI).
h. Underwriters laboratories, Inc. (UL) labeling and/or listing.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -23
4. Sound .rating of "A".
5. UL Class P rated, without any components containing PCB.
6. Rated 50°F minimum for fixtures on interior. Rate 0°F minimum for fixtures on exterior, in parking
garages and in refrigerated spaces.
7. HPF throughout including for compact lamps.
8. Equip each fixture with (1) or (2) electronic ballasts as required. For continuous row single lamp
fixtures, use common ballast for adjacent fixtures as practical. Three and four lamp ballasts are
not acceptable unless specifically indicated.
9. Where indicated or specified, provide radio frequency suppressor for each fixture. Where ballasts
in fixture are supplied from separate conductors, provide separate suppressor for each ballast.
10. Ballast to provide normal rated life for specified lamp.
11. Start lamps in Rapid Start mode.
B. Electronic Ballasts, Additional Requirements:
1. Physically interchangeable with electromagnetic ballasts in new or existing fixtures.
2. Operate lamps at frequencies between 25 and 40 KHz from 60 Hz input source with less than
10% flicker, at ambient temperature of 50°F to 105°F with 60°C maximum case temperature
during operation.
3. Maximum light regulation ± 5% with ± 10% input voltage variation.
4. Suitable for operation of F1 7T8, F25T8 and F32T8, one two or three lamps, types as indicated or
specified, design for optimum operation of the specified lamps.
5. Solid-state consisting of rectifier, high frequency inverter, power control and regulation circuitry, in
steel case, marked with manufacturer's name, part number, supply voltage, sound rating, power
factor, open circuit voltage, RMS current draw, input watts, starting current, crest factor, efficiency
and UL listing.
6. Ballast life to be unaffected by lamp failure.
7. .Minimum ballast factor of 95%.
8. Maximum current crest factor of 1.7.
9. Maximum total harmonic distortion of 15%, maximum third harmonic distortion of 10%.
10. Minimum power factor of 90%.
11. Withstand line transients per IEEE 587, Category A.
12. Rated life of 30,000 hours based on 10 hours per day.
13. Submit evidence with shop drawings from ballast supplier of three projects of significant
magnitude, employing the proposed ballasts, in satisfactory operation for a minimum of one year.
Identify projects; operating personnel familiar with the ballast performance, and frequency of
ballast failure.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -24
2.20 EMERGENCY POWER BATTERY PACK
A. Provide where called for in the lighting fixture descriptions. 0
B. Consisting of a high temperature nickel cadmium battery, battery, battery charger, all solid state
circuitry, in one enclosure.
C. Include charging indicator light and test switch.
D. Capable of operating with one or two lamp electronic ballasts to illuminate one T8 lamp for a
minimum of 90 minutes, producing 900 to 1100 lumens of initial emergency lighting.
E. UL listed.
F. Five year warranty.
2.21 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE
A. Temperature Rating:
1. Design fixtures to limit ballast case temperature installed in fixtures to applicable UL Standards.
2. Conform with Guarantee Requirements.
B. Fixture Construction:
1. Lampholders: Bipin type. Permitting full entry of lamp pins in a vertical plane, after which entry, a
900 rotation shall properly seat the lamp. Corrosion -resistant "edge -wipe" type lamp pin contacts.
2. Lampholders, Electronic Ballasts: Suitable for frequencies employed, meeting recommendation
of the ballast manufacturer.
3. Lampholder Fastening: Securely fastened to brackets or socket straps in manner to eliminate
flexing under normal lamp pressure. Replaceable without removing fixture from the installation.
Backed by fixture housing or end plate to prevent twisting.
4. Ballast: Fasten directly to metal fixture housing at three points, using captive bolts or screws, or
equivalent method.
Housings and Bodies Recessed Troffers: Fabricated of die -formed, cold -rolled steel not less than
20 U.S. gauge welded into a one-piece assembly using lap seam construction. Breaks, bends,
edges, holes and knockouts accomplished by die -forming and machine operation. Alternately,
fabricated of extruded aluminum sections or die -formed from aluminum sheet of not less than No.
16 B and S gauge aluminum, with sections positively interlocked to provide a rigid unit. A
complete die -formed housing of 22U. S. gauge steel will be acceptable providing the unit is
ribbed, embossed or paneled with a minimum of four cross ribs so as to be equivalent in strength
to the above specified.
a. Provide wiring and ballast compartment accessible when the fixture is in the installed
position. Wiring secured by clips or clamps to the body of the fixture, with the cover removed.
b. For troffers in suspended ceilings, in addition to seismic suspension, provide four clips
attached to fixtures to positively tie fixture to T -bar or ceiling channel suspension. In plaster
and dry wall ceilings, provide all necessary framing, support and hardware.
6. Finish: Finish visible fixture trim in color designated on drawings, or baked white enamel where •
not otherwise noted. Rustproof metal parts. Provide enamel where not otherwise noted.
Rustproof metal parts. Provide enamel finish, baked -on at a minimum temperature of 300°F.
Enamel reflective surface to have 87 percent reflectivity, minimum.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
- ELECTRICAL -25
7. Diffusers and Lenses: Provide types indicated on fixture schedules and as specified herein.
• 8. Lenses: Flat lens designed to direct light down and present low surface brightness within normal
viewing angles; high molecular weight virgin acrylic plastic; smooth on one side, uniform pattern
of male cones or hexagonal prisms on the other, 3/16" outside dimensions. Special types where
noted on fixture schedule.
9. Doors: For troffers, unless otherwise specified, provide separable, hinged door constructed of
extruded aluminum, with mitered corners, secured in place by inconspicuous spring loaded,
visible, finger operated catches, removable without tools, but hinged to preclude accidental
dislodgment in the open position. Incorporate light trap between door and fixture. Retain lens
firmly in door with clips or equivalent, but allowing for lens replacement without special tools.
10. Fixture Wiring: Wire with 600V, 105°C rated, thermoplastic insulation. Interconnect between
sockets and ballasts, and provide 12" minimum length pigtails. Provide two wire pigtail for single
circuit connection, four wire for two circuit connection where two neutrals are shown on drawings.
Where fixture is served from two sources, barrier wiring from emergency source as required and
provide notation inside fixture indicating "supplied from two sources".
11. Recessed Fixture Connection: Connect to fixture outlet, with 6' length maximum of flexible
conduit with conductors insulated for rated fixture operating temperature.
12. Recessed Downlights: Provide mounting frame with high power factor ballast and an attached
prewired junction box, rated for through wiring with 60°C conductors, designed for installation
without installing trim, diffusers or lens. Verify suitability of attached junction boxes for number of
conductors indicated on drawings, provide additional boxes where attached junction box capacity
is exceeded.
C. For fluorescent fixture specified to be chain hung, provide machine type steel chain, closed welded
links, hot -dipped galvanized finish, 750 Ib. rated tensile strength, weighing approximately 13 lbs/100
feet, capable of supporting fixture weights of 30 to 60 lbs.
2.22 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES
A. Provide porcelain, screw type mogul sockets with nickel plated brass shells, silicone prelubricated, UL
listed at 600V, 1500 watts, securely fastened to fixture body to prevent twisting or rocking of socket
when lamping or relamping. For pendant units, provide balanced construction for use on swivel
hanger. .
B. For interior use, where not otherwise specified, provide integral constant wattage, "B" sound rated,
fluorescent style ballasts, meeting requirements for fluorescent fixture ballasts, and including
automatic resetting thermal protector and fuse. Use encased and potted type where fluorescent style
is not available.
C. For exterior use, where not otherwise specified, provide integral constant wattage, weatherproof,
minus 20°F rated, high power factor ballasts complete with automotive type fuses in plastic fuse
holders, wired into primary circuit. Where specified, provide integral luminaire construction, utilizing
core and coil units, to provide same performance.
D. Where fixtures are indicated to be connected to emergency circuits, provide a standby quartz iodine
lamp for.temporary illumination until HID lamp restrikes.
E. Conform with ballast guarantee requirements.
• F. Provide ballast compatible with specified lamps and so certify.
G. High Pressure Sodium Vapor Additional Requirements:
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -26
1. Ballast to operate with lamp in open or short circuit condition for six months without significant
loss of ballast life.
2. 2% maximum wattage variation from lamp watts at rated voltage.
3. 2% maximum wattage variation at ± 10% voltage variance.
4. Power factor 85% minimum at ± 10% voltage variation through life.
5. Ballast, including starting aid, to protect itself against normal lamp failure modes.
6. For 50 to 100 watt lamps, use HX-HPF ballasts.
2.23 EXTERIOR, FLOODLIGHTING AND DECORATIVE STANDARDS ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Complete installation including poles, anchor bolts, luminaries, lamps, ballasts, wiring as detailed
and/or specified, mounted on reinforced concrete bases.
B. UL wet location label on fixtures on exterior or in wet locations.
C. Exterior pendant or pole mounted fixtures to withstand minimum lateral load of thirty pounds per
square foot of exposed surface. Certify conformance on shop drawings.
D. Poles for exterior fixtures to be round tapered steel (unless otherwise detailed or specified), 11 gauge
minimum, height as indicated, with welded steel baseplate, four galvanized anchor bolts, eight nuts
and washers and hand hole with cover. Poles to be galvanized and field painted to match fixture.
Painting to conform with PAINTING section of specification.
E. Stainless steel or nonferrous hardware throughout on exterior fixtures.
F. Grounding lugs on pole mounted fixtures.
G. Acrylic diffusers on exterior of high heat resistance type. When used with H.I.D. lamps include an
ultraviolet absorber to limit yellowing index change to plus 0.5 after 4000 hours exposure to 400 watt
lamp.
H. For poles exceeding 25 feet in height, provide structural calculations to enforcing authority and obtain
approval.
2.24 LAMPS
A. General: Unless specified otherwise herein, furnish and install lamps for each fixture of type and
wattage indicated on drawings or other section of the specification, compatible with specified ballast.
For fixtures on exterior or in cold locations, use lamps suitable for 0°F start. Refer to paragraph titled
"Spares". Lamps to be as follows where not otherwise specified.
B. Fluorescent Lamps (minimum Values):
1. General: Rapid start, suitable for operation with electronic ballasts LION, 3500K, RE 835.
2. T8 Lamps: 20,000 hour life; CRI 84; 17 watts, 1,375 lumens for 24" lamps; 25 watts, 2,200
lumens for 36" lamps; 32 watts, 2,950 lumens for 48" lamps.
0
3. Compact Lamps: Four pin (UON): CRI 82; 10,000 hour life; 9 watts, 600 lumens; 13 watts, 900
lumens; 18 watts, 1,200 lumens; 26 watts, 1,800 lumens; 32 watts, 2,400 Lumens; 42 watts, •
3,200 lumens lengths per fixture requirements.
BANK OF AMERICA .16000
ELECTRICAL -27
C. Metal Halide: Phosphor coated, unless otherwise noted, universal burning type, used with compatible
ballasts in enclosed fixtures. Breaking of outer glass to disconnect supply- to arc tube. CRI 70
minimum.
•
Initial Life
Watt
Base
Lumens Hours
Comment
100:
E 17
7,900 10,000
Enclosed Fixture
175 _
BT 28
14,000 10,000
Enclosed Fixture
250
BT 28
20,500 10,000
Enclosed Fixture
400
BT 37
32,300 15,000
Safety
D. High Pressure Sodium:
Diffuse coated, CRI 22 unless otherwise noted,
universal burning type, used
with compatible ballasts.
Watt
Base
Initial Lumens
Life -Hours
50
BT 25
3,800
24,000
70
BT 25
5,860
24,000
100
BT 25
8,800
24,000
150.
ED 25
15,000
24,000
250
BT 28
26,000
24,000
400
BT 37
47,500
24,000
2.25 OCCUPANCY. SENSORS
•
J
A. Provide California Energy Commission approved, UL listed, passive infrared occupancy sensors in
individual rooms, at locations, at locations indicated on drawings.
B. Passive infrared Wall Sensor:
1. Automatic on-off control of lighting loads in rooms as indicated. Rated for both incandescent and
fluorescent lighting. Up to 600 VA at 120V and up to 1200 VA at 277V with zero minimum.
Capable of switching electronic fluorescent ballasts.
2. Horizontal field of view; minimum 170° x 15 feet for hand motion.
3. Two position switch; automatic mode, and override of the automatic mode to turn lighting off even
if room is occupied.
4. Delayed automatic "off' (time-out) adjustable from minimum of 1 minute to a maximum of 20
minutes. Movement in the room during the time-out period to reset the time delay.
5. An ambient light override that may be set so that when sufficient ambient light (daylight) is
present, the lighting will not turn on. Adjustable from full daylight to less than 40 foot-candles.
6. Ivory (unless otherwise noted) injection molded thermoplastic device body for mounting on a
single gang plaster ring, with stainless steel GFI style (rectangular opening) plate.
7. Two year manufacturer's warranty.
C. Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensor:
1. Automatic on-off control of lighting loads in rooms as indicated. Unit complete with low voltage
• power, supply, relay for switching multiple circuits with local manual --switches single or multiple
sensors in opposite directions as indicated on drawings.
2. Each sensor to have a field of range minimum of 25' x 25' for hand motion. Multiple sensors to
double the range. Transmitter and receivers angled 30° down form horizontal.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -28
3. Sensor to have on -auto switch, adjustable time delay between 1-20 minutes, adjustable
sensitivity and normally closed relay to leave lights on sensors failure. •
4. Housing made of rugged high impact injected molded plastic colored white.
5. Two year manufacturer's warranty.
2.26 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHING/LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. General:
Provide a complete and operable programmable system for low voltage remote control including
self contained microcomputer controller with built-in keyboard, display LCD, data link, power
supply, output modules and relays adjacent to lighting panels, data lines between photocells,
switches and other transceiver or remote relay panels, extension of branch circuits to relays,
control source in each panel and to control relays in each cabinet and to lighting panel circuit
breakers. It shall be fully programmable on relay by a relay basis.
2. The system shall include but not limited to:
a. Low voltage momentary or maintained contact master or local override switches.
b. Local mounted key -pads.
c. Low voltage 20 Amp latching relays.
d. Control transformers.
e. Control programmable stand-alone panel processor.
f. Remote relay cabinets.
B. SUBMITTALS
1. Submit manufacture's data on lighting control system and components.
2. Drawings shall include but not be limited to riser diagram, individual panel drawings with load
assignments, panel address, relay counts, switch input information, and data line connections.
Internal lighting control programs include detailed software interlock schedules for switching
devices and telephone override control, and initial automatic lighting control schedule program
shall be submitted for review.
C. Lighting Relay Panel (LRP)
1. The LRP shall be a wall mounted, self contained microprocessor based intelligent control panel,
housing computers, power supplies, relays and all other related equipment in an NEMA 1
enclosure.
2. The power supply to the LRP shall be 277 or 120 volts, single phase, with step down to 24 volts
for the LRP.
3. Barriers of dead front covers shall be provided to segregate normal and emergency lighting circuit
low voltage wiring.
•
4. All LRP components shall be readily replaceable with "off the shelf' replacements without shut- •
down of the complete system.
5. All LRP's shall have included the ability, both hardware and software, to up -grade the panels to a
complete integrated lighting system controlled through a central processor that will program,
BANK OF AMERICA + 16000
ELECTRICAL -29
modify, report relay status or errors, without any modifications to the existing LRPs'. The only
materials that would be added are the remote interface computer with software and the data line
• between the processor and the LRPs. LRP's that cannot be up -graded with out adding or
replacing. hardware in the panels will not be accepted.
6. All LRPs shall be supplied with a minimum of 32 programmable switch inputs, Each input shall
support both momentary and maintained switch inputs mixed or matched in the same panel.
Each switch input can operate one of all of the relays or any programmable group of relays.
7. A sixteen (16) character keypad and a thirty-two (32) character liquid crystal display (LCD) shall
be provided on each LRP for local control, status check, and programming. It shall be possible to
program all parameters as specified for the system through this local keypad and display. The
programming and status functions available are to be as follows:
ASTRO time clock
Day schedules
Exception (holiday) schedules
Relay assignment
Override switch assignment
Relay commands
Set time and dates
Display time and date
Errors during programming shall be annunciated by an audible tone.
8. All LRP's shall be able to transmit all local programming, status, and control data to a central
controller via data line communication without modifying the panels. If the central processor up-
grade is selected by the owner at some future date only the data line, central computer, and
software need be added. I .
9. LRP enclosure shall be suitable for surface installation, with hinged door and lock.
10. Provide seventy-two (72) hour battery back-up for all vital memory functions.
11. Contractor is responsible to provide a complete working lighting control system including all
conduits, wire, switches, LRP panels, relays, and programming.
D. Remote Control Switches
1.. Remote control switches, single pole, two circuits, momentary contact for normal services. A 25
volt (mounted on the rocker arm) red L.E.D. for "on" condition.
2. System shall be capable of using any low voltage momentary or maintained dry contact switch.
Switches can be mixed or matched between maintained and momentary in each panel.
3. Switches shall wired with 3 conductor #18 awg for each switch with a pilot light.
E. Manual Controls
1. Manual controls shall be on such basis that any switch shall be capable of controlling any relay or
group of relays in any configuration without restriction. Provide a manual override keypad on
each panel for programming, relay status, and scheduling.
F. Low voltage relays
• 1. Relays shall be plug-in type and shall be activated electronically by momentary pulse.
2. Relays to be rated for 20 Amp Tungsten filament, ballast, or resistive loads.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -30
3. Relays shall be electrically operated and mechanically held latching single pole. Electrically held
relays will not be accepted. •
G. Telephone Override
1. Telephone override system shall provide user access to the lighting via the building telephone
system. Each tenant telephone shall act as a switch to control the local lighting by using a simple
four digit code to activate lighting during after hour operations.
H. Day Light Controls
1. Provide photo diode programmable sensors as indicated on the project drawings.
2. Sensors are mounted on the roof exterior areas as near as possible to the associated LRP via 4
conductor shielded cable.
3. Controller is mounted next to the associated LRP. Controller shall display the actual foot candle
as indicated by the sensor. Calibration and setpoints for on/off controls based on foot candle
levels shall be adjusted on the controller.
4. Controller shall have adjustable HID timers, cloud cover on -delay and off delay timers, H -O -A
controls, pilot light indication, and full digital readouts.
5. Controller shall require 120/277 -volt AC power form the associated LRP. Controllers shall be a
complete U.L. Listed assembly.
I. Programming
1. Contractor is responsible to provide a factory trained and authorized field engineer to assist in the
basic programming of the lighting controls. Base programming to include switch to relay
assignment for overrides, schedules for M -F, week -end and holiday schedules.
2. Contractor to provide a second programming field trip to coordinate with the building owner/tenant
all final programming adjustments that may be required.
2.27 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTUREERS, MATERIAL
A. Insulated Bushing: O.Z. Gedney types A, B and copper lug BLG, equivalent by Midwest Electric.
B. EMT Fittings - Steel Raintight: Appleton TW Series, Crouse -Hinds MW Series, Steel City TC710
Series, Thomas and Betts 5120 Series, Tomic 20 Series.
C. Liquidtight Flex: type U.A. with built-in bond wire, American Flex Conduit, Anaconda, O.Z. Gedney.
D. Gutters and Wireways: Circle AW, Hoffman Engineering Company, Square D.
E. Nonmetallic Conduit, Polyvinyl Chloride, Schedule 40, 900C Rated: Can -Tex Industries, Carlon,
Certain Teed, Kraloy Plastics.
F. Hubs: Myers, Appleton.
G. Conduit Seals: Crouse -Hinds Type EYS, equivalent by Appleton.
H. Expansion Joints: O.Z. Gedney Type "DX" or combination of fittings, equivalent by Appleton. See
conduit installation specifications. •
I. Wall Entrance Seals: Thunderline Link -Seal, O.Z. Gedney Type WSK.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -31
J. Caulking -Compound: Tremco - "Acoustic Sealant', Manville - "Duxseal", Interchemical - "Pressite
• 579.64", Chase Foam.
K. Penetrations, Fire Rated Wall orPartitions. UL rated assembly.
L. Flashing: Stoneman 1100 Series, equivalent by Archer.
M. Conduit Wrapping: Polyvinyl tape - 20 mil '/2 lap by Manville, Minnesota Mining "Scotch" or 40 mil
PVC coating by Occidental Coating Company, Robroy.
N. Steel Outlet Boxes: 4" square by 1'/2' deep minimum, Appleton, Bowers, Raco, Steel City.
O. Acoustical Outlet Box Pads: Harry A. Lowry Associates, Nelson Electric FSP.
P. Prefabricated Outlet Box Assemblies: G.B. Electric, Caddy.
Q. Cast Boxes and Conduit: Appleton, Crouse -Hinds, Pyle/National, O.Z. Gedney.
R. Floor Boxes: Hubbell "Dual Level" fully adjustable Type 1, round cover. Rectangular for ganged
boxes. For flush duplex outlets .S-3925 cover. Steel City 600 Series, Walker 880 Series. Afterset:
Hubbell PT7 Series. Equal by Steel City, Walker.
S. Cast Iron Floor Junction Boxes: Appleton, Thomas and Betts, O.Z. Gedney.
T. Precast Concrete Pull Boxes, Transformer Pads:
1. Enclosure: Associated Concrete products, Brooks Products.
® 2. Waterproofing: Sonneborn Hydrocide. Equivalent by Dow Corning.
3. Hardware: Inwesco 10A Series Racks and Hooks, 11A31 Insulators, Equivalent by A.B. Chance.
U. Hand Hole: Brooks Products No. 3 -RT, equivalent by Associated Concrete Products. .
V. 600V Conductor Installation Accessories:
1. Steel Spring Connectors (No. 8 and Smaller): Scotchlok Types R and Y, Ideal Wirenut.
2. Solderless Connectors (No. 6 and Larger) Copper or Bronze Bolted Saddle Type: Burndy -
"Versitaps", Thomas and Betts "Locktite", O.Z. Gedney solderless, Teledyne Penn -Union Vi-tite.
3. Power Distribution Blocks: Square D Series 9080, equivalent by Marathon Special Products.
4. Compression Connectors (Motor Connections No. 8 and Smaller): T&B Stakon, Burndy
equivalent.
5. Tape: Scotch #23 rubber tape and #88 vinyl tape. Sola Basic, Sierra-Tomic.
6. Sealant: Scotchkote. No known equal.
7. Pulling Compound: Powdered Soapstone, Ideal Yellow 77, Wirelube, Minerallac #100, Sierra-
Tomic.
8. Cable Supports: O.Z. Gedney split wedge, Kellems cable clamps.
• W. Ground Connectors:
1. Conductor Joint: Exothermic - Cadweld, Thermoweld. Compression - Burndy Hyground.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -32
X. Vibration Isolators:
Type Description
PN Neoprene Pad
HMN Neoprene Mount
HN Neoprene Hanger
* Preapproved for California
Manufacturer: California Dynamic
Corporation, equal by Mason Ind.,
Amber/Booth, Sause (Vibrex)
VT
RQ'
RH'
Y. Seismic Bracing Systems: B-line, NUSIG or California approved equivalent.
Z. Afterset Anchors: Hilti Kwikbolt, Phillips 'Redhead" wedge type.
2.28 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS EQUIPMENT (Subject to conformance with specification).
A. Switchboards:
1. 2500A and Smaller: General Electric Type AV2 line.
2. Equivalent by Siemens, Square D, Cutler -Hammer.
B. Terminal Cabinets: General Electric, Siemens, Square D, Cutler Hammer.
C. 480/277V and 208/120V Lighting and Outlet Panelboards: General Electric Type AE and AQ with
TEY, TED4, TFJ and THQB, TQD branch breakers. Equivalent: Square D, Cutler Hammer.
D. Motor Starters: Allen Bradley, General Electric, Siemens, Square D, CH.
E. Circuit Breakers: Molded case.
1. For Lighting Panelboards: Same as panel manufacturer.
2. For Switchboards: General Electric, Siemens, Square D, Cutler Hammer.
F. Disconnect Switches (Heavy Duty, Quick -Make, Quick -Break):
1. 800A and Smaller: General Electric, Siemens, Square D, Cutler Hammer. Rejection type for
fused units.
2. Motor Switches: For 120V, 230V up to 5 HP, 460V up to 10HP. Square D Class 2510.
Equivalent by General Electric, Cutler Hammer.
G. Fuses:
1. 600A and Smaller: Low peak, dual element Class RK1, Buss LPN -RK (250V) LPS-RK (600V).
Equivalent by Gould Shawmut, Littlefuse.
H. Transformers (Dry Type):
1. Acme, General Electric, Square D, Cutler Hammer.
I. Wiring Devices:
1. Maintained Switches: Hubbell 1221-1 Series, equivalent by Arrow Hart, Bryant, Pass/Seymour.
2. Momentary Switches: Hubbell 1557-I; Arrow hart 1995 Series.
•
•
•
•
40,
0
Ti
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
` ELECTRICAL -33
3. Pilot Lights (Ganged with Switch): Neon type, Arrow Hart #1720, voltage and color as specified,
equivalent by Pass/Seymour.
4. Duplex Outlets: Hubbell 5252-I, equivalent by Arrow Hart, Bryant, Leviton, Pass/Seymour.
5. Clock Receptacle with Stainless Steel Plate: Arrow Hart 452, General Electric 4224- 5, Hubbell
5235.
6. Floor Box Mounted Outlets: Hubbell, Lew, Walker.
7. Special Receptacles: NEMA configurations as specified and or shown on drawings, Arrow hart,
Hubbell.
8. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles: Hubbell GF 5262-I, with WP26 lift cover. Equivalent by
Arrow Hart.
9. Weatherproof Receptacle, Flush Mounting: Hubbell GF 5262-1 with WP26 Lift Cover. Equivalent
by Arrow Hart.
10. Weatherproof Receptacle, Freestanding: Hubbell GF 5262-1 with WPF526 Lift Cover (FS box
mounting). Equivalent by Arrow Hart.
11. Isolated Ground, Transient Suppressor Receptacle: Engrave plate "Isolated Ground", Hubbell IG
5362 -IS.
12. Plates - Nylon: Arrow Hart, Hubbell, Leviton.
13. Low voltage control transformer, 30VA - Edwards No. 599. Equivalent by Acme, General Electric,
Cutler Hammer.
14. Low voltage push button, momentary - Edwards No. 852. Equivalent by Eagle.
J. Lighting Fixtures:
1. Conform with all requirements described under "Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Accessories" in
addition to scheduled descriptions. Submit itemized conformance list with bid.
2. Lighting Fixture Schedule: Verify ceiling construction on Architectural drawings. Supply fixture
types compatible with ceiling.
3. Lenses equal to KSH Pattern 19 3/16", where not otherwise noted.
4.. Ballasts, Electronic: Advance,.Magne Tek Triad, Motorola, Valmont.
5. Ballasts, Core and Coil: Advance, Universal, Valmont. Energy saving type equivalent to
Universal SLH Series.
6. .Emergency Power Battery Pack: Bodine, Siltron.
7. Lamps: General Electric, Osram, Phillips, Sylvania.
K. Occupancy Sensor: My -Tech, Watt -Stopper.
L. Low Voltage Switching: Macro Electronics, LCD, General Electric, Watt -Stopper.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -34
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CONDITIONS •
A. Examine the drawings of all trades and all specification sections, survey the existing conditions, and
include all necessary allowances in bid proposal.
B. Resolve all conflicts with code requirements, site conditions and the work of other trades.
C. Verify the locations of all existing utilities prior to construction and protect them from damage.
D. Pay all costs incurred due to damage of existing utilities or other facilities.
3.2 LOCATIONS
A. Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and although the size and locations of equipment are
generally shown to scale, make use of data in all Contract Documents, and informational documents,
and verify this information against field conditions.
B. Drawings indicate the required size and points of termination of conduits, and the number and size of
wires and suggest proper routing of conduit. Install conduit with all necessary offsets, junction boxes,
and fittings to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, maintain required
accessibility, and satisfy the requirements of the governing codes and the standards of good practice.
C. Architectural and structural drawings and specifications take precedence over the electrical drawings
in the representation of the general construction work. Civil drawings take precedence in the
representation of site work. Refer to the drawings, specifications, and reviewed shop drawings for all
work, in order to coordinate electrical work with other work of the project.
D. When changes in indicated locations or arrangements are necessary due to conditions in building
construction, rearrangement of furnishings or equipment, or conflict in location, make such changes
at no cost to Owner, provided that the change is ordered before conduit is installed and that length of
conduit run is not revised by more than ten percent (10%) of indicated run, for conduits 1" nominal or
smaller, and five percent (5%) for larger conduits.
E. Bring discrepancies between different drawings, between drawings and actual field conditions, or
between drawings and specifications, promptly to the attention of the Architect for decision, and stop
pertinent work subject to resolution of the conflict.
F. Equipment in mechanical, electrical and signal rooms or spaces has been laid out in accordance with
the requirements of typical equipment of the class indicated. Modify wiring and location and pay all
costs, to meet to the requirements of the particular manufacturer's equipment which is installed,
where it is different from that shown on the drawings. Do not use equipment which exceeds space or
which infringes on required aisle or access space.
G. Coordinate the location of the lighting fixtures and framing with the ceiling construction so that the
overall pattern is acceptable to the Architect. Architectural reflected ceiling drawings, plans and
details govern. Locate lighting fixtures in mechanical and -equipment rooms to avoid ductwork, piping
and equipment. Coordinate location with trade supplying equipment prior to lighting fixture
installation.
H. Locate sleeves, floor and wall outlets, and devices serving equipment, built-in fixtures and appliances,
in accordance with dimensions on the respective equipment drawings of the equipment supplier.
I. Provide clarifying details where required by inspecting authority and obtain Architect's and Inspector's •
approval prior to installation.
BANK OF AMERICA " r,"� 16000
+. ELECTRICAL -35
3.3 RESPONSIBILITY
• A. Provide complete functioning systems and include all labor, material and associated tools and
transportation required for the system to operate safely and satisfactorily. Provide empty conduit
systems where specified, complete, clear, and with pull wires, ready to accept conductors and allow
for equipment installation.
B. Provide all work indicated on the drawings whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications.
C. Coordinate the installation of electrical items with the schedules for work of other trades to prevent
delays in total work. Assume responsibility for any cooperative work which must be altered due to
lack of proper supervision or failure to make proper provision in time. Perform alterations to
Architect's satisfaction, and pay all costs.
D. Resolve code conflicts prior to installation. Remove and replace all work conflicting with codes or, in
the Architect's opinion, not meeting specified requirements and pay all costs.
3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide an experienced superintendent in charge of erection of the work, together with all necessary
journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, erect, connect, adjust, operate and test
the work involved to provide a neat, workmanlike installation. Latest industry standards are
considered minimum.
B. For the actual fabrication, installation, and testing of the work of this section, use only thoroughly
trained and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the requirements for this work
and with the installation recommendations of the manufacturers of the specified items. Where
specified, provide factory personnel for testing and adjusting.
C. For major equipment such as transformers, switchboards, panelboards, transfer switches, motor
control centers, circuit breakers, control devices, etc., submit letters from principals of the equipment
manufacturing company, with bid proposal, specifying the location of factory authorized parts and
service organizations intended to serve the subject project.
D. For signal, communication and specialized systems, perform all work in accordance with instructions
provided by, and under the supervision of, factory authorized agents. Provide evidence that the
factory agent has five projects equal in scope to specified systems, operating satisfactorily. Submit a
letter, with bid proposal, from principals of the equipment manufacturing company specifying the
location of factory authorized parts and service organizations now in service intended to serve the
subject project, the length of time which they have been in operation (which shall not be less than
three years) and the guarantee available for the continued operation.
3.5 EXISTING FACILITIES.
A. Examine the drawings and specifications of the completed work and inspect the site to establish the
scope of demolition work and new work to ,be provided under this sections. and clarification of the
phasing of the work.
B. Based on project phasing and scheduling, demolition work will be taking place in and around existing
areas that are to remain in service. Where the work under this section affects or interferes with the
operation of any existing areas to remain in service, or portions of the work already in operation,
provide all necessary work and material including premium pay, required to avoid shutdown of these
areas during normal operations. Obtain Owner's approval for shutdown, in writing, 48 hours prior to
shutdown.
0C. Existing electrical and signal facilities outside of the demolition area to remain in place and in service
during demolition.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -36
D. Unless specifically noted or otherwise indicated or directed, remove all existing electrical equipment
in the areas to be demolished. Deliver all equipment removed, including lighting fixtures, to the •
Owner's representative.
3.6 REMODELING
A. Where remodeling of existing areas is indicated, provide all work indicated and required for a
complete and operating facility. Where work is adjacent to existing fixtures or devices, provide
matching products to present uniform appearance. Salvage demolished material and equipment and
deliver to Owner as directed. Dispose of salvaged materials and equipment where so directed in
writing by Owner. Patch all openings in existing walls or floors caused by removal of materials and/or
equipment under this work.
3.7 DEMOLITION
A. Where areas of existing facilities are indicated to be demolished or remodeled, visit site to determine
scope of work. Relocate electric and signal system equipment, and reroute or replace conduit and
wiring as required to conform with new use of the area and maintain operation of adjacent areas.
3.8 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING
A. General: Provide excavation, backfilling, and pumping required for work under this section, in
accordance with requirements of Earthwork Section, Division 2, of the specifications. Remove
surplus materials as directed.
B. Existing Paving: Where trenches are required through existing paving, resurface, after installation, to
match existing in accordance with appropriate sections of Division 2, using accredited journeymen of
respective trades.
C. Conduit Trenches: Provide cover over buried conduit, where not otherwise detailed or noted, and in
accordance with NEC limitations, as follows: 30" over duct banks; 30" over secondary and signal
conduits outside building; 24" for 1 '/2' and larger secondary and signal conduit within building
footprint. Cut trenches to bottom of conduit, allowing for concrete encasement where specified, and
make cuts as narrow as possible. For nonmetallic conduit without encasement where permitted
elsewhere herein, excavate 4" below conduit and backfill with sand. Snake conduit to allow for
expansion. In rock, excavate 6" below conduit and backfill with gravel for encased conduit and sand
for direct buried conduit. Separate signal and power conduit in a common trench by 12" of tamped
earth or 6" of concrete. For electric and telephone utility services, conform with utility company
requirements where more restrictive.
D. Within Building Footprint: Run buried conduit, 1'/ nominal and smaller, 6" minimum below slabs in
contact with earth. Encase as described for underground conduit. Conduits with diameter less than
1/3 of slab thickness may be run in slab on grade where practical and where accepted by the
Architect in writing.
3.9 EQUIPMENT PADS AND CURBS
A. Install floor mounted switchboards, and transformers on 3" high level concrete pads in basement,
ground floor where on grade and roof levels, in mechanical rooms on all levels, and where indicated.
Coordinate with equipment supplier so that device handles do not exceed 6-6" above working
surface per NEC. Extend pad in front of devices or metering to maintain code or utility company
height limits.
B. Provide exact pad size, location, and conduit entries based on equipment shop drawings to concrete
section for construction. 0
BANK OF AMERICA ''" `" + 16000
- ELECTRICAL -37
3.10 SLEEVES, OPENINGS, CUTTING AND,PATCHING
• A. Locations of Openings: Locate all chases, shafts, sleeves, openings, anchors and inserts required for
the installation of the electrical work during framing of the structure and before concrete placement.
Obtain approval from the Architect, in writing, for penetration of structural members or blockouts
through slabs for grouped conduits, prior to installation.
B. Cutting and Patching: Provide, per Architect's requirements, cutting, core drilling and associated
patching required due to improperly located or omitted openings, using accredited journeymen of the
respective trades and without cost to Owner. In a like manner, patch openings in existing walls or
floors cause by removal of conduit. Do not sleeve, cut nor drill structural members nor footings
without Architect's written approval. Fill all blockouts and preformed openings provided for work
under this section with concrete in a manner to maintain the fire rating integrity of the floor or wall.
C. Location of Sleeves:
1. Place conduits which rise through slabs on grade before concrete is poured.
For 1" or smaller conduits penetrating non -rated interior walls, solidly grout around conduits in
concrete and masonry and solidly plaster around conduits in plaster or dry wall.
3. For all conduits penetrating rated walls and floor slabs and for 1 1/.' or larger conduits penetrating
walls, provide sleeves of ample size to provide Yz' minimum annular space. Center conduit in
sleeve and support independently of sleeve.
D. Types of Sleeves:
1. Sleeve Assemblies: Provide UL listed assemblies for penetrating rated walls or floors in
accordance with their fire rating. Requirements herein are minimum. Submit shop drawings.
2. Suspended Floor Slabs: Standard weight, galvanized steel pipe, stubbed 1" above finished floor.
Cap unused sleeves to maintain floor rating.
3. Interior Walls and Partitions: Adjustable galvanized sheet steel with wall flanges and plaster lip.
Provide 22 gauge for 2" and smaller conduit, 20 gauge for larger conduit.
4. Membranes: Stub sleeve 6" beyond membrane and provide flanges suitable for sealing of
membrane. Obtain Architect's approval of sleeve detail.
5. Exterior Walls Below Grade: Provide, where entering rooms below grade, sealing fitting
consisting of oversized sleeve and modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking
synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and sleeve (or
wall opening for existing walls). Tighten bolts to form watertight seal. Install -per manufacturer's
directions.
E. Installation: Cut all sleeves smooth, ream and install perpendicular to floor or wall.
F. Escutcheons: In finished locations exposed to public, provide chrome plated split type escutcheons
held on by setscrews where conduits pass through floors, walls, and ceilings. Provide plates on
conduit extending through sleeves.
3.11 CAULKING
A. Provide as specified herein and detailed on the drawings.
• B. Conduit Penetration: Through exterior walls, caulk conduit penetrations for full wall thickness for
waterproofing. At fire rated floors and partitions, pack sleeves with approved packing for full sleeve
depth and caulk both ends.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -38
C. Conductor Penetration: Where sleeves or openings in fire rated floors and partitions contain
conductors not enclosed in a raceway, provide UL approved seal of the sleeve or opening per •
manufacturers' instructions and code requirements.
D. Compound Characteristics: Putty like; workable with hands down to -35°F; firm up to 300°F; remain
pliable when exposed to air; adhere to metal, plastic, concrete, masonry and cable insulation;
harmless to hands; seal without causing deterioration of materials sealed.
E. Fire Rated Walls, Partitions or Floors: UL classified fire retardant assemblies.
3.12 FLASHING
A. Wherever conduit extends through roof, install a four pound seamless lead flashing assembly and
counter flashing. Coordinate installation of flashing with roofing installation. Provide pitch pockets as
option and where indicated.
3.13 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. General: Provide systems free of noise and/or vibration transmission to building from transformers,
rotating machinery or electrical equipment through structure or conduit connections. Provide sleeved
openings for all conduit penetrations between rooms of low and high ambient sound levels, caulked to
ensure airtight resilient closure. Correct, at no cost to Owner, conditions resulting in noise
transmission to facility from work under this section.
B. Connections: Connect to motors, transformers and all isolated or vibrating equipment -with 24"
minimum length of liquid tight flexible conduit, slack connected. For dry type transformers, conduit
may be stubbed into bottom, not connected to, but bonded to, frame, in lieu of flexible connections.
C. Vibration Isolation: Provide between structure and vibrating or rotating equipment furnished and/or
installed under this section. 10-1
Equipment
Transformers (Below 100 KVA)
Design
Deflection Isolator
Slab, On Grade 0.06" PN
Above Grade, Supported 0.3" HMN'
Above Grade, Suspended 0.2" HN'
'Equipped with preapproved seismic restraint as noted by an assigned "R" number.
D. Switchboards: Manufacturer to size, brace and arrange bus within gear and design enclosure to
preclude hum and vibration. Provide sound baffles and shock mounts for mechanically -held relays
and contactors.
E. Wiring: In multiple runs of feeder conductors in conduit or wireway, twist associated phase and
neutral conductors together to avoid abnormal field generation.
F. Equipment Frames: For vibrating or rotating equipment to be isolated, provide mounting frames
and/or brackets to carry the load of the equipment without causing mechanical distortion or stress to
the equipment.
G. Machinery Rooms:
1. In machinery and electrical rooms located above occupied spaces, do no penetrate floor slab
without specific approval in writing. Where floor has membrane, avoid penetrations and run all •
conduit overhead.
�d
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -39
2. In general, run conduits to motors and equipment overhead. For overhead drops exceeding 8' in
length or floor risers • over 2' high, provide unistrut or pipe brace to floor or structure. For slabs in contact with earth, run conduit as specified under other paragraphs herein. Verify stub -up
location with equipment supplier.
Do not run conduit through vibration isolated (floating) concrete slabs.
H. Outlets:
1. Do not use back-to-back outlets or through boxes. Separate outlets on opposite sides of wall by
12" minimum unless otherwise detailed.
2. In rated walls provide separation as required by Code.
3. In sound insulated floors, ceilings, and wall partitions, provide acoustical outlet box pads, pliable,
putty -like, W thick, per manufacturer's instructions. Include boxes for receptacles, switches,
telephone and data outlets. Isolate all conduit within the sound rated floor ceiling assembly from
the building construction at points of support or contact by means of approved resilient sleeves,
mounts or underlayments %" thick.
3.14 SEISMIC AND BRACING REQUIREMENTS
A. Scope: Brace electrical systems and equipment to withstand lateral and vertical forces that result
from earthquake or wind, in accordance with NUSIG guidelines.
B. Equipment: Anchor all equipment, switchboards, panelboards and transformers by securely bolting
them in place to the building structure. Install vibration isolation devices where specified. Provide
bolts, anchors and bracing to withstand acceleration of 0.5 g. Equipment manufacturer to submit
weight, center of gravity and method of fastening required for seismic anchoring.
1. For equipment weighting 1000 pounds or more, submit calculations for anchorage prepared by a
structural engineer, registered in the State, conforming to all applicable codes.
C. For conduits, 2" nominal and larger, suspended more than 12", provide diagonal bracing to structure
at hangers, at changes in direction, and on approximate 30' centers, installed along with conduit in
accordance with NUSIG and using approved components. -Rework of other trades due to late
installation of bracing is the responsibility of this section.
D. For conduits crossing seismic separations, provide approved fittings or combinations of fittings, that
permit horizontal expansion or contraction and vertical and angular deflection. Selection of fitting to
be based on the dimension of the separation and conduit size. Refer to Raceways and Wireways".
E.' Lighting Fixtures:
1. Suspended acoustical ceiling system: Suspend recessed fixtures with two 12 gauge wires at
opposite ends per California building Code Chapter 47. Support recessed fluorescent fixtures
from building structure with steel support wires, two 10 gauge at diagonal corners or four 12
gauge at four corners. Allow '/a' slack in wires. Attach fixture positively to ceiling members with
attachments having a capacity of 100% of the fixture weight in all directions. Support fixtures
weighing over 50 pounds directly from structure with approved hangers, and attach the fixture
positively to ceiling members. Attach surface fixtures to main runners with a minimum of two
approved clamping devices, 14 gauge minimum, and support each clamp from ceiling structure
with 10 gauge steel wire.
2. Pendant Fixtures: Provide approved seismic fixture suspension allowing for 450 swing in all
• directions without impacting adjacent obstructions or structure. For stem mounted fixtures,
provide approved seismic ball aligners at fixture and outlet box, and 3/32" stainless steel aircraft
cable in each stem and with the circuit conductors, continuous from the fixture housing, through
the outlet box, and attach directly to the structure above. Within the fixture housing, provide a
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -40
mechanically crimped cable loop and secure to the housing with a closed eye bolt nut and lock
washer. At the structure above, provide a cable loop and closed eye threaded lag screws and
steel wedge drilled anchors. Level and adjust fixtures and remove cable slack before attaching to •
the fixture housing.
a. Where pendant fixtures are indicated to be cable supported, provide 3/32" (minimum)
stainless steel aircraft cables, cable to rod swivel adapters, '/.-20 rod extensions above the
ceiling to the structure. Brace the rod seismically with a rod fitting and (3) 12 gauge steel
wires extended from the rod to the structure at 1200 angles.
If a 450 swing cannot be achieved, brace fixtures to prevent contact with the adjacent
obstruction or structure. All fixture suspension assemblies to be State of California approved.
c. Submit a sample of the seismic ball aligner and details of the cable attachments and
assemblies with the fixture ship drawing submittal.
3.15 GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. General: Provide service ground with resistance to ground of five ohms or less and in accordance
with applicable code requirements. Maintain equipment ground continuity through entire system
including raceways, wireways, equipment enclosures, lighting fixtures and devices. Provide
grounding as specified and as shown on drawings. Include equipment ground conductor in all
nonmetallic conduits, in all feeders as scheduled on the drawings and in branch circuiting where
indicated on the symbol list. Use green insulated copper ground conductors sized per tables herein.
In steel frame buildings, bond a minimum of two columns to service ground with conductors sized for
service ground. Bond to building reinforcing bars embedded in concrete footings or foundation, which
equal 20 feet of 1/2" diameter steel, prior to concrete pour.
B. Service Ground:
Provide service ground copper bus bar with a minimum of six ground studs. See details on
drawings. Terminate all ground conductors at service ground bus bar. Locate at accessible
location in main electrical room. Engrave "Service Ground Electrode.
2. Provide ufer ground consisting of 30' length of bare copper conductor extended full length and
embedded along bottom of building concrete foundation in direct contact with earth, supported to
provide 2" concrete encasement minimum. Bring loop out at center to service ground bus bar.
Extend to foundation reinforcing steel.
3. Provide, in accessible location, exothermic bond to a minimum of two steel columns or to
reinforcing of two concrete columns with insulated ground conductor in steel conduit to service
ground bus bar.
4. Bond from building cold water main, 2" or larger, within 5' of building entry, to service ground with
insulated ground conductor in steel conduit to service ground bus bar. Make the cold water pipe
system continuous by bonding around insulating joints. Utilize cast bronze heavy duty ground
clamps with bronze bolts and nuts.
5. Extend neutral and equipment ground from service switchboard (ahead of service mains and
neutral bus link) with insulated conductor in steel conduit to service ground bus bar.
6. Service Ground Conductor:
Service (or Transformer
Secondary) Amperes
Embedded Cold Water & Service Ground
AWG I AWG Conduit
400A and Less 1/0 1/0 1"
500A - 800A 2/0 2/0 ill
•
•
BANK OF AMERICA 16.000
ELECTRICAL -41
7. Where required to obtain specified resistance to ground, drive additional ground rods, number as
• required, and connect to service ground box with insulated conductor in steel conduit.
C. Separately Derived System Grounds:
1. Ground transformers and uninterruptible power supplies from neutral bus or bushing to main
service ground at service ground bus bar. Extend insulated ground conductor in steel conduit per
Paragraph D.
D. Separately Derived System Grounding Table:
208/120V 4801277V
KVA AWG Size -Conduit AWG Size -Conduit
15 and Less 8 3/4' 8 3/4'
30,45 6 3/4' 8 3/a'
75 2 3/4' 6 3/4'
112-1/2 1/0 1" 4 3/<
E. Ground Continuity:
1. Provide green THWN insulated ground conductor in all nonmetallic conduits, each conduit run for
primary and secondary feeders and where indicated for branch circuits. For lighting circuits,
connect ground wire to fixture ground lead where available or bond to fixture housing by
mechanical means. Connect grounding conductors to ground busses in panels and switchboards,
and to terminals on devices, and bond to all equipment. Bond feeder grounds to all metallic pull
and junction boxes. Provide copper ground conductor, sized not less than following (up to 600V
systems):
Up 25 70 110 225 550 700
Circuit Device to to to to to to to to
Setting, Amperes: 20 60 100 200 500 600 800
Ground Conductor
AWG Size: 12 10 8 6 2 1 1/0
a. For parallel feeders or circuits, run ground in each conduit. Refer to schedule on drawings.
2. Provide ground bushings, fittings, and jumpers as required at expansion and seismic fittings,
isolated sections and wherever ground continuity is broken. Provide ground bushings on conduit
stub -ups and bond to enclosure and ground bus.
3. Bond plug strip, light track, isolated metal parts of lighting fixtures, and ..ground terminal of
receptacles to equipment ground.
4. Provide separate green ground conductor in circuits serving isolated ground outlets and ground
fault outlets.
F. Communications Ground: Provide 1 #6 (minimum) THWN copper ground conductor in 3/4' conduit
from main telephone room and/or telephone terminal to service ground bus bar if available or to cold
water pipe 2" or larger. Extend to other telephone terminals where indicated.
G. Materials and Methods:
1. For ground loop and/or buried ground conductor, use soft drawn stranded copper conductors size
as scheduled. Snake buried conductors to allow for settlement. Bury. ground. loop conductors 12"
• minimum below concrete slabs on grade.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -42
2. Install continuous conductors without splices. Where joints are required, use exothermic welding
or UL approved compression connection to join all conductor strands, providing completed joint •
equivalent to or larger than conductor. Obtain inspection before covering joints.
3. Provide service system ground conductor embedded at bottom of foundations and extend to
ground bus bar.
4. Bond to steel columns or reinforcing steel of concrete columns with suitable copper to steel
exothermic connections.
H. Ground Electrodes:
1. Where specified or required, provide ground rods driven a minimum of 10' into the earth. Locate
in precast concrete hand holes. Engrave cover "Grounding Electrode". Where driven ground
rods are precluded by rock, propose and submit equivalent alternate for review.
2. Ground rods to be of cone pointed electrolytic copper bonded to carbon steel core, sectional type
where over 10' in length, die stamped near top with name or trademark of the manufacturer and
length of rod in feet; diameter sufficient to permit driving without damage, but not less than 5/8".
3. Bond ground wires to rod with exothermic weld or UL approved compression connection.
3.16 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS
A. Deliver raceways and wireways to the site in standard lengths, and store where continuously
protected from moisture and weather.
B. Conduit sizes on the drawings are minimum, sized for copper conductors, for normal (THW)
insulation. Use '/a" trade size minimum for underground runs. Increase sizes where required by
physical conditions, or conductor insulation's. Do not combine runs without written approval. Allow
for grounding conductor as described under paragraph titled "Grounding System".
C. Conceal conduit from view above ceilings, below floors or in walls where possible. Refer to
Architectural Sections and Details to determine conduit routing required to conceal conduit.
D. Do not run in concrete slabs without written permission from the Architect. Conduits with diameter
less than 1/3 thickness of slab (thickness is measured above flutes of deck) shall, where permitted in
suspended slabs, be limited to 5% of slab in 100 sq. ft. area with a minimum spacing of 1'-0" o.c. as
per code for fire resistive two hour floor. Route conduit to maintain slab fire resistive rating and
structural integrity as acceptable to the enforcing agency. Obtain agency approval prior to pouring
concrete.
E. Conduit may be exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, shop and utility areas and
where indicated. Install all conduit runs parallel with or perpendicular to structural members.
Surmount obstructions by use of bends, offsets, and where necessary with junction and pull boxes.
For surface mounted outlets and small junction boxes within 7' of floor, use cast boxes and/or
condulets.
F. Cut conduits and raceways square and free of burrs. Ream conduit ends and clean conduits before
pulling conductors.
G. Cap open ends of conduits with approved manufactured conduit seals until ready to pull in
conductors. Install as complete system, mechanically and electrically continuous between outlets,
gear and equipment.
H. Where conduits or wireways cross expansion or seismic joints, provide approved expansion fittings, •
or combinations of fittings, which allow deflection in all directions equivalent to twice the movement
allowed in the structural design. For conduits 1'/a' trade size or smaller, 18" minimum length of
weatherproof flex, slack mounted, may be used.
BANK OF AMERICA - 16000
ELECTRICAL -43
• I. For bends and offsets in conduit V and larger, use larger radius factory fittings not less than 8 times
the nominal conduit size or bend with a hydraulic bender meeting NEC Table 346-10 exception.
Refer to additional requirements under Paragraph titled "Interior Telephone and Data Systems
Provisions". Replace all flattened, deformed or kinked conduit.
Route raceways and wireways so as to prevent insulated conductors from being subjected to high
ambient temperature conditions. Maintain the following minimum clearances:
1. Crossing noninsulated pipe or duct - 3".
2. Crossing insulated pipes or ducts - 1".
3. Parallel to noninsulated pipes or ducts - 3".
4. Parallel to insulated pipes or ducts - 6".
K. Provide No. 14 AWG black iron pull wire or polyethylene or nylon pull rope in all empty conduits and
stubs over 10' in length, extending at least 12" beyond conduit. Pull rope tensile strength to be 240
pounds up to 1Y2' conduit and 800 pounds for larger conduit. Submit pull rope data with shop
drawings.
L. Stub conduit into bottom of dry type transformers where possible and bond to case.
M. Terminate branch circuit, communication and signal conduits turning from floor into interior removable
nonmasonry partitions, freestanding appliances and equipment, with flush floor couplings before
extending conduit.
N. Terminate conduits in concrete light pole bases a vertical distance of 4" above top of foundation and
inclined towards the light pole hand hole. Extend conduit stubs a minimum distance of 3' from outside
of concrete foundation and cap. Before pouring of concrete bases, position all conduits at correct
height and bond together. Hold anchor bolts and conduits in place by means of templates until
01 concrete sets. Allow 72 hours for concrete set before erecting standards.
O. Secure rigid or IMC conduits to panels, pull boxes, wireways and enclosures with locknuts, inside and
out, and provide impact resistant plastic, insulated throat or malleable iron bushings at terminations in
pull boxes, wireways, signal cabinets, boxes and enclosures. Zinc insulated throat hubs with "O" ring
gaskets may be used in lieu of double locknut and bushing. For feeder conductors No. 4 AWG and
larger, provide steel or malleable iron insulating bushings with plastic liner. For EMT provide
insulated throat connectors secured with locknut on interior of box or enclosure. For flexible conduit,
provide insulated throat die cast twist -in connectors secured with locknut on interior of box or
enclosure, or steel twist -in connectors with plastic bushing, and locknut. At switchboards and
..bottomless gear and equipment, terminate conduits with ground bushing bonded to ground bus with
code size conductor, No. 8 AWG minimum. Use approved coupling or unions. Running thread,
threadless coupling, or split coupling connections are not permitted,
P. Where conduit enters the top of drip proof gear, make connection with bolt on hubs.
Q. Field thread rigid and IMC conduit conforming to American Standard Pipe Threads tapered for the
entire length at 3/. inch/foot. Treat threads with protective coating to prevent corrosion, but maintain
electric continuity.
R. For underground steel conduit coat all joints and points where wrenches have been applied, with
bituminastic paint.
S. Extend underground stub outs as shown on drawings, but 3' minimum beyond building foundations or
concrete paving adjacent to building.
0.T. Where conduit extending into building from site enters occupied level, slope, conduits to drain away
from building and seal to prevent entrance of -moisture into building.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -44
U. In vehicle maintenance and garage areas, consider area within 18" of floor as hazardous. Run
conduit overhead and keep conduit, devices and equipment out of hazardous area where possible. •
V. Route openable raceways and wireways so as to be readily accessible.
W. Gutter and wireway dimensions indicated on the drawings are minimum. Provide sufficient cross
section to contain conductors including all splices in accordance with code allowed percent fill.
Where covers occur on bottom, provide removable wire supports not more than 3' apart.
X. Refer to paragraph titled "Identification" for additional requirements.
3.17 CONDUIT
A. Use Rigid Steel conduit in all sizes, or Intermediate Steel conduit up to 3": In slab on grade; on
exterior; encased in exterior masonry or concrete walls; in wet locations; in exposed locations within
7' of floor or walking surfaces; in suspended slabs, but only where permission is obtained from
Architect in writing for conduit to be run in slab.
B. Use Rigid or Intermediate steel conduit for trade sizes 2~/z" and larger installed above grade
throughout.
C. For Underground Installations:
Use Rigid, Intermediate Steel, or Schedule 80 PVC below building and rigid or intermediate steel
or Schedule 40 PVC outside buildings unless otherwise noted. Provide rigid or intermediate steel
conduit elbows (2" minimum above floor) for stub -ups and risers. Use PVC conduit with PVC
risers, terminating in PVC threaded couplings flush with 4" high raised concrete pad at
Contractor's option for telephone, signal, communication and data systems. For fire alarm
systems use rigid or intermediate steel only.
Encase in concrete envelope of rectangular cross section not less than 3" beyond any surface of
conduit. Where steel conduit extends above grade from concrete encasement, paint conduit with
two coats of bituminastic paint for 12" minimum on both sides of junction with concrete. Use
precast concrete or plastic separators to secure uniform spacing between conduits of 2".
Concrete to have 2,500 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Reinforce envelope with
No. 4 rebar rods at four corners parallel to conduit, with 1'/z" of concrete cover, and with No. 3 ties
on two foot centers (minimum) where crossing fill or loose soil, other utility mains, at sharp slopes
and where run below the building. For runs over 150', provide bends with a minimum radius of
ten times the internal radius of the conduit. Ball mandrel conduit. Where conduits are under
building, mandrel before any slabs are poured. Route conduit to avoid column footings and
foundation. Equip conduit with end bells for termination in manholes. Slope conduit away from
building and towards manholes or pull boxes with pitch of 3" per 100'. Submit sections and
details.
3. For utility company conduits, obtain and observe utility company standards. Obtain and observe
utility company standards. Obtain utility company approvals.
D. In corrosive soils wrap underground steel conduit system with plastic wrap before encasing. Where
Architect indicates in writing that soil is noncorrosive, underground steel conduit and couplings may,
in lieu of concrete encasement, be protected with plastic wrap or coating:
1. Factory wrap with one-half lap of twenty mil thick identified polyvinyl tape to provide uniform forty
mil coating. Field taped joints shall provide equivalent coating.
2. Factory coat with forty mil thick PVC coating bonded to conduit. Coating on couplings shall •
extend beyond coupling ends for one conduit diameter up to 1'/i'.
3. Extend wrap for 12" minimum where conduit emerges from ground.
, ,;• t,p,Y•• .^.SIF
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -45
E. Use, Rigid or Intermediate Steel or Electric. Metallic Tubing in Trade Sizes Z and Smaller for: Dry
concealed locations; exposed locations above 7' from floor or walking -surfaces; in electrical and
• telephone rooms at all heights.
F. Use Flexible Steel Conduit, '/i' minimum trade size, 6' maximum length, for connection to lighting
fixtures from fixture outlet, and from outlets to motors or other moving or vibrating equipment with
minimum 24" length. Where structural conditions make use of rigid conduit or tubing impractical,
obtain written permission from Architect to use flexible conduit.
G. Use 24" Minimum Length of Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit, Y2" Minimum Trade Size, Slack
Connected for: Connection from outlet to motor and other moving or vibrating equipment; code
length to lighting fixtures in damp or wet locations; to transformer housings; all flexible connections in
exposed areas. Where conduit stubs into bottom of dry type transformer, without connecting to
enclosure, bond conduit to enclosure and omit flex connection.
H. Provide bend radius for flexible conduit not less than 5 times the trade size.
I. For connection to exterior lighting standards from normal system, Schedule 40 PVC may be used
without encasement outside of building area. Use rigid steel under building stubbed 5' beyond
building, and in concrete pole base. Include ground wire and size conduit accordingly. For
emergency circuits, use wrapped steel conduit or concrete encased PVC.
J. Where penetrating floors or fire separations, use UL listed fittings and/or devices to maintain
separation integrity.
K. Where crossing existing pavement, place conduit under pavement by approved jacking method. Keep
jack pits 2' clear of edge of pavement. Do not undermine paving with excessive water. If jacking
cannot be accomplished, obtain Architect's permission in writing to cut and patch paving.
L. When forming bends in nonmetallic conduit, apply heat without distorting or discoloring conduit.
3.18 SUPPORT AND FASTENING OF RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS
A. Support vertical conduits passing through sleeves with UL approved riser clamps secured to the
conduit and resting on the building structure. Support vertical conduits 1'/4" and larger a minimum of
once, and on 15' centers maximum. For vertical conduits smaller than 1'/a" provide standoffs on 8'
centers maximum. Support conduits adjacent to walls with preformed channels. Support
freestanding risers with conduit racks of angle iron or channel iron members, rigidly bolted or welded
together and adequately braced. For securing vertical conduits 1" or smaller to metal studs,
horizontal '/4' diameter steel pencil rods tied with No. 16 gauge galvanized steel, twisted tie wires, is
acceptable.
B. Install rigid steel conduit with threaded couplings. Support conduits 1" and larger on 10' intervals,
smaller than 1" on 7' intervals, all sizes within 3' of connection to box, cabinet or fitting.
C. Support electric metallic tubing on maximum spacing of 10' and within 3' of connections to box,
cabinet or fitting including couplings.
D. Support flexible metal conduit on 4' intervals, within 1' of outlet box or fitting (except at connections to
recessed lighting fixtures) and within 2' of vibrating equipment. .
E. Support gutter and wireways at 5' intervals and at changes of direction, in- a manner to allow full
access.
is
F. Attach to field poured concrete with preset,inserts for conduits 3" and larger•and .with preset inserts or
steel wedge screw anchors for smaller sizes. Shot driven studs are not permitted without. written
approval from the Architect. Submit size, quantity and approximate weight with request to use shot
driven studs. Secure conduit with cast conduit clamps and cadmium plated machine or lag screws.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -46
G. Attach to plaster, dry wall or hollow masonry walls with metal toggle bolts.
H. Attach to solid masonry walls with steel wedge anchors. •
I. Do not fasten rigid conduit or tubing to equipment subject to vibration or mounted on shock mounts.
Secure conduits V14" and smaller to steel deck where permitted by Architect with cast or malleable
iron conduit clamps and 1" minimum cadmium plated or galvanized sheet metal screws.
K. Where attaching to steel members, use beam clamp, welded threaded studs or machine screws.
Where not otherwise specified herein, support all sizes of suspended conduit from structure with
factory made pipe hangers with split hinged malleable iron or springable steel pipe rings and solid
round mild steel rods, W diameter for up to 1%" conduit, 3/8" diameter up to 2" conduit and V
diameter for larger conduit. Friction type conduit support hardware and attachments are not
acceptable. Where required conduit spacing is more frequent than available structural members,
provide intermediate steel support as required.
M. Provide trapeze type hangers where three or more conduits run parallel and clamp conduit to hanger.
Provide diagonal seismic bracing for suspended runs of conduits 2" trade size and larger. Use
unistrut type channel for trapeze assemblies. Lathing channels are not acceptable.
N. Provide plated or galvanized hangers, threaded, rods, channels and metallic support and fastening
material or provide two coats of rust resistant paint, in all damp or corrosive locations (e.g., vehicle
maintenance garage, labs).
O. Do not use perforated metal strap or wood as support material.
P. Support conduit to structure above suspended ceilings 3" minimum above ceiling to allow removal of
tile. Do not support from T -bars or T -bar hanger wires. Maintain 2" clearance above recessed light
fixtures.
Q. Above fixed ceiling and in stud walls, tie conduit 1" or smaller to furring, support channels capable of
carrying the weight, or studs with No. 16 gauge galvanized wire ties 4' on center, maximum.
R. Attached to precast or prestressed concrete as described under applicable sections of the
specifications. Coordinate installation of precast unistrut or inserts where required, or obtain written
approval from the Architect of alternate support methods.
3.19 INSTALLATION OF BOXES
A. Use new, bright stock and store where continuously protected from weather.
B. Install all outlets and boxes in readily accessible locations.
C. Provide additional pull or outlet boxes as required to meet code requirements or to facilitate pulling of
wires. Locate in utility areas, above accessible ceilings, or in approved locations.
D. Size boxes for devices contained and the number of wires passing through or terminating therein, not
less than 4" square by 1'/Z' deep, or equivalent configuration. Use pull and junction boxes of
adequate size for splices and terminations contained therein.
E. For door alarms and switches, use special boxes designed to fit in door frame.
F. For receptacles 30A rating and greater, use 2-1/8" deep box with two gang ring and plate to match •
device.
G. Use 4-11/16" square box with round plaster ring, for surface mounted ceiling fixtures.
- f
BANK OF AMERICA i 16000
ELECTRICAL -47
H. Where more than one switch: is shown at one location, group behind common plate. Use gang boxes
• for three or more devices. Provide barrier between 277V switches controlling two or more circuits.
I. Use 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep boxes, minimum size, for more than two flexible connections to
lighting fixtures.
J. For wall mounted telephone, data, computer, or intercom outlets, use 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep
box with one gang flush plaster ring.
K. Recess boxes in finished areas,` and wherever possible in utility, mechanical and electrical spaces.
Provide extension rings and/or plaster rings to finish flush with finished surfaces. Install approved
factory made knockout seals where knockouts are not intact, and close all openings.
L. Use cast metal, gasketed boxes for locations noted on drawings and as follows: Stub mounted
outlets; surface mounted outlets within 7' of the floor; wet or corrosive locations; outlets on exterior or
within exterior walls facing the exterior. For flush mounted outlets, provide adapter plates. Provide
threaded plugs in unused hubs.
M. For concrete work, use concrete boxes which allow the placing of conduit without displacing the
reinforcing bars. Use masonry boxes in block and masonry walls.
N. Use extension rings with blank covers for surface extension from flush box.
O. Support light fixture outlets to building structure and equip with fixture stud and hanger bar or
supporting device as required, including outlets for fixtures furnished by others. Support lighting
fixtures in excess of 60 pounds to structure independently of outlet box.
P. Do not use back to back outlets or through boxes. See paragraph titled "Noise and Vibration".
• Q. Provide boxes for all devices. For devices not specified or scheduled, use boxes as approved,
adequate for device to be installed.
R. Combine devices in ganged box with suitable barriers behind common plate where indicated,
specified or detailed. Provide separate or barriered boxes for normal and emergency devices.
S. Provide flush mounted box with horizontal single gang ring for surface mounted multi -outlet assembly
in metal raceway.
T. Install boxes in a rigid manner, with box hangers, expansion shields in masonry, and machine screws
on metal work. Do not nail to structure. Use plated or galvanized screws throughout.. , -
U. Secure pull and junction boxes to the structure independently of the conduits by means of bolts, rod
hangers or brackets.
V. Prefabricated Outlet/Junction Box Assemblies: The following types of box assemblies are acceptable,
subject to a shop drawing submittal review and the basic specification requirements for outlet and
junction boxes.
1. Wiring device outlet box attached to the back of a one piece vertical galvanized steel bracket that
incorporates a back wall support flange, and is designed to mount in the floor track of a metal
stud partition. Bracket height as determined by the designated device mounting height. Plaster
ring attachment to front of bracket. Support flange to assure that box is held in a rigid manner
when the dry wall material is attached to both sides of the studs.
is
2. Branch circuit junction box screwed to a 1'/2" black iron channel that is secured to the structure
above. Branch circuit conduits supported from structure above independently of box assembly
per specifications.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -48
W. For communications and signal systems, refer to paragraph titled "Communications and Signal
System Provisions". •
X Provide designations per paragraph titled "Identification".
3.20 INSTALLATION OF DEVICES
A. Unless specifically directed otherwise, install switches with single gang vertical plate on latch side of
door. Verify door swing before installation.
B. Unless noted otherwise, install duplex receptacles, single receptacles, telephone and
communications outlets vertically. Receptacles with ground slot up. Where horizontal mounting is
required, locate ground slot to right when facing outlet.
C. Connect receptacle grounding screw to equipment ground conductor where conductor is called for,
otherwise bond to outlet box with green ground conductor.
D. Plumb and align all devices and install plaster rings flush with wall surface so that plates fit tight
against wall and device surface without strain.
E. On exterior, and interior locations subject to moisture, use weatherproof devices.
F. Within six feet of sinks, basins or sources of running or standing water, use GFI outlets.
3.21 DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Check architectural details and building equipment drawings before installation of outlets, to
determine required outlet mounting heights. Install outlets, under this work, to clear built-in features,
furniture and equipment. •
1. The electrical drawings take precedence as to quantity and type of outlets and general location.
2. Where architectural elevations have been provided, the elevations take precedence as to
mounting height and spacing.
3. Outlets, by symbol, are generally +18", +42", or as noted on the electrical drawings. If an outlet
occurs behind casework and there is no architectural elevation, locate the outlet above the
counter. Where counter has a backsplash, mount outlet at +4" above top edge of splash. If there
is no backsplash, mount at +4" above top of counter.
4. If outlets occur back to back, paragraph titled "Noise and Vibration" takes precedence regarding
separation between boxes.
5. If an outlet is symbolized at +42" above a counter and there is a conflict, use the +4" mounting
height above top of splash or counter.
6. Verify mounting height of outlets below counters for garbage disposal, hot water dispensers or
undercounter refrigerators with equipment shop drawings.
7. Where a cord slot is detailed in countertops, mount outlet below counter at +18"
B. Install outlets for specific equipment or appliances per equipment suppliers' instructions.
C. Mounting height for wall mounted outlet is from centerline of outlet to finished floor, and is indicated
on the drawings by "+".
D. Where Not Otherwise Noted or Detailed, Use Mounting heights herein Indicated: •
1. Switches and Push Buttons: +42".
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -49
2. Receptacle: +18" -
• 3. Receptacles for Fixed Equipment: To suit equipment.
4. Receptacles in Equipment Rooms: +42".
5. At communication and/or telephone terminal backboards, provide multi outlet raceway (Plugmold)
below backboard at +8". -
6. Desk Mounted Telephone, Data and Intercom outlet: +18".
7. Backbox for Wall Mounted Telephones: +42".
8. Signal System Device Requiring Manual Operation: +42".
9. Manual Fire Alarm Reporting Station: +48".
10. Fire Alarm Audible/Visual or Visual Alarm: +80" to bottom of strobe (ADA Strobe).
11. Thermostats: +48".
12. Signal System Audible Device: Locate outlet so that device clears finished ceiling by 1", where
not otherwise indicated.
13. Clock Outlet: +84". Above door, locate outlet so than bottom of clock clears top of door frame by
1" unless otherwise indicated.
14. Bracket Light Outlet: +96", unless otherwise indicated.
3.22 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS
A. Store conductors where continuously protected from sunlight, heat and weather.
B. Install all conductors (line, low voltage, signal and control) in conduit. Complete conduit system and
clean and dry conduit before pulling in conductors. Install conductors after general construction work
in area has progressed sufficiently to avoid conductor damage.
C. Circuit as indicated on plans and single line diagrams.
D. Provide conductors of identical lengths in parallel feeder runs.
E. Use fish tapes with ball type heads for pulling conductors. Pull conductors in without kinking wires or
scoring conduit.
F. Use only lubricant, which does not damage conductors, as a pulling aid
G. Fan branch circuit and control conductors, size 1/0 and smaller, in panelboards, switchboards, motor
control centers and terminal cabinets and tie with plastic ties suitable for conductor size. Lace larger
conductors with marline for Yz' on 12" centers with intermediate tie wraps. Identify spare conductors
(line, control and signal), and ground both ends to enclosure case.
H. Run neutral conductors continuous to panel. Do not combine. Run feeders continuous to panel or
equipment without splices. Do not splice or tap in equipment enclosures or conduits. Make
necessary splices or taps only in junction boxes, pull boxes or in oversize wiring gutters designed for
the purpose at panelboards.
• I. Use No. 12 AWG minimum for lighting and power and No. 14 AWG minimum for signal and
communications and control, except where special conductors are specified.
BANK OF AM
16000
ELECTRICAL -50
J. Allow 18" minimum free length of conductor where terminating in outlet or pull box. Provide longer
lengths where indicated. •
K. Do not loop through receptacle terminals; connect by means of conductor taps joined to branch circuit
conductors.
L. Where branch circuit conductors extend from ground fault interrupting breakers, enclose conductors
in plastic tubing within panelboard.
M. See paragraph titled "Identification and Warning Signs".
3.23 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING
A. For lighting and outlet branch circuits, use factory colored conductors. For motor circuits and feeders,
use pressure sensitive colored tapes, in 2" wide minimum bands, at all panelboards, safety switches,
motor starters, motor and equipment outlets. Where more than one multi -conductor circuit is run in a
conduit, tape each multi conductor circuit together with its neutral at each junction point and outlet.
B. Color Codes for Line Conductors:
C. Color code conductors of cables used in communication and signal systems and control conductors
in line and low voltage control panels, motor control centers and supervisory panels. Use white for
grounded conductor and green for equipment ground, exclusively.
3.24 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS, LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS.
A. For joints, splices, taps and connections for 600V conductors, use solderless connectors.
B. For branch circuit conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller, use steel spring with semi rigid insulating shell,
or setscrew type, taped.
C. Terminate all solid conductors, No. 10 AWG and smaller by a fast holding application of the conductor
directly to the binding screws of the equipment to be connected.
D. For conductors No. 6 AWG and larger, use copper or bronze bolted connectors and lugs, or
compression type at Contractor's option, sized for conductors. For conductors No. 1 AWG and larger,
use lugs with two bolts through tongue, minimum or equivalent anti -turn construction (submit sample).
Connectors and lugs which are crimp type or which apply setscrews directly to the conductors are not
acceptable. Fasten lugs with flat and spring washers and hex nuts.
E. In panelboard feed through gutters, use copper power distribution blocks to extend conductors from
feeder to panel. •
F. Coordinate equipment terminations with equipment supplier to insure that terminals provided conform
with requirements specified herein.
Color
Color
Conductor
120/208V
277/480V
Phase A
Black
Brown
Phase B
Red
Orange
Phase C
Blue
Yellow
Neutral
White
Gray (where permitted or as
directed)
Traveler
Brown
As approved
Equipment Ground
Green
Green
Instrument Ground and
Green with
Isolated System Ground
Yellow Stripes
C. Color code conductors of cables used in communication and signal systems and control conductors
in line and low voltage control panels, motor control centers and supervisory panels. Use white for
grounded conductor and green for equipment ground, exclusively.
3.24 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS, LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS.
A. For joints, splices, taps and connections for 600V conductors, use solderless connectors.
B. For branch circuit conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller, use steel spring with semi rigid insulating shell,
or setscrew type, taped.
C. Terminate all solid conductors, No. 10 AWG and smaller by a fast holding application of the conductor
directly to the binding screws of the equipment to be connected.
D. For conductors No. 6 AWG and larger, use copper or bronze bolted connectors and lugs, or
compression type at Contractor's option, sized for conductors. For conductors No. 1 AWG and larger,
use lugs with two bolts through tongue, minimum or equivalent anti -turn construction (submit sample).
Connectors and lugs which are crimp type or which apply setscrews directly to the conductors are not
acceptable. Fasten lugs with flat and spring washers and hex nuts.
E. In panelboard feed through gutters, use copper power distribution blocks to extend conductors from
feeder to panel. •
F. Coordinate equipment terminations with equipment supplier to insure that terminals provided conform
with requirements specified herein.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -51
G. For connections, at, motors, use lugs on motor and branch circuit conductors, bolted and taped. For
conductors No. 8 AWG and smaller, crimp lugs to conductors.
• H. Splice grounding conductors by means of exothermic weldingand terminate b means of approved
Y PP
grounding connectors. Do not solder.
I. Tape all noninsulated connections with lap wound layers of vinyl plastic tap (Scothch #88) or lap
wound layers of rubber tape covered by lap wound layers of friction tape„ to provide insulation
equivalent to 150 percent of the conductor's insulation, but in no case less than three layers. Split
bakelite casings with stainless steel spring clips designed for specific connectors may be used
alternately.
J. Position all splices in pull boxes and junction boxes, so they are accessible from the removable cover
side of the box.
K. Provide waterproof connections in wet locations. Pencil and roughen conductors and apply rubber
tape equivalent to in thickness. Cover with two half -lapped layers of 8.5 mil, all weather, vinyl
plastic tape, suitable for below freezing application, and coat with sealant. Form conductors into drip
loops so that water does not collect on connections. Blow out conduit to remove moisture and seal
conduit ends with waterproof compound.
L. Torque all electrical conductor terminations in accordance with equipment manufacturer's directions
and industry standards.
3.25 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS, SIGNAL SYSTEM AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS.
A. Run conductors continuous from equipment to terminal cabinets and devices. Do not splice.
• B. In terminal cabinet and junction boxes terminate on solder terminals, screw type terminals, telephone
type punch terminals or wire wrapped terminals.
C. - At equipment or devices terminate on screw type terminals or with plug and socket connections.
D. For fire alarm systems and control use screw type terminals throughout.
E. For flexible connection use stranded conductors and crimp type lugs.
F,. For shielded conductors, make shield continuous and isolate shields from ground..and other shields.
3.26 CONDUCTOR SUPPORT
A. In vertical risers provide split wedge or cable clamp conductor supports in equipment or intermediate
junction or pull boxes, or provide code approved equivalent. Spacing Not to Exceed the Following:
Support
Conductor AWG Size Spacing (Feet)
1/0 and Smaller 100
2/0 through 4/0 80
250 MCM through 350 MCM 60
500 MCM 50
3.27 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Maintain required aisles, work space and clearances in front of equipment and. behind accessible
sections of freestanding equipment not less than indicated and as required by code.
B. For dry ventilated transformers, maintain minimum clearance between ,transformer ventilation
openings and adjacent structure: 6" below 300 KVA.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -52
C. For equipment less than 600V to ground, maintain 3' clear minimum in front, 3'/i between accessible •
side and grounded surface; and 4' between rows.
3.28 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Install panelboards and cabinets on a common wall with tops even. Mount panels at 78" to top unless
approved otherwise.
B. Mount individual switches, starters, or controls at 72" from finished floor to top. Where required to be
lower by equipment arrangement or configuration, maintain 18" to bottom from finished floor.
3.29 EQUIPMENT FASTENING
A. Fasten floorstanding equipment with four %' bolts minimum. Grout channel sills, where provided, into
concrete pad. Fasten surface mounted equipment in excess of 20 pounds to a minimum of two
structural wall members. Provide support channel spanning structural members where equipment
does not span two members.
3.30 PANELBOARD PROVISIONS
A. Install three'/ conduits minimum from each flush mounted panelboard into accessible ceiling space
above and below panel and cap.
3.31 LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Connections: Use Underwriters' Laboratories approved solderless connectors as specified elsewhere
herein, for splicing.
B. Blocking: Provide supplementary blocking and support under this section, as required to support
fixture from structural members adequate for fixture weight.
C. Pendant Fixtures: Unless otherwise specified, suspend fixture with one piece steel stems 3/8" ID
minimum, with matching canopies, and finished with enamel or lacquer finish of color to match fixture
or ceiling, as directed by Architect. Where pendant fixtures are indicated to be cable supported,
provide 3/32" (minimum) stainless steel aircraft cables and cable to rod adapters. Provide a ceiling
plate at each ceiling fitting, with baked enamel finish color to match fixture or ceiling, as directed by
Architect. Provide a white #18/4 (minimum) Type SJ cord at one end of fixture row. Provide two
supports per 4', 6' or 8' fixture, and uniformly spaced pattern for continuous rows.
D. Pendant Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures, Continuous Rows: Provide rigid coupling between fixtures,
fastened to each fixture with a minimum of two bolts. Hang fixtures with two supports per 8' or 4'
fixture. Limit continuous rows to 40' length separated by 1'/i' minimum with separate circuit
connections to separated rows. Do not nipple between separated rows. Provide an approved swivel
at the junction of stem and fixture. Where indicated, provide channel bracing of rows of fixtures.
E. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Secure to structural members or to structural channels which span
structural members with '/4' minimum machine screws.
F. Refer to paragraph titled "Seismic and Bracing Requirements" for additional requirements.
G. Fixture Outlets: In accessible tile ceilings, locate outlet within 4' of fixture, rigidly fastened to structural
member or suspended from structure with rod or channel. In nonaccessible ceilings, provide access
to outlet through fixture housing utilizing approved outlet assembly. Provide fixture outlet for each
fixture, or continuous row of fixtures, or, in demountable ceilings, for a cluster of fixtures which .can be
connected by 6' flexible connections. 0
H. Connections: Do not use fixtures as pull or junction boxes between separated fixtures. Do not flex
between separated, suspended fixtures. Surface mounted fixtures, separated by not more than 6" in
BANK OF AMERICA S 16000
ELECTRICAL -53
utility areas, may be nippled together. Connect from recessed fixtures to fixture outlet with 6' length
• of flexible conduit and conductors with insulation type described under paragraph titled "Conductors".
I. Machine Rooms: Prior to installation, coordinate light fixture location in machine rooms with
equipment, piping, and ductwork to properly illuminate room and avoid interference's. Use only
ceiling mounted or stem mounted fixtures in elevator machine rooms.
J. For wall mounted fixtures on exterior, mount on cast gasketed boxes. See Installation of Boxes.
K. Adjustable Fixtures: Aim adjustable fixtures as directed by Architect. For exterior units, adjust during
evening hours to Architect's satisfaction.
L. Location: Locate fixture outlets, recessed fixtures, and determine the length of custom, continuous
row cove or "reverse cove" fixtures, by reference to Architectural reflected ceiling plans and details
.and measurement of building construction. Do not scale electrical drawings.
M. Lamping: For initial lamping of overhead fixtures during construction, omit diffuser installation. Prior
to final acceptance and when directed by the owner in writing, clean the fixtures, remove construction
lamps, relamp with new lamps and install diffusers.
N. For fixtures recessed in ceilings rated one hour or more, box around fixture to maintain ceiling
integrity. Allow free space around fixture, 1" for fluorescent and 3" for incandescent fixtures.
O. For master/slave arrangement provide flexible whip between fixtures containing circuit and ballast
wiring.
P. Electric Signs and Outline Lighting: Provide branch circuits and code required disconnects for signs
and outline lighting provided under other sections or by Owner. Coordinate location with equipment
supplier.
3.32 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, VENTILATING AND PLUMBING CONTROL
A. Provide Under This Section:
1. Motor starters, disconnects, circuit protection, items of industrial control, individually mounted
controls, as specified or required.
2. Control wiring in conduit, to remote line voltage control devices, where indicated on the drawings,
and where not included under the mechanical or building automation sections,
3. Connections to motors, motorized smoke dampers and controls as shown, but coordinated with
a equipment supplier.
4. Verification of point of connection to motors with equipment supplier prior to conduit installation.
For roof mounted exhaust fans, rise within housing where possible.
5. Connection to package unit controls furnished as part of equipment.
6. Installation and connection of separately mounted electric line voltage thermostats and controls
furnished with equipment, as indicated.
7. Line voltage supply circuits for building automation system data gathering panels and consoles.
Locations are not indicated. Coordinate locations with system supplier. •
8. Line voltage supply circuits from closest appropriate panel to plumbing and HVAC control panels
and the like, coordinated with mechanical specifications section and equipment supplier.
• 9. Connection to devices in piping or ductwork (such as aquastats, solenoids, float switches)
installed under. Division 15. - -
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -54
B. The Following is Specified to be Provided Under Other Divisions:
1. Furnishing and installation of motors, motorized smoke dampers. •
2. Furnishing of thermostats, and controls which are part of equipment.
3. Installation of devices in piping or ductwork.
C. Refer to Divisions 15 of the specifications, and mechanical and electrical drawings to establish
complete scope of work.
3.33 INTERIOR TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS PROVISIONS
A. Empty telephone and data raceway systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein,
including all distribution conduit, wireways, blockouts, sleeves, grounds, pull wires, plywood
backboards, outlets and plates indicated on the drawings for wiring provided under other sections or
by Owner. Minimum conduit to be 3/." trade size for telephone/data outlet.
B. Conduit bends with a minimum radius in feet equivalent to the diameter of conduit in inches, and not
exceeding the equivalent of two 900 bends in a single run. Where over two 90° bends are required,
install accessible pull box in run. Bush ends of all conduits. Do not use condulets.
C. Terminate conduits at terminal backboards 6" above floor or within 12" of top of backboard. To
reduce bends, backboard may be extended up to conduit stubs.
D. Plywood Terminal Backboards: 8' high by length indicated, for telephone, data or signal systems
where indicated on electrical drawings, of/.: thick, APA exterior grade Douglas Fir A -C treated with
fire retardant chemical to provide a flame spread rating of not more than 25 when tested according to
ASTM E84. Install backboards over plaster or gypsum wallboard, not directly to studs. Use full
sheets where practicable and attached to plaster walls with '/a' flat head toggle bolts. Attach to 0
gypsum wallboard using fire retardant, nonexplosive contact cement, applied in strips spaced 16" on
center horizontally or vertically across plywood, and in a continuous band around perimeter of
plywood. Install plywood with clear face exposed to view.
E. Stub 3/." conduit up from single telephone/data outlets up to accessible ceiling spaces unless unless
otherwise noted.
3.34 COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL SYSTEM PROVISIONS
A. Provide empty raceway systems, including outlets, device and equipment back boxes, sleeves,
grounds, pull wires, terminal cabinets and plywood terminal backboards as indicated on the drawings
for wiring systems provided under other sections or by the Owner.
B. Provide back boxes for devices and equipment and terminal cabinet dimensions as required by
system supplier.
3.35 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT
A. Where electrically operated equipment indicated on the drawings is specified under other divisions of
the specification, provide, unless otherwise indicated, all conduit, wiring and connections under this
section, as required for proper operation, and in accordance with wiring diagrams furnished by
equipment supplier.
B. Install controls furnished by equipment supplier, and provide disconnect switches within sight of
controller. •
C. Refer to equipment specification for coordination of work.
•
0
BANK OF AMERICA ' 16000
ELECTRICAL -55
3.36 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Materials and Equipment: Coverall transformers, switchboards, panelboards, lighting fixtures, signal
system equipment, etc., stored;or installed on the site, with polyethylene sheets or approved
equivalent, to protect equipment from moisture, plaster, cement, paint, or other work of other trades.
Cover outlet boxes with cardboard or plastic closures. Plug or cap conduit ends until final connection.
Protect conduit stubs, stub -ups and risers from construction equipment.
B. Storage: Provide proper and adequate storage facilities. Store conductors, raceways and fittings, in
dry, protected locations.
C. Damage: Replace all damaged or defective work, materials or equipment. Install sensitive or
delicate equipment after major construction work is completed.
D. Parts: Store and protect all portable and detachable parts or portions of the installation such as spare
parts, fittings, fuses, keys, locks, adapters, locking clips and inserts until completion of the work. As a
precondition for acceptance of the work, deliver to the Owner's representative and obtain itemized
receipt. Include receipts with the Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual(s) required under
other paragraphs of the specifications.
E. Site Cleaning: Periodically remove waste and rubbish and maintain order.
F. Equipment Finish: Clean and polish finished metal surfaces. Clean and prepare prime coated gear
for painting.
G. Light Fixtures: Remove dust and handprints from light fixture surfaces. Clean diffusers before project
acceptance.
H. Electrical Equipment: Clean exterior and interior of all equipment. Vacuum interiors, do not blow out.
Apply permanent identification and remove temporary and unauthorized notations.
I. Acceptance: Remove all debris, dirt, grease and oil from building surfaces, caused by work under
this section. Clean out and vacuum electric rooms.
3.37 PAINTING
A. In Equipment and Utility Areas: Provide factory finished equipment including prime coat and medium
dark gray finishing over rust -inhibitor.
B. Outdoors and in Wet Locations: Provide additional factory coat of exterior lacquer for a two mils finish
thickness. Indicate finish on shop drawings.
C. In Public Areas: Provide shop prime coat for equipment installed flush in painted walls. Finish
painting is under Specification Section "Painting".
D. Touchup: Use factory supplied paint for touchup of rusty or scratched surfaces. Replace marred or
scratched plated finishes.
E. Supports: All conduit hangers, racks and structural supports for electrical material and equipment
under other paragraphs to be galvanized or plated to be field painted, if not plated, under this work in
conformance with Specification Section "Painting".
3.38 _ IDENTIFICATION AND WARNING SIGNS
A. Nameplates - General:
• 1. Provide laminated, engraved plastic nameplates with '/i' high letters for all switchboards and
panelboards. Provide similar nameplates with 3/8" high letters for transformers, individually
mounted breakers, switches and controls, and with sheet metal screws. Adhesive mounted
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -56
nameplates are not acceptable. Refer to single line diagrams and schedules for actual
designations and circuit numbers. •
2. Include nameplate schedule on shop drawings submittals.
3. Indicate on Gear nameplates:
a. Line 1 Equipment Designation
b. Line 2 Voltage, Phase, Number of Wires, Amperes (Switchboards) KVA (transformers,
generators).
c. Example SWITCHBOARD MSS
d. 277/480V, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, 3,000 AMPERES
4. On service switchboards with multiple main breakers label each main breaker and indicate
number of mains on each label. Example: Main No. 1 of 3, main No. 2 of 3, etc.
5. Indicate equipment and/or equipment controlled and designation on component nameplates.
Examples:
a. Swbd Breaker: CIR 3 - PANEL 3AA
b. Time Switch: TSA - PARKING LIGHTS (served from Panel A)
c. Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet: Fire alarm system 24V DC
6. Install panelboard nameplates behind panel door in public area and on panel face in equipment
rooms.
B. Nameplate Color Schedule:
1. 277V through 600V: Green letters on white label.
2. 120V through 240V: Black letters on which label.
3. Emergency System: White letters on red label.
4. Devices Connected Ahead of Service mains and Substation Secondary Mains: Letter color as for
switchboard on yellow label.
5. Fire Alarm System: Black letters on red label.
6. Communication or Signal Systems: White letters on black label. Identify system.
C. Stenciled Designations: Provide readily visible block letter stenciled designations for the following
with '/i' high minimum letters on background of contrasting color, colors as outlined under
nameplates.
1. Junction and pull boxes and cabinets of signal and communication systems identifying system
and voltage.
2. 277V lighting outlet and junction boxes - 277/480V.
3. 480V outlet and junction boxes - 480V.
rI
4. Feeder conduit runs on 25' centers and on both sides of wall and floor penetrations, where visible •
from floor and above demountable ceilings. Indicate circuit designation and number on all
feeders. Indicate system on all signal and communications system conduit sized 1 %2' and larger.
BANK OF AMERICA l `? 16000
ELECTRICAL -57
D. Labels: ' t,
• 1. At all fusible devices, either individually mounted or part of gear, provide a label (as supplied by
fuse manufacturer) or nameplate inside each switch cover, indicating specific type. of fuse
required for replacement.
2. Provide label, in addition to UL label, for each switchgear, switchboard, panelboard, transfer
switch and motor control center indicating the short circuit rating of the gear as constructed and
the minimum rating of devices allowable. Submit with shop drawings.
E. Conduit and Conductors:
1. Tag feeders at panels, switchboards, pull boxes, and other accessible enclosures, indicating
source, voltage, circuit number and conductor ampere rating. Tags to be readily readable after
installation.
2. In exterior or wet locations, provide metal or laminated plastic discs as above attached with nylon
cord.
3. Tag exposed ends of conduit stubs indicating system, name of panel, switchboard, etc., of origin
and conduit size.
4. Identify all branch circuit system conductors with premarked, self-adhesive, wraparound cloth
wire markers, indicating circuit number and name of panel, cabinet, etc., of origin, at panelboards,
motor centers, switchboards, terminal cabinets, wireways, junction boxes and at outlet boxes
containing more than one neutral wire.
5. Identification Format Examples:
a.
Switchboard Feeder
SAA -1 480/277V -225A
b.
Transformer Subfeeder
3ETA-1 208/120V -380A
c.
Transfer Switch Subfeeder
3ATS-1 480V -800A
d.
Panel AA Branch Circuit
AA -10
e.
Motor Control Center Circuit
MCCA-4 480V
6. Provide, above underground conduits stubbed for future use, engraved flush bronze marker
anchored in 4" square by 12" deep concrete block, flush with grade, indicating system, conduit
size and point of origin.
F. Devices: Engrave on each device plate with 3/16" high block letters filled with black enamel where
noted and as follows:
1. Lock switch and switch with pilot light - device controlled.
2. Switch for fan, motor, unit heater -equipment controlled.
3. Switch where lights or equipment are out of sight - equipment controlled.
4. Switches in gangs of three or more - description of lights or equipment switched.
5. Receptacles over 150V to ground and/or 30A and higher rating - voltage and ampere rating.
6. Isolated ground Receptacles - "Isolated Ground".
• 7. ' Where wording is not indicated, allow for ten letters per device and use wording as directed.
G. Warning Signs: Conform with the latest edition of NEC. Provide 18 gauge steel, white porcelain
enameled signs with 1" high black letters in all electrical and communication rooms and closets
reading ELECTRICAL (or SIGNAL) ROOM- NO STORAGE PERMITTED.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -58
H. Panel Schedules: Provide typewritten panel schedules on inside of panel doors behind clear plastic.
Indicate as -built number and type of outlets served and general location of outlets or fixtures and/or •
item of equipment served. Where modifying existing panels, provide new typewritten schedules
reflecting modifications provided under this work.
3.39 TEST AND CERTIFICATION
A. General: Provide testing in accordance with NETA requirements, as specified under individual
equipment and system specifications and as follows:
1. Upon completion of the work, and as a condition for acceptance, test all components and
systems in the presence of the Owner's representative to demonstrate compliance with the
specifications. Provide tests as specified and as required by the code or enforcing authorities.
Adjust, repair and/or replace defective material and equipment.
2. Provide supervisory personnel experienced with the particular systems involved, and where
specified, arrange for the presence of factory representatives to direct indicated testing. Check
all field connections prior to testing.
3. Provide all required testing instruments and pay all costs for testing and for any resulting repair or
replacement.
4. Tighten all bolted connections and meggar all equipment and bus prior to testing.
5. Tabulate all test data and prepare certified typewritten report covering all testing performed and
include in Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual(s).
B. Test and Measurements: Include all required factory service engineering time to cover the outline
testing. Submit a per diem cost to cover additional testing which may be requested.
C. Ground Resistance: Test ground resistance at service, substation, generator, and at the secondary
of each transformer, sized 75 KVA and larger. Perform test in accordance with the latest edition of
James G. Biddle manual on "Earth Resistance Testing" and describe tests and results in test report.
Where ground resistance is in excess of specified values, add ground electrodes as required to meet
specifications. Perform tests before associated slabs are poured so that corrective measures are not
precluded.
D. Switchboards:
1. For each building service switchboard and switchboard served from separately derived systems
(transformer) isolate neutral bus from ground by removing neutral bus from ground by removing
neutral bus link and test neutral bus for infinite resistance. It may be necessary to disconnect DC
inverters. Correct all unintentional neutral grounding and repeat test until infinite resistance is
obtained. Submit test report. Reinstall bus links.
2. Set, test and operate each operable device.
3. For motors served from motor starters provide under this section, provide certified listing of
nameplate motor data along with overloads provided in associated starters. Replace overloads
as required for code compliance. Include list in Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual.
4. Ground Fault Detectors: Verify proper neutral grounding and installation of ground fault detector.
In zero sequence system, neutral and phase conductors to pass through sensor in same direction
and equipment ground to be outside sensor. Test operation"of each detector using factory
authorized test equipment. •
5. Metering: Demonstrate operation and set zero adjustment.
BANK OF AMERICA } 16000
ELECTRICAL -59
E. Conductors: Test for continuity, proper neutral connection, short circuit and improper ground.
• Meggar all feeders with switchboards and/or panels connected, but with branch loads disconnected,
and meggar circuits for 20 HP and larger motors. Insulation resistance to be not less than cable
manufacturer's recommendation.
F. Panelboards: Test with main disconnect open, branch circuits connected, wall switches closed,
lighting fixtures and/or outlets permanently connected, without lamps, for neutral ground, short circuit,
continuity, improper ground, and multiple neutral grounds.
G. Signal and Communication Systems: Factory engineer to test each system to demonstrate specified
operation of all components. For code required systems arrange for code authorities to witness test.
H. Receptacles:
1. Verify that all receptacles are installed per manufacturer's instructions and terminal connections
are secure and clean. Test for polarity.
2. With the Aid of a GFI Tester, Such as Hubbell #GFT2-G, Test GFI Receptacles:
a. Hot - neutral - ground connections.
b. At two and three milliamps respectively, GFI shall not trip within 10 seconds.
c. At five milliamps, GFI shall trip within one second.
3. Test isolated ground receptacles for ground isolation.
I. Perform fluorescent troffer tests prior to installation.
J. Adjustments: After project loads are in full operation, and at a time acceptable to the Owner:
1. Take voltage readings at each transformer. Where voltage on secondary of building transformers
is above or below required rating in excess of 2'/2 percent at full load, make appropriate tap
changes.
2. Take current readings on each phase at each panel. Adjust branch circuiting between phases
where required to balance phase currents within 10 percent. Reflect revisions in panel
schedules. Circuit revisions shall not compromise multi -wire circuits sharing a common neutral.
3. Tabulate adjustment data by transformer and panel and submit with test data.
K. Thermographic Inspection:
1. After project loads are in full operation, perform a thermographic inspection of the electrical
equipment and connections at a time acceptable to the Owner and in the presence of his
authorized representative.
2. The inspection is to locate high resistive points by comparing temperature levels to reference
temperatures.
3. Utilize an infrared camera with a range of -20°C to 900°C and an accuracy of 0.10C. Equip
camera with a minimum of three lenses: 70 telephoto, 200 wide angle and 40 extra wide angle.
Utilize camera to detect infrared wave lengths and convert them into video signals projected onto
a monitor screen in the form of a line thermal image to be photographed for inclusion in the
report. Heat loss survey to be in both gray step mode and color.
• a. Inspect the entire electrical system including:
1) Transformers.
BANK OF AMERICA 16000
ELECTRICAL -60
2) Switchboard, panelboards.
3) Circuit breakers, disconnect switches. •
b. Include in test report thermographs and photographs -of defective equipment and
connections. Outline probable cause, severity of defect and corrective measure
recommendations.
c. Correct deficiencies as agreed upon at no cost to owner. Rephotograph corrected areas and
resubmit data indicating satisfactory condition.
2. Non Metallic Conduit Test:
a. Provide witnessed test of all conduits, after installation, for clear bore, using ball mandrel,
brushes and snake. Use Lignum Vitae ball of diameter equal to approximately 85% of
conduit inside diameter. For utility conduit, test in presence of utility representative. Clear all
conduitsthats which reject ball mandrel. Bear all cost involved, including chopping concrete,
replacing conduit and restoring surfaces to original condition.
b. Maintain record of testing indicating 'left clear, tagged, capped" listing conduit designation,
diameter, location, date of test and testing personnel. Submit certified copies in triplicate.
END OF SECTION
•
40
BANK OF AMERICA- _ _ 16410.
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -1
SECTION 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to this section.
B. General Requirements and Materials of Section 16000 apply to this section.
1.2 SCOPE:
A. Work under this section consists of all labor, materials, equipment, services, permits, fees and
transportation necessary for, and/or reasonably incidental to, the construction and completion in
working order of the work specified herein.
B. Work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Fire alarm detection and signaling system.
2. Plan check approval.
3. Furnishing and installation of equipment and devices.
4. Wiring in conduit, and connections.
• 5. Conduit, wire and connections for status and control of air handling motors, and smoke dampers,
for shut down.
6. Testing, cleaning, adjusting of complete work.
7. Wiring diagrams, shop drawings, equipment data.
8. Complete maintenance for one year. Proposal for subsequent maintenance contract.
9. All work and material for complete and operable systems,as indicated or specified.
10. Record drawings.
11. Permits, inspections, fees.
12. Identification and instruction.
13. Coordination with Section 16000 general Requirements and Materials.
14. Furnishing of special back boxes for installation under electrical section.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Conduit and outlet boxes (Section 16000).
B. Painting, except shop finishing and field touch-up (Section "Painting").
C. HVAC and fire protection systems (Division 15).
D. Temporary service (General Conditions).
BANK OF AMERICA 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -2
1.4 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS:
A. Conform to all applicable requirements of Section 16000, General Requirements and Materials, the
Electronics Industries Association, the guidelines of the Fire Department and Building Department for
life safety and smoke control systems, and the Federal Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
Equipment and installation to conform to the current applicable provisions of California Electric Code,
Article 760 and NFPA 72.
B. System and components to be listed by Underwriters' laboratories, Inc. under:
UL 864
Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 268
Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 268A
Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 217
Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station
UL 521
Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling
UL 228
Door Closer Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 464
Audible Signaling Appliances
UL 1638
Visual Signaling Appliances
UL 38
Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
UL 346
Waterflow indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1481
Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
1.5 APPROVALS:
A. Prepare complete plans, risers, wiring diagrams, and installation drawings for the fire alarm system
stamped by a registered engineer where required by the inspecting agencies. Obtain governing
agency (State Fire Marshal, City Fire Department, Building Department) approval for fire alarm
system prior to submitting shop drawings or installing any portion of the system. Submit voltage drop
calculations conforming with NEC limitations. Install system per reviewed shop drawings. •
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS OF SYSTEMS INSTALLERS:
A. Submit evidence of completion and satisfactory operation of five projects of equal scope for the
specified systems.
B. Submit evidence that installers are factory authorized agents.
C. Submit letter from equipment manufacturers indicating intent to maintain local service organizations
or direct factory service.
D. Installer to be UL listed to certificate the system.
E. Installers to be prepared to offer a service contract on expiration of guarantee.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Provide schematic layout drawings indicating location of all components and equipment, required size
and location of conduit and outlets and type and quantity of system conductors. Include voltage drop
calculations.
B. Include wiring diagrams for overall system and components, and typical devices.
C. Include physical and electrical characteristics of equipment to indicate conformance with the
specifications.
D. Describe system characteristics and function.
E. Submit annunciator configuration and designations.
x a" i
BANK OF AMERICA 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -3
F. Sequence of operation in matrix form.
• G. Fire marshal listing for all devices and equipment including current listing date.
r
1-.8 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. Revise shop drawings to reflect record conditions, including coded cable layout, and incorporate in
Operating and Maintenance Instruction manual.
1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL:
A. Refer to Section 16000, General Requirements and Materials, paragraph titled "Operating and
Maintenance Data"..
B. Include:
1. Operational description.
2. Coded cabling plan.
3. Two wire circuit diagrams.
4. Wiring destination schedule.
5. Schematic component diagrams and PC board layouts.
6. Maintenance and alignment procedures.
1.10 COORDINATION: Refer to the electrical and mechanical drawings and specifications to determine
quantities and locations of devices and required scope of work and coordinate work with mechanical and
electrical installers. Provide function described under Mechanical Section Sequence of Control for Fire
Conditions. Submit conduit requirements to electrical installer. For self-contained door release,
coordinate with door supplier.
01.11 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. General: System to be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and the California State Fire Marshal,
designed to meet the functional requirements of NFPA 72.
B. Features:
1. Main fire control panel with operator's control module, matrix type annunciator and printer.
2. Remote matrix annunciator at the lobby and as indicated.
3. Alarm/trouble point transmitters in main panel and grouped in transmitter panels.
4. Manual alarm reporting stations.
5. Combination audible/visual alarm signal devices. Visual alarm signal devices..
6. Connection to sprinkler waterflow and pressure switches.
7. Sprinkler valve supervision.
8. Smoke detectors.
9. Duct smoke detectors with remote LED indicators at smoke dampers, fans and as shown on
mechanical drawings.
10. Combination fixed temperature/rate of rise heat detectors.
11. Electromagnetic door hold open devices. Interface with integral door hardware and detectors.
Interface with fire doors.
BANK OF AMERICA 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -4
12. Remote transponder.
13. Power supply for smoke damper motors. •
14. Cabling and connections.
15. Provisions for connection to off-site central station via leased telephone lines.
16. Interface with fire protection system (sprinklers) for alarm and trouble reporting.
17. Interface with the HVAC system for control of smoke dampers. All associated relays.
18. Operating and supervising electrical power for the system at 120V single phase, three wire to the
fire control panel. Internal battery back up.
19. Additional circuits for powering smoke dampers.
20. Auxiliary contacts on smoke and duct detector for local control of fire shutter, doors, fire/smoke
dampers and fan shut-off.
1.12 SYSTEM OPERATION:
A. System to be electrically operated, double supervised, closed circuit, active interrogate/respond type
alarm system, 24V DC non -coded, positive, non -interfering, successive operation, in which all devices
send status signals to the main fire control panel from remote data transmitter panels. ' Normal,
trouble, or actuated status signals to transmit at 5 seconds maximum intervals. Report change in
status twice to determine that it is a valid signal, and record automatically and permanently. The
requirements in NFPA 72A for standby power to be met by the emergency generator system, in
combination with the backup battery. 0
B. Supervise wiring, equipment and devices for alarm initiation, annunciation, and audible signaling
continuously for opens, shorts or grounds (trouble). Provide each alarm initiating device circuit with
illuminated and audible annunciation of both trouble and alarm conditions. Non -illumination to
indicate a normal condition. Provide Style "7" wiring in two separate conduits between the fire control
panel and the field equipment cabinets with wiring to the equipment in one conduit and the return
portion of the loop in the second conduit. Wiring between signal devices and the field equipment
cabinets to be Style "Y" wiring in conduit, with end -of -line terminating devices. Wiring between
reporting devises and the field equipment cabinet to be Style "4" in conduit.
C. Any alarm or trouble condition to sound an audible signal at the fire control panel and the remote
annunciators. Silencing of signal by a momentary contact switch to transfer the signal to a visual
indicator. Silencing switch to be key operated or behind lockable door. Subsequent trouble
conditions to cause the signal to resound and in turn may be silenced. The trouble signal silencing
indicator to extinguish automatically or restoration to normal.
D. Activation of any automatic or manual alarm initiating device to cause the following to occur:
1. Sound an audible alarm and illuminate the visual indicator for zone and type of alarm at the fire
control panel and the remote annunciators.
2. Sound the alarm signal over the system audible devices and activate the visual signal devices.
3. Transmit signal to release the electromagnetic hold open devices on corridor doors.
4. Transmit signal to close smoke dampers.
5. Transmit alarm signal to the central station office.
BANK OF AMERICA 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -5
E. System not to incorporate a time delay for any of the alarm initiating devices. All alarms to be
• considered confirmed alarms.
F. Accomplish detection and reporting of fire conditions by the following basic methods:
1. Manual stations.
2. Smoke detectors.
3. Heat detectors.
4. Duct detectors.
5. Waterflow switches.
G. Subdivide fire alarm system inputs as follows, for a more defined indication of the location and nature
of the fire or trouble condition:
1. Manual station per zone.
2. Smoke detectors at smoke dampers or air handlers, by device.
3. Area smoke and/or heat detector per zone.
4. Door hold open detector by zone.
5. Waterflow or pressure switch by zone.
6. Sprinkler valve position indication by zone.
H. Alarm condition to override trouble indication. Trouble indication to reappear after alarm reset.
I. Fire Alarm Zones as follow: Zone per floor and system.
J. Provide audible and visual alarm from the fire control panel to all fire alarm zones.
K. Printout on system printer all alarm and trouble reports, indicating type of device, condition, time and
® date and alarm clearing.
L. Selective manual testing of any device point in the system to determine normal, trouble or alarm
status.
M. Main annunciator to indicate device type by floor and zone.
N. Remote annunciator to duplicate annunciation from the main fire control panel. Location as indicated
or directed.
O. System to be capable of manual operation in the event of malfunction of the central processor.
Supplier to include a statement in the system shop drawing submittal explaining the manual operating
capability,of the system. Provide redundant processor to duplicate primary processor function.
P. Sequence of Operation Under Alarm Condition:
1. Sound an audible alarm at the main fire control panel and the remote annunciator and
simultaneously illuminate the visual indicator for zone and type of alarm.
2. Manual acknowledge switch operation to illuminate alarm acknowledge light and silence the
audible signal. Visual indicator for zone of alarm to remain illuminated. New alarm to resound
the audible alarm and repeat sequence.
3. Transmit signal to central station office.
4. Correction of alarm condition to provide return to normal status and to printout.
• 5. Sound building alarm as described in "System Operation".
Q. Sequence of Operation for Supervision:
BANK OF AMERICA 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -6
1. The following trouble conditions to sound an audible alarm and illuminate the visual trouble zone
indicator at the main fire control command center and the remote annunciator:
a. Malfunction or trouble in any equipment or component of the fire alarm system.
b. Opens, shorts or grounds in the fire alarm system wiring.
c. Closed sprinkler system valve.
d. Removal of any fire alarm detection or reporting device.
e. Wet system sprinkler valve - tamper switch.
2. Manual acknowledge switch operation to illuminate trouble acknowledge light and silence audible
signal. Visual indicator for zone of trouble to remain illuminated.
R. HVAC Interface: Coordinate system function with sequence of control described in the mechanical
section.
S. Operation: Connect all components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to provide a
complete and operable system.
1.13 LOADS OF EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS:
A. Follow Electronics Industries Association Standard where applicable.
B. Provide fuse protection for equipment and spare fuses.
C. Design systems for operation at 120V, normal or emergency power as indicated, 60Hz nominal input. 0
D. Operating voltage dissipated by resistors shall not exceed 25% of ratings.
E. Operating voltage of capacitors shall not exceed 80% of rated voltage.
F. Operating loads and voltages of transistors and solid-state devices shall not exceed manufacturer's
recommendation for normal full load operation.
G. Use electronic components of types and rating commonly available from stock of established
commercial distribution.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide materials and equipment of new and recent manufacture, UL labeled and/or listed for specific
use.
B. The system and equipment described and furnished under these specifications are to be the standard
product of the manufacturer specified for each system. All reference to model numbers and other
pertinent information herein is intended to establish the standards of performance, quality, and
appearance.
C. Equipment descriptions refer to Pyrotronics. Equivalent systems conforming with the specifications,
by Edwards, Grinnel, Notifier or Simplex are acceptable.
D. System and equipment proposed as equivalent to that specified shall conform to the standards •
herein. Manufacturer and Contractor to supply evidence of having produced and installed similar
equipment for at least five years and list systems of equal scope rendering satisfactory service.
Obtain the Architect's approval in writing ten working days prior to bidding equipment other than as
BANK OF AMERICA , k ` w 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -7
specified.' Submit the manufacturer's name, model numbers, and three copies of working drawings
• and engineering data sheets for approval. Include in the submittal a certified statement from the
manufacturer of the substitute equipment that it does, in fact, equal the electronic and physical
features and functions of the specified equipment.
E. Equivalent systems using the principle of addressable devices will be considered. However, specified
redundant capability will be required.
2.2 MAIN FIRE CONTROL CENTER:
A. Modular design with all modules and spacing panels to be the same size. All solid state circuitry and
components. Signal line circuit to function with up to 100 ohms line resistance. Battery backup.
B. Dead front panel construction. Panel to be mounted in a heavy gauge steel cabinet finished in red
with module front plates finished in black. Hinged cabinet door with lock to provide access to field
wiring terminals. Internal audible signal.
C. Center to Incorporate the Following Basic Components for Fire Alarm System Functions:
1. Operators control module.
2. Matrix type annunciator.
3. Power supply module/modules.
D. Operators Control Module to Incorporate:
1. Eighty character minimum, alpha -numeric visual display for continuous indication of time -of -day,
day -of -week, month, date -of -month and year or for indication of manual function entries.
•, 2. LED indicators for operating and supervising power, common alarm, alarm silenced, manual
mode, system trouble, audible silenced, common trouble, loop fault, alarm circuit trouble and
disconnect and auxiliary circuit trouble.
3. Keypad for the following entries and call ups displayed on the alpha -numeric display:
a. Alarm silence.
b. Audible silence.
c. System reset.
d. Auxiliary disconnect for central station circuit.
e. Call up of all system troubles not annunciated.
f. Call up of the status of any system point.
g. Set time, day -of -week, month, date -of -month and year.
h. Annunciator LED test.
E. Annunciator Module to Incorporate:
1. LED indicators for zone alarm (red), trouble (amber), and status (green).
2. Provision for indicating zone designations.
3. Matrix configuration with zone columns and floor rows, by building.
F. Battery Backup: Sealed lead acid type with automatic battery charger. Twenty-four hour standby,
five-minute alarm. UL approved as emergency standby system. Provide wall mounted cabinets,
recessed or semi -recessed where permitted. Locate batteries so as to preclude leaks on any other
equipment.
•2.3 PRINTER:
A. Solid-staterint head English
p g language characters with serialized messages. Cabinet mounting with
. paper -take up reel.•_24V.DC operating power.
BANK OF AMERICA 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -8
2.4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR:
A. Same design and construction as the main fire control panel except annunciator to include only the •
annunciator module and required power supplies. Provide matrix format.
2.5 ALARM/TROUBLE POINT TRANSMITTERS:
A. Single, four or eight input point Class "B" units as required by the system design and layout.
B. Number of units in any one zone as required by the system design and layout.
C. For mounting in standard module cabinets.
D. Power supplied from the main fire control panel.
2.6 MANUAL ALARM REPORTING STATIONS:
A. Noncoded, semi -flush, double action with "Lift to Break - Pull Lever Down" lettering on clear plastic
shield.
B. Mechanically locked until manually reset, rigid metal construction with raised lettering "Pull Down"
under clear plastic shield.
C. Weatherproof on exterior.
2.7 AUTOMATIC SMOKE DETECTORS:
A. Solid-state photo electric smoke detector, allowing for cleaning and sensitivity testing. 24V DC. •
B. Equipped with bug screen and EMI shielded against false alarms.
C. Detector mounted LED visual alarm indicator.
2.8 DOOR HOLD OPEN DEVICES:
A. Electromagnetic type, 24V DC at doors where required. Door release on activation of the fire alarm
system.
2.9 HEAT DETECTORS:
A. Combination fixed temperature and rate -of -rise type, 135°F fixed temperature rating, 15°F per minute
rate -of -rise rating, normally open contacts.
B. Flush mounted in finished areas, surface mounted in unfinished areas, off-white finish.
2.10 AUDIBLE/VISUAL SIGNAL DEVICES:
A. Combination vibration horn/strobe, meeting requirements of Federal Disability Act (ADA), recessed,
on supervised circuits with steel back box and flush grill. Audible levels of 92 dB minimum at ten feet.
Strobe output candela as required, wall mounted at MH=80" to bottom of strobe.
B. Where indicated, provide single or double projectors and separately mounted strobe below.
2.11 VISULAL SIGNAL DEVICES: is
A. Strobe light candela output meeting requirements of Federal Disability Act (ADA), three dimensional,
triangular, with fire in red letters on white translucent polycarbonate lens. Letters vertical on wall and
horizontal on ceiling. Mount on 4" square back box on wall at MH=80" to bottom of strobe.
•
•
BANK OF AMERICA 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -9
2.12 DUCT DETECTORS:
A. Photoelectric sensor, dual sampling tube type. Provide minimum of two sets of contacts for fire alarm
and HVAC interface.
B. Uniform detection sensitivity for air velocities between 300 to 3500' per minute.
C. Length of sampling tubes to be based on the full inside width of the duct.
D. Plug-in detector serviceable from outside the duct by removing the sampling chamber cover.
E. Visible alarm lamp.
2.13 WATERFLOW AND/OR PRESSURE SWITCHES:
A. Furnished under Fire Protection section connected under this section.
B. Coordinate with Fire Protection section.
2.14 SPRINKLER VALVE TAMPER SWITCH:
A. Furnished under Fire Protection section connected under this section.
B. Coordinate with Fire Protection section.
2.15 BELL:
A. Six inch weather proof Motor Bell.
B. Operated directly from building main sprinkler flow switch without by-pass or silence switch.
2:16 SUPPLEMENTARY RELAYS:
A. Designed to activate or deactivate external circuit controls such as fans, smoke dampers, door
releases.
B. Contacts rated two amperes minimum, but adequate for circuit controlled.
C. Relay coil supplied.from system power supply.
D. Where remote from command center, enclosed in modular enclosure.
E. State Fire Marshal approved for use in fire alarm system.
2.17 CONDUCTORS:
A. No. 14 AWG, 600V minimum, shielded, twisted pairs for audio. Conductor layout and quantities to be
delineated on the shop drawing submittals as described in paragraph titled "Shop Drawings".
Calculate voltage drop and increase conductor size as required, not to exceed 3% to furthest device.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. All applicable paragraphs of Section 16000, General Requirements and Materials apply as though
repeated herein.
BANK OF AMERICA 16410
LOW RISE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -10
3.2 OPERATION:
A. Systems outlined herein to be complete and operable including all labor and material necessary for
the required performance. Exact wiring and connections per suppliers' wiring diagrams.
3.3 GROUNDING:
A. All equipment to be grounded by means of green ground wire to "U" contact of duplex receptacles
and bonded to ground provided under Electrical Section.
3.4 INSPECTION:
A. Systems to meet all the requirements of the code enforcing agency and shall be approved thereby
before installation.
3.5 LOCATION:
A. Before installation, verify exact location of control equipment and outlets. The Architect reserves the
right to relocate outlets within a radius of 10' at no increase in cost before rough -in work is started for
the respective outlet. Permanently and clearly identify location of duct detectors. Install in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and maintain access for maintenance.
3.6 PROTECTION:
A. Protect detection devices from dust, paint and contamination until construction clean-up of all trades
is completed. Where detectors are required prior to completion of clean up, provide temporary heat
detectors and replace with final devices after completion. Protect speakers in the same manner until
clean up is completed.
3.7 WIRING:
A. Furnish all conductors, equipment, plugs, terminal strips, etc., and labor to install a complete and
operable system. All cable conductors to be color coded and numbered for identification at all
terminals. Green for grounding conductor. Maintain continuous shields throughout system and
ground shield at main control panel.
3.8 TESTING:
A. After all equipment specified herein for each system has been installed and is in operating condition,
conduct performance test to determine if the installation and components comply with _these
specifications. Perform smoke removal test in coordination personnel, all test material and approved
test instruments and conduct the tests under supervision of factory personnel, in the presence of the
Architect and the inspecting agency. Test atrium smoke control before sunrise or after sunset.
3.9 REPORT:
A. Prepare written report of final test results, signed by witnessing parties. Submit to Architect in
triplicate.
END OF SECTION
C`.